REESE LIBRARY 


OF THE 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


Received. oe ἔφ. 158 LE 


Accesstons No. 2LLG Of Shelf No. -..- Foe wes -9 
ψ- ς aw 2 4) “2 
Τ᾽ Te 1’ ὡ- 


ἘΞΕΞΤ σεν τοτετες 


τοῖς teste 


ahs: 


tot 


Freese 


mii? 


ΣΥΣΣΣΣΣΣ, πε τα] 


wey 


ἘΜΤῚ 


ii 


SRESSINS 


παῖς 
saat 


ttt 
pattie 
tit 


ih Ht 
a 


ἣ 

bait) 
Sih 
i i 


cs 
~ 
a 


. 
Ν 
ἐπ δ ith P| 


aS 


FOR THE 


ν᾿ 
υ 
- . « ᾿ 
ἶ Ὁ 
τ 
“ = ‘ B 


By B.A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. 
/ +: SECOND EDITION, 


A fos: Sh SE BRB. 
i: a ee Jon. 


a τ 

> 
ere 

> 


F. oa MUNTI 


atone according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by : ΤῊΝ 
Η. ἩυΝΤΙΝΟΤΟΝ, Jun., 


in the Clerk’s office of the District Zee? of the District of Pomiuetiott, 


in ee aoe 


; = - 
eo ee a : ἕ τ 
ΟΑΜΒΕΙΡΘΕ: τῶ ἢ . 
STEREOTYPED AND PRINTED BY : 
FOLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON, ‘ 
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. : 
΄ᾷς- 


PREFACE. 


Tue materials, of which this compendious 
Grammar is composed, have been drawn from — 
the best sources. 


The examples given in the Syntax are taken 
from the following classic authors : — Homer, 
Hesiod, Pindar, Auschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, 
Aristophanes, Theocritus; Herodotus, Thucydides, — 


Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, AXschines, Demos- — 


thenes, Plato, Aristotle. 


Those rules, which should be first read and 
which should be committed to memory, are print- 
ed in the largest type (as § 136. 1). 

E. A. 8. 


New Haven, 
October 20th, 1839. 


CONTENTS. 


we 
>, . Part -l. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
Ξ Page Pa 
Εν. The eo Alphabet - - - 1} Accent - =) » Ἂν δ % 
oa owels - - - * 41] - Enclitics - Ἔ .; 16 
᾿ς Diphthongs - - - 5 | Contraction - - - » 17 
‘4 Breathings - - - - 6 , Crasis - - - ὦ 18 
oe Consonants - - - 6 | Elision bg 19 
id ᾿ Euphonic Changes - - - 7 | Syncope, Metathesis, and “Apheresia - 19 
-ο Movable Consonants - _- 11 | Punctuation » 20 
; Syllables - - - 12] Pronunciation - - ye 5. 
Quantity of Syllables - - 13 
' : 
Part II. INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
Parts of Speech - - - 23.) Augment - e's a ie 
Noun - - - - - 28 Syllabic Avgment ‘ 2 84 
First Declension - - - 24 Temporal Augment - - - 86 
Second Declension - - oe Augment of Compound Verbs - 87 
Third Declension Ὁ | Verbal Roots and Terminations - - 88 
Syncopated Moons of the Third Declension 36 Indicative Mood - - - 89 
Contracts of the Third Declensiin 7 Subjunctive Mood - ἂν Ὁ" - 92 
Indeclinable Nouns - - 42 Optative Mood - = - 93 
Anomalous Nouns - - - 42 Imperative Mood - - =). ae 
Defective Nouns - - - 45 Infinitive Mood - - - 95 
; Adjectives - - - =) os .: Participle —. - 96 
" Adjectives in og = - - 46 Perfect and Pluperfect | Passive and Middle 96 
m Adiectives in ὡς ~ - - ΣΝ Aorist Passive 99 
Adi amaives in? a “ 4 Accent of Verbs - - - 100 
eee eS 49 Formation of the Tenses - - lol 
Adjectives in ἧς and ες % = resent Active - - - 101 
Adjectives in ὥς, εἰς: HV, OVS, US, ors ως 49 Imperfect Active - - 105 
Adjectives of one ending - 54 First and Second Perfect Active - 106 
Compound Adjectives - 54 First and Second Pluperfect Active - 108 
Anomalous and Defective Adjectives 55 First and Second Future Active - 108 
Degrees of Comparison - - 57 First and Second Aorist Active - 110 
Comparison by tegos, τατος - o& « BF Present and Imperfect Passive - 112 
Comparison by swy, ἑστὸς 5: 58 ee - ce 7 " oe 
upertec assive τ 
RA ὦ aioe aoe Detective Comparison τ First and Second Aorist Passive 114 
-* Cardinal Ndiibers . t 61 First, Second, and Third Future Passive. 115 
Ordinal Numbers ᾿ 63 penne Imperfect, Perfect,and Flupertect, ssi 
1¢ 
seal Substautives, Adjectives, and Ad- 64 First and Second Future Middle - 116 
‘Article i AR μὲ See First and Second Aorist Middle - 117 
Pronoun ‘ a ae 65 Contract Verbs - - - - 118 
Personal Pronoun” - - ὙΠ ἢ ὁ πα ἀμ r Ms ἔ ἐπῶν 
Reflexive Pronoun - i 67 | Anomalous Verbs - - - 135 
Possessive Pronouns - - - 68 | Adverb 4 » ᾿ 168 
Interrogative Pronoun - - 68 Comparison of Adverbs Νν τς τα 
Indefinite Pronoun - - - 69) Derivation of Words * “- 172 
Demonstrative Pronoun - ὡ 69 erivation of Substantives τ = <2 
Relative Pronoun οἱ x batt 70 Derivation of Adjectives - 5 175 
ἃ Reciprocal Pronoun -« - 71 Derivation of Verbs = 5 - 176 
4: Pronominal Adjectives - - 171} Composition of Words - - 177 
Ν᾿ ἋΣ Verb - - - 73 
a = . 
ἑ Part Ill, SYNTAX. 
, Substantive - - - - 179 Passive - Wee νας: - - 229 
a Adjective - - - - 180 Middle - * 
Ee ΡΨ Article - - ‘ < (Bil Deponent Verte ἢ - - ΕἸΣ 
ΜῈ Pronoun - - - 185 | Tenses ee 
‘i Personal Pronoun ᾿ - - - 185 Present, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future 292 
Reflexive Pronoun - . 187 Imperfec t - - 294 
Possessive Pronoun - - - 188 Third Future - - - 234 
nterrogative Pronoun - - 188. Aorist - -- - 234 
Indefinite Pronoun - - - 188 | Moods - - - - ω835 
: Demonstrative Pronoun - - 189 Indicative - - - 235 
2 ' Relative Pronoun’ - τῳ - 190 Subjunctive * - - 2387 
᾿ Reciprocal Pronoun - - 194 ‘Optative - ‘os κ᾿ 239 
le aay, Subject and Predicate - - - 194 Imperative «. - Ξ - 242 
a δὰ Object - - - - 9201 Infinitive - - . 242 
Accusative - - - - 202) Participle - - - - 246 
πὰς Genitive - ἐν Φ Ξ 207 | Adverb is τς - = 248 
nr Dative - . - - 221|} Preposition - - - - 250 
Vocative - - - κι 227 | Conjunction - - - 252 
ἵ Voices — - - - - 227 | Interjection - - - - 8865 
ὃ Active - - - 227 | Irregular Construction - - 257 
| Part IV. ὙΠ ATION. 3 
᾿ Feet - ᾧ 5 Dactylic Verse - - - 264 
ad Trochaic Verne - - - 261 pero Verse “ - - 266 
ι Iambic Verse - - "ἢ υ : : 
=a τ GREEK INDEX - - - ABBREVIATIONS - - 284 
ages BNGLISH INDEX - - - . 276 | ν 


LETTERS ΣΕ y SYLLABLES. 


THE GREEK ALPHABET. 


δ. Be, L The Greek alphabet consists of the j 
following twenty-four letters: 
Figure. Representative. Name. 


Aa A a "Aiga Alpha 
BB 6 B b Bria Beta 

fr ae G g Τάμμα Gamma 
4 8 D d Aéhta Delta 

E ε E δ. “Ewikdy Epsilon 
Za τξ, Z Zz Znia Lela 

H η E δ "Hia Eta 

Θ 306 TH ἰδ Onta — Theta 
Ἅ5} I 1 ‘lata Jota 
Kx Kit ick Kanna Kappa - 
Mich L i AduBda Lambda 
M u Mi «et Mo Mu or My 
Νν Ae No Vu or Vy 
fe ξ.. B.4 x i X1 

O ο: O 0 Ὃ μικρόν Omicron 
Wage P poy ae Pi 

ἡ saad R r ‘Pa Rho 

= osfinal § 8 Σίγμα Sigma 
τ T t Ταῦ Lahn 
Fv Uor Y u or y *Y ψιλόν Upsilon — 
ὦ φ. PH. ph... DF ΡΩΝ 

Ae ME CH ch Xt Chi 
Pow Ῥ ps Pers “Ps 

2 ὦ O 6 "2 μέγα Omega 


2 _ LETTERS. AND. SYLLABLES. | [§ 1. 


2. These letters are divided into vowels and 
consonanis. ‘The vowels are a@, & 7, t, 0, v, ὦ" 
the consonants are β, 7, ὃ, ζ, ὃ. x, A, μι v, & 7, 0, 


0, T, Ps ZX, W- ) 

Nore 1. ἘΦ was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It 
was qualified by the adjective ψιλόν, smooth (not aspirated), only when it was 
used as a vowel. Anciently this vowel stood also for and the diphthong εἰ.» 
E. g. αἰϑήρ was written AIOEP. 

Hi was originally equivalent to the rough breathing, E. g. ἥσαρ was writ- 
ten HETLAP, ἡϑμός, HEOMOS. 

O stood also for ὦ and the diphthong o. E. g. πάσχω was written IIA. 
ΣΧΟ, ἔχουσι, EXOZI. It seems, that there was a time when O and 2 were 
distinguished from each other only by their size: hence the epithets ὄν, 
small, and μέγα, large. : é ‘ 

Y also was originally used both as a vowel andas a breathing. It was 
called ψιλόν only when it was used as a vowel. As a breathing, or rather as 
a consonant, it was probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma. The 
modern Greeks still pronounce it like v orf, in the diphthongs εν and av. 

Nott 2. Before the introduction of ® and X, the Greeks wrote IIH for 
®, and KH for X. E. g, they wrote EKILHANTOI ’Ex¢dévra, ἘΠΕΥ. 
KHOMENO® ἐπευχόμενος. Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing. 

TH was probably never used for ©. 

They wrote also ΚΣ or XZ for &, and ΦΣ for ¥. E.g. AEKSZAT for 
dikes, LILEAEXSZATO for ὑπεδέξατο, DEY XAZ for ψυχάς. 

Nore 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three other letters, which 
disappeared from it in later times, and then were called iwionwa, numeral marks. 
These are F or ¢, φ ΟΥ̓ Ly ‘and “JD. 


F ors, Bad, Vau, or Aivaupa, Digamma, (that 15, double gamma, so 
called on account of its form F,) corresponds to the Latin F or V. [Ι{ is still 
to be seen in some ancient inscriptions. 


? or “7 , Κύσσα, Koppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It was probably 
a deep guttural. 

ZN, Σάν or Σαρα, San or Sampi, was perhaps sounded like the Eng- 
lish sh. | : 

Remarx. The mark ¢ representing στ must not be confounded with the 
digamma. 

Note 4. We observe, that o is used only at the beginning 
or middle, and ¢ at the end of a word. KE. g. σεσωσμένος, not 
SéoWCuEVOO. 

Some editors unnecessarily put ¢ at the end of a word com- 
pounded with another.  E. g. ᾿εἰξέρχομαν for εἰσέρχομαι, δυςτυχῆς 
for δυστυχής, ὅοτις for ὅστις. 

Nore 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed 
also as numeral figures. The first eight letters denote units, 


8117 THE GREEK ALPHABET. 8 


the next eight, fens, and the last eight, hundreds. ‘The obso- 
lete letters ¢, hy, ΩΝ, denote 6, 90, 900, respectively. 
Observe, that the letters denoting units, tens, or hundreds, 
have an accent above. 
Thousands commence the alphabet again, with a stroke . 
underneath. 


Here follows a table of numerals. 


Ld 


α 1 ια΄ 1 V 30 v 400 
β΄ Q ιβ΄ 12 μ' 40 φ 500 
A 3 ιγ΄ 13 y 50 x 600 
δ΄ 4 ιδ΄ 14 ξ' 60 y' 700 
δ᾽ 5 ιδ΄ 1ὅ ο΄ 70 ω 800 
“Ὁ ea is. 16 nan 80 Dy’ 900 
ζ΄ 7 ιζ΄ 17 Lh ’ 90 a 1000 
51:9: 8 in 18 ο΄ 100 f 2000 
ae 9 wy 19 o 200 y 9000 
Στ) κ΄ 20 « 300 &c. 


Examples, αὐδή = 1838, αψος = 1776, owxe’ = 1821. 


Nore 6. There is another method of writing numerals, m 
which 1, 7, 4, ΚΠ, H; Jaf, X, ET, M, respectively denote, 
"Tos, one, Πέντε, jive, Δέκα, ten, Πεντάκις Δέκα, five times ten, or 
Sifty, ‘Exatoy (anciently HEKATON), hundred, πεντάκις Ἕκα- 
τόν, five hundred, Χίλιοι, thousand, Πεντάκις Χίλιοι, five thousand, 
Mugio1, ten thousand. (δ 60.) 


Here follows a table. 


I 1 ANI 17 il uw 600 
11 Q ANIII 18 ET uu 700 
Tit 3 Anitir 419 le] num 800 
IIIT 4 44 20 fal nonuy 900 
il 5 “244 90 Χ 1000 
ΠΙ 0 4444 40 xX 2000 
ΠΙΙ 7 50 xxx 3000 
IIT 8 1414 60 xxexe 4000 
ΤΙΝ 9 Ff44 0 5. ἘΠ 5000° 
A 10 Η444 80 EIx  __.6000 
AI 11 ff 4411 9 EL xx 7000 
A eB H 100 FI xxx 8000 
41m 18 HE 200 ET xxxx 9000 
Ζ1Π1: 14 HUH -300 mM , 10000 
Al 15 HHHH 400° mx 11000 


ANI 16 ἘΠ δ00 &e. 


4 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. ~ [ὃ 2. 


VOWELS. 


§ 2. There are five short vowels, and five cor- 
responding long ones. The short vowels are ἄ, ¢, 
t, 0, v: the long vowels are &, ἡ, ¢, ὦ, ὕ. 


The mark (~) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark 
(-), over along one. These marks, however, are necessary 
only in the case of «, 1, and v, since the letters ἡ and ὦ repre- 
sent long E and O respectively. 


Note 1. The vowels ε and o are often called the short vow- 
els, ἡ and w, the long vowels, and α, 1, v, the doubtful vowels. 


Remark. By the term, doubtful, we are not to understand 
that the quantity of a, 1, v, is uncertain in any given syllable, 
but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and 
in others always short. E. g. vin the words ϑῦμός, πῦρός wheat, 
is always long; in the words πύλη, ὑπό, always short. 

There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these let- 
ters is variable, as α in “4oye, ε IN μυρέκη, and v in χορύνη" 
but we should recollect, that the sounds Z and © also are, 
in certain instances, variable, as ξηρός and ξἕερός, ἴωμεν and 
ἴομεν. 


Nore 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five 
vowels, 4, E, I, O, 7. The long vowels differ from the short 
ones in quantity, but notin quality. 


Note 3. Commutation or Vowets. (1) When from any 
* cause the vowels « and 0 are to be lengthened, they are gen- 
erally changed into the diphthongs εν and ov, rather than into 
their corresponding long ones ἡ and w._ ΕἾ. σ΄. ξεῖνος for ξένος, 
μοῦνος for μόνος. 

(2) In some instances o is lengthened into o. LE, g. ποία 
for πόα. 

(3) The vowel ἃ often passes into αὐ or y. Εἰ. g. αἰεί from 
ἀεὶ, τέϑηλα from ϑάλλω. 

(4) The vowels ἅ and ε are frequently interchanged. E. g. 
Ionic τέσσερες for τέσσαρες, Doric πιάζω for πιέζω. 

(5) The syllables go and ἄω are often changed into ew. 
E. g. Attic λεώς for λαός, lonic ἐφετμέων for ἐφετμᾶω». 

(6) The vowels ἃ and ἡ are interchanged. Εἰ. g. Doric 
ἃ for ἡ, lonic πρῆγμα for πρᾶγμα. 


§ 3.] VOWELS. | 5 


The use of ἃ for ἡ is one of the leading peculiarities of the 
Dorie dialect. The use οἴη for ἃ is peculiar to the Ionic. 


(7) The vowels ἃ and » are sometimes interchanged. E. g. 
κράζω and χρώζω. ; 

(8) The vowels « and ο are often interchanged. Εἰ. g. 
τέτροφα from τρέπω. 

(9) The vowels ἡ and are, in some instances, inter- 
changed. E. g. πτήσσω and atwoow. 


DIPHTHONGS. 


§ 3. 1. There are fourteen diphthongs, of which 
seven, al, ἄν, εἰ, ev, ol, ov, and w, begin with a 
short vowel, and seven, @, ἄν, 9, nV, @, av, and 
i, with along one. ‘The former are called proper 
diphthongs, and the latter, improper diphthongs. 

The » is written under the long vowel, and is called zota 
subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter. E, g. 
THI ‘AITAL, τῇ ἁγίᾳ, ΤΩΙ TOPR, τῷ σοφῷ " “Adw, ᾷδω. 


2. The diphthongs are represented in English as follows : 


Proper diphthongs. Improper diphthongs. 
αν by αἱ ot by οἱ ᾳ by ἃ ῳ by ὃ 
av “ au ov ““ ou gu“ au ov “ Ou 
oe Sie vw * yt an al te i 
ev 3 ** ems nu ““ eu 


Nore 1. The diphthong wy belongs to the Ionic dialect. 
It may be doubted whether the diphthong a was ever used. 


Nore 2. In the improper diphthongs, the second vowel was 
nearly swallowed up by the preceding long one, which long 
vowel constituted the leading element of these diphthongs. 


Nore 3. Commuration or ΠΙΡΗΤΗΟΝΟΒ. (1) The Tonians 
often use wv for av. E. g. ϑωῦμα for ϑαῦμα. (ᾧ 9. Ν, L) 


(2) The Ionians use yi for εἰ. E. g. ἀγγήϊον for ἀγγεῖον, 
βασιληΐη for βασιλεία. 


(3) They use y for αὐ. E. g. τιμῆσι for τιμαῖσι. 

(4) The Dorians use ὦ for ov. LE. g. μῶσα for μοῦσα- 

For ov before o they often use οἱ. Εἰ. g. μοῖσα for μοῦσα 
᾿ 


6 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [$$ 4, 5, 


BREATHINGS. 


' §4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a 
vowel must have either the rough breathing (ἢ), or 
the smooth breathing (7), over that vowel. E. g. 


ἀκούω, ἑπόμενος. 


Note 1. The vowel v-at the beginning of a word takes the 
rough breathing. E. g. ὑμεῖς, ὑπό. Except the Epic pro- 
nouns ὄὕμμι, ὕμμιν, and tuys. (ὃ 64. N. 2.) 


2. The rough breathing is placed also over g at the begin- 

ning of a word. E, g. 
ῥεῦμα, ὅᾷδιος. 

8. When 9 is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one 
. takes the smooth breathing, and the other, the rough breathing. 
E. g- ἀῤῥητος. 

4, The breathing, as also the accent (ᾧ 19. 5), is placed 
over the second owe) of the SEP BORE: E. g. αὐτὸς, αἴρω, 
υἱός, οὗτος. 

Except the improper diphthongs ᾳ, mo. E. g. #00, ἦδον, 
ody. So in capitals, ἄιδω, “Hidor, 23%. 

5. The rough breathing corresponds . to the English h. 
E. g. ἵππος, οὗτος, gevue, ἄῤδητος, ἴῃ English letters i ch 
houtos, rheuma, arrhétos. 


Note 2. The smooth breathing represents the effort, with 
which a vowel, not depending on a preceding letter, is pro- 
nounced, Let, for example, the learner pronounce first the 
word, act, and then, enact, and mark the difference between 
the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will per- 
ceive, that the utterance of ἃ in act, requires more effort than 
that of ἃ in enact. 


CONSONANTS. 


ἢ 5. 1. The consonants A, uy ¥, Q, are, On ac- 
count of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids. 


2. The consonants £ & w, are called double 
_consonanis ; because £ βίδ Δα 8 for 00, & for xo, and 
w for zo. 


§$§ 6, 7.] CONSONANTS. 7 


Nore 1. The preposition ἐκ in composition never cvalesces 
with the following o. E. g. ἐκσκορπίζω, not ἐξκορπίζω. 

Nore 2, It is not exactly correct to say that ¢ stands for 3c, since, ac- 
cording to the Greek notions of euphiony, a lingual is always dropped before ¢ 
(§ 10. 2). In strictness ζ is a mixture of δ and 7, just as e is compounded 
of a and i, o of a and u, and ὁ of m and p. ἜΝ 

With respeet to its making position (§ 17. 2), this was probably owing to 
its strong vocal hissing. 


{ 8. The consonants πὶ B; φ, κι 7, 7%, τ, ὃ, 4, are 


, 
f 
, 
} 


called mutes. They are divided into 


smooth mutes πὶ, κ, τ, 
middle mutes β, γ, ὃ, 
rough mutes φ, χ, ϑ. 
These letters correspond to each other in the perpendicular 
direction. ἘΣ, g. @ is the corresponding rough of π. 
4. The letter o, on account of its hissing sound, 
is called the sibilant letter. | 


Nore 3. The consonants », ρ, ς, § wy, are the only ones that 
can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word. 


Except x in the preposition ἐκ and the adverb οὐκ. 


§ 6. According to the organs with which they 
are pronounced, the consonants are divided into — 


ο dabials 7, B, φ, μι, 
linguals τ, 0, 9, ἵ, σ; 2, ν, 0; 
palatals x, 7, χ. 


The labials are pronounced chiefly with the lips; the hn- 
guals, with the tongue; and the palatals, with the palate. 


Nore. Commutation or Consonants. (1) The Dorians 
generally use od for ¢. E. g. χωμάσδω for κωμάζω. ‘This takes 
place in the middle of a word. 

(2) The Attics use tr for oo. E. g. πράττω for πράσσω. 

(3) In some instances ὁ is used for ga. E. g. ἄρῥην for 
ἄρσην. : | | 


EUPHONIC CHANGES. oN 


§ 7. When a labial (x, 8, p), or apalatal (x, y, 7), happens to 
stand before a lingual (τ, ὃ, 9); the former is changed into its 


8 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. μῳἨ[{φ88-10. 


corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as the 
latter is smooth, middle, or rough, (Ὁ 5.3.) E.g. 


τέτριπ-ται — for! τέτριβ-ται ἐτρίφ-ϑην for ἐτρίβ-ϑην. 


yéyoun-tar “ἰγέγραφ-ταν ἐτύφ:ιϑην ““ ἐτύπ-ϑην * 

ηκ-ται ¢ ἡγ-ται ἐπλέχ-ϑην ‘© ἐπλέκ-ϑην - 

_tétevx-tar = δέρευκύεας ἐλέχ-ϑην * ἐλέγ-ϑην. 

So ἕβδομος from ἑπτά, ὄγδοος from ὀκτώ, ἐπιγράβδην for ἐπι- 
γράφδην. 

So in Latin, nuptum for nubtum, actus for agtus, vectum for 
vehtum. 


Nore. Except x in the preposition ἐκ. E. g. sha éx- 
ϑροώσκω, not ἐγδέρω, ἐχϑρώσκω. 


’ ᾧ 5. 1A labial (2,8, p) before μ is always changed into μ. 
E. g. 
λέλειμ- μαι for λέλειπ-μαι γέγραμ-μαν for γέγραφ-μαι. 
᾿ τέτριμ- μὰν ““τέτριβ-μαν. τέϑραμ-μαι “ τέϑρῳαφ-μαι. 
2. A labial (β, p) before σ is changed into x. According to 
§ 5. 2, the combination zo is repreper ted by y. E.g. 
toiww for τρίβ-σω γράψω for γράφ-σω.. 
So in Latin, nupsi for nubsi, lapsus for labsus. 


ΟὟ § 9. 1. A palatal (x,7) before μ is generally changed into 
γ. Eg. 
πέπλεγε-μαι for πέπλεκ-μαι τέτευγ-μαι for τέτευχ-μαι. 

Nore. The preposition ἐκ remains unaltered before uw. E. g. 
ἐχμαί-νω, ἐκμετρέω, NOt ἐγμαΐνω, ἐγμετρέω. 
/ 2. A palatal (y,z7) before σ is changed into x, According 
to § 5. 2, the combination xo is represented by & LE. g. 

λέξω for λέγ-σω . τεύξω for τεύχ-σω. 
Soi in Latin, text for tegsi, traxt for trahsi. 


\ soa ae 1. A lingual (z, 5, 4, ¢) before w is often sncnied into 


o. ‘Erg. 
ἦσ-μαι for ἤδ-μαι ᾿ πέπεισ- μαι for πέπειϑ-μαι 
πλάσ-μα “ πλάϑ-μα φρόντισ-μα ““ φρόντιζ-μα. 
2. A lingual (τ, δ, ὃ, 2) is always dropped before o. LE. g. 
3 mé-ow for nét-ow πλά-σω. for πλάϑ-σω 
; ζ-τσω “ἄἀδ-σω φροντί-σω ““ φροντίζ-σω. 
ee in Latin, amans for amants, monens for monents, lust for 
St. 


$§ 11, 12.) CONSONANTS. — ᾿- 


3. A lingual (τ, δ, 9.) ¢) before another hngaet is often 
changed intoo. E. g. 
ἤσ-ται for ἠδ-ται πέπλασ-ται for πέπλαϑ-ται 
ἴσ-τε ““ Ἰἴὃ-τε φροντισ-τής ““ φροντιζ-τής. 
4, A lingual — (τ, 9, 9, ¢) before a palatal (x,y,z) is always 
dropped. E. g. 7-xa for 70-x0, πέπει-κα for πέπειϑ--κα, πεφρόν- , 
ti-xe for πεφρόντιζ-κα. 


Nore 1. The omission of a lingual before ¢ or x does not affect the quantity 
of the preceding vowel. 


Nore 2. In the Epic language the ¢ of the preposition xaré is changed 
into the following consonant. E. g. χαγγόνυ for κατγόνυ for κατὰ γόνυ, 
κάλλιπον for κάτλιπον for κατέλιπον, 


Before two consonants the ¢ of this preposition is dropped. E. g. κάσχεϑε 
for κάσσχεϑε for κατέσχεϑε. 


§ Hi. The letter o cannot stand between two consonants. 
E. g. γεγράφ-ϑαι for γεγράφ-σϑαι, ἐψάλ-ϑαι for ἐψάλ-σϑαι. 


§ 12. 1. Before a labial (7, 8, p), ν is changed into μ. E. g. 
ἐμ-πίπτω for év-ninto éu-parig for ἐγ-φανής 
συμ-βαίνω ““ συν-βαίνω ἔμ- ψυχος ““ ἔν- ψυχος. — 

So in Latin, zmbellis for inbellis, impius for inpius. 

2. Before a palatal (x, γ, χ), y is changed intoy. Eg. 
συγ-καίω for συν- καίω συγ-γενής for συν-γενής 
ἐγ-ξέω ““ ἐν-ξέω συγεχέω “ συν-χέω. 

Remark. The combinations yy, yx, 7& yy, are repre- 

sented i in English by ng, ne or nk, ne, neh, respectively, EK. g. 

ἄγγος ANGOS, ἀγκών ancon or ankon, ἄγξω anxo, ἄγχω ancho, 


3. Before a liquid (λ, μ, 0), ν is changed into that liquid, 


συλ-λέγω for συν-λέγω ᾿ς ἐμ- μένω for ἐν-μένω 
th-hoyog ““ ἔν:λογος συῤ-ῥέω ““ συν-ῥέω. 


So in Latin, colligo for conligo, commotus for conmotus, cor- 
ruptus for conruptus. 


4. Before o or €, ν is dropped. E. g. δαίμο-σι for δαίμον-σι, 
σύ-ζυγος for σύν-ζυγος. 

5. In many instances, after y has been dropped before o, the 
preceding short vowel is lengthened. £ and o are changed 
into εὐ and οὐ respectively (ᾧ 2. N. 8). Εἰ. δ. 


μέλᾶ-ς = for μέλαν-ς τιϑεῖ-σι for τιϑέν-σι 
τετυφᾶ--σι ““ τετυφον-σι τύπτου- σι ““ τύπτον-σι-.. 


10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δὲ 19, 14. 


This lengthening almost always takes place when yz, 9d, 9, 
are dropped before o (δὴ 10. 2: 12.4). E. g. 


youwa-¢ for γράψαντες ~ λέου--σι for λέοντ--σι 
τυφϑεί-ς ““τυφϑέντ-ς σπεί-σω ““ σπένδ-σω 

΄ , ? ᾿ 
δεικνύς “ δεικγυντ-ς πεί-σομαν ““ πένϑ- σομαι. 


ΝΌΤΕ 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the lingual has any 
thing to do with the lengthening of the vowel before σ (§ 10. 2, N. 1). 


Nore 2. In some instances, » before o is changed into o. 
E. g. σύσσωμος for σύνσωμος. 


Nore 3. The preposition ἐν remains unaltered before 9, o, 
ξ. E. g. “ἐνράπτω, ἐνσάττω, ἐνζεύγνυμι. 


Nore 4. In the following words ν is not dropped before o- 
xévoor (from κεντέω), πέπανσις, πέφανσαι (from guirw). Also in 
the ending γς of the third declension (§ 36. 1), as ἕλμινς. Also 
in the word πάλιν, in composition, as παλινστομέω. 


§ UB. At the beginning of a word ρ is generally doubled, 
when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand between 
two vowels. KE. g. 


περιῤῥέω from περί and δέω ἔρῥευκα for ξρευκα. 


§ ΓΔ. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, ἃ 
smooth consonant (2, x, τ) happens to stand before a vowel hav- 
ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the rough 
breathing form a corresponding rough consonant (φ, χ, 9). Εἰ. g. 

᾿ἀφ-ίημε = for ἀπ-ἴημι καϑ-αίρεσις for κατ-αΐἵρεσις 
δεχ-ήμερος ““ δεχκ-ῆμερος αὐϑ-ήμερος ““ αὐτ-ἥμερος. 


Nore 1. In the words τέϑριππον (τέτταρες, ἵππος), φροῦδος 
(190, ὃδός), ϑοιμάτιον᾽ (τὸ ἱμάτιον), ϑατέρου (τοῦ ἑτέρου), the 
rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it does not 
immediately come in contact with it. 


_ 2. The same change takes place when, of two successive 
words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next 
begins with a vowel having the rough breathing. LE. g. 
ἀφ᾽ οὗ for aa οὗ τ΄ μεϑ' ἡμῶν for wer ἡμῶν 
c ~ 3 c ~ 
nak ξαυτόν “ χατ ἑαυτόν οὐχ ὑμῶν “οὐκ ὑμῶν. 
Norte 2. The Ionic dialect violates these rules. E. g. ἀπι- 
᾿ ᾿ 3 ᾿ , ’ 4 ? rs 
᾿χκέσϑαι for ἀφικέσϑαι, xatevdw for καϑεύδω, οὐκ οἷος for οὐχ οἷος. 


_ | 8. If two successive syllables would each have ἃ rough con- 


§ 15.] CONSONANTS. 11 


sonant (φ, χ, 8), the first rough consonant is often changed into 
its corresponding smooth (7, κ, τ). Εἰ. g. 
πέφηνα for φέφηνα τέϑηλα for ϑέϑηλα 
κέχανδα ““ χέχανδα τρέχω ““ ϑρέχω. 
This change takes place in almost all reduplications. 


Note 3. The first aorist passive deviates from this rule. — 
E. g. ἀφέϑην, ἐχύϑην, not ἀπέϑην, ἐκύϑην. 

Except ἐτέϑην from τέϑημι, and ἐτύϑην from ϑύω. 

Nore 4, The termination ϑὲι οἵ the imperative active 
(ὃ 88. 1) is changed into τι, if the preceding syllable has a 
rough consonant. EK. g. τύφϑητι for τύφϑηϑι, τέϑετι for τέϑεϑι. 

Except the imperatives φάϑιυ from φημί, and τέϑναϑι from 
ϑνήσκω. 


Nore 5. In the verb “Ex.2, of which the future is ἕξω, the 
rough breathing is changed into the smooth breathing, ἔχω, on 
account of y in the following syllable, 


4. A rough consonant (q, χ, 9) is never doubled ; but instead 
of this, its corresponding smooth (z,x,r) is placed before it. 
E. g. angus, Ἴακχος, ArPis, not ἀφφύς, Ἴαχχος, AdFis. 


ἱ MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 


§ 1. 1. All datives plural-in 1, and all third persons in 1 
and «, are written both with and without a final y They are - 
generally written with it when the next word begins with a 
vowel. E. g. 


ϑηρσὶν ἀγρίοις ϑηρσὶ κακοῖς 
φησὶν οὗτος. φησὶ Σωκράτης 
τύπτουσιν αὐτοὺς τύπτουσι τούτους 
ἔστερξεν μέγα ἔστερξε μέγα- 


2. Also, all adverbs of place in σι (ὃ 121. 1). E.-g. πλα- 
ταιᾶσι. ' 


Also, the particles νύ and χέ, the adverbs πέρυσι and γόσφι, 
and the numeral εἴκοσι. 


Nore. In some Grammars, » movable is written parentheti- 
cally. E. g. ϑηρσί (yr). 

3. The words οὕτως, ἄχρις, μέχρις, and ἐξ (that is, éxc), and a 
few others, drop the ¢ before a consonant. Εἰ. g. οὕτω φησί, ἐκ 
ϑεοῦ. : 

"ἄχρις and μέχρις often drop the ¢ even before a vowel. 


4. The adverb ov becomes οὐκ or οὐχ before a vowel. E. σ᾽ 
οὔ φησι, οὐκ εἶπε, οὐχ εἵπετο (8 14. 2). 


12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ῷ 16. 


SYLLABLES. 


§ 16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek | 
word as there are vowels and diphthongs in it. 


2. Words of one syllable are called-monosyllables ; of two, 
dissyllables; and of more than two, polysyllables. 


3. The last syllable except one is called the penult ; the last 
except two, the antepenult. LE. g.-in si-onhay-yvos, χνος is the 
last syllable, σπλαγ, the penult, and <i, the antepenult. 


Nore 1. (1) Any single consonant may commence a Greek 
word. 

(2) The following combinations of consonants may com- 
mence a Greek word or a syllable: 86, 62, Bo, yi, vv, ve, Su, ὃν, 
do, D1, ϑν, Fo, uh, xp, xv, κρ, xt, wy, πλ, mY, πρ, UT, OB, OF; Ox, 
σκλ, Ou, on, σπλ, OT, OTA, στρ, σφ, OZ, TA, TU, TO, PF, HA, Ho, ZI; 
Hh, χν, H0- , me | 

(3) The following combinations also may commence a syl- 
lable: 75, yu, Du, τν, py, χμ. : 

(4) Further, any three consonants. may begin ἃ syllable, 
provided the first and the last pair may each begin a syllable. 
E. δ. TQ, χϑρ- ᾽ 


Nore 2. Greek words are divided into syllables in the fol- 
lowing manner : 


(1) A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a 
combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable 
(§ 16. N. 1), is placed at the beginning of the syllable. ἘΣ, g. 


‘ ε 
δι-α-λέ-γο-μαι, ὑ-τ-σπληγξ, κα-το-πτρον. 


(2) When the combination cannot commence ἃ syllable, its 
first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable. E. g. ἔλ-ϑω, 
ἄγ-χω, ψάλ-λω. 


(3) A compound word is resolved into its component parts, 
if the first part ends with a consonant. E. g. πα-λίν-ορ-σος. 

But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is 
divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut 
off (§ 135.3). E. g. πα-ρέ-λα-βον. 


‘4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel or diphthong is 
immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding syllable. 
E. g. the following words end in a, αἱ, ag, os, pure: σηπέ-α, 
σηπί- αι, σηπί-ας, ἄγρι-ος. 


μι πως 171 | QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13 


QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 


ἃ 17. In any Greek word, every syllable is 
either long or short. 


1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a 
long vowel or diphthong. Ἐπ g. in the following 
words the penult is long by nature: 


5 ? τ ~ 
οἶκος, ἄνϑρωπος, Thun, πᾶσα. 


2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when 
its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two 
or more consonants, or by a double consonant 
(fw). E. g. in the following words the penult is 
long by position: ! ; 


> ’ co » [4 
ἐστέ, ορκος, ἄσπλαγχνος, φραζω. 


3. When a short vowel is followed by a mute 
and a liquid, the syllable is common. E. g. in the 
following words the penult is either long or short: 


’ . 
τέκνον, υβρις. 


4, But the syllable is almost always long, when its vowel, 
being short by nature, is followed by the following combina- 
tions: βλ, yi, yu, vv, Ou, ὃν. E. g. the antepenult of ἔβλεπον. 


Nore 1. In the Epic language the syllable is generally long 
when its vowel, being short. by nature, is followed by a mute 
and a liquid. 


a 


Nore 2. In Homer and Hesiod, ox and £, at the beginning 


of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel. 
E. g. (Il. 6, 402: 2, 634.) 


5. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be 
long, must be assumed to be short. 


Nore 3. The quantity of @, 1, v, must be learned by obser- 
vation. The following remarks, however, may be of some use 
to the learner : 

2 


14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δὴ 18, 19. 


(1) Every circumflexed a, 1, v, is long by nature. (§ 21.) 
E. g. πᾶν, ὑμῖν, δρῦς. 

(2) Every a, x, v, arising from contraction is long by nature. 
(ὃ 23.) E. g. τἰμᾶ, πόλτς, Boris, from τίμαε, πόλιες, βότρυες. 

(3) Every ao, vo, arising from ayzo, vyto, is long by nature. 
(Ὁ 12.5.) E. g. τύψασι, ζευγνῦς, for τύψαντσι, ζευγνύντς. 

(4) Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their 
primitives. oe 
ὁ U8. 1. The epic and the lyric. poets often shorten a long 
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word when the next word 
begins with a vowel. E. g. (Od. 5, 286) Ἢ πόποι, ἢ μάλα δὴ 


> 
μετεβούλευσαν ϑεοὶ ἄλλως, Where ὦ πόποι, -σαν ϑεοὶ, are dactyles. 


Nore 1. This kind of shortening occurs also in the middle 
of a word. E.g. δηΐοιο (~~--~), τοιαυτέ (~—-). 


2. A short syllable is often made long by the epic poets. 
E. g. ἐπειδή (-- -- --), Αἰόλου (-- -- --), φίλε ixvgé (--~~- Bic 


Nore 2. It is supposed that the ancients generally doubled 
in pronunciation the consonant following the short vowel. 
E. g. they read ἐππειδή, Aicddov. 

There are instances, however, where the short vowel was 
lengthened without reference to the following letter. . E. g. 
διά for dia. 


ACCENT. 


§ 19. 1. The Greek has three accents, viz. the 
acute (), the grave (‘), and the circumflex (7). 


The acute can stand only on one of the last 
three syllables of a word; the circumflex, only on 
one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. 


Remark 1. The place of the accent in every word must be 
learned by observation. 


Nore !. The following monosyllables (called aténa) gen- 
erally appear unaccented : | 

gl, sig OF éo, ἐν or εἶν, ἐξ ΟΥ ἐκ, ov OF οὐκ OF οὐχ, ws, and the 
articles 0, 7, ot, at. . 


~ 


207 .- ACCENT. ay | 15 
ἢ ; a 
Remarx 2. When the articles 6, ἡ, oi, ai, stand for demonstrative pronouns 
(§ 142. 1), they should be read as if they were accented. 


Remark 3. Ὁ takes the acute when it is equivalent to the relative pronoun 
(§ 142, 2). For ὥς, see below (δ 123. N. 1). 


Norz 2. According to the old grammarians, the grave accent is understood 
on every syllable which appears unaccented. Thus ἀνθρωποκτόνος, τύπτω, are, 
according to them, ἄνθρωσὸκ τόνὸς, ciara. It seems, then, that.the grave 
accent is πὸ accent at all. 

2. A word is called orytone, when it has the acute accent 
on the last syllable. E. g. πιστός, εἰπέ, ἀγαϑ οἵ. 

Parozytone, when it has the acute accent on the penult. 
E. g. ϑέλω, μεμερίσθαι. 

Proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult. 
E. g. ἄνϑρωπος, ἄξιοι, πόλεως. 


3. A word is called perispomenon, when it has the circum- 
flex on the last syllable. E. σι, ἐπιϑῶ, διαπερᾷν, ποδοῖν. 

Properispomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult. 
E. g. τοῦτον, μεμνῆσϑαι, μᾶλλον. 

4. A word is called barytone, when its last syllable has no 
accent at all. (ᾧ 19. Ν. 2.) E. g. τύπτω, τοῦτον, περιερχόμενος. 


5. When the accented syllable has a diphthong, the accent 
is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong. E, g. 
αἵματα, ϑωῦμα.. Except the improper diphthongs «, 7, @. 
(See also § 4. 4.) 


§ 2@. 1. If the last syllable is long either by nature or by 
position (§ 17. 1, 2), no accent can be placed on the ante- 
penult. 


2. The acute can stand on the antepenult only when the 
last syllable is short. E. g. ἄνϑρωπος, διέφϑορεν, πέλεκυς. 


Nore 1. The endings αὐ and οὐ are, with respect to accent, 
short. E. σι λέγονται, ἄνϑρωποι. 

Except the third person singular of the optative active. 
E. g. τιμήσαι, τιμήσοι. 

Except also the adverb οἴκοι, at home, which in reality is an 
old dative. 


Note 2. The endings ὦ, w, ὡς, ws, ὧν, av, of the second ἄρ. (iA 7 


clension, and ὡς, wy, of the genitive of nouns in tc, vs, of the 
third declension, permit | the accent to be on the — 
(δὴ 33: 43.3.) E. g. ἀνώγεω, πόλεως, πόλεων. 


16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [δὴ 21, 22. 


Nore 3. Also the Ionic termination. » of the genitive sin- 
gular of the first declension permits the accent to stand on the 
antepenult, E. g. Τυδείδεω. (931. N. 3.) 


8. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is short 
by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. E. g. 
λόγος, μούσης. 


4. When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable, 
stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this 
acute becomes grave ("). E. g. τοὺς πονηροὺς καὶ τοὺς ἀγαϑοὺς 
ἀνϑρώπους, not τούς πονηρούς καί τούς ἀγαϑούς ἀνθρώπους. 


§ 21. 1. The crrcumriex can be placed only ona syl- 
lable long by nature. E. g. τῆς τιμῆς, διαπερῶν. 


2. A penult long by nature, if accented, takes the circum- 
flex only when the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature. 
E. g. μᾶλλον, πῖνε, καταῖτυξ. So εἶγαι, οἶκοι, (ὃ 20. N. 1.)_ 


§ 22. 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent 
back upon the last syllable of the preveding word. The fol- 
lowing words are enclitics : 


(1) The personal pronouns μοῦ, μοΐ, μέ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ, οὗ, οἵ, 
ἕ, σφωέ, σφωΐν, σφέων, σφέας, σφέα, σφίσι, σφέν, σφέ, σφάς. We 
must observe, that,of those beginning with og, only the oblique 
cases are enclitic. 


(2) The indefinite pronoun τὶς, ti, through all the cases, as 
also the words tov, τῷ, for τινὸς, tri. 


(3) The present indicative of εἰμί, am, and φημί, say. 
Except the monosyllabic 2 pers. sing. εἶ or sic, and φής. 


(4) The particles ποϑὲν, ποϑί, mot, πή, πού, πώς, ποτέ, γέ, 
ϑήν, κὲ OF κέν, νύ OF γύν, πέρ, πώ, τέ, τοί, δά, and the insepar- 
able particle dé, to. 


2. If the word before the enclitic‘has the acute on the ante- 
penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic throws 
back an acuté on the last syllable of that word. E. g. ἄνϑρω- 
moc τις, for ἄνϑρωπος τὶς" δεῖξόν μοι, for δεῖξον μοὶ. 


3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the 
last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. In this 
case the acute does not become grave (§ 20. 4). E. g. ἐγώ 
φημι, for ἐγὼ φημὲ" πολλοῖς τισι, for πολλοῖς τισὶ» 


§ 29.] CONTRACTION. 17 


Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- 
ceding word has the acute on the penult.  E. g. τούτου ye. 


4, An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent, 


(1) When the preceding word has the acute on the penult. 
E. g. ἄνδρες τινὲς. 

(2) When the syllable upon which its accent would have 
been thrown back has been elided (§ 25). E. g. πόλλ᾽ ἐστὶ, 


for πολλα ἐστι. 


Nore 1. Enclitics, which stand at the beginning of ἃ sen- 
tence, retain their accent. E. g. σοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον. 


Remark. The abovementioned personal pronouns retain 
their accent, when they depend upon a preposition. KE. g. 
ἐπὶ coi, not ἐπί σοι. Except μὲ in the formula πρός us. 


Nore 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the 
preceding takes the accent of the following. E. g. οὐδίβροτέ 
ἐστί σφισιν, for οὐδέποτε ἐστὶ σφίσιν. 


Note 3. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and the par- 
ticles are not Separated bya space from the attracting word. 
E. g. οὔτε, μήτις, ὅστις, οἵστισιν, ὥστε. 


CONTRACTION. 


§ 23. A pure syllable (ὃ 16. 4) and the one immediately 
preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This is 
called contraction. It takes places generally as follows: 


eo are contracted into a, as into d, as χρύσεα χρυσᾶ, ὑγιέα 
ΣΤΟΝ ὦ Gis bad le 
μνάα μνᾶ. ὑγιᾶ. 
αᾳ --τῷ, aS μνάᾳ pre. ἐᾷ ---ῃ,  ἃ8 χρυσέῳ χρυσῇ. 
Ob — αι, AS μνάαι μναῖ. δαὶ —7 OF αἱ, as τύπτεαι τύπτῃ, 
- ἂξ — ἃ, as τίμαε τἰμᾶ. χρύσεαι χρυσαῖ. ; 
. O86 — ᾧ, AS τιμάεν τιμᾷ. δὲ — ξι, as piles φίλει. Some- 
| an —46, as τιμάητε τιμᾶτε. times into η, as τριήρεε τριήρη. 
\ καῇ a, as τιμάῃς τιμᾷς. 7 eeu — δι, aS φιλέεις φιλεῖς. 
Gh -—— g, 885 ἀΐσσω ἄσσω. ᾿ ξῆ ““π-- ἢ, AS φιλέητε φιλῆτε. 


00 --- ὦ, as τιμάομεν τιμῶμεν. ξῇ --- ἢ» as φιλέῃς φιλῇς. 
αου --- ῳ, as τιμάοιμεν τιμῷμεν. εἰ -τι εἰ, aS πόλεϊ πόλει. 


τ “ov—w, as τιμάουσι τιμῶσι. £0 — οὐ, aS φιλέομεν φιλοῦμεν. 
᾿Π 00 -“π ὦ, as τιμάω τιμῶ. οὐ δοῦ —— 0, aS φιλέοιμεν φιλοῖμεν. 


s% — ἢ, aS γέα γῆ. ie ie «ἑοῦ ---- οὐ, a8 φιλέουσι φιλοῦσι. 


18 

δὼ —, aS φιλέω φιλῶ. 

nt --π ἡ, aS τιμήεσσα τιμῆσσα. 
nee — ἢ, AS τιμήεις τιμῇς.. 

nt --- ἢ, aS Θρήϊσσα Θρῆσσα. 
ie --τῖ, 88 πόλιες πόλῖς. 


4 —T, aS πόλιι πόλι. 

on —w OF d, as ἠχύα ἠχώ, 
ἁπλόα ἁπλὰ. 

oat — αἱ, aS διπλόαι διπλαῖ. 

os —ov, as δηλόετε δηλοῦτε. 


LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 


6 24. 


times into ἡ, as διπλόη δι- 
πλῆ. 
on --- οι, aS δηλόης δηλοῖς. This 
contraction occurs only in 
verbs in ow. Verbs in ape 
(§ 117) contract oy into ῳ. 
οἱ -πτ οι, aS ἡχόϊ ἡἠχοῖ. 
/00 —ov, as δηλόομεν δηλοῦμεν. 
ρον — οἱ, aS δηλόοιμεν δηλοῖμεν. 
οου ---- ov, aS δηλόουσι δηλοῦσι. 


os —ov, as δηλόειν δηλοῦν. ow —w, as δηλόω δηλῶ. 
Verbs in ew (§ 116) con- “0@ —@, aS πλόῳ πλῷ. 


tract the endings os and ve —d, as ἰχϑύες ἰχϑῦς. 
οεις Into οἱ and οις, as δηλόες vi — wi, aS πληϑύϊ πληϑιυῖ, 
δηλοῖ, δηλόεις δηλοῖς, ai --ῳ, as λωΐων λῴω». 


on—w, as δηλόητε δηλῶτε. Some- 


Nore 1. (1) The Doric dialect contracts ws and as, into 
ἡ and 7 respettively. Εἰ. g. ὅραε oon, δράει δρῇ. 

The Attic does the same in the following verbs, διψάω, Com, 
κνάω, πεινάω, σμάω, χράομαι. 

(2) The Ionic and the Doric contract εο into εὖ. 
OTEPUVEOVIML στεφανεῦνται. 


E. g. 


Nore 2. The contraction is often left to pronunciation. 
E. g. Διομήδ-εα (~ ~ ——), Αἰγυπτ-ίων (---). This kind of 
contraction is called synzzésis or synecphonésis. | 


Nore 3. Accent. (1) If one of the syllables to be con- 
tracted has the accent, the accent generally remains on the 
contracted syllable, And if this syllable be a penult or ante- 
penult, the accent is determined according to §§ 20: 21; if 
it be a final syllable, it takes the circumflex, except when the 
word uncontracted has the acute accent on the last syllable. 
E. g. φιλεόμεϑα φιλούμεϑα, πλέετε πλεῖτε᾽ τιμάω τιμῶ " βεβαώς 
βεβως. ' 

(2) If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the 
accent, the accent of the word generally retains its place. 
E. g. πόλεες πόλεις. 


CRASIS. 


§ 24. Two contiguous words are, in many instances, con- 
tracted into one, when the first ends and the next begins with 


δῷ 25, 26.] _ ELISION. 19 


a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. The 
coronis (7 ) is generally placed over the contracted syllable. E. g. 
τοὐναντίον for τὸ ἐναντίον 
τἀληϑές ““ τὸ ἀληϑές. 
Nore 1. The « is subscribed only when it stands at the 
end of the last of the syllables to be contracted. E. g. ἐγῴῷμαι 
for ἐγὼ οἶμαι, but καγώ for καὶ ἐγώ. 


Note 2. The ecrasis is sometimes left to pronunciation. 
E. g. (Il, 2, 651) Ἐνδαλίῳ ἀνδρειφόντῃ, to be read ‘Evialiavdge- 
φόντῃ. 


ELISION. 


§ 23. When the first of two contiguous words ends with a 
short vowel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former 
often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe (* ) is put over the 
vacant place. This is called elision. E. g. : 

δι᾿ ἐμοῦ for διὰ ἐμοῦ 
ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ “© ἐπὶ αὐτῷ 


ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν (8 14. 2) for ἐπὶ ἡμῖν. 


Remark. The prepositions περί and πρό never lose their 
final vowel. E. g. περὲ αὐτόν, πρὸ ᾿4ϑηνῶν. 


Nore 1. The diphthong o is sometimes elided by the poets, 
but only in the passive terminations μαι, σαι, ταῖι; and σϑαι. 
E. g. βούλομ᾽ ἐγώ, for βούλομαι ἐγώ" καλεῖσϑ'᾽ ἀπαχγξαίμην, for 
καλεῖσϑαι ἀπαγξαίμην. 


Norte 2. The epic poets, in some instances, reject the final 
vowel even when the following, word begins with a consonant. 
E. g. ἂν νέκυας, for ἀνὰ γέκυας " παρ Ζηνὶ, for παρὰ Ζηνί. 


Nore 3. Accent. (1) In prepositions and conjunctions, if 
the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with 
the vowel. E. g. ἀμφ᾽ αὐτῷ, any εἰπέ. 


(2) In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the 
preceding syllable. E. g. φήμ ἐγώ, for φημὶ ἐγώ. 
SYNCOPE, METATHESIS, AND APHARESIS. 


§ 2G. 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the 
middle of a word. E. g. πατρός, for πατέρος. 


2. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two con- 
tiguous letters in the same word. E. g. xgadia, for καρδία. 


20 | LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [$$ 27, 28. 


3. Apheresis is the taking of a letter from the beginning 
of aword. E. g. ποῦ ᾽στιν, for ποῦ ἐστιν. 


Nore. The combinations yi, yo, ve, arising from a syncope 
or from a metathesis, are changed into μβλ, ufo, de, respec- 
tively. E. g. γαμβρός for γαμερός, ἀνδρὸς for arégos. 


PUNCTUATION. 


§ 27. The Greek has the following punctuation marks: 
Comma, . ia ae : ; GE 
Colon, , ; , oe 
Period, har. rs! 
Interrogation, : ; pelt Χω ay, 
Apostrophe (ὃ 25), . ‘ : Dy iad 
Coronis (§ 24), . ‘ a po 
Marks of quantity (§ 2), ~ [--Ἴ and [.] 
Marks of parenthesis, [(} 
Mark of dieresis, ee 
Mark of admiration, ba 


Nore 1. The mark of digresis is placed over 4 or v to 
prevent its forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. 
E. g. γήραϊ, airy, are trissyllables, but γήραι, αὐτή, are dissyl- 
lables. 


Nore 2. The mark of admiration is not much used. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


§ 28. 1. It is supposed by many-that the ancient pronun- 
τ ciation, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians 
and of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost. 
The best expedient, according to some, 15, to observe how the 
Romans expressed Greek, and the:Greeks Roman names. 
This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pronun- 
ciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as that of 
the Greek. : 

According to others, the best rule is, to observe how the 
ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made by particular ani- 
mals. This rule is, to say the least, very ridiculous, because 
dogs and sheep are hardly teachers of articulate sounds, and 
because there are as many ways of expressing the sound made 


ᾧ 28.] _ PRONUNCIATION, Q1 


by any animal, as there are nations upon the face of the earth. 

The frog, for example, in ancient Greek sings βρεκεκεκὲξ κοὰξ, 

κοὰξ, in modern Greek, μπάκα κάκα, in English, croak croak. 
2. Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the 

only source from which any definite notions concerning the 
ancient pronunciation can be derived.. First, because this 
language is immediately derived from the ancient; a circum- 
stance of no small importance. Secondly, because its pro- 
nunciation is remarkably uniform; and uniformity in matters 
of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. Further, 
the modern Greek method is founded on tradition, while all 
other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of the 
curious we proceed to describe it. 

α and @ are pronounced like α in father, After the sound 7 
(c, ἡ, δι, OL, υ, ve) it is pronounced like a@ in peculiarity. 

ow like ς. 

av, εὐ, ηυ, wu, before a vowel, ἃ liquid, or a middle mute 
(8, y, 5) are pronounced like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively. 
In all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. 

6 like v. 

y before the sounds £ and J is pronounced nearly like y in yes, 
York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the German g 
in Tag. 

yy and yx like ng in strongest. 

γξ like nz. ees 

yx like ng-h, nearly. 

6 like ¢h in that. 

e like e in fellow, nearly. 

El like be 

su, 866 αὖ. 

ξ like z. 

Ή and 7) like 4. 

nu, SCE av. 

like th in than. 

u like ὃ in machine. 

x like k. 

λ πκ 1, Before the sound J, like 11 in William. 

u like m. 

un like mb, as ἔμπροσϑεν pronounced émbrosthen. 

uy (uno) like mbs. 

ν like n. Before the sound J, like πὶ in oNion. 

The words τὸν, τὴν, ἐν, σὺν, before a word beginning with 
x or ἕ, are pronounced like roy, ry, ἐγ, avy before x or ξ. 
(See yx, γξ) Εἰ. g. τὸν καιρόν, ἐν ξυλόχῳ, pronounced τὸ- 


22 7 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ὃ 28. 


γκαιρόν, ἐγξυλόχῳ. Before m OF wy they are pronounced tou, 
τὴμ, ἐμ, ou. E. 8. τὸν πονηρόν, σὺν ψυχῇ, 2 aati 
τὸμπονηρόν, σὐμψυχῇ. 
vt like nd, as ἔντιμος pronounced éndimos. 
E like 2 or &s. | 
o like o in porter. 
ot like «. 
ov like οὐ in moon, 
m, @, like p, r. 
site 8 in soft. Before B, γ, δ, μι, 9; it is sounded like ¢. 
E. δ. κόσμος, σβέσαι, Σμύρνη, pronounced κόζμος, ξβέσαι, 
Ζμύρνη. So also at the end of a word, TOUS βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς; 
pronounced τοὐξβασιλεῖς τηζγῆς. - 
τ like ¢ in ¢ell. 
υ like «. 
ui like ¢. 
@ like ph or f. : 
z like German ch or Spanish ye 
y like ps. 
@ and ῳ like ὁ. 
au, See αὖ. 
The rough breathing is eet: in modern Greek. 
So far as quantity is concerned, all the short vowels are 
equivalent to the long ones. 
The written accent guides the stress of the voice. 
The accent of the enelitic, however, is disregarded in pro- 
~“nunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent on 
the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent. 
E. g. δεῖξον μοι, pronounced δείξονμοι, but λέλεκταί wor has the 
primary accent on the first syllable 42, and the secondary on ~ 
κται. 


~~ 


Sore 
INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


PARTS OF SPEECH. 


§ 29. 1. The declinable parts of speech are 
the noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and 
the participle. 


2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the 
adverb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the 
interjection. 


3. The declinable parts of speech have three 
_ NumBERs ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. 


The dual may be used when two things are 
spoken of ; but not necessarily. 


NOUN. 


§ 30. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into 
substantive and adjective. Substantives are divided 
into proper and common. 


2. The noun has three GENDERS; the masculine, — 
the feminine, and the neuter. The masculine is, in 
grammar, distinguished by the article 6, the femin- 
ine, by ἡ > and the neuter, by τό. E. g. ὁ ἀνήρ, the 
man, ἡ γυνή, the woman, to σῦκον, the fig. 

Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to _ 
be of the common gehder. Such nouns are, in grammar, 


distinguished by the articles 6,7. E. g. ὁ, ἢ ἄνθρωπος; a hu- 
man being. : : 


24 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 31. 


3. The noun has three pEcLENsIoNs; the first 
declension, the second eye and the third 
declension. 

4, The cases are five; the ποίρ ἐ ὐῆγό, the geni- 
tive, the dative, the Seciisati¥ve, and the vocative. 

Nore 1. «All neuters have three of the cases alike, viz. the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these 


cases end in α΄ except some neuters of the second declen- 
sion, which end in ὦ (ᾧ 33). 


Nore ὦ. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual, 
are alike. The genitive and dative dual are also alike. 


In the plural, the vocative is always like the nominative. 


FIRST DECLEN SION ‘ 


§ 3. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
first declension. 


S. Fem. Mas. D. F. & M. | P. F. δ' M. 
N.-y a ᾶ ngs ἃς ΪΝ ᾶ Ν. αι 
G. no ἧς Υ ᾶς ἃς ov ov |G. αιν G. wy 
D. q 4 Or @ ᾳ ῃ oO D. ΟὟ» Ὁ. als 
A. ny ay ay nv av | A. ᾶ Α. ἃς 
V. 9 0 ἃ nore ἃ V ᾶ ), We αι 


2. Nouns in 7 Οἵ" ἅ ΟΥ̓ ἃ are feminine. E. g. ἡ 
τιμή, honor, ἡ woved, muse, ἡ copia, wisdom. 

Nouns in ys or ἄς are masculine. E. g. ὃ τελώνης, 
publican, ὃ ταμίας, steward. 


S. ἡ (honor) D. (two honors) P. (honors) 
N.  aipy N. τιμά N. tripod 
G. τιμῆς G. τιμαῖν α. τιμῶν 
τιμῇ Ὦ. τιμαῖν Ὁ. τιμαῖς 
Α. τιμήν Α. τιμά. Α. τιμάς 
τιμή V. tie V. τιμαΐὲ 
S. ἡ (muse) D. (two muses) P. (muses) 
N. μοῦσα Ν,. μούσα Ν. μοῦσαν 
σ. μούσης α. μούσαιν α. μουσῶν 
μούσῃ Ὦ. μούσαιν. Ὁ. μούσαις 
Α. μοῦσαν A. μούσα Α. μούσας 
V. μοῦσα “ V. μούσα V. μοῦσαι 


5 ΠΝ 


§ 31.] : FIRST DECLENSION. 25 


S. ὁ (publican) D. (two publicans) PP. (publicans) 


N. τελώνης N. τελώνα Ν. τελῶναι 
(. τελώνου α. τελώναιν G. τελωνῶν 
Ὁ. τελώνῃ Ὦ. τελώναιν Ὦ. τελώναις 
Α. τελώνην A. τελωώνα Α. τελώνας 
Υ. τελώγη Υ. τελώνα ὝὟ, τελῶναι 
S. 6 (steward ) D. (two stewards) Ῥ. (stewards) 
N. ταμίας N. ταμία Ν. ταμίαι 
α. ταμίου α. ταμέαιν α. ταμιῶν 
Ὁ. ταμίᾳ D. ταμίαιν D. ταμίαις 
Α. ταμίαν Α. ταμία Α. ταμίας 
Υ. ταμία Υ. ταμία V. ταμίαι 


3. Nouns in ὦ pure (§ 16. 4), ρα, and some 
others, retain the « throughout the singular. E. g. 
σοφία, σοφίας, copia, σοφίαν " χαρά, γαρᾶς, χαρᾷ, 


S. ἡ (house) D. (two houses) P. (houses) 
Ν. οἰκία Ν. οἰκία Ν, οἰκίαν 
G. οἰκίας α. οἰκίαιν α. οἰκιῶν 
D. οἰκίᾳ D. οἰκίαιν D. οἰκίαις 
Α. οἰκίαν Ἀ. οἰκία Α. οἰκίας 
d V. οἰκία V. οἰκία V. οἰκίαι 


4. The following classes of nouns in ἧς have ἃ in the voca- 
tive singular. 

(1) Nouns in της. E. g. πολίτης, citizen, voc. πολϊτἄ. 

Remark 1. In Homer, civagiens, unhappily brave, has γος. aivagirn. 

(2) Nouns derived from verbs by adding ng to the last con- 
sonant of the verb. (ᾧ 129. Ν. 9.) E. g. γεωμέτρης, geometer, 
VOC. γεωμέτρᾶ. 

(3) All national appellations. E. g. Σκύϑης, Scythian, voc. 
Σκυϑᾶ. 

(4) A few _Proper names. Εἰ. g. πυραίχμης, Pyrechmes, 
voc. Πυραϊχμᾶ. 

WA Nore 1. Quantity. (1) 4 of the nominative singular is 
always short when the genitive has yo. Εἰ, g. μοῦσα, μούσης. 

It is very often long when the genitive has ας. E. g. σοφίᾶ, 
σοφίας. 

| All proparoxytones and properispomena have of course the 
| a@short. E, g. δμι μα wind 


ΣΝ δου, δου ϑδλυδι, ιν ..2..; .. 2... 


20 -INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὁ 31. 


Further, oxytones and paroxytones, which have ας in the 
genitive, have « long in the nominative. E. g. χαρά, χαρὰς" 
πέτρα, πὲ 4 ed Except the numeral yia, and the proper names 
Kigéa an πύῤῥὰ. 

(2) Ac is long. E. g. ταμίᾶς, σοφίᾶς. 

(3) 4v of the accusative singular always follows the quantity 
of the nominative singular. E. g. μοῦσα, μοῦσἄν " copld, σοφίᾶν. 

(4) 4 of the vocative singular from nouns in ας is always 
long; from nouns in ἧς it is always short. E. g. ταμίας, ταμία " 
πολίτης, πολὶτὰα. 

(5) 4 of the nominative, accusative, and vocative, dual, is 
always long. Εἰ, g. μούσᾶ. 


Notre 2. Accenr. (1) The accent remains on the same 
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it: if 
not, it is removed to the next syllable. (§ 20. 1,2,3.) E. g. 


Biteoce, ϑάλασσαν, ϑάλασσαν" ϑαλάσσης, Suldaer: 
REMARK 2. Δεσπότης, master, has voc. δέσποτα, not δεσπότα. 


(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 
bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 

on the last syllable. Εἰ. g. τιμή, τιμῆς, τιμῇ, τιμαῖς. 

(3) My of the genitive plural of barytones also is circum- 
flexed. LE. g. μοῦσα, μουσῶν. 
- Except the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in 
og. (§ 49.1.) E. g. ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἀξίων " τυπτόμενος, τυπτομένη, 
TUNTOMEVWY. 

Except also the following NOUNS : χρήστης, χρήστων» " οὗ ἐτη- 
σίαι, ἐτησίων " ἀφύη, ἀφύων. 


Nore 3. Dratects. (1) The following table exhibits the 
dialectic peculiarities of the first declension. 


Sing. N. Old ἃ for NS, as ἱππότὰ.. 
G. Old ἄο, Ionic ew, Doric &, for ov, as ᾿“τρείδης, ᾿4τρεί-- 
dio, ‘Argeidew, ‘Arotida. Before a vowel ew drops s, 
as ‘Eousiac, “Eousio for “Eousisw. 
The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, es- 
pecially in proper names. 
Plur. G. Old ἄων, Ionic ewy, Doric ἄν, for ὧν, as μοῦσα, μου- 


σάων, μουσέων, μουσᾶν. 
D. Old αισι, Tonic not ΟΥ̓ ἧς, for αἷς, as Lait povoatos, 


μούσῃσι, “μούσῃς. 
A. Doric ἄς for ἄς, as τέχνη, τέχνᾶς. 


͵ 


δῷ 32, 33.] SECOND DECLENSION. | 27 


Sing and Plur. G. Ὁ. Epic - ait or ng for ἧς, ἢ, ὧν, αἷς, as 
τιμή, τιμῆφι- 


(2) For ἡ the Dorians use ἅ, as τιμά, ἃς, ᾧ, ἄν, ά. 
On the other hand the Ionians-use ἡ for ἅ, but ont in the 


singular, as σοφίη, ys, ἢ» nv, ἡ. (§ 2. N. 9.) 


§ 32. Nouns in aa, at, exc, and on, are contracted. (§ 23.) 


E. g. 


μνάα μνᾶ, mina, G. μνάας μνᾶς, Ῥ. μνάᾳ μγᾷ, A. μνάαν μνᾶν, 
Υ. ᾿μνάα μνᾶ, Plural N. μνάαι μναῖ, G. μνάων prov, D 
μνάαις μναῖς, A. μνάας μνᾶς, V. porate [UV Oibe 

σῦκέα συκῆ, jig-tree, G. συκέας συκῆς, Ὁ. συκέᾳ συκῇ, Α. συκέαν 
συκῆν, Υ. συκέα συκῆ, Plural N. συχκέαν συκαῖ, G. συκεῶν, 
συκῶν, Ὁ. συκέαις συκαῖς, A. συκέας συκᾶς, V. συκέαι συκαῖ» 

ἀργυρέα ἀργυρᾶ, of silver, G. ἀργυρέας ἀργυρᾶς, ὄχτο. 

Ἕρμέας ἙἭ μῆς, Hermes, G.“Eguéou Ἑρμοῦ, Ὁ. ἝἙρμέᾳ Ερμῇ, δυο. 

ἁπλόη ἁπλῆ, simple, G. ἁπλόης ἁπλῆς, &e. 


Nors 1. The vowels e« are contracted into η. But when ~ 


they are preceded by a vowel or by g, they are contracted into 


a. 


In the accusative plural they are always contracted into & |, 


Nore 2. The contracted forms of βορέας generally double. 


the 9. Thus, βορέας βοῤῥας. 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 


second declension. 


SP URA ὦ 


M. & F. Neut. | D.Allgenders.| P. M. & F. Neut. 
o¢ ὡς ον av | N, ω N. o @» το 
ov w ov w | G. ow ov G. ων ων» 
ῳ ῳ D. ow wv D., o¢ ws ol as 
ov wy ov wy | A ω A. οὐς ὡς ἃ ὦ 
ε ὡς ov wy | Vz ω γὼ: ot. gt τα 


2. Nouns in os or ws are masculine or feminine. 


E. g. ὃ λόγος, word, ἡ νῆσος, island, 6 νεώς, temple. 


Nouns in ον or wy are neuter. Εἰ, g. τὸ ovxoy, 


fig, τὸ ανώγεων, hall. 


28 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ᾧ 33. 
S. ὁ (word ) D. (two words) P, (words) 
N. λόγος N. λόγω Ν. λόγοι 
α. λόγου α. λόγοιν α. λόγων 
Ὦ. λόγῳ Ὦ. λόγοιν Ὁ. λόγοις 
Α. λόγον Α. λόγω Α. λόγους 
V. λόγε V. λόγω Υ. λόγοι 
δ. τὸ (fig) D. (two figs) P. (igs) 
N. σῦκον N. σύκω Ν. σῦκα 
α. σύκου α. σύκοιν α. σύκων 
Ὁ. σύκῳ D. σύχοιν D. σύκοις 
Α. σῦκον Α. σύκω Α. σῦκα 
Υ. σῦκον ΝΥ. σύκω V. σῦκα 
S. ὃ (temple) D. (two temples) P. (temples) 
N. νεώς N. νεώ N. γεῴ 
G. vee G, νεῷν - G. vewy 
D. νεῷ . D. γεῷν Ὁ. γεῷς 

: A. vey A. γεώ A. vee 
Υ. γεώς V. γεώ V. νεῴ 
S. τ opel) D. {ἐπῶν halls) Bi (halls): 
N. ἀνώ ἦγεων Ν. ἀνώγεω Ν. ἂν ὠγεω 
α. ἂν ὥγεω α. ἀνώγεῳν G. ἀνώγεων 
D. ἂν ὠ yep D. ἀνώ IY EY - D. ἀνώγεῳς 
Α. ave) iy E00 A. ave) sy 809 A. ἀνώ γεῶ 
Υ. ἀνώγεων Υ. ἀνώγεω Υ. ἀνώγεω 


Note 1. The following neuters have o instead of ον in the 
nominative, accusative, and vocative, singular : ἄλλο, αὐτό, 
ἐκεῖνο, 0, τό, τοῦτο, from ἄλλος, αὐτός, ἐκεῖνος, ὃς, ὃ, οὗτος, re- 
spectively. 


Remark 1. Further, the termination wy of the accusative 
singular often drops the » Εἰ. g. “49ac, acc. "49w for “49a. 


Nore 2. Quantity. 4 of the neuter plural is always short. 


Nore 3. Accent. (1) The accent remains on the same 
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : 
if not, it is removed to the next syllable. (Ὁ 20. 1,2,3.) Εἰ g. 


ἄνθρωπος, aviounoy, &vFowmor* ἀνθρώπῳ, Ὡνδυώπαν. 
(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 


bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 
on the last syllable. E. g. D206; ϑεοῦ, ϑεοῖν, 9 εοῖς. 


8 94:1 SECOND DECLENSION. 29 


Except the genitive singular of nouns in ὡς. ΕἾ, g. γεώς, 
gen. VEO. | 
Remarx 2. For the accent of proparoxytones in ws, wy, see above (δ 20. 
N. 2). 
Nore 4. Diatectrs. The following table exhibits the dia- 
lectic peculiarities of the second declension. 
Sing.G. Old ovo, Doric w, for ov, as λόγος, λόγοιο, λόγω. 
Nouns in ὡς have wo instead of ovo, as Πετεώς, 
Πετεῶο. 
Dual.G. Ὁ. Epic ou» for ow, as ἵππος, ἵπποιιν, 
Plur. D. Old. οἱσι for οἷς, as ϑριγκός, ϑριγκοῖσι. 
A. Doric ὡς or o¢ for ove, as λύκος, λύκως, λύκος. 
Sing. & Plur. G. Ὁ. Epic ogi or ogi for ov, ῳ, ὧν, οἷς, a8 
τς ϑεός, ϑεόφιν. 


ᾧ 88:4. Nouns in εος, οος, eov, οον, are contracted. (ᾧ 23.) 


E. g. 
S. ὁ (mind) D. (two minds) P. (minds) 
N. γόος vous N. vow γώ N, νόον vot 
G. νόου νοῦ G. voow νοῖν G. vowy γῶν 
D. vow νῷ D. yoow γοῖν D. γόοις νοὶς 
2" er , " F » 
Α. γόον γοῦν A. vow γώ A. voovg γοῦς 
V. woe νοῦ V. vow γώ V. voor. vot 
S. τὸ (bone) D. (two bones) P. (bones) 
N. ὀστέον ὀστοῦν N. ὀστέω  ootw N. ὀστέα outa 
’ ~ ' 3 - > ’ 3 
G. ὀστέου ὀστοῦ G. ὀστέοιν ὀστοῖν G. ὀστέων ὀστῶν 
’ ~ ’ ~ Bit Je 2 ~ 
D. ὀστέω ὀστῷ D. ὀστέοιν ὀστον Ὁ. ὀστέοις ὀστοῖς 
2 an rae > = > ’ > 7 > π χὰ 
A. ὀστέον ὀυτοῦν <A. οστέω οστώ A. οστέα oote 
> " 3 π᾿ 2 ’ 3 > 
V. ὀστέον οστοῦν V. outém οστώ V. ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 


Note 1. The vowels ea in the neuter plural are always con- 
tracted into &. 


Norte 2. (1) The contracted nominative, accusative, and 
vocative, dual, take the acute AccENT, contrary to the rule 
(§ 23. N. 3). : 

(2) The contracted genitive and dative of polysyllabic com- 
pounds in οος, οον, are accented contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
E. g. avtinvoog ἀντίπνους, G. ἀντιπνόου ἀντίπνου. 

(3) Some of the contracted forms of adjectives in εὸς take 
the circumflex on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
E. g. χρύσεος sores χρύσεα χρυσᾶ. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


[Ὁ 86. 


ᾧ 3S. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
the third declension. 


S. All genders 

Ν. ς 

G. ος 

D. t 

A. ἄ,ν 

V. ς 

2. 

by observation. 

S. ὁ (crow) 
N. κόραξ 
α. κόρακος 
D. κόρακι 
A. κόρακα 
Υ. κόραξ 
S. ἡ (hope) 
Ν. ἐλπίς 
G. ἐλπίδος 
D. ἐλπίδι 
Α. ἐλπίδα 
V. ἐλπί 
S. ὁ (giant) 
N.' γίγᾶς 
G. γίγαντος 
D. γίγαντι 
A. γίγαντα 
Υ. γίγαν 
5. ὁ (weevil) 
Ν. κχίς 
G. κιός 
D. xi 
A. xiv 
V. xis 


D. All ωνδον. P.M. δ᾽ Ε. Neut. 


8 Ν. 
οιν α. 
ow D. 
& A. 
8 V. 


10. (two crows) 


“ΡΘΩΖ 


SPOQAS SPEOAZy Ξὡ ϑῶΖΌ 


κόρακε 
κοράκοιν 
κοράκοιν 
΄ 
κόρακξε 
κύρακξε 


(two hopes) 


élnids 
ἐλτείδοιν 
ἐλπίδοιν 
élnids 


ἐλπίδε 


(two giants) 


γίγαντε 
γιγάντοιν 
γιγάντοιν 
yiyavts 
ylyurre 


(two weevils) 
“LE 

κιοῖν 

κιοὶν 

“LE 

x68 


ες ἃ 

ων ων 
σι(ν») σι(») 
ἃς a 

ες ἃ 


SPEQAN SPORZN SPEEA ΞΡΌΘΩΖΡ 


In the third declension the gender must be determined 


<(ormmg) 


κόρακες 
κοράκων 
κόραξι(») 
κύρακας 
κόρακες 


- (hopes) 
ἐλπίδες 
ἐλπίδων 
ἐλπίσι(ν) 
ἐλπίδας 
ἐλπίδες 


. (giants) 
γίγαντες 
γιγάντων 
γί ἰγᾶσι(ν») 
γίγαντας 
γίγαντες 


(weevils) 
“LEC 
κιὼν 
noi(y) 
κίας 


les 


§ 35.] THIRD DECLENSION. 31 


S. ὃ (age) D. (two ages) P. (ages) 

N. αἰών N. αἰῶνε ΟΝΝ, αἰῶνες 

α. αἰῶνος G. αἰωώνοιν G. αἰώνων 
Ὦ. αἰῶνι D. αἰώνοιν D. αἰῶσι(») 
A, αἰῶνα Α. αἰῶνε Α. αἰῶνας 
VV. αἰών V. αἰῶνε Ὑ. αἰῶνες 

8. ὁ (god) D. (two gods) P. (gods) 

N. δαίμων N. δαΐίμονε N. δαίμονες 
G. δαίμονος G. δαιμόνοιν G. δαιμόνων 
D. δαίμονι D. δαιμόνοιν D. δαίμοσι(») 
A. δαίμονα A. δαίμονξ A. δαίμονας 
V. δαῖμον V. duiuors V. δαίμονες 
S. ὁ (lion) D. (two lions) — P. (lions) 

N. λέων Ν. λέοντε Ν. λέοντες 

G. λέοντος G. λεόντοιν α. λεόντων 
D. λέοντι Ὦ. λεόντοιν D. λέουσι(ν) 
Α. λέοντα Α. λέοντε Α. λέοντας 
Ὗ, δέον Ὕ. λέοντε ὝὟ. λέοντες 

S. τὸ (thing) D. (two things) P. (things) - 
N. πρᾶγμα N. πράγματε N. πράγματα 
G. πράγματος G. πραγμαῖοιν G. πραγμάτων 
D. πράγματι Ὁ. + πραγμάτοιν D. πράγμασι(») 
Α. πρᾶγμα A. πράγματε Α. πρά; y MOTO 
V. πρᾶγμα V. πράγματε Υ. πράγματα 


Note 1. Quantity. (1) The terminations 1, σι, a, ας, are 
short. Εἰ. g. xdouxt, κόραξί, κόρακᾶ, κόραλᾶς. 


ie papain in eug (§ 44) may have @, ds, in the accusative. 
©. βασιλεύς, €h, ἑᾶς. 


- 


Nore 2. Accent. (1) In diss yllables and polysyllables the 
accent generally remains on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
native, if the last syllable permits it: if not, it is removed to 
the next syllable. (ἢ 20. 1,2,3.) E. g. χόραξ, κόρακος, κοράκων. 


(2) Monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive and 
dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable. " In this case 
the terminations οἱν, wy, are circumflexed. E. σ᾽ κίς, κιός, κιῶν. 


Except monosyllabic participles. E. g. δούς, δόντος, δόντι. 


Except also the dual and plural of πᾶς πάντοιν, πάντων, 
πᾶσι, (δ 53.) 


92 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


[Ὁ 86. 


Except also the genitive dual and plural of the following 
nouns : das torch, ὃμώς, ϑώς, KPAX head, οὐς, παῖς, ons, Tous, 


φῷς blister, φῶς light. 


Remark. For the accent of rari, 
ἀνήρ, κύων, and APHN, see below (ὃ 40, 


Nore 3. DIauects. 


μήτηρ, Suyarne, Δημήτηρ, γαστήξ, 
N. 3). 


The following table exhibits the dia- 


lectic peculiarities of the third declension. 


Dual. G. D. Epic our for ow, as Σειρήν, Σειρήνοιιν. 


Plur, G. Tonic ἐὼν for ay, as χήν, χηνέων. 
Ὁ. Old εσσι or εσι, as δέπας, δεπάεσσι. 


Sing. and Plur. G. 1). Epic ogi(y) or φι(») for og, ἐν Ων; σι» 


as ὄχος, ὑχεσφι᾿ 


VOUS, ναῦφι. 


§ 36. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
NOMINATIVE and GENITIVE, SINGULAR, of the third declension. 


~ 


α΄ gen. ατος, axtoc, neut. 

aig — αἰτος, aidoc, all genders, 

ay --- avoc, o’tocs, Mas. orneut. 

αρ — αἀρος, ατος, αρτος, ΒΌΛΗΕν 
ally neuter. 

ας — ang, atoc, ados, avos, av- 
tos, all genders. 

ave — doc, fem. 

219 — εἰρος, ἔρος, MAS. ΟΥ̓ fem. 

εἰς —— ἐγος, ἔντος, εἰδος, Mas. OF 
fem. ' 

sy — voc, εντος, neut. 

ευς — soc, Mas. 

ἢ π---ητος, neut. 


ην —~ νος, ἕνος, Mas. or fem. 

40 — ηρος, ἐρος, Mas. or fem. 

"S$ — ητος, ηϑος, ἐος, Mas. OF 
fem. 

ε — L0G, τος, neut. 

ty — νος, mas. or fem. 

ιἰς — 4106, tT0¢, ἰδὸς, LOG, ιγνος, 
mas. or fem.” 

dg — hoc. 


γς — νϑος. 
ξ — κος, γος, χος, κτος, Mas. 


or fem. 
ov — orog, ovtoc, neut. 
00 — ορος, neut. 
ος «= οτος, εος, neut. 
ovy — οδος, neut. 
ove — οντος, 00g, odoc, Mas. ΟΥ̓ 


v “--- voc, neut. 

vy — vvoc, vytoc, Mas. or neut. 

vo — υρος, mas. ΟΥ̓ neut. 

vg — voc, υδος,υϑος, υνος, UY- 
τος, mas. or fem. 


y — πος, Soc, pos,mas. or fem. 

w — οος, fem. 

ων — wos, ογος, οντος, Mas, OF 
fem. 


wo — ὡρος, ogos, generally mas. 
or fem. 

ὡς — woe, 00¢, τος, οτος, δος, 
generally mas. or fem. 


2. Most nouns of the third declension form their NOMINA- 


ᾧ 36.] THIRD DECLENSION. 33 


TIVE SINGULAR by dropping the termination og of the genitive, 
and annexing ¢. E. g. 


κόραξ gen. κόρακος, (ὃ 5. 2) 
Μέλον ‘* Πέλοπος, (ibid.) 
ἐλπίς >< οἱ ἐλπίδος, (δ 10. 2) 
yiyas ““ γίγαντος, (ὃ 12. 5.) 


So φλέψ (ᾧ 8. 2), φλεβός" ῥάξ (8, 9. 2), ῥαγός" βήξ (ibid.), 
βηχός" χάρις (Ὁ 10. 2), pe ety: ὄρνις, (ibid.), ὄρνεϑος" ῥίς 
(§ 12. 4), ῥινός" κτεὶς (§ 12, δ), κτενός " τυφϑ εἰς (ibid. ), τυφ- 
ϑέντος " δούς (ibid.), δόντος. 


(1) Most masculines and Seminines lengthen ες into ys, and 
og into ὡς. Εἰ. g. τριήρης, τριήρεος * τετυφώς, TETUPOTOS. 


(2) Many masculines lengthen ες into eve. E. g. βασιλεύς, 
βασιλέος. 


(9) All neuter substantives change ες into og. E. g. τεῖχος, 
τείχεος. (§ 2. N. 3.) 


(4) Some neuters change ¢ into 9. E. g. στέαρ, στέατος. 


(5) The following nouns i δος og into evs* βοῦς, βοός" 
ποῦς, ποδός" yous, zoos. (ᾧ 2. Ν. 8 


(6) The following change as into avg" γραῦς, γραός " ναῦς, 
γαῦς. 

(7) “Aloinn§, εκος, changes the radical letter « into 7 in the 
nominative. : | 


Nore 1. Ἄναξ, ἄνακτος, and νύξ, γυκτός, are the only nouns 
in ἕξ that have χτος in the genitive. Originally they had gen. 
ἄνακος, vuzos. (Compare Ἄνακες, Dioscuri, and γύχιος, noctur- 
nal.) 

“Ads, ἁλός, is the only noun in Je. 


3. Many form their nominative singular by dropping the — 
termination ος of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot 
stand at the end of a Greek word (§ 5. N. 3). Masculines 
and feminines lengthen ε and ο, in the final syllable, into ἡ and 


ὦ respectively. E. g. 


αἰών gen. αἰῶνος 
δαίμων ““ δαίμονος 
λέων Ἢ λέοντος 
πρᾶγμα “πράγματος. 


So χήν, χηνός" λιμήν, λιμένος" dey, ϑέντος * σωτήρ, σωτῆρος " 
ἠχώ, ἠχόος  δόν, δόντος " φώρ, φωρός " ἥτορ, ἤτορος " ῥήτωρ, 
ῥήτορος " σίνηπι, σινήπιος " δεικγύν, δεικνύντος. 


94 ; INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 97. 


Remark 1. In reality the nominative is formed from the root, which is 
obtained by dropping o¢ of the genitive. E. g. χόραξ, κόρακος, root xogan. 


Nore 2. Iuida, τὸ, is the only noun in α that has αχτος in 
the genitive. 
᾿Δάμαρ, ἢ, the only noun in ag that has agrog in the genitive. 
- Méd, τὸ, the only substantive in ὁ that has czo¢g in the geni- 
tive. . 


Nore 8. Neuters in ag are contracted when this nants is 
preceded by e + δ. E00 10, G. ἕαρος ρος. 


The neuters δέλεαρ, στέαρ, φρέχρ, have gen. δελέατος δέλητος, 
στέατος στητός, φρέατος φρητύς, Contrary to the rule (ᾧ 29, N. 9). 


Note 4. Nouns in εἰς, ev, gen. εντος, are contracted when 
these endings are preceded by ἡ or ὁ. E. g. τιμήεις τιμῆς, 


¢ ~ , ~ ΄ ~ 
τιμήεντος τιμηντος " πλάχοεις πλακους, πλάκοεντος πλακοῦντος. 


Remark 2. Proper names in cwy are generally contracted. 
E. g. Ποσειδάων Ποσειδῶν. 


Nore 5. The quantity of the last syllable of the nomina- 
tive, and of the penult of the genitive, must be learned by 
observation. Nevertheless we remark here, that 


(1) Monosyllabic nominatives are long. KE. g. ΜΡ δίς, 
δρῦς. Except the pronouns τίς, τί, τὶς; τὶ, 


(2) “The vowels a, «, v, in the penult of the genitive are 
short, when this case ends in o¢ pure. Τὰ, g. γῆρας, ἄος " πόλις, 
ἴος " Ἰόον ὕος. 


--ὠ 


Except γραῦς, ἀός" ναῦς, cos. 


(3) The penult of the genitive of substantives is Jong, when 
this case terminates in “VOS, LVOS, VVOS. KE. g. Tita, ἄνος " Σαλα- 
μίς, ἵγος " Papas; ὕγος. 


ᾧ 4 7. 1. The accusative Ββινάυτακ of masculine and 
feminine nouns is formed by dropping og of the genitive, and 
annexing a. Εἰ g. 


κόραξ, κόρακος 800. κόρακα. 


2. Nouns in ες, ve, ave, ove, of which ‘the genitive 15 In o¢ 
pure (ὃ 16. 4), form their accusative by dropping ς΄, of the 
nominative and annexing», ΚΕ, g. 


‘ 


πόλις, πόλιος acc, πόλιν ᾿ 
ἰχϑύς, ἰχϑύς “ ἰχϑύν. 


§ 98.] THIRD DECLENSION. 90 


If the genitive is not in og pure, they can have ν in the 
accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is — 
not accented. E. g. ; 

ὄρνις, Ort Fos acc. ὄρνιϑα ΟΥ̓ oory 
κόρυς, κόρυϑος “4 χῤρυϑα ΟΥ̓ κόρυν. 


Nore 1. In the Epic language, the following nouns often 
have α in the accusative singular, contrary to the preceding 
rule: βοῦς, βόα " εὐρύς, εὐρέα" ἰχϑύς, ἰχϑύα᾽" ναῦς, νέἕα. 


Remark. The accusative singular of the obsolete sz> is 
always Aiea. | 


Nore 2. These three nouns, ᾿“πόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, κυκεών, 
7 | , ~ - 
have acc. ᾿ζ“πόλλωνα and ᾿Δπόλλω, Ποσειδῶνα and Ποσειδῶ, κυ- 
κεῶνα and κυκεῶ. Ἢ 


§ 38. 1. In many instances the vocartve sincuLaR of 
masculine and feminine nouns is like the nominative singular. 


2. Nouns in ἄς, no, wy, wg, and some others, form their 
vocative singular by dropping og of the genitive, with such 
consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word 


(§5.N.3). Evg. 


γίγας, γίγαντος VOC. yiyay 
δαίμων, δαίμονος ““ δαῖμον. 


_ 9, Nouns in ες, vs, evs, ave, and ove gen. οος, and the com- 
pounds of ποῦς, drop the ¢ of the nominative. The ending εὖ 
is always circumflexed. KE. g. 


ἐλπίς voc. ἐλπὶί 
ἰχϑύς δ᾿ ys 2 
βασιλεύς ““ βασιλεῦ. 


4, Nous in ἧς gen. εος, shorten ἧς into ἐς. Εἰ, g. Σωχράτης, 
voc.. Σώχρατες. : 


5, Feminines in ὦ, ὡς, gen. ooc, have οὗ in the vocative 
. 3 ’ ἄν ἢ ΒΝ 
singular. Τὶ g. yz, ἡχόος, voc. ἠχοῖ. 

Nore 1. A few proper names in ἄς gen. αντος, have ἃ in 
the vocative singular. E. g. “αοδάμας, avtos, vor. “αοδάμᾶ. 


Nore 2. The following nouns shorten the final syllable in 
the vocative singular: ‘4nc,lwy, Ἄπολλον" Ποσειδῶν, Πόσειδον" 
σωτήρ, σῶτερ. 


36 7 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$$ 39, 40. 


‘Nore 8. (1) The following nouns throw the accenr back 
on the penult in the vocative : ἀνήρ, ἄνερ Sang, δᾶερ᾽ πατήρ, 
πάτερ" σωτήρ, σῶτερ. 


(2) Polysyllabic vocatives, which end in a short syllable, 
often throw the accent sgt on the antepenult. E. g. Σωχρά- 
TNS; Σώκρατες. 


- Nore 4. Ἄναξ, king, when employed to invoke a god has 
voc. &va. Elsewhere its vocative is like the nominative. 


§ 39. 1. The pative ΡΕΌΒΑΙ, is formed by dropping og of 
the genitive singular, and annexing w. E. g. 
κόραξ, κόρακος dat. plur. κόραξι (ὃ 5. 2) 
ἐλπὶς, ἐλπίδος “ ἐλπίσι (δ 10. 2) 
γίγᾶς, γίγαντος Ἢ γίγᾶσι (δ 12. 5), 
2. Nouns in «vg, ave, and ove gen. οος, form their dative 
plural by dropping ¢ of the nominative singular, and annexing 
a KE. g. βασιλεύς, βασιλεῦσι" βοῦς, βουσί. 


Nore. The omission of » before σι (§ 12. 4) in this case does not lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. E. g. Bainwy, daipovos, δαίμοσι. 


SYNCOPATED NOUNS OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. ° 


§ 40. 1. The following nouns in yg generally drop the « in 
the genitive and dative singular. In the dative ΠΝ they. 
change the ε into a, and place it after the 9. (§§ 26. 2: 2. N.3.) 

Γαστήρ, 1; belly, G. γαστέρος γαστρός, 1). γαστέρι at 
D. Plur. γαστρᾶσι and γαστῆρσι. 

Δημήτηρ, %, Ceres, G. 4ημήτερος Δήμητρος, D. shapes 
Ajuntor. This noun is syncopated also in the accusative 
singular, Ζημήτερα Δήμητρα. 

Θυγάτηρ, 7, daughter, G. ϑυγατέρος ϑυγατρός, 1). ϑυγατέρι 
ϑυγατρί, D. Plur. ϑυγατραᾶσι. 

ἹΜήτηρ, 7, mother, G. μητέρος μητρός, D. μητέρι μητρί, D. Plur. 
μητράσι, 

Πατήρ, ὃ, father, G. πατέρος πατρός, D. πατέρι πατρὶ, D. Plur. 
TOT OIL. 


2. “Avie, 6, man, is syncopated in all the cases except the 
nominative and vocative singular, and dative plural : 


τς τή σα τ .0Ὑ ΠΣ ῪΡ βου τὴ. ΒΩ 


ἀφ 41. 42.] THIRD DECLENSION. | UF 


"AVN 0, ἀνέρος ἂν δρός, D. ἀνέρι ἀνδρί, A. -αγέρα ἀνδρα, Υ. ἄνερ, 
DuaiN. A. Vv. ἀνέρε ἀνδρε, G. Ὦ. ἀνέροιν ἀνδροῖν, Plur, N. 
ἀγέρες ἄνδρες, G. ἀνέρων ἀνδρὼν, D. ἀνδράσι, Α. ἀνέρας 
ἄνδρας, .V. ἀνέρες ἄνδρες. For the insertion of δ, see 
above (§ 26. N.). 


3. APHN, 6, lamb, and κύων, ὃ ἢ, dog, are deckeac’l as fol- 
lows . 
APUWN, G. “eves, Ὦ. ἀρνί, A. ἄρνα, Dual N. A. ἄρνε, G. D. 
ἀρνοῖν, Plur. N. ὄρνες, G. ἀρνῶν, Ὁ. ἀρνάσι, Α. ἄρνας. 
Κύων, G. χυνός, D. κυνί, A. κύνα, V. κύον, Dual N..A. V. 
χύνε, G. D. χυνοῖν, Plur. N. χύνες, G. κυνῶν, Ὦ. xvoi, A. 
κύνας, γ. κύγες. : 


Nort 1. The poets in some instances drop the « also in the 
accusative singular, and in the nominative and genitive plural. 
EK. g. ϑύγατρα, ϑύχατρες, πατρῶν. 


Nore 2. “Ἀστήρ, ἔρος, ὃ, star, imitates πατήρ Only in the 
dative plural, ἀστράσι. 


Nore 3. (1) The accent of the full forms of & ἀνήρ, APHN, 


γαστήρ, Anuntng, κύων, πατήρ, is regular (ᾧ 35. N. 2). 


For the accent of the vocative of a»jg and πατήρ, see above 
(38. N. 3). 


The accent of the full forms of ϑυγάτηρ and μήτηρ 1S it — 


regular in the cases which end in a short syllable, 


(2) In the syncopated genitive and dative the accent is 
placed on the last eee. Except Ζημήτηρ. 


CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


§ 48. 1. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the 
genitive ends in og pure (§ 16. 4), are contracted. 


2. The contracted accusative plural is always like the con- 
tracted nominative plural. 7 


§ 42, Nouns in ze, ὃς; ος, gen. coc, NOUNS IN we gen. aos, 
and nouns in @, ὡς, gen. οος, are contracted in those cases, 
in which the termination (ὃ 35. 1) begins with a vowel. E. g. 

4 1 ¥ 


~ 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


: 8. τὸ (wall) 


py ἀσαδονὴ Ὁ 

τριήρης. 

τριήφεος τρυήφους 
τριήρεϊ τριήρει 
τριήρεα τριήρη 
τρίηρες ms! 

. (two "hae ys) - 

AY. ToLNQEE τριήρη 
0. τριηρέοιν τριηροῖν 


εκαμίζενθλ 
τριήρεες τριήρεις 
τριηρέων τριηρῶν 
τριήρεσι(ν) 
τριήρεας τριήρεις 
τριήρξες τριήρεις 


MOA <PYAZR ees ΞΡ <PHRee 


[ὃ 42. 


N. τεῖχος 
G. τείχεος τείχους 
D. τείχεὶ τείχει 
A. τεῖχος 
Υ. τεῖχος 


1). (two walls) 


N.A.V. τεῖχεξ τείχη 
G.D. τειχέοιν τειχοῖν 


P. (walls) 


τείχεο τείχη . 
α. τειχέων τειχὼν 
Ὁ. τείχεσι(ν) 

τείχεα τείχη 
V. τείχεα. τεΐχη 


τὸ (prize) S. ἡ (echo) 
γέρας Ν. ἠχώ 
γέραος γέρως τ. ἦχόος ἠχοῦς 
γέρα γέρᾳ. ᾿ἡχόϊ ἡχοῖ 
γέρας Α. ἠχόα ἠχώ 
γέρας Ve ηχοῖ͵ 
. (two prizes) D. (two pohees) 
AY. γέραε γέρᾶ N.A.V. ἠχώ 
D. γεράοιν γερῷν. G. Ὁ. ἠχοῖν 
. (prizes) Fs (echoes) 
N. γέραα γέρα N. ἡχοΐ 
α. γεράων γερῶν α. ηχὼν 
Ὁ. γέρασι(ν D. ἠχοῖς 
A. γέραα γέρα Α ἡχούς 
V. γέραα γερᾶ ὟΝ. nyol 


Nore 1. Proper names in χλέης, contracted κλῆς, undergo a 
double contraction in the dative, singular, and sometimes in 
the accusative singular. EK. g. 

S. ὃ (Pericles) 
Περικλέης Περικλῆς 
Περικλέεος Περικλέους 
Περικλέεὶ Περικλέει Περικλεῖ ᾿ 


Περικλέεα Περικλέα Περικλῆ 
Περίκλεες «Περίκλεις 


“ΕΘ Ὁ 


§ 43.] THIRD DECLENSION. . ΣῈ 99 


Remark. Sometimes proper names in. κλέης "δὲ κλέος In 
the genitive, and κλέϊ in the dative. 


The noun Ἡρακλέης, Hercules, has voc. also “Houxies. 


Nore 2. The ending so, when preceded by a vowel, 
generally contracted into a. E.g. ὑχιής, a ὑγιᾶ " ται 
nhésa “hid. 


Nore 3. Κέρας and τέρας, ZEN. eros, often drop the t 
and are contracted like γέρας. Εἰ. g. κέρας, κέρατος κέραος κέρως. 


Κρέας, in the later Greek, has arog in the genitive. 


Nore 4, The dual and plural of nouns in ὦ, ὡς, follow the 
analogy of the second declension. 


The uncontracted forms of these nouns are not used. 


Norse 5. The Epic language often contracts geog mMto jos 
Or siog, get Into Hi OF st, and ἕεα into Ho ΟΥ̓ sia. Εἰ. σ΄. Ἡρακλέης, 
πκλέεος -πλῆος, -χλέες -κλὴηϊ, -κλέδα -κλῆα" δέος, σπέξος σπεῖος, 
σπέεὶ σπὴϊ Or σπεῖι. 


Nore 6, In the Ionic dialect, the accusative sora of 
nouns in ὦ, ὡς, ends in ov»... E. g. Anr,. Agtovy. 


Notre 7. The accent of the contracted accusative singu- 
lar of nouns in ὦ is contrary to the rule (§ 23. .N. 3). 


ᾧ 43. 1. Nouns IN 1¢, Us, ZEN. Log, vog, are contracted in 
the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative, plural. E. g. 


S. ὁ (seen) | ὃ (fish) 
N. Opes δῇ ἰχϑύς 
G. ὄφιος G. ἐχϑύος 
0. ὄφιν ogi D. ἐχϑύιν ἰχϑυὶ 
Α. ὄφιν A. ἐχϑύν 
V. ope VL ἰχϑύ 

ς D. (two seepents) _D. (two fishes). 
N.A.V. ὄφιε N.A.V. ἰχϑύε 
α. D. ὀφίοιν G.. ἰχϑύοιν 
Y og Gra) P. ( Jishes) 


N. ὄφιες ogis N. ἰχϑύες ἰχϑῦς 
α. ὀφίων α. ἰἰχϑύων 

D. ὄφισι(ν) D. ἰχϑύσι(ν) : 
A. ὄφιας ὑφῖς Α. ἰχϑύας ἰχϑὺς 
V. ὄφιες ὄφῖς Υ, ἐχϑύες ἰχϑῦς 


ΠΥ ees Ἂς γος ἌΝ bis ΡΥ ΟΕ AS “Ὁ ὙΠ Ψ, ΤΎΤΟΥ ee ere 


40 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ 43. 


2. The nouns 6, 7 βοῦς, ox, ἡ γραῦς, old woman, ἡ ναῦς, ship, 
and ὃ, ἡ dic, sheep, are declined as follows: 
βοῦς, G. βοός, 1). Bot, A. βοῦν, V. Bow, Dual N. A. V. βόε, 
G. 3. βοοῖν, Plur. N. βόες βοῦς, G. βοῶν, D. Bovai, A. βόας 
βοῦς, V. βόες βοῦς. ᾿ 
γραῦς, G. γρᾶός, D. γραΐ, A. γραῦν, V. γραῦ, Dual Ν. A. V. 
yous, G. D. γραοῖν, Plur. N. γρᾶες γραῦς, G. γραῶν, D. 
γραυσί, A. γρᾶας γραῦς, V. γρᾶες γραῦς. ; 
vows is regularly declined like γραῦς. 'The Attics decline 
it.as follows: G. vec, D. νηΐ, Av ναῦν, V. vav, Plur. N. 
γῆες, G. νεῶν, D. vavol, A. ναῦς, V. νῆες. 
The Ionians change αὶ into ἡ, as γηῦς. They have also 
G. νεός, A. νῆα and νέα, Dual D. veoiv, Plur. N. γέες, A. 
γέας. : ᾿ 
δὲς οἷς, G. δῖος οἷός, D. dit ott, A. δὲν οἷν, Plur. N. diese οἷὲς 
otc, Ὁ. δεσι, A. δίας οἷας Vie. 


3. Most nouns in ες, 4, vg, v, change z and v into ε, in all the 
cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, singu- 
lar. Substantives in ὡς and ὃς generally change og into ὡς. 


E. g. 


S. ἡ (state) ΕἸ S. τὸ (mustard) 
N. πόλις Ν. σίνηπι 
G. πόλεως G. σινήπεος 
D. πόλεϊς πόλει D. σινήπεϊ σινήπει 
A. πόλιν Α. σίνηπι 
V. πόλι Υ. σίνηπι 
. D. (two states) D. : 
N.A.V. πόλεε N.A.V. σινήπεε 
G. Ὁ. πολέοιν α. ἢ. σινηπέοιν 
P. (states) "ἢ 
Ν. πόλεες πόλεις N. σινήπεα σινήπη * 
α. πόλεων α. σινηπέων 
D. πόλεσι(ν) D. σινήπεσι(») 
Α. πόλεας πόλεις A. σινήπεα σινήπη 
V. πόλεες πόλεις V.- σινήπεα σιγήπη 


ᾧ 441 THIRD DECLENSION, 41 


S. ὁ (cubit) - S. τὸ (city). 

N. πῆχυς N. ἄστυ 

G. πήχεως G. ἄστεος 

D. πήχεϊ aye D. ἄστεϊ cote 
A. πῆχν. A. ἄστυ 

V. πῆχυ V. ἄστυ 

D. (two cubits) D. (two εἴπ) 
N.A.V. πήχεε Ν. A.V. ἄστεε 
G. ἢ. πηχέοιν α. D. ἀστέοιν 
P. (cubits) P. (cities) 

N. πήχεες πήχεις N. ἄστεα ἄστη 
α. πήχεων α. ἀστέων ' 
D. πήχεσι(ν) D. ἄστεσι(ν) 
A. πήχεας πήχεις᾽ A. ἄστεα ἄστη: 


Ὑ.᾿ πήχεες πήχεις . Ὑ. ἄστεα ἄστη 


Nore 1. In some instances the genitive.of nouns in ve and 
v is contracted. Τὰ, g. πῆχυς, πηχέων πηχῶν" ἥμισυ, ἡμίσεος 
ἡμίσους. Such contractions belong to the later Greek. ~ 


Nore 2. The genitive singular of meuters in s and v very seldom ends in ὡς» 


Nore 3. According to the old grammarians, the Attie genitive and dative, 
‘dual, of nouns in ὡς and ὡς end in wy. Εἰ. g. πόλις, πόλεων. Such forms, 
however, are not found in any Greek writer of authority. 


Nore 4. Πόλις, in the Epic language, one changes <intoy. E.g. gen 
“πόληος for πόλεος. 


“Nore 5. For the accent of the ernie of nouns in 4s, vs, see above 
(§ 20. N. 2). 


§ 44. Nouns in ες are contracted in the dative singular, 
and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative, plural. ‘They 
generally have ὡς in the ‘genitive singular. E. g. 


S. δ' (hing) e P. (kings) 

N. βασιλεύς N. βασιλέες βασιλεῖς 
α. διασιλέως α. βασιλέων 

D. βασιλέϊ βασιλεῖ Θ. βασιλεῦσι(ν) 

Α. βασιλέα Α. βασιλέας βασιλεῖς 
V. Bao τοις | V. βασιλέες βασιλεῖς 


1). (two kings) 
N.A.V. βασιλέε 


G. D. Baorréow 
4 * 


οὐ να δ εις et δου hae lle al se Oe  ούδο ἜΚ aS ΨΥ ΦΨ ek) ee 
eae los aa ¥ 


42 INFLECTION OF WORDS. _ [$$ 45, 46, 


Note 1. The genitive and accusative, singular, are some- 
times contracted. E. g. Ππειραιεύς, Πειραιέως Ἠειραιῶς συγ- 
γραφεύς, συγγραφέα συγγραφη. 


Nore 2. The vowels δὰ are contracted into α, when they 


_//{ are preceded by a vowel. E. g. χοεύς, χοέα χοᾶ. 


Note 3. The ending ἐες of the nominative plural is some- 


times contracted into ἧς. Εἰ. g. ἱππεύς, ἱππέες ἱππῆς. 


Nore 4. The Ionians very often change « into 7, except 
when it is in the diphthong ev. E. g. βασιλεύς, βασιλῆος. 


INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 
§ 44. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one 
form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, 


1. The names of the letters of the alphabet. E. g. τὸ, τοῦ, 
τῷ ἄλφα, alpha. 


2. The cardinal numbers, from 5 to 100 inclusive. E. g. 
Of, Ot, τὰ, τῶν, τοῖς, TOUS, τὰς πέντε, five. 


3. All foreign names not Grecized. _E δ. ὃ, τοῦ, TH, TOY 


: ρου Adam. 


ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 


§ 46. 1. All nouns which have, or are supposed to have, 
more than one nominative, are anoeheloun. Such are the fol- 


lowing. 

ἀηδών, ὄνος, 7, nightingale, from YONA, γόνατος, γόνα- 
regular. From AHA, G. Tl, Dual γόνατε, ,7ονάτοιν, 
ἀηδοῦς, V. andor , * Plur. γόνατα, γονάτων, γό- 

ἀΐδης, ov, 0, the infernal ‘ede ο VOL. 


gions, regular. _ From AIS, The poets have G. γουνός, 

G. ἄϊδος, D. vids, A. aida. Ὁ. yovvi, Plur. N. A. V. 
ἀλκή, ἧς, Hs strength, regular. γοῦνα, G. γούνων. 

From 4.45, D. ἀλκί. γυνή, ἢ, woman. ‘The rest is 
ἀνδράποδον, ov, τὸ, slave, regu- from 1ὙΝΑ͂ΙΞ (oxytone), 

lar. From ΑἸΝΔΡΑΠΟΥ͂Σ, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, 

D. Plur. ἀνδραπόδεσσι( Epic). γύναι, Dual γυναῖκε, γυναι- 
γόνυ, τὸ, knee, The rest is. κοῖν, Plur. yuvaizes, γυνᾶι- 


΄σ 


§ 461] 


κῶν, γυναιξί, γυναῖκας, γυναῖ»- 
κες. ν 

‘The genitive and dative 
of all the numbers take the 
accent on the last syllable, 
contrary to the rule (§ 35. 
N. 2). 


daic, toc, 4, fight, regular. 


From JAS, 1). dat. 
AIS, see Zeve. . 
δόρυ, τὸ, spear. 'The rest is 
from JAOPAZ, δόρατος, δό- 
oar, Dual δόρατε, δυράτοιν, 
Plur. δόρατα, δοράτων, δό- 

- ρασι. 

The poets have G. δορός, 
doveds, D. dogi, δουρί, Dual 
doves, Plur. N. δοῦρα, G. 
Sovewr, D. “δούρεσσι (Epic). 

δορυξόος, ov, ὃ, spear-polisher, 
regular. From ΦΟΡΥ͂ΞΟΣ, 
N. δορυξέ. 

εἰκών, ὄνος, 4, mage, regular. 
From EIK2, G. sixovs, A. 
εἰκώ, A. Plur. sixove. 

Ζεύς, δ, Jupiter, V. Zev. From 
ALS, G. Διός, Ὁ: Mi, A. Δία. 
A$ 37. N. 1, ) 

Ζήν, o, G. Ζηνός, D. Ζηνί, A. 
Ζῆνα, = preceding. 

ϑεράπων, οντος, ὃ, attendant, 
regular. From OEPA®, A. 
ϑέραπα, N. Plur. ϑέραπες. 

ἰχώρ, ὥρος, ichor, regular. Acc. 
Sing. also 7 ἰχῶ. 
καλως, ὦ OF woe, 6, cable. fiom 


KAAOS, Plur. N. κάλοι, A. 


“κάλους. 

κάρᾶ Ionic κάρη, τὸ, head, α. 
κάρητος, D. χκάρητι, κάρᾳ, Ν, 
Plur. κάρα. From KPA, 
G. κρατός, D. χρατί, A. τὸ or 
τὸν κρᾶτα, Plur. G. κράτων,͵ 
Ὦ. κρασί. From KPAAS, 
G. χράατος, D. κράατι, Plur. 


ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 


43 


N. χράατα, A. τοὺς χρᾶτας. 
From KAPHA, G. καρήα- 

. τὸς, D. καρήατι, Plur. καρή-- 
ατα. 

κλάδος, ov, δ, bough, regular. 
From KAAS, D. xiadi, Ὁ. 
Plur. κλάδεσι (Epic). 

κοινωνός, ov, ὁ, partaker, reg- 
ular. From KOINQN, 
Plur. N. χοινῶνες, A. xoi- 
γῶνας. 

KPAAS, KPA, see κάρα. 

κρίνον, ov, τὸ, . lily, regular. 
From KP£VOS, Plur. N. 
ngived, D. «πρίνεσι. 

χρόκη, 1S, ἢ, woof, regular. 
From KPOE, A. κρόκα. 

λᾶας contracted λᾶς, 6, stone, 
G. λύώαος λᾶός, D. λααὶϊ hat, 
A. λᾶαν hoy, Dual. λάαε Las, 
Plur. N. λάαες λᾶες, G. λαάων 
λάων, D. λάεσσι (Epic). From 
AAAZ (----, G. λάου. 

μάρτυς, ὃ, witness, A. μάρτυν, 
Ὠ. Plur. μάρτυσι. From 
MAPT?P, μάρτυρος, μάρτυ-- 
οι, &c. 

μαστιξ, γος, ἢ, Scourge, regular. 
From MATIZ, Ὁ. μάσιζ 
(contracted from moot), A. 
μάστιν. 

ὄνειρον, τὸ, dream, The rest is 
from” ONEIPAS, ὀνείρατος, 
ὀνείρατι, Dual 6 “ὀνείρατε, ὀνξι-- 
θάτοιν, Plur. ὀνείρατα, ὀνει-- 
-θάτων, ὀνείρασι. 

οὐς, TO, ear. _The rest is from 
the Doric ὦ ae, ὦτός, ὠτί, Dual 
ὦτε, τοῖν, Plur. ὦτα, ὦτων, 
wot. 


πρέσβυς, ὃ, οἷά man, A, πρέ- 


σβυν,Υ͂. πρέσβυ. The rest is 
from πρεσβύτης, ov. 

In Hesiod a Nom. Plur. 
πρέσβηες OCCUrS, 


44 INFLECTION 

πρέσβυς, ὃ, ambassador, G. 
πρέσβεως, Plur. N. aE Y. 
πρέσβεις, D. πρέσβεσι. ‘The 
rest is from “πρεσβευτής, οὔ. 

πρόσωπον, ov, τὸ, face, regular. 
From ITPOZ RITA, Plur. 
N. προσώπατα,, D. προσώπα- 
ot. : 

πρόχοος, ov, ἡ, ewer, regular. 
From ΠΡΟΧΟΥ͂Σ, D. Plur. 
πρόχουσι. (like βουσί from 
_Bovs). 

πῦρ, πυρός, πυρὶ, TO, fire. From 
ΠΥ͂ΡΟΝ, Plur. N. A. πυρά, 
G. πυρῶν, D. πυροῖς. 

σχῶρ, τὸ The rest is from 
ΣΚΑ͂Σ, σκατός, σκατί, &c. 

σταγών, ὄνος, ἢ, drop, regular. 


From STA, ei Plur. στά- 
γες. $ 
στίχος, OV, ὁ, Tow, epider. 


OF WORDS. [ᾧ 46. 
From ἢ STI, στιχός, στιχί, 
ὅσο. : 

ταώς, ὦ, 0, peacock, regular, 
From T4032, N. Plur. tool. 

ὕδωρ, to, water, ‘The rest is 
from ‘TIA, ὕδατος, ὕδατι, 
&c. . 

From woos; D. Sing. vos 
(Epic). 

υἱός, ov, ὃ, Son, regular. From 
‘TIES, G. υἱέος, S&c. like 
βασιλεύς. From “rey come 
the Epic G. υἷος, Ὁ. vin, A. 
υἷα, Dual. vie, Plur. Ν, υἷες, 
D. υἱέσι and υἱάσι, A. υἷας. 

ὑσμίνη, 1s. ἢ, battle, regular, 
From ἡ TSMIS, D. ὑσμῖνι. 

χελιδών, ὄνος, ἢ, swallow, regu- 
lar. From ΧΕΖΙΔ4., Ν. 

- χελιδοῖ. 

ὡς, 868 οὖς. 


2. Nouns, which have only one nominative, but more than 


one form for any of the other cases, are anomalous. 


are the following : 


ἅλως, ὦ OY wos, 4, threshing- 


floor. 


γέλως, ὦ OF wtos, ὃ, laughter. 

ϑέμις, Log OF “τὸς OF εδὸς ΟΥ̓ 
ἰστος, ῇ, Justice. | | 

ἱδρώς, ὦ OF ὦτος, 6, sweat. 

κλεῖς, εἰδός, ἢ, key. Also Acc. 
‘Sing. χλεῖν, A. Υ. Plur. 
κλεῖς. 

μήτρως, ὦ OY wos, ὃ, maternal 
uncle. 


Such 


μύκης, ov ΟΥ̓́ῆτος, δ, mushroom. 

ὄρνις, toc, ὃ, ἡ, bird, regular. 
In the Plur. also N. A. 69- 
γῖς ΟΥ̓ ὄρνεις, G. ὄρνεων. ᾿ 

πάτρως, ὦ ΟΥ̓́Ωος, 0, paternal 
uncle, 

σής, €0¢ OF ητός, ὃ, moth. 

χείρ, χειρὸς and χερός, ἡ, hand, 
_D. Plur. always χερσί. The 
forms G, χερός, D. χερί, Dual 
χειροῖν, are poetic. 


Nore 1. All proper names in ἧς gen. eog (ἢ 42), have mor 


ny in the accusative singular. 
Aguatopayng, £06 


EK. g. 


ace. ᾿Αριστοφάνη and yy. 


Norte 2. Some nouns in ες have wos OF τος in the genitive. 


Bs 


μῆνις, gen. μήνιδος Or μήνιος, resentment. 


§§ 47, 48.] 


ADJECTIVES. 


45 


Nore 3. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of 


nouns in ἧς gen. ov, often ends in ξα. 


Tuyen for Γύγην. 


E. δ: Γύγης, ov, acc. 


Note 4. A few proper names in ἧς, οὑς, and vg, are de- 
clined according to the following asics 


Ἰαννῆς, G. Ἰαννῆ, D. “Torry, A. Ἰαννὴν, V. Ἰαννῆ. 
Τλοῦς,. G. Τλοῦ, Dy Τλοῦ, A. Τλοῦν, V. Τλοῦ. 
Διονῦς, G. Διονῦ, D. Διονῦ, A. Διονῦν, V. Διονῦ. 


. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


§ 4'7. Defective nouns are those of which only some of the 


cases are in use, 


ἐτησίαι, wy, ot, Etesian winds: 
No singular. 

now, an A. Plur. used only 1 in 
the formula, ἦρα φέρειν, to 
show favor. 

"Tod wa, wy, τὰ, Isthmian games. 
No singular. 

hic, 0, lion, A. λῖν. 

AIS, ὃ, fine linen, D. λιτί, A. 
ita. 

μάλη, 16; ἡ, armpit, used only 
in the phrase ὑπὸ μάλης, 
‘under the arm, clandestinely. 

Wéuso, wv, τὰ, Nemean games, 
No singular. 

NI, ἡ, snow, only A. vica. 


᾿Ολύμπια, 


. » ‘ 
οφέλος, TO, 


Such are the following: 


wv, τὰ, Olympic 
games. No singular. 

ovag, τὸ, dream, used only in 
the N. and A. Sing. 

ΟΣ or OSZSON, τὸ, eye, Dual 
N. A. ὄσσε, Plur. G. ὄσσων, 
D. ὄσσοις, old δσσοισι. 

advantage, 
only in the N. Sing, 

πύϑια; ων, τὰ, Pythian games, 
No singular. 

τάν, used only in the formula 
a τάν, O thou. 

ὕπαρ; τὸ, waking, as opposed 
to ὄναρ, used only in the 


ΟΝ. and A. Sing. 


used 


ADJECTIVES. 


§ 48. 


feminine is always of the first declension ; 


1. In adjectives of three endings, the 


the mas- 


culine and the neuter are either of the second or 


of the third. 


2. Adjectives of two ἈΞΊΩΝ are either οἵ the 
second or of the third declension ;~ the feminine 
is the same with the masculine. 


46 INFLECTION OF WORDS. . [Ὁ 49. 


3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first 
or of the third declension. Such adjectives are 
either ἐλλδοῦμα, feminine, or common, - 


ADJ ECTIVES - IN ox 


-ᾧ 49. 1. Most adjectives 1 in. og ave three endings, og, ἡ; ov. 
E. g- copos, σοφή, σοφόν. 


When og is preceded by a vowel or by 9, the feminine 


we SS ees ao νι ee -— i — “ “" <2 &, - a OE ee ee ee ἀν. no ΤΉΝ 


has ἃ instead of η. KE. σ΄. ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον" μακρός, μακχρᾶ, 


μακρόν. 
S. ὃ (wise) i eee) τὸ ὃ (wise) 
Ν. σοφός σοφή σοφόν 
α. σοφοῦ ᾿ σοφῆς σοφοῦ 
D. σοφῷ. σοφὴ - σοφῷ 
A. σοφόν σοφήν σοφόν 
V. σοφὲ σοφή σοφόν 

_ D. 

N.A.V. σοφώ σοφά cope 
G. D. σοφοῖν σοφαῖν cogow 
Pp? τὶ 
Ν. σοφοὶ σοφαὶ | σοφά 
α. σοφῶν σοφῶν σοφῶν — 
D. coors σοφαῖς σοφοῖς 
Α. σοφούς σοφάς σοφά 
ὝΨ: σοφοΐ ‘copa σοφά 


So all PARTICIPLES in. ος. 


E. g. τυπτόμεγος, τυπτομένη, 
TUNTOMEVOY. : 


S. 0 (worthy) © ἡ (worthy) τὸ (worthy) 
N. ἄξιος ἀξία ἄξιον 
G. ἀξίου ἡ ἀξίας ἀξίου 
D. ἀξίῳ ; ἀξίᾳ. ἀξίῳ. 
Α. ἄξιον ἀξίαν ἄξιον 
Ἂς ἄξιε ἀξία τς ἄξιον 
; D. Ἢ 
N.A.V. ἀείω Ὁ το θυ 
; 3 " De 
G.'D. ἀξίοιν akiaw akiow 


ἘῸΝ 
Ν. ᾿ ἄξιοι 
α. ἀξίων 
Ὁ. ἀξίοις 
Α. ἀξίους 
V ἄξιοι 


Nore 1. Adjectives in οος have ἡ in the feminine, 


ADJECTIVES. 


when oog is preceded by o. 


c , es ? c , 
amthoos, ἁπλοη, ἀπλοον. 
3 , ? 7 3 ͵ 
άϑροος, αϑροα, ἀϑροον. 


SE LIBRA 


or THE 


UNIV@RSIT 


(4 ΡΟΣ 


ἄξια 


3 
ες αξδίων 


39 
ἀξίοις 
ἄξια 
"ἄξια 


Except 


2. Many adjectives in og have only two endings, og, ov. 


E. g. ἥσυχος, ἥσυχον. 


Particularly, compound adjectives in og have two endings. 


E. g. ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιζήμιον. 


But compound adjectives in xog have three endings. 


-S. δ, ἡ (quiet) 


N. ἥσυχος. 
α. © ἡσύχου. 
Ὁ. ἡσύχῳ 
Α. ἡσυχον 
V. ἥσυχε 
D. . 
N.A.V.q0vzo 
G. ἢ. ἡσύχοιν 
Ῥ. 
Ν, ἡσύχοι 
G. ἡσύχων 
D. ἡσύχοις 
Α. ἡσύχους 
V. ἥσυχον 


with only two. 


τὸ (quiet) 


teks 
ἥσυχον 


ς , 
. ησυχοῦ 
ἡσύχῳ 


ἥσυχον 
ἥσυχον 


᾿ἡσύχω 


c 7, 
NOUZOLY 


ἥσυχα 
ἡσύχων 


_ Hovyots 


ἥσυχα 


ἥσυχα 


Nore 2. In Attic writers and in the poets, many adjec- 
tives in ος, which commonly have three endings, are found 
Eg. ὁ, ἢ ἐλεύϑερος, τὸ ἐλεύϑερον, frees 


ἐπι τ fm 6 ae ee .} 


Norse 3. The ending « of the feminine is leone Except 
the feminine of δῖος, divine, and a few others. 


‘Nore 4. For the accenr of the genitive plural of the cide of bary- 


tone adjectives and participles in os, see above (δ 31. N. 2). 


48 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$§ 50, 51. 


3: Adjectives in δος, ex, soy, and οος, on, oor, are contracted 
(§§ 82: 34). Eg. 


χρύσεος. χρυσοῦς, χρυσέα χρυσῆ, χρύσεον χρυσοῦν, G. χρυσέου 
: χρυσοῦ, χρυσέας χρυσῆς, 4s ape 
ἀργύρεος, ἀργυροῦς, ἄργυρέα ἀργυρᾶ, ἀργύρεον ἀργυροῦν, G. 
ἀργυρέου ἀργυροῦ, ἀργυρέας aoyueas, Of silver, 
᾿ ἅπλόος ἁπλοῦς, anon ἁπλῆ; ἁπλόον ἁπλοῦν, G. ἁπλόου ἁπλοῦ, 
ἅἁπλόης ἁπλῆς, simple. 


Norz 5. For the apis of. some of the contracted forms of adjectives in 
t0s, 00s, See above (ὃ 34. N. 2). 


᾿ ADJECTIVES IN ΩΣ. 


§ 30. Adjectives in ὡς have two endings, ὡς, wy. . They 
are declined like γεώς and ἀγώγεων (ὃ 33). E. g. εὔγεως, 
εὔγεων. 


S. δ, ἢ (fertile) τὸ (fertile) 


ΝΗ: εὔγεως εὔγεων 
α. εὔγεω εὔγεω 
νυ 
Ὁ. εὔγεῳ ᾿ δὔχεῳ 
A, εὔγεων εὔγεων 
᾿ 7. εὔγεως εὔγεων 
N.A.V. εὔγεω ς εὔγεω 
>” 
G. Ὁ. εὔγεῳν εὔγεων 
Ῥὼςξ 
“ς ? 
N. εὔγεῳ εὔγεω 
α. εὔγεων _ δὔγεων 
ν᾽ » w 
D. εὔγεῳς εὔγεῳς - 
a. εὔγεως εὔγεω 
γ.. εὔγεῳ. _ εὔγεω 


ADJECTIVES IN rs. 


§ 51. Adjectives in vc, gen. δος». _ have three endings, us, 
su, v. BE. g. γλυκύς, γλυκεῖα, γλυκύ. 


S. ὃ (sweet) | τς ἢ (swect) τὸ (sweet) 
N. λγσγλυκύς "γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 
τα ἘΣ γλυκέος - Ἶ γλυκείας ᾿ γλυκέος 
D. γλυκέ γλυκεῖ οογλυκείᾳ γλυκεῖ γλυκεῖ 
Α. γλυκύν “γλυκεῖαν γλυκύ 
Ν᾽ γλυκύ γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 


δῷ 52, δ9.1. OC mbagerieEs: 49 


D. 

N.A.V. γλυκέε γλυκεία γλυκέε 
α. α. γλυκέοιν γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν 
> | 

N. γλυκέες γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλυκέα 

α. γλυκέων γλυκειῶν γλυκέων 
D γλυκέσι(») γλυκείαις γλυκέσι(ν) 
Α, σλυκέας γλυκεῖς γλυκείας γλυκέα 
V. γλυκέες γλυκεὶς γλυκεῖαι γλυχέα " 


Note 1. The Ionics make fem. éa or é. E. g. Badve, 
βαϑέα Or Baden. 


Norte 2. The poets sometimes have mas. and fem. υς, neut. 
v. E. g. 0, ἡ ἡδύς, τὸ ἡδύ. 


ADJECTIVES IN wy AND 1Σ. 


§ 2. 1. Adjectives in ye, gen. δος, have two endings, 
ns, ες. E. g. ἀληϑής, adn dec. 


S. ὃ, ἡ (true) τὸ (true) 

N. adn dye ἀληϑές 

α. ἀληϑέος ἀληϑοῦς ἀληϑέος ἀληϑοῦς 
D. ἀληϑέέ ἀληϑεὶ ἀληϑέξ Οαἁἀληϑεῖ 
Α. ἀληϑέα ἀληϑὴ ἀληϑές 

Υ. ἄληϑες ἀληϑές 

1. 

Ν.Α.Υ. ἀληϑέε ἀληϑῆ ἀληϑέε ἀληϑὴ 
α. D. ἀληϑέοιν ἀληϑ οἷν ἀληϑέοιν ἅληϑοῖν 
so 

N. ἀληϑέες adn Peis ἀληϑέα ἀληϑὴ 
σα. ἀληϑέων ἀληϑῶν ἀληϑέων ἀληϑὼν 
D. ἀληϑέσι(ν) ἀληϑέσι(ν) 

As ἀληϑέας ἀληϑεῖς ἀληϑέα ἀληϑῆ 
V. ἀληϑέες ἀληϑεῖς ἀληϑέα ἀληϑὴ 


2. Adjectives in ic, gen. ἰὸς, have two endings, ic, 1. Εν g. 
ἴδρις, ἔδρι, G. ἴδριος, knowing. 


ADJECTIVES IN a> ΕἸΣ, HN, OTs, 2, ΩΝ, NS. 


§ BB. 1. Adjectives in ἄς, gen. α»τος, have three cadings, 
ἄς, doo, av. E.g. πᾶς, πᾶσαν πᾶν. 


50 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ § 53. 


S. ὃ (all) ἡ (all) τὸ (all) | 
N. πὰς πᾶσα πᾶν 
“6. παντός πάσης. παντός 
D. παντί πάσῃ παντί 
Α. πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν 
V. πᾶς : πᾶσα “πᾶν 
D. 
N.A.V.acyvte ᾿ πᾶσα; ᾿ πάντε 
G.D.. πάντοιν πάσαιν ᾿ πάντοιν 
P. 
N. πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
G. πάντων πασῶν ᾿ πάντων 
D. πᾶσι(ν) πάσαις πᾶσι(ν) 
Α. πάντας πᾶσας πᾶνται 
Υ: πάντες - πᾶσαι πάντα 


So all ΡΑΒΤΙΟΙΡΙΕΒ in ἄς, Εἰ g. τύψᾶς, τύψασα, τύψαν, G. 
τύψαντος. — 


Remark 1. These two adjectives in ἃς, μέλας and τάλας, 
have αἰνὰ in the feminine. Thus, 
μέλᾶς, μέλαινα, μέλαν, G. μέλανος, black. 
τάλας, τάλαινα, τάλαν, G. τάλανος, unfortunate 


2. Adjectives in εἰς, gen. evtoc, have three endings, εἰς, 
εσσα, ev. EK. g. χαρίεις, χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν. 


S. ὃ (graceful) ἡ (graceful) τὸ (graceful) 
N. ο χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν 

ΕΣ; χαρΐεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος 
D. χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι 
Α. χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν 

V. χαρΐεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν 
Ὁ. 

N.A.V χαρίεντε χαριέσσα χαρίεντε 
G. D. χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν 
FP. 

Ν, χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαν χαρίεντα 
α. χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν χαριέντων 
D. κχαρίεσι(ν) ᾿ χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι(») 
A. κκχααρΐίεντας χαριέσσας . χαρίεντα 
V. χαρΐεντες ἰ χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα 


§ 53.] ADJECTIVES. 51 
Nore 1. The endings jee, ἥεσσα, yey, are contracted into 
ἧς, 1090; ἣν. EK. g. ν᾿ 


τιμήεις τιμῆς, τιμήεσσα τιμῆσσα, τιμὴεν rity, G. εἰβήεντοὶ 
τιμῆντος, valuable. 


The endings des, όεσσα, dev, are contracted into οὖς, οὖὔσσα, 
οὗν. E. g. 
πλακόεις πλακοῦς, πλακόεσσα πλακοῦσσα, πλακόεν πλακοῦν, G. 
πλακόεντος πλακοῦντος, flat. 


Remark 2. .The dative plural of adjectives in εἰς forms an ase te to 
the general rule (δ 12. 5). 


3. Participles in εἰς have three endings, εἷς, εἶσα, ἐν. Εἰ g. 
τιϑείς, τιϑεῖσα, τιϑ έν. 


S. ὃ (placing) (placing) τὸ (placing) 

N. τιϑ εἰς τιϑεῖσα ! τιϑὲέν 

G. τιϑέντος τιϑείσης τιϑέντος 

Ὁ. τιϑέντι τιϑείση τιϑέντι 

Α. - τιϑέντα τιϑεῖσαν τιϑὲέν 

Υ. τιϑ εἰς τυϑεῖσα τιϑὲν 

ἢ. 

Ν.Α.Υ. τιϑέντε τιϑείσα τιϑέντε 

G. D. τιϑέντοιν τιϑείσαιν τιϑέντοιν 

pie 

N. τιϑέντες τιϑεῖσαν τιϑέντα 

G. τιϑέντων τιϑεισῶν τιϑέντων 

Ὁ. τιϑεῖσι(ν) τιϑεΐσαις τιϑεἴσι(ν) 
A. τιϑέντας τιϑεῖσας τιϑέντα 

V. τιϑέντες τιϑεῖσαι τιϑέντα 


4, There are but two adjectives in ἡν᾿ δ τέρην, ἥ τέρεινα, 
τὸ τέρεν, α. τέρενος, tender ; and ὃ ἄρσην OF ἀῤῥην, τὸ ἄρσεν OF 
ἄῤδεν, G. ἄρσενος OF ἄῤῥενος, male. 


5. Participles in ove have three endings, οὐς, οὖσα, ov. 
E. g. διδούς, διδοῦσα, διδόν. | 


S. ὃ (giving) 4 (giving) τὸ (giving) 


~ N. διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν 
α. διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος 
D. διδόντι διδούσῃ διδόντι 
Α. διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδὸν 
V. διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν 


6. Participles in ὥς have three endings, Uc, Vou, UY. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


D. 

Ν.Α.Υ «διδόντε 
α. Ὁ. διδόντοιν 
P. 

ΙΝ, διδόντες 
G. διδόντων 
D. διδοῦσι(») 
Α. διδόντας 
γ. διδόντες 


δεικνύς, δεικνῦσα, δεικγύν. 


ov. 


S. ὃ (showing) 
N. δεικνύς 

G. δεικγύγντος 
D. δεικγύντι 
A. δεικνύντα 
V. δεικνύς 

DD, et τ 
N.A.V «δεικνύντε 
G. Ὁ. ᾿δεικγνύγτοιν 
Ρ. ἃ 

Ν. δεικνύντες 
α. δεικνύντωνγ᾽ 
Ὁ. δεικνῦσι(») 
Α. δεικνύντας 
a δεικνύντες 
Α 

E. g. ἑχών, ἑκοῦσα, ἑκόν. 
S. ὃ (willing) 
N. ἑχών 

α. ἑκόντος. 
D. éxovte 

A, ἑκόντα 

V. ἑκών 
| N.A.V ἑκόντε 

G. Ὁ. ἑκόντοιν 


διδούσα 
διδούσαιν 


διδοῦσαι 
διδουσὼν 
διδούσαις 
διδούσας 
διδοῦσαι 


~ 


ἡ (showing) 


- δεικγῦσα 


δεικνύσης 
δεικγύσῃ 
δειχγῦσαν 
δεικνῦσα 


, 
δεικνυσα 
δεικνύσαιν 


δεικνῦσαι 
δεικνυσῶν 
δεικνύσαις 
δεικνύσας 
δεικνῦσαι 


ἡ (willing) 


ἑχοῦσα 
ἑκούσης 
x , 
ἑκούσῃ 
ἑκοῦσαν 
ἑκοῦσα 


ἑχούσα 


ἑκούσαιν 


ΟΣ ὅ8, 


διδόντε 
διδόντοιν 


διδόντα 
διδόντων 
διδοῦσι(») 
διδόντα 
διδόντα 


τὸ (showing) 
δεικνύν, 
δεικνύντος 
δεικγύντι 
δεικνύν 
δεικνύν 


δεικνύντε 
δειχκγύντοιν 


δεικνύντα 
δεικγύντων 
δεικνῦσι(») 
δεικνύντα 
δεικνύντα 


djectives 1 in ὧν, ZEN. οντος, have three endings, WY, OVOE, 


τὸ (willing) 
ἑχόν. 
ἑκόντος 
ἑκόντι 
éxov 
Exov 


ἑκόντε 
ἑχόντοιν 


E. ¢ 


“85 


§ 53.] ΤῊΝ ADJECTIVES. : 53 


Pr: ; 

N. ἑκόντες τς ἑκοῦσαν ἑκόντα 
α. ἑχόντων ἑκουσὼν ἑκόντων 
D. ἑκοῦσι(») ἑκούσαις . ἑκοῦσι(ν) 
Α. ἑκόντας ἑκούσας ἑκόντα 
V. ἑκόντες ἑκοῦσαν ἑκόντα 


So all PARTICIPLES in wy. KE. g. τύπτων, τύπτουσα, τύπτον, 
G. τύπτοντος " φιλέων, φιλέουσα, φιλέον, α. φιλέοντος, contracted 
φιλῶν, φιλοῦσα, φιλοῦν, G. φιλοῦντος. 


Nore 2. The feminine of adjectives in ds, εἰς) ovs, Ds, wv, gen. vrog, is 
formed by dropping os of the genitive, and annexing ca, E. g. 


Ths, παντός fem. πᾶσα (ὃ 12. 5) 
aiSeis, τιϑένφος Rs: σιϑεῖσα (ibid.) 
διδούς, dudevros, > διδοῦσα (ibid. ) 
δεικνύς, δεικνύνχος = δεικνῦσα (ibid. ) 
ἑκών, ExovrTos . - ἑκοῦσα (ibid. ) 


χαρίεις, χαρίενσος “5 χαρίεσσα (§ 12. N. 2). 


8. Adjectives in wy, gen. ovog, have two endings, wy, ov 
E. g. 


S. 0, ἡ (ripe) τὸ (ripe) 

N. πέπων “πέπον 

α. πέπονος πέπονγος ᾿ 
D. πέπονν _. πέπονν 
Α. πέπονα πέπον 

V. πέπον ; πέπον 
D.- 

N.A. V.xézove πέπονε 
G. D. πεπόνοιν TEETLOVOLY 
P. 

N. πέπονες πέπονα 
G. πεπόνων . πεπόνων 
Ώ. πέποσι(») πέποσι(ν) 
A, πέπονας πέπονα 
Vi πέπονες πέπονα 


9. Participles in ὡς have tnree endings, ὡς, υἷα, os. E. g. 
τετυφώς, τετυφυΐα, τετυφός, having struck. 


5* 


P 


. , "(ὦ τ ed *. bone 
54 INFLECTION OF WORDS, [δῷ 54, 55. 
S. ὃ ἡ : τὸ 
N. © τετυφώς ες φετυφυΐα τετυφός 
3 ᾿ 
α. -tstugotos - ὁ Ἐτετυφυΐας ες φετυφότος 
, " 
D. τετυφύτι τετυφυΐς. τετυφότι 
Α. τετυφότα ᾿τέτυφυαν 6Λ τετυφός. 
V; τετυφώς ᾿ς φετυφυῖΐὰα τετυφός 
N.A.V. τετυφότε τετυφυίΐα τετυφότε 
G. 10. τετυφότοιν τετυφυΐαιν TETUPOTOLY 
P. ‘ 
N. TETUPOTEG TETUPUIGL TETUPOTH 
α: τετυφότων τετυφυιῶν ἡ τετυφότων 
D.. τετυφόσι(ν) τετυφυίαις τετυφόσι(») 
A. τετυφότας τς φτετυφυΐας τετυφότα 
γ. τετυφύτες τ τετυφυϊαι τετυφότα 


“ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 


§ 34. The following are some of the adjectives which have 
only one ending : ὃ ἀβλής, ἧτος " 0, ἢ ἀβρώς, ὦτος " ὃ, ἡ ἀγνώς, 
ὦτος " ὃ, ἢ ἀδμής, 7 ἥτος" Ὁ," 7 αἰγίλιψ, πος 0, 7 αἴϑοψ, πος" ὃ 
αἴϑων," νος " ὃ ἀχμής, NTOS " ὃ, ῇ ἄναλκις, δὸς" εὖ, ἥ ἁπτήν, ἦνος " 
6, 7 ἀργής, ἥτος Or τος 0, ἢ ἅρπαξ, γος" ὃ βλάξ, κός" ὃ, 7] 
δρομάς, ἄδος" ὃ ἐθελοντής, οὔ ὃ, ῆ ἐπήλυξ, γος" 0; 7 ἔπηλυς, 
υδος" «ἢ ἐπίτεξ, noc” Ὁ, a fugu, wvos ἡ 0, 7 εὐώψ, πος ὃ, ἢ ms, 
KOS" ὁ, ἢ ἡμεϑνής, ἦτος " ὃ, ἢ ἱππᾶς, δος" ὃ “μάκαρ, αρος " ὃ, 7 


paxguiny, auog’ ὃ, 7 μακραύχην, ἕνος" 0, 7 μῶνυξ, Hog" 0, ἢ 


γνοιἷάς, ἄδος᾽ ὃ, ἢ πὰαραβλωώψ, πος" 0, ἦ παφραπλήξ, 7ος " ὃ πένης, 
τος ὃ πολυύϊξ, χοὸς" ὃ προβλής, ἧτος " ὃ, ἢ σπορᾶς, ἄδος " ὃ, ἢ 
φοίνιξ. ' 

Add ‘to these the compounds of ois, ϑώραξ, σαῖς, Ζείρ. 
E. g. ὃ ὀρϑόϑριξ, τριχος " ὃ, ῇ καλλίπαις, αἰδος " ὃ, ῇ μακρόχειρ, 
εἰρος. 

Nore. Some of these are also used as neuters, but only in the genitive and 
dative. 


COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. . 


§ 5. Compound adjectives, of which the last component 
part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. 


ea « 


. 
_— 
Ce a a 


ᾧ 56.] - €OMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 55 


Such adjectives may have a neuter, when it can be formed 
after the same/analogy. E. g. 


εὔχαρις, i, G. τος, graceful, from εὖ, χάρις, τος 
εὔελπις, ι, G. Wo, hopeful, from εὖ, ἐλπίς, ἐδος 

δίπους, ovy, G. οδος, two-footed, from δίς, ποῦς, ποδός 
ἄδακρυς, υ, G. voc, tearless, from a-, 'δάχρυ, υος 
εὐδαίμων, ον, G. ονος, happy, from εὖ, δαίμων, ovosg 
μεγαλήτωρ, 09, G. 0090S, magnanimous, from μέγας, ἦτορ. 


Norte |. The compounds of πόλις generally have dog in the - 


genitive. E. g. 
ἄπολις, t, G. og, vagabond. 


Note 2. The Gees of μήτηρ, πατήρ, and φρήν mind, 
change ἡ intow. E. g. 
ἀμήτωρ, 00, α. ορος, motherless 
ἀπάτωρ, og, ἃ. ὅρος, fatherless 
σώφρων, ον, G. ovoc, discreet. 


Note 3. The compounds of γέλως, laughter, and χέρας, then: 
are either of the second or third declension. E. g. 
φιλόγελως, way, G. w Or wtoc, fond of laughter 
τρίκερως, wy, G. w OY wroc, having three horns. 


ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 


§ 66. The following list contains most of the anomalous 
and defective adjectives. 


ἐύς and nic, neut. ἐΐ and 4%, Rad G. ἐῆος, A. évy and ἠῦν, neut. 
Plur. G. ἐἄων, of good things. 
The neuter εὖ, contracted from év, means, well. 
ζώς, Ν om, mas. living, alive, The rest is from the regular ζωός, 
My Ov. 
μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great, is declined in the following manner: 


S. ὁ (great) (great) ΄. τὸ (great) 
N. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα 

G. μεγάλου μεγάλης. μεγάλου 
D. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ 
Α. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα 

V. μεγάλε ᾿ μεγάλη μέγα 
D. 

N.A.V. μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 
α. ἢ. μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν μεγάλοι» 


τὰκ 


σΩΖ 


a 


μεγάλοι 
μεγάλων 
μεγάλοις 


μεγάλους 


μεγάλοι 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


μεγάλαι 
μεγάλων 
μεγάλαις 
μεγάλας 
μεγάλαι 


τῷ 56. 


- μεγάλα 


μεγάλων 
μὲγαλοις 
μεγάλα 


᾿ μεγάλα: 
Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and 


accusative singular, masculine and soil come from the 


obsolete METAA ΟΣ. 
The vocative singular μεγάλε is very rare. 


πλέως, full, borrows its feminine from nhéoc. Thus, πλέως, πλέα," 
πλέων. In composition it has only two endings, we, wy, (ἢ 50.) 


᾿ πολύς, πολλὴ, πολύ, much, is declined as follows : 


ὧν 

Ὺ S. ὁ (much) ἢ (much) | 70 (much) 
N. πολύς πολλή πολύ 
α. πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
Ὁ. πολλῷ πολλὴ πολλῷ 
A. πολὺν πολλήν πολύ 
ΡΣ, (many (many) (many) 
N. πολλοί πολλαΐ πολλά 
G. πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
D. πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοὶς 
Α. πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 


The dual is of course wanting, 

Observe, that -all the cases, Bicept the nominative and 
accusative singular, masculine ond neuter, come from πολλός, 
7, ov, which is used by the Lonians. 


The epic poets decline πολύς like γλυκύς" thus, πολύς, monster, 
πολύ, G. πολέος. 


πρᾷος, meek, borrows its feminine and neuter from πραῦς, πραεῖα, 
πραῦ, G. πραέος. 
σῶς, 6, ἢ, safe, ποαΐ, σῶν, A. σῶν, A. Plur. σῶς, neut. Plur. σᾶ, 
the rest from the regular σῶος, α, ov. The feminine σᾶ 1s 
rare, 
φροῦδος, ἡ, ov, gone, used only in the Nominative, of all genders 
and numbers. 


.δ67. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 57 


DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 


COMPARISON BY TEPOS, TATOS. 


§ 57. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping ς, 
and annexing tegog for the comparative, and τατος for the 
superlative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is 
changed into wm. E. g. 

σοφός, wise, σοφώτερος, wiser, σοφώτατος, wisest 
Ott μος, dishonored, ἀτιμότερος, ἀτιμότατος 
σεμγός, venerable, σεμνότερος, σεμνότατος. 


Note 1. In general, o remains unaltered when it is pre- 
ceded by a mute and a liquid. (δ 17.3.) ΕἸ, g. πυκνός, dense, 
πυκγότερος , πυκνότατος. 


Remarx 1. In ἃ few instances Homer changes o into w even when the 
penult of the positive is long. E. g. κακόξεινος, xaxokeivaregos. 


Nore 2. A few adjectives in- ος are compared according to 
the following examples: 
φίλος, φίλτερος, φίλτατος 
μέσος, μεσαίτερος, μεσαίτατος 
σπουδαῖος, σπουδαιέστερος, ,»σπουδαιέστατος. 
ὀψοφάγος, ὀψοφαχγίστερος; οψοφαχίστατος. 


os 


Remark 2. Those in oog are always compared by εστερος, 
sotatog. EK. g. 


ἁπλόος, ἁπλοέστερος, ἁπλοέστατος, contracted ἁπλούστερος, 
ἁπλούστατος. 


2. Adjectives in vg, gen. εος, are compared by dropping ς, and 
annexing Togs, Taree. Εν, 
οξύς, sharp, ὀξύτερος, ὀξύτατος. 
3. These two adjectives, μέλας and τάλας, drop ὃς of the 
genitive, and annex tegoc, τατος. Thus, 
μέλας, ανος, μελάντερος, μελάντατος 
τάλας, αὖος, ταλάντερος, ταλάντατος. 


4. Adjectives in ἧς gen. εος, and εἰς gen. ἐντὸς, shorten ἧς 
and εἰς into ec, and annex τερος, τατος. E, ge 


ἀληϑής, ἀληϑέστερος, ἀληϑέστατος 
χαρίεις, χαριέστερος, χαριέστατος.. 


nee ὦ 


58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. : [§ 58. 


Nore 3. Ὑευδής, tos, false, has also comparative ψευδίσσερος. 


᾿ Πένης, nros, poor, follows the analogy of adjectives in ns, gen. sos " ὅκα, 
πενέστερος, πενίσσατος. 


5. Adjectives in wy, gen. ονος; drop ος Of the genitive, and 
annex S0TEQOS, sotatoc. Εἰ. g. 


σώφρων, ογος, σωφρονέστερος, σωφρογέστατος. 


6. The adjectives ἅρπαξ, ἄχαρις, βλάξ, μάκαρ, are compared 
as follows: 
ἅρπαξ, γος, ἁρπαγίστερος 
ἄχαρις, ἀχαρίστερος | 
βλάξ, κός, βλακίστερος, βλακίστατος 
μάκαρ, μακάρτερος, μακάρτατος. 


Note 4. Substantives denoting an employment or character 
are sometimes compared like adjectives. E. g. βασιλεύς, king, 
βασιλεύτερος, more kingly, βασιλέύτατος, most kingly ; κλέπτης, 
thief, xlentiotatoc, very thievish. 

Nore 5. The pronouns do not admit of different degrees in their significa- 
tion. Nevertheless the comedians, for the sake of exciting laughter, compare 
αὐτός in the following manner: αὐφός, himself, airdregos, himself-er, airdraros, 


himself-est, ipsissimus. 
COMPARISON BY I2N, TOS 


§ 38. 1. Some adjectives in ve drop this ending, and annex 
των for the comparative, and ἐστὸς for the superlative. E, g. 


ἡδύς, pleasant, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος. 
2. Comparatives in wy are declined according to the follow- 
ing example : 


S.6, ἢ (pleasanter) τὸ ( pleasanter) 


ἡδιόνων 
ἡδίοσι(ν) 
ἡδίονας ἡδίους 


POIAN 224 


ἡδίονες ἡδίους ς 


N. πηδίων 701 ov 
G. dlovos ἡδίονος 
D. ηἡδίονυ ἡδίονι 
A. ἡδίονα ἡδίω ἥδιον 
1. 
A. ἡδίονε ἡδίονε 
D. ἡδιόνοιν ἡδιόνοι» 


ἡδίονα ἡδίω 
ἡδιόνων = 
ἡδίοσι(ν) 


7 
ἡδίονα. ἡδίω 


. δ. ὅθ. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 59° 


Observe, that the accusative singular masculine and feminine, 
and the nominative and accusative plural of all genders, drop 
the y, and contract the two last syllables. 


Nore 1. A few adjectives in vs form their comparative by Νὰ the last 
syllable of the positive and annexing cvwy or rr. EE. g. 
παχύς, fat, πάσσων 
βαϑύς, deep, βάσσων. 


Note 2. Kearis, powerful, changes a into ¢ or ein the cueperanvet thus, 
κρατύς, κράσσων, κρέσσων, κρείσσων. (δ ὃ 58. N. 1: 2. Ν. 3.) 


The Doric κάῤῥων for κρείσσων is formed in the following manner: χρασύς, 
κράσσων, κάρσων, κάῤῥων. (δὲ 58. N. 1: 26,2: 11: 6. N 


Nor 3. These two adjectives, μέγας and ὀλέγος, form their comparative by 
dropping the last syllable, and annexing gw». Thus μέγας; μέξων (Attic pwsigwy) ; 
ὀλίγος, ὀλίζων. (ὃ 2. Ν. 3.) 


ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 


§ 39. 1. The comparison of an ‘abetiv is anomalous 
when the adjective has, or is supposed to have, more than 
one positive. 


2. The. comparison is defective, when the adjeatiys.. has no 
positive in use. 


3. The following list contains most of the adjectives which 
are anomalous or defective in their comparison. 


ἀγαϑός, good ἀμείνων ἄριστος 
᾿ βελτίων βέλτιστος 
κρείσσων ΟΥ̓ χρείττων κράτιστος. 
λωΐων or λῴων λώϊστος ΟΥ̓ λῷστος 


᾿Αρείων, the proper comparative of ἄρισσος, belongs to the Epic language. 

For βελτίων, Awiwy, the epic poets have βέλσερος, Awiregos. 

Keards, the positive of κρείσσων, κράτιστος, occurs in Homer. 

For Btarieres, the Doric dialect has Bivrirros. 

For κρείσσων, the Ionic has κρέσσων, and the Doric xappwv. (ὃ 58. Ν, 2.) 

The poets have κάρτιστος for κράτιστος. (δ. 26. 2.) 

The Epic language has also compar. φέρφερος, superl. φέρισσος or φέρτατος. 

The regular comparative and superlative, Sumit ἀγαϑώτατος, do not 
occur in good writers. 


αἰσχρός (4I=XT2), ugly, αἰσχίων, αἴσχιστος. The ἌΟΡ Ν 
αἰσχρότερος is not much used. 


| ἄλγεινός (AATT), painful, ἀλγεινότερος ΟΥ̓ ἀλγίων,. ἀλγεινότατος 


_ a 


60 -INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ 59. 
or ἄλγιστος. The regular Givi’ ἀλγεινότερος, ἀλγεινότατος, 
are more usual in the masculine and feminine. 

ἀμείνων, see ἀγαϑός. 

ἀρείων, ἄριστος; see ayados. 

βελτίων, βέλτιστος, see ἀγαϑός. 

ἐλαχύς, 566 μικρός. 

EAEIXTs, infamous, elergioroe. The ici of the postive 
occurs in Homer (Il. 4, 242: 24, 239). : 

ἔσχατος, last, a defective superlative. 

ἐχϑρὸς (ΕΧΘΥΣ), hostile, ἐχϑρότερος or ἐχϑίων, ὩΣ ΉΡΩΣ or 
ἔχϑιστος. 

ἭΚΥΣ, see κακός. 


κακός, bad κακίων.  χρκιστος 
χείρων ᾿ χείριστος 
ἥσσων ἥκιστος 


The forms ἥσσων, ἥκισαος, come from ἭΚΥΣ. (§ 58. N. 1 "δι 
The regular comparative κακώσερος is poetic. 
For χείρων and ἥσσων, the Ionians have χερείων and ἕσσων. 


καλός (KAATS), beautiful, καλλίων, κάλλιστος. . The doubling 


‘of the 4 seems to be an accidental peculiarity. 

καῤῥων, 566 ἀγαϑός. 

ΚΕΡΔΎΣ, crafty, κερδίων, κέρδιστος.. 

κρατύς, see ἀγαϑός. 

κυδρός (ΚΥΖΔΥΣῚ, glorious, κυδίων, κύδιστος. 

κύντερος, More impudent,.a defective comparative, derived from. 
κύων, κυνός, dog. 

λωΐων, λωΐστος, see ἀγαϑός. 

μακρός (MAKTS, MHKT), long, Lpnaentis and μάσσων, μα-- 
κρότατος and μήκιστος. (Ὁ 58. 

μέγας, great, μείζων (Ionic udtear); ieddirtee (ὃ 58. Ν. 3.) 


μικρός, small. ἐλάσσων ἐλάχιστος 
μείων μεῖστος 
μικρότερος μικρότατος 


The forms ἐλάσσων, ἐλάχισαος, come from ἐλαχύς. (ὃ 58. N. 1.) The 

superlative μεεῖσσος is poetic. - 

oliyos, little, ὀλίζων, ὀλίγιστος. (§ 58, N. 3.) 

οἰκτρός (OIKTTS), pitiable, οἰκτίων, οἴκτιστος OF οἰκτρότατος. 

ὁπλότερος, younger, ὅπλότατος, youngest, Epic. It is derived 
from ὅπλον, weapon. 

πέπων, ripe, πεπαΐέτερος, πεπαΐτατος. 

πίων, fat, πιότερος, πιότατος. 

πολύς, much, πλείων OY πλέων, πλεῖστος. 

πρότερος, former, πρῶτος, first, derived from the preposition πρό, 
before. 

δάδιος (PATS), easy, δῴων, ῥᾷστος. 


ὁ 60.] _ NUMERALS, 61 


The Ionians say ῥηΐδιος, ῥηΐων, ῥήϊσεος. 
The epic poets have ῥηΐσερος, inirares. 
ταχύς (OAXTS), swift, toziwy commonly ϑάσσων, τάχιστος. 
($$ 14.3: 58. N. 1.) 
ὑπέρτερος, ugher, ὑπέρτατος, highest, derived from the Peeps 
tion ὑπέρ, above. 
ὕστερος, later, ὕστατος, latest. 
ὙΨΥΣ, high, ὑψίων, ὕψιστος. 
φαάντερος, brighter, φαάντατος, brightest, derived from φαΐνω. 
φέρτερος, φέρτατος, φέριστος, see ἀγαϑός. 
χείρων, χείριστος, ZEQELWY, SCE κακός. 
Nore. In a few instances new comparatives and superlatives: are formed from 


adjectives, which are already in the comparative or ipealative degree.  E. g. 
Teorisros from πρῶτος, χειρόφερος from χείρων. 


NUMERALS. 
CARDINAL NUMBERS. 


§ GO. 1. The numerals εἷς, δύο, τρεῖς, and τεσσαρες ΟΥ̓ τέτ-- 
ταρες, are declined as follows: 


8. é (one) 7 (one) τὸ (one) 

N. εἷς μία ἕν 

G. ἑνός μιᾶς _ ἑνός 

D. évi μιᾷ ive 

A, ἕνα μέαν ἕν 
D. τὼ, τὰ, τὼ (two) !Ῥ. (ἀμνοὶ 
N. A. δύο and δύω N. A. wanting 
G. δυοῖν and δυεῖν G. δυῶν ᾿ 
Ὁ. δυοῖν D. δυσί(ν) 

P. οἵ, «i (three) ta (three) 

N. τρεῖς a τρία 
. τριὼν : τριῶν 

D. τρισί(») τρισί(») 

A. τρεῖς τρία 

Ρ. οἵ, αἵ ( four) : ᾿ τὰ ( four) 

Ν. τέσσαρες τέσσαρα 

α. τεσσάρων τεσσάρων 

Ὁ. τέσσαρσι(ν) τέσσαρσι(»). 

A. 


τέσσαρας ν τέσσαρα 


62 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ § 60, 


Remark. Jvo is found undeclined. 


2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100, inclusive, are in- 
declinable ({§ 45. 2). 


5. πέντε ! 40. τεσσαράκοντα 

6. ἕξ : 50. πεντήκοντα 

7. ἑπτά 60. ἑξηκοντα 

8. ὀχτώ 70. ἑβδομήκοντα 
9. ἐννέα - τς 860, ὀγδοήκοντα 
10. δέκα Θ0. ἐννενήκοντα 

11. ἕνδεκα 100. ἑκατόν 

12. δώδεκα ; 200. διᾶκόσιοι, αἱ, α 
13. δεκατρεῖς Or τρισκαίΐδχα ᾽ 9θῦ. τριακόσιοι, αἱ, α 
14. δεκατέσσαρες ΟΥ̓ τεσσαρεσ- 400. τετρακόσιοι, αι, ἃ 

καίδεκα, 500. πενταχόσιοι, αἱ, o 

15. δεκαπέντε Or πεντεκαίδεκα 600. ἑξακόσιοι, αἱ, α 
16. δεκαέξ or ἑκκαίδεκα 700. ἑπτακύσιοι, αἱ, o 
17. δεκαεπτά Or ἑπτακαίδεκα 800. ὀκτακόσιοι, αὖ, α 
.18. δεκαοκτώ or ὀχτωκαίΐδεκα 900. ἐννακόσιοι, αἱ, α 
19. δεκαεννέα Or ἐννεακαίδεκα 1000. χίλιοι, αι, ἃ 

20. εἴκοσι(ν) Φ000. δισχίλιοι, αι, ἃ 
Q1. εἴκοσι εἷς, OF εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι 10000. μύριοι; αι, α 

90. τριᾶκοντα 20000. δισμύριοι, αἰ, a 


Nore 1. The compounds οὐδείς (οὐδέ, εἷς) and μηδείς (μηδὲ, 
sic) have nom. plur. οὐδένες, μηδένες, insignificant persons. 


Nore 2. The accent of the feminine μέα is anomalous in 
the genitive and dative. (§ 31. N. 2.) 


Note 3. Δεκατρεῖς, δεκατέσσαρες, and the first component 
part of τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, are declined like τρεῖς and τέσσαρες. 
respectively. 


Nore 4. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral 
adverbs (§ 62. 4) to χίλιοι. 
Tens of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to 


μύριοι. ! 

Nore 5.. Instead of any number of tens +8 or 9, a circumlocution with 
δέων (from δέω, to want) is often used.” E. g. Δυοῖν δέοντε; εἴκοσι, twenty 
wanting two, simply eighteen. Ἑνὸς δέοντες πριάκοντα, thirty wanting one, 
simply twenty-nine. 

This principle applies also to ordinals. E, g. ‘Evds δέον εἰκοστὸν ros, the 
nineteenth year. 

The participle δέων (from δέω, am wanting) with its substantive is sometimes | 
put in the genitive absolute. E. g. Ilevevjxovra μιᾶς δεούσης, forty-nine. So 
with ordinals, ‘Evés δέοντος σριακοστῷ tres, in the twenty-ninth year. 


δ 61.] ORDINAL ‘NUMBERS. | 63 


Nore 6. Duiatecrs. The dialectic peculiarities of the  cardinat mumbers are 
as follows : 


1. Epic ἴα for pia, ἰῷ for ivi. 

2. Epic δοιώ, δοιοί, declined throughout. 

4. Ionic σέσσερες, Doric cieroges or σέφορες, AXolic πίσυρες, poetic dat. plur. 
τέτρασι for φίσταρσι. 

5. Doric πέμπε. 

12. Ionic and poetic δυώδεκα and δυοκαίδεκα. 

14. Ionic πεσσερεσκαίδεκα, indeclinable. 

20. Dorie εἴκατι, Epic ἐείκοσι. 

30, 40, 80, 200, 300. Tonic φριήκοντα, φσεσσερήκοντσα, ἘΠ ΤΩς ns ae 
φριηκόσιοι. 


9000, 10090. Old ἐννεώχτλοι, δεκάχτλοι- é, 


-ORDINAL NUMBERS. 


§ 61. The ordinal numbers are, 


Ist. πρῶτος, ἢ, ov 30th. τριακοστός, ή, ov 
2Qd. δεύτερος, α, ov ς 40th. τεσσαρακοστός, ή, oy 
3d. τρίτος, ἡ, ον 50th. princi ή, ὄν 
Ath. τέταρτος, ἡ, ov 60th. ἑξηκοστός, ή, όν 
Sth. πέμπτος, ἡ, ov 70th. ἑβδομηκοστός, ή, ov 
6th. ἕκτος, ἡ» ον SOth. ὀγδοηκοστός, ἥ, ov 
7th. ἕβδομος, ἡ, ov ~ 90th. ἐνγενηκοστός, ή, ὄν 
Sth. ὄγδοος, ῇ, ov ~  —-: 100th. ἑκατοστός, ή, o» 
Oth. ἔννατος, ἢ, ov 200th. διακοσιοστός, 4, ov 
10th. δέκατος, ἡ, ov 300th. τριᾶκοσιοστός, ή, oy 
11th. & δέκατος, ἡ, ον 400th. τετραχοσιοστύς, ή, ov 
12th. δωδέκατος, ἡ, ον 500th. “πενταχοσιουτός, ή, ov 
13th. τρισκαιδέκατος, ἡ, ον 600th. ἑξακοσιοστός, ή, ov 
14th. τεσσαρακαιδέκατος,η,0»ἁ  TO0Oth. ἑπτακοσιοστός, 7], ov 
15th. πεντεκαιδέκατος, ἡ, ov 800th. ὀχτακχοσιοστός, ἡ, ov 
16th. ἑκκαιδέκατος, ἡ, ον 900th. ἐννακοσιοστός, ή, ὧν 
17th. ἑπτακαιδέκατος, ἡ, ον 1000th. χιλιοστός, ή; ov 


18th. ὀκτωκαιδέκατος, yn, ov  10000th. μυριοστός, 7, ov 
19th. ἐννεακαιδέκατος, ἡ,ον 20000th. δισμυριοστός, ἥ, ov 
20th. εἰκοστός, Ty ov &c. 
2lst. εἰκοστὸς πρῶτος, OF πρῶ-- , 

τος καὶ εἰκοστός 
Nore 1. Homer has τέτρατος for σίταρτος, ἱδδόματος for ἕξδδοριος, ὀγδδατος 


for ὄγδοος, siveros for ἔνναπος or ἔνασος. Herodotus has ove re for 
τεσσαρακαιδεκάτη. : 


Nore 2. A mired number, of which the fractional part is 4, is expressed by 
ἃ circumlocution, when it denotes a coin or weight. E. g. Πέμασον ἡμοιροναῖον 


64 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$$ 62, 63. 


= 44 mine ; but Πέντε ἡριμναῖα = ὃ = 24 mine. "Evaroy ἡμιτάλανκον 
= 84 talents; but "Ewie ἡμιτάλαντα = ὃὶ = 43 talents. Tiragrey ἡμιώ- 
βολον = 84 oboli; but Τίσσαρα ἡμιώξολα = 3 = 2 oboli. 


NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND 
ADVERBS. 


§ 62. 1. The numeral substantives end in ἄς, gen. «dos, 
feminine. Εἰ, g. μονάς, monad, unit, δυάς, τριάς, triad, πεντάς, 
Ecc, ἑβδομάς, ὀγδοάς, ἐννεάς, δεκάς, ἑκατοντάς, χιλιάς, μυριάς, 
myriad. : 


2. The numeral adjectives in πλόος or πλάσιος correspond 
to those in fold, in English. E. g. ἁπλόος, simple, διπλόος or 
διπλάσιος, double, twofold, τριπλόος or τριπλάσιος, triple, three- 
Sold, τετραπλόος or τετραπλάσιος, quadruple, fourfold. 


3. The numeral adjectives answering to the question πο- 
σταῖος, on what day? end in αἷος. They are formed from the 
ordinals. E.g. δευτεραῖος, on the second day, τριταῖος, on the 
third day. | ts 


4. The numeral adverbs answering to the question ποσάκις, 
how often? end in ax. KE. g. τετράκις, four times, πεντάκις, 
Jive times. 

Except the first three; ἅπαξ, once, Sic, twice, and τρίς, thrice. 


Poe : ARTICLE. 


$63. The article 6, the, is declined as follows: 
SMF N. DM. FON. Ψ FON. 


Ν᾿ Ἢ λό Ν. τό τά τῶ Ν. οἵ af τά 
G. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ ΟὍ. τοῖν ταῖν τον G.tav τῶν τῶν 
D. τῷ τῇ τῷ D. τοῖν ταῖν τον Ὁ. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
Α. τόν τήν τό A. τώ τό tw <A. τούς τάς τά 


Nore 1. For quanriry, ACCENT, and pIALEcTs, see above (§§ 31. N. 1, 
2, 3: $s. N. 2, S, 4.) νὰ ' 


We only observe here that the Dorians have vel, vei, for οἷ, ai. 


Nore 2. The original form of the article was TOS, from which come the 
oblique cases, the Doric forms roi, rei, and the adverb ras. 


ᾧ 64. PRONOUN. 65 


PRONOUN. 
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 


§ G4. The personal pronouns are ἐγώ, σύ, Ἵ. The nomi- 
native ‘7 is obsolete. , 


S. (1 ) S. (thou) S. (he, she, it) 

N. ἐγώ N. σύ NUE 

G. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ G. σοῦ α οὗ 

Ὦ. ἐμοΐῖ, μοί D. σοὶ D. οἵ 

A. ἐμὲ, μὲ Α. σὲ A. s 

D. (we two) D. (yout two) D. (they two) 
N.A.y» γῶϊ, γῷ N.A. σφῶϊ, ope N.A. σφωέ 

G.D. νῶϊν, rev  G.D. σφῶϊν, cpav 6.2. σφωΐν 

BP. (se) P. (ye, you) P. (they) 

N. ἡμεῖς N. ὑμεῖς ON. σφεῖς π. σφέα 
α. ἡμῶν α. ὑμὼν α. σφῶν 

Ὦ. ἡμῖν D. ὑμῖν Ὁ. σφίσι(ν) 

A. ἡμᾶς Α. ὑμᾶς A. σφᾶς 0. σφέα 


Remark. The dual ve and ope are very often written with- 
out the iota subscript ; thus, γώ, σφώ. 


Note 1. The particle ; yé is often appended to the pronouns 
of the first and second person for the sake of emphasis. FE, g. 
ἔγωγε, I indeed, for my part; σύ ε, thou meres The accent 
of ἔγωγε is irregular (Ὁ 22.3 


Nore 2. Diarects. The dialectic peculiarities of the per- 
sonal pronouns are exhibited in the following table. 


ἜΠΕΑ 

Sing. N. Epic and Doric ἐγών. 

G. Epic ἐμέο, ἐμεῖογ ἐμέθεν, lonic and Doric ἐμεῦ, ued. 

D. Doric ™ ae 
Plur. N. Tonie 7 ἡμέες, Epic oa ἄμμες, Dorie « OES (long α). 

G. Ionic 7 ἡμέων, Epic ἡ ἡμείων. Ἢ 

D. Epic ἃ ἄμμι or ἄμμιν, poetic ἡμῖν (short t), nucy. 

A. lonic ἡ ημέας, Epic ἃ UME, Doric « aus (long a), poetic 

ἡμάς (short a). 
6* 


66 INFLECTION OF wWorDs. [ἡ 65. 


Σύ. 
Sing. N. Doric τύ, Epic τύνη. 
G. Epic σέο, σεῖο, σέϑεν, τεοῖο, » Tonic and Doric σεῦ, 
Doric also τεῦ or τεῦς. 
D. Doric tiv, τείν, Ionic and Doric toi. 
A. Daric τέ, τίν, ‘3 beeen & 
Plur. N. Ionic ὑ ὑμέες, Εριοὕ ὕμμες, Doric ὑμές (long v). 
G. Ionic ὑ ὑμέων, Epic ὑ ὑμείων. 
D. Epic ἐ ὔμμι or ὔμμιν, poetic ὑμέν (short 1), ὑμῖν. 
A. lonic ὑμέας, Epic ὕμμε, Doric ὑμέ (long νυ), poetic 
ὑμάς (short .} 


£. 
Sing. G. Epic ἕο, εἶο, Fev, &sto, Ionic and Doric εὖ. 
D. Doric iv, Epic oi. 
A. Epic ἕε. 
Plur. N. Ionic σφέες. 
G. Ionic σφέων, Epic σφείων. 
D. Epic and Ionic ogi or σφέν. 
A. Ionic σφέας, Epic and lonic σφέ, poetic σφάς (short 
a), Doric ψέ (in Theocritus). 
The Attic poets use the accusative σφέ in all 
genders and numbers, 


Norte 3. The accusative μὲν or. viv, him, her, it, them, is 
used in all genders and numbers. 

The epic poets and the Ionians use μέν, the Attic poets 
and the. Dorians, γέν. 


§ δῶ. 1. The pronoun αὐτός is declined like σοφός 
(§ 49. 1), except that its neuter has ο instead of ov. Thus, 


αὐτός, he, himself, αὐτή, she, herself, αὐτό, it, itself, G. αὐτοῦ, 
ἧς, οὗ. 


2, With the article before it, wbrée signifies the same, 
(§ 144. 3,) in which case it is often contracted with the arti- 
cle. E. g. ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτῷ, ταὐτῇ, for τοῦ αὐτοῦ, τῷ αὐτῷ, τῇ αὐτῇ. 

When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ον " 
thus, ταὐτό or ταὐτόν, for τὸ αὐτό. ἢ 


The contracted forms ταὐτῇ and «ταῦτά must not be con- 
founded with ταύτῃ and ταῦτα from οὗτος. 


Nore. The Tonians insert: an ¢ before the endings of αὐτῷ, 
αὐτήν, αὐτῶν, αὐτοῖς. E. δ: αὐτέην for αὐτήν. 


2 δι. Αἱ ἀν νῶι. ὦ 


ᾧ 66.] PRONOUN. | 67 
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN, 


§ 66. The reflexive pronouns are ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ. 
They are compounded of the personal pronouns and αὐτός. 
They have no nominative. 


3. M. (of myself ) S. F. (of myself ) 
G. ἐμαυτοῦ " α. ἐμαυτῆς 
D. ἐμαυτῷ D. ἐμαυτῇ 
Α. ἐμαυτόν Α. ἐμαυτήν 
P. (ὁ ourselves) P. (of ourselves) 
G. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν α. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
D. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς D. ἡμῖν αὐταῖς 

- y ~ > [4 - 
Α. ἡμᾶς αὑτούς Α. ἡμᾶς αὐτᾶς 
S. (of thyself) S. (of thyself) 
G. σεαυτοῦ OF σαυτοῦ G. σεαυτῆς ΟΥ̓ σαυτῆς 
Ὁ. σεαυτῷ ΟΥ̓ σαυτῷ Ὁ. σεαυτῇ or σαυτῇ 
Α. σεαυτόν OF σαυτόν - Α. σεαυτήν ΟΥ̓ σαυτήν 
P. (of yourselves) rs (of yourselves ) 
G. ὑμῶν αὐτῶν α. ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
Ὁ. ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς D. ὑμῖν αὐταῖς 
Α. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς Α. ὑμᾶς αὐτάς 
S. (of himself) 5. (of herself ) 
G. ἑαυτοῦ OF αὑτοῦ G. ἑαυτῆς ΟΥ̓ αὑτῆς 
D. ἑαυτῷ OF αὑτῷ D. ἑαυτῇ or αὑτῇ 
Α. ἑαυτόν OF αὑτόν Α. ἑαυτήν or αὑτήν 
P. (of themselves) P. (of themselves) 
α. ἑαυτῶν OF αὑτῶν α. ἑαυτῶν OF αὑτῶν 
D. ἑαυτοῖς OF αὑτοῖς D. ξαυταὶς OF αὑταῖς 
Α. ἑαυτούς OF αὑτούς Α. ἑαυτάς OF αὑτάς 


The contracted forms of ἑαυτοῦ must not be confounded 
with the corresponding forms of αὐτός. 


Note 1. The ¢hird person plural also is often formed by 
means of the personal pronoun and αὐτός. E. g. σφῶν αὑτῶν, 
for ἑαυτῶν. 


Norte 2. The neuter tavré or αὗτό, from ἑαυτοῦ, sometimes occurs. 
Nore 3. The dual αὑτοῖν of the reflexive pronoun ἑαυτοῦ is sometimes used. 


Note 4. In Homer these pronouns are often written separ- 
ately. E. g. ἐμεῦ αὐτῆς, for ἐμαυτῆς. 


68 _ INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$9 67, 68. 


Nore 5. The Ionians use εωῦ for av. E. g. ἐμεωυτοῦ for 
ἐμαυτοῦ. (Ὁ 9. Ν. 3.) 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 


§ 67. The possessive pronouns are derived from the per- 
sonal pronouns. In signification they are equivalent to the 
genitive of the personal pronoun, 


ἐμός, ή, ὄν, my, : Ἔ item ἐμοῦ 
γωΐτερος, a, ον, of us two, | veri 
ἡμέτερος, α, OY, OUT, ἡ ἡμεῖς 
σός, σή, σόν, thy, ain τ δον 
σφωΐτερος, α, ον, of you two, σφῶξ 
' ες ~ 
ὑμέτερος, α, OY, Your, ““ ὡμεῖς 
« c " Γ᾿. ᾿ Σ 
ὃς, ἣ, ὃν, - his, her, tts, ee Oe 
σφέτερος, a, ov, their, “ σφεῖς 


Nore 1. Diatects. First Person Plur, Dorie ἅ duos (long a), 
Epi¢ ἀμός (long-«), for ἡ ἡμέτερος. In the Attic poets ἀμός 18 
equivalent to the singular éuog. 

Second Person Sing. Tonic and Doric τεύς for σός, Plur. 
Doric and Epic ὑὕμός (long v), for v ὑμέτερος: 

Third Person Sing. Ionic and Doric és for ὅς, Plur. Epic 
and Doric σφύς for σφέτερος. 


Nore 2. The dual νωΐτερος and σφωΐτερος are used only by the poets. 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN, 


§ 6S. The interrogative pronoun tic, who? which? what 7 
is declined in the following manner : 


S. M. F. N. 12. M. FN. PMP. NN. 
N. tic τί Ν. τίνε ΟΝ, τίνες τίνα 
G. τίνος,τοῦ τίνος, τοῦ G. τίνοιν. α. τένων Tipo 
D. tin, τῷὀ τίνι τῷ 10. tivow D. τίσι(ν) τἰσι(») 
A. τίνα τί A. tive A. tivag τίνα 


The forms τοῦ, τῷ, , must not be confounded with the articles 
τοῦ, τῷ. 


Nore. Diatecrs. Sing. G. Epic τέο, Ionic and Dorie τεῦ, 
for tov, D. Ionic τέῳ for τῷ, Plur. Jonic, G. τέων, 10. τέοις, 
τέοισι. 


$§ 69, 70.1 _. PRONOUN. 69 
INDEFINITE PRONOUN. - 


§ 69. 1. The indefinite pronoun τὶς (grave accent), any, 
certain, some, is declined as follows: 


S. M. F. N. D. M.F.N. P. M. F. ΟΝ. 

Ν. εὶς ghee N. τινὲ "Ὁ Ν. τινὲς τινὰ 

G. τινὸς, τοῦ τινὸς, τοῦ α. τινοῖν α. τινῶν τινῶν. 

Ὦ. τιῤὲ, τῷ τινὶ τῷ Ὁ. τινοῖν D. τισὶ(») τισὶ(ν) 

Α. τινὰ τὶ A. τινὲ Α. τινὰς τινὰ, ἄσσα 


Nore 1. Diatecrs. Sing. G. Epic τέο, Ionic and Doric τεῦ, 
for τοῦ, D. Ionic τέῳ for τῷ, Plur. G. Ionic τέων, all enclitic. 


2. The indefinite pronoun δεῖνα, such-a-one, is declined as 
follows : 


S. All genders. P. Ali genders, 
N. δεῖνα : : N. δεῖνες 

G. δεῖνος G. δείνων 

D. δεῖνι D. 

A. δεῖνα A 


Note 2. Aristophanes (Thesm. 622) has rod δεῖνα, for τοῦ δεῖνος. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 
§ 79. The demonstrative pronouns are ὅδε, οὗτος, and 
ἐκεῖνος. 


Ὅ δε is simply the article with the inseparable particle δέ. 
Thus, ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, G. τοῦδε, τῆσδε. 


Οὗτος is declined as follows: 


S. M. (this) F’. (this) NN. (this) 
N. οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο 
, , 
G τούτου ταύτης τούτου 
D τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ 
Α. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο 
D. (these two) (these two) (these two) 
N. A. τούτω ταῦτα τούτω 
G. D. τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν 
P. (these) (these) (these) 
N. οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
σα. τούτων τούτων τούτων 
Ὁ. τούτοις ταῦταις τούτοις 
‘ ΄ , - 
Α: τούτους ~ ταῦυτὰς ταῦτα 


“᾿ ἜΤ ΚΣ ΤΡ ah eS ee eee oe “7 


x 


‘ ' ie - ͵ 
70 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ ΤΙ. 
Ἐκεῖνος, he, that, is declined like οὗτος. Thus, ἐκεῖνος, ἡ, 0, 
G. ἐκείνου, ης, ov. 


i- 


Nore 1. Diatects. D. Plur. Epic τοΐσδεσσι, τοΐσδεσι, for 
τοῖσδε," from ods. 

The Tonians insert an ¢ before the endings of τούτου, ταύτης, 
τούτω, τούτων, τούτους. Εἰ. g. τουτέου for τούτου. 


For ἐχεῖνος, the Ionic dialect has χεῖνος, the Doric, "τῆνος, 
and the Afolic, κῆνος. »- 


Nore 2. The letter ὁ (long) is Gen appended to the de- 
monstrative pronouns a the sake of emphasis. Εἰ g. οὑτοσί, 
αὑτηΐ, this here; ἐκειγοσί, that there. | 

~The short vowel is dropped before . E. g. o0é, ἡδέ, τοδί. 


τουτί, ταυτί, for odet, ἡδεῖ, τοδεί, τουτοΐ, ταυταΐ. 
RELATIVE PRONOUN. 


§ 71. 1. The relative pronoun ὅς, who, which, that, is de- 
clined as follows: 


53. M. FL ON. D. M. F. N. P. Bie Pin, 
N. ὃς ἢ ὃ Ν. ὦ ἃ ὥ N. of αἵ ἃ 

= yz p = τ τ € = = 
G. ov ἧς ov G. οἷν aw ow G. ov ὧν ὧν 
D.a ἡ @ D. οἷν αἷν οἷν D. οἷς αἷς οἷς 

{ { ὄ Α c c c A co ] cq 
A. ὃν ἢν ὁ oO ὦ Q) . οὖς oC oO 


2. The relative ὅστις, whoever, who, is compounded of o¢ 
and the indefinite pronoun tis, which are separately declined. 
Thus, 


S. ἡ. F. N. 

N. a ὅστις . ἥτις oD ee 

G. οὗτινος, ὅτου : ἧστινος οὗτινος, ὅτου 

Ὁ. ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ τινι ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ 

A. ὅντινα ἥντινα" ὅ τι 

Ρ. 
Ν. οἵτινες , ᾿αἵτιγνες ἅτινα, ἅττα Γ 

G. ὦντινων, ὅτὼν ὠὡντινωῶν ὧγτινων, ὅτων 

D. οἵστισι(ν), ὅτοισιί(»ν) αἷστισι(ν ο͵ἵστισι(ν), στοισι(») 
A. οὕστινας ἅστινας ἅτινα, ἅττα 


The neuter 6 τὸ is often written ὅ,τι, to prevent its being 
confounded with the conjunction ὅτι, that. 


΄ 


§§ 72, 78. PRONOUN, τ cou 


Note 1. Diatects. Sing. Epic, N. ὅτις for ὅστις, α. ἃ ὅτεο, 
ὅτευ, ὅττευ, for ὅτου, D. ὅτεῳ for ὅτῳ, A. ὅτινα, neut, ὅττι, for 
ὅντινα, ὃ τί, respectively, Plur. Ionic, G. orewy for ὅτων, Ὁ. 
ὁτέοισι, fem. δτέῃσι. 

The accusative singular ὅτινα stands also for the neuter 
plural ἅτινα. 

Nore 2. ‘The particle πέρ, is often appended to ὃς. E, g. 
ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὥπερ, G. οὕπερ, ἧσπερ, written also separately ὃς 
περ, n σερ, ὃ περ. 

Nore 3. The particle οὖν is often appended to the com-. 


pound relatives: ὅστις and ὅσπερ. Ἐν g. ὁστισοῦν, δσπεροῦν, 
whoever, written also separately, ὅστις οὐν, ὅσπερ OUP. 


RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 


§ 42. The reciprocal pronoun is ἀλλήλων, of one e another. 
The nominative case and the singular moanbey are of course 


wanting : 


σα. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 
D. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 
Ἂς ae ἀλχήλα ae 

i ag 

G. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων 
D. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις 
Α. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα 


PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 738. 1. From the obsolete ox, what? ‘O02, who, 
and ΤΌΣ, this, and from the relative pronoun ὅς, who, come 
the following corresponding pronominal adjectives : 


Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative, 


| πόσος, how much? ποσός, of α τόσος OF τοσόσδε ὅσος OF 
how many ? certain OF τοσοῦτος, SO 070006, as 
quantity = much much as 


72 


motos, of what 


quality ? certain Or τοιοῦτος, such ὁποῖος, as 
quality 
πότερος, Which of wanting wanting ὅπότερος, 
the two? whichever 
of the two 
πόστος, of what wanting wanting © oncotos, of 
number ? - what num- 
ber soever 
ποσταῖος, in how wanting wanting ὅποσταῖος, 
many days ? ae in what- 
ever num- 
3 ber of days 
πηλίκος, howold? πηλίκος, of τηλίκος or τηλι-Ἢ ἡλίκος OF 
how large? a certain κόυδε OF τηλι-- omnhixos, 
age, of a κοῦτος, so old, as old as, 
certain size so large as large as — 
ποδαπός, of what wanting wanting omodunoc, 
country ? of what 
country 
soever 
wanting wanting τύννος OF τυννοῦ- wanting 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


ποιός, Of @ τοῖος OF τοιόσδε 


τος, 80 little 


[ὁ 78. 


οἷος ΟΥ 


Note 1. Τοσοῦτος, τοιοῦτος, and τηλικοῦτος coincide’ with 
οὗτος in respect to the diphthongs ov and αὖ. 


τοσαύτη. 


In the neuter they have both o and ον. 


τοσοῦτον. 


E. g. τοσοῦτος, 


E. g. τοσοῦτο or 


Note 2. The demonstrative forms often take { (ὁ 70. N. 2). 


Εἰ. g. τοσουτοσί, as much as you see here. 
Here also the short vowel is dropped before the letter ἐ. 


E. g. tovovdi for τοσουδεῖ. 


Nore 3. The particle οὖν is often appended to the relative 
forms (§ 71. N. 3). E. g. δυοσοῦν, how much soever. 


2. The following adjectives also belong here: ' 

ἄμφω, both, G. Ὁ. ἀμφοῖν, used 
only in'the dual. 

ἕκαστος, ἡ, ov, each, every. 


ἀλλοδαπός (ἀλλοςὶ, 7, ov, foreign. 
ἄλλος, ἡ, 0, other. (§ 33. N. 1.) 
ἀμφότερος (ἄμφω), a, ov both. 


$74] | or 73 


ἑκάτερος, a, ov, each of two. παντοδαπός (πᾶς), ή, ov, of all 
ἕτερος, a, ον, other, another. kinds. 
ἡμεδαπός (ἡδεῖ. ἡ, Ov, Our ὑμεδαπός (ὑμεῖς), ἡ, Ov, Your 
countryman, countryman, 
ἔδιος, a, ον, proper, peculiar, 
his own. 
VERB 


§ 74. 1. The Greek verb has three voicrs; 
the active voice, the passive voice, and the middle 
voice. 


2. There are five moons; the indicative, the 
subjunctive, the optative, the ἩΡΡΨΒΕΝΝ and the 
infinitive. 


3. There are six TENSES, the present, the imper- 
fect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future, and the 
aorist. 

The primary or leading tenses are the Jets 
the perfect, and the future. 

The secondary or historical tenses are the im- 
perfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist. 3 


4, The indicative is the only mood in which the 
imperfect and pluperfect are found.. The subjunc- 
tive and imperative want also the future. 


5. There are three persons; the first person, 
the second person, and the third person. 


74 


Present. 

Imperfect. 
Perfect 1. 
Perfect 2. 


Pluperfect 1. 
Pluperfect 2. 


Future 1. 
Future 2. 
Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Future 1. 
Future 2. 
Future 3. 
Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Future. 1. 
Future 9, 
Aorist 1. 
Aorist 2. 


δὰ deal Whereis 
INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$ 74. 
Synopti-. 
ACTIVE 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. | 
τύπτω τύπτω 
ἔτυπτον 
τέτυφα τετύφω 
τέτυπα τετύπω. 
ἐτετύφειν 
ἐτετύπειν 
τύψω 
4 
τυπέω 
ETU WO, τύψω 
ξυκρα ite 
PASSIVE 
τύπτομαι τὐπτωμαι 
ἑτυπτόμην memes ΠΝ 
τέτυμμοιι τετυμμένος ὦ 
ἐτετύμμην -- 
τυφϑήσομαι 
τυπήσομαι 
τετύψομαι "πὶ 
ἐτύφϑην τυφϑώ 
ἑτύπην τυπῶ 
MIDDLE 
τύπτομαι τύπτωμαι 
ἐτυπτόμην 9 ἢ 
τέτυμμαι τετυμμένος ὦ 
ἐτετύμμην ------ 
cae —— 
τυπέομαι ----- 
ἐτυψάμην. τύψωμαι 
ἐτυπόμην τύπωμοαι 


84] 
cal Table. 
VOICE. 


VERB. 


75 


OpraTive. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 


τύπτοιμι 


τετύφοιμι 
τετύποιμι 


τύψοιμι 
4 
τυπέοιμι 
τύψαιμι 
τύποιμι 


VOICE. 


τυπτοίμην 


τετυμμένος εἴ- 


τυφϑησοίμην 
τυπησοίμην 
τετυψοίμην 


τυφϑείην 
τυπείην 
VOICE. 


τυπτοίμην 


τυψοίμην 
τυπεοίμην 
᾿τυψαίμην 
τυποίμην 


[ην 


TETUMMEVOS EL- 


τύπτε 


, 
TETUQE 
ceUe 
TETUILE 


TUNTOV 


TETUWO 


τύφϑητι 
τύπηϑι 


τύπτου 


τέτυψο 


τύπτειν 


τετυφέναι 
τετυπέναι 


ὔ 
τύινειν 
bic 
τυπέειν 
τύψαι 
τυπεῖν 


τύπτεσθαι 


τετύφϑαι 


τυφϑήσεσθαι 
ευπήσεσϑαι 
τετύψεσθϑαι 


τυφϑηναι 
τυπήναι 


τύπτεσθαι 


τετύφϑαι 


τύψεσϑαι 
τυπέεσϑαι 
τύψασϑαι 
τυπεσϑαι 


τύπτων 


τετυφώς 
τετυπώς 


παν 


πρνρκολεῖ δν ὦ 


᾿τύψων 


τυπέων 
τύψας 
τυπών 


, 
τυπτόμενος 


τετυμμένος 
[νος 
τυφϑησόμε- 
τυπησόμενος 
τετυψόμενος 
τυφϑείς 
τυπείς 


τυπτόμενος 


; 
TETUUMEVOS 


τυψόμενος 
τυπεόμενος 
τυψάμενος 
τυπόμενος 


76 


bat 7 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὁ 74. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present. 1 strike, I am striking. 


, 4 
τύπτω 10. τύπτομεν Ῥ, τύπτομεν 
΄ ἈΦ 22 eee ὴ 
τύπτεις , τὐπτετον. τύπτετε 
[4 - ’ } 
τύπτει “ τὔπτετον τὐπτουσι(ν») 


Imperfect. J struck, I was striking. 


ἔτυπτον D. ἐτύπτομεν P. ἐτύπτομεν 

ἔτυπτες ἐτύπτετον ἐτύπτετε 

ἔτυπτε(») ἐτυπτέτην ἔτυπτον 
Perfect 1. 7 have struck. 

τέτυφα 1). τετύφαμν (ΟΡ. τετύφαμεν 

τέτυφας τετύφατον τετύφατε 

τέτυφε(ν) τετύφατον τετυφᾶσι(») 


Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
τέτυπα, inflected like Perfect 1. 


Pluperfect 1. J had struck. 


, fin ΄ 
ἐτετύφειν 1). ἐτετύφειμεν P. ἐτετύφειμεν 
ἐτετύφεις ἐτετύφειτον οὐ ἐτετύφειτε 
ἐτετύφει ἐτετυφείτην ἐτετύφεισαν OF -ἔσαν 


Pluperfect 2. Synonymous with Pluperfect 1. 
ἐτετύπειν, inflected like Pluperfect 1... 


Future 1. J shall or will strike. 


τύψω 1). τύψομεν !Ῥ. τύψομεν 
τύψεις ο΄ τύψετον τύψετε 
τύψει τύψετον τύψουσι(ν). 


Future 2. Synonymous with Future! 1. 
τυπέω contracted τυπῶ, inflected like φιλέω (§ 116). 


Aorist 1. I struck. 


ἔτυψα 1). ἐτύψαμεν !Ῥ. ἐτύψαμεν 
‘ > , 

ἔτυψας . ἐτύψατον ἐτύψατε 

᾿ 2 > , 

ἔτυψε(») ἐτυψάτην ἔτυψαν 


Aorist ὦ. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 


ἔτυπον, inflected like the Imperfect. — ea Ey 


i 
μι μῶν. eS eee 


§ 74.] ACTIVE VOICE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present. J strike, I may or can strike. 


, 
S. τύπτω !9. τύπτωμεν Ῥ. τύπτωμεν 
, 
τύπτῃς : τύπτητον τύπτητε 
, 
τύπτῃ τύπτητον τὐπτωσι(ν) 


Perfect 1. JI have, or may have, struck. 
τετύφω, inflected like the Present. 


Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
τετύπω, inflected like the Present. 


Aorist 1. J strike, I may or can strike. 


S. τύψω 12. τύψωμεν P. τύψωμεν 
τύψης τύψητον τύψητε 
τύψῃ τύψητον τύψωσι(ν) 


Aorist 2... Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τύπω, inflected like Aorist 1. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present. I might, could, would, or should strike. 


r , Ἶ 
5. τύπτοιμι 1). τύπτοιμεν Ῥ τύπτοιμεν 
τύπτοις τύπτοιτον τύπτοιτε 
[4 
τύπτου τυπτοίτην TUNTOLEY 


Perfect 1. I might, could, would, or should have struck. 
τετύφοιμι, inflected like the Present. 


Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
τετύποιμι, inflected like the Present. 


Future 1. J would or should strike. 
τύψοιμι, inflected like the Present. 


Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
τυπέοιμι contracted τυποῖμι, like φιλέοιμι (ὃ 116). 


Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should strike. 


5. τύψαιμι. 19. τύψαιμεν - . τύψαιμεν 
τύψαις τύψαιτον τύψαιτε 
τύψαι τυψαίτην . τύψαιεν 


Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τύποιμι, inflected like the Present. 
Ke 


"τον 
ἐν re 


ἤν ΠΤ ταν 


78 INFLECTION QF WORDS. [ὁ 74. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Present. Strike thou, be thou striking. 


8S. D. P. 
τύπτε τύπτετον τύπτετε 
τυπτέτω τυπτέτων τυπτέτωσαν OF --πτόντων 
Perfect 1. Have struck. 
τέτυφε, inflected like the Present. 
Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
τέτυπε, inflected like the Present. 
Aorist 1. — Strike thou. 
S. a ee D. SS PP: 
τύψον τύψατον τύψατε 
τυψάτω τυψάτων τυψάτωσαν ΟΥ̓ -ἄντων 


Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
tine, inflected like the Present. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present. τύπτειν, to strike, to be striking. 

Perfect 1. τετυφέναι, to have struck. 

Perfect 2. τετυπέναι, synonymous with Perfect 1 : 
Future 1. τύψειν, to be about to strike. | | | 
Future 2. τυπέειν contracted τυπεῖν, synonymous with Pues 1. 
Aorist 1. τύψαι, to strike. 

Aorist ὦ, τυπεῖν, synonymous with Aorist 1. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Present. τύπτων, οὐσα, ον, striking. (δ 53. 7.) 

Perfect 1. τετυφώς; via, ός, having struck, (§ ὅ8. θ) 
Perfect 2, τετυπώς, via, ds, Synonymous with Perfect 1. (ibid-) 
Future 1. τύψων, ουσα, ον, about to strike. (§ 53. 7.) 

Future 2. τυπέων, ἕουσα, gov, contracted τυπῶν, οὔσα, ovr. (ibid.) 
Aorist 1. τύψας, aoa, av, striking, having struck. (§ 53. 1.) 
Aorist 2. τυπώ»ν, οὖσα, όν, synonymous with Aorist 1. (§ 53. 7.) 


ᾧ 74.] . | ; PASSIVE VOICE. , 79 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present. J am struck. 


τύπτομαι 12. τυπτόμεϑον P. τυπτόμεϑα 

τύπτῃ ΟΥ̓ -πτεν τύπτεσϑον τύπτεσϑε 

τύπτεται τύπτεσϑον τύπτονται 
« 

Imperfect. I was struck. ; 
ἐτυπτόμην D. ἐτυπτόμεϑον =P. ἐτυπτόμεϑα 
ἐτύπτου ἐτύπτεσϑον ἐτύπτεσϑε 
ἔτύπτετο ἐτυπτέσϑην ἐτύπτοντο 

Perfect. I have been struck. 
τέτυμμαν 12. τετύμμεϑον. P. τετύμμεϑα 
᾿τέτυψαν τέτυφϑον ο΄ τέτυφϑε 
τέτυπταν τέτυφϑον τετυμμένοι εἰσέ 
Pluperfect. J had been struck. 
ἐτετύμμην 190. ἐτετύμμεϑον (Ῥ. ἐτετύμμεϑα 
ἐτέτυψο ἐτέτυρϑον ἐτέτυφϑε ‘ 
ἐτέτυπτο ἐτετύφϑην τετυμμένοι ἦσαν 
Future 1. J shall or will be struck. 
τυφϑήσομαι D. τυφϑησόμεϑον P. τυφϑησόμεϑα 
τυφϑήσῃ ΟΥ̓ -σεὺ τυφϑήσεσϑον τυφϑήσεσϑε 
τυφϑήσεται τυφϑήσεσϑον τυφϑήσονται 


Future ὦ, Synonymous with Future 1. 
τυπήσομαι, inflected like Future 1. 


Future 8. I shall remain struck. 
τετύψομαι, inflected like Future 1. 


Aorist 1. JZ was struck. 


ἐτύφϑην 12). ἐτύφϑημεν P. ἐτύφϑημεν 
ἐτύφϑης ἐτύφϑητον ἐτύφϑητε 
ἐτύφϑη ἐτυφϑήτην ἐτύφϑησαν 


Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
ἐτύπην, inflected like Aorist 1. 


er 


τ τας 


INFLECTICN OF WORDS. [ὃ 74. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present.’ I am struck, I may or can be struck. 


i 4 
τύπτωμαι D. τυπτώμεϑον P. τυπτώμεϑα 
[4 , 
τύπτῃ ; τύπτησϑον τύπτησϑε 
[4 
τύπτηται τυπτησϑον τύπτωνται 


Perfect. I have been struck, I may have been struck. 


~ 
32 


τετυμμένος (η, ov) ὦ, ἧς; 1 
"τετυμμένω (a, ὦ) ὦμεν, ἦτον, ἦτον 


* 
τετυμμένοι (αι, α) ὦμεν, ἦτε, ὠσι(») 


Aorist 1. JZ am struck, I may or can be struck. 


τυφϑὼ D. τυφϑῶμεν 0. τυφϑῶμεν 
τυφϑῆς τυφϑῆτον τυφϑῆτε 
τυφϑὴ τυφϑῆτον τυφϑὼῶσι(ν) 


Aorist ὦ, Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τυπῶ, inflected like Aorist 1. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present. I might, could, would, or should be struck. 


tuntoiuny (1). τυπτοίμεϑον P. τυπτοίμεϑα 
[4 

τύπτοιο τύπτοισϑον - τύὐπτοισϑὲ 

τύπτοιτο τυπτοίσϑην τύπτοιντο 


Perfect. I might, &c. have been struck. 


τετυμμένος (7, ov) εἴην, εἴης, εἴη 
τετυμμένω (α, wm) εἴημεν, εἴητον, εἰήτην 
τετυμμένοι (αι, α) εἴημεν, εἴητε, εἴησαν 


Future 1. J should, or would be struck. 
τυφϑησοίμην, inflected like the Present. 


Future 2, Synonymous with Future 1. 
τυπησοΐμην, inflected like the Present. 


Future 3. I should or would remain struck. 


_ τετυψοίμην, inflected like the Present. 


Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should be struck. 

τυφϑείην D. τυφϑείημεν (Ῥ. τυφϑείημεν ΟΥ̓--εἶμεν 

τυφϑ sing τυφϑείητον τυφϑείητε OF -εἶτε 

τυφϑ sin τυφϑειήτην τυφϑείησαν ΟΥ̓ --εἴεν 
Aorist 9. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 

τυπείην, inflected like Aorist 1. 


eS ee ee ἀντ 


eS a a ee ee ee ee ee ee en ae See 


a 'ν 
ᾧ 74.] PASSIVE VOICE. 81 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. Be thou struck. 
S. D. — ΟΡ. 
τύπτου τύπτεσϑον τύπτεσϑε 
τυπτιέσϑω τυπτέσϑων τυπτέσϑωσαν OY -otuy 
| Perfect. Be thou struck. 
S. D. —— PP. 
τέτυψο τέτυφϑον τέτυφϑε 
τετύφϑω τετύφϑων τετύφϑωσαν ΟΥ̓́-Ξφϑων 


Aorist 1. Be thou struck. 
ἂν... Ξ JP &-. 


τύφϑητι τύφϑητον τύφϑητε 
τυφϑήτω τυφϑήτων τυφϑήτωσαν OF -φϑέντων 


Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1 
τύπηϑι, inflected like Aorist 1. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present. τύπτεσϑαι, to be struck. 

Perfect. τετύφϑαι, to have been struck. 

Future 1. τυφϑήσεσϑαι, to be about to be struck. 
Future 2. τυπήσεσϑαι, Synonymous with Future 1. 
Future 3. τετύψεσϑαι, to remain struck. Ὁ 

Aorist 1. τυφϑῆναι, to be struck. 

Aorist ὦ, τυπῆναι, synonymous with Aorist 1 


PARTICIPLE. 


Present. τυπτόμενος, ἡ, ov, being struck. 

Perfect. τετυμμένος, ἡ, ov, struck, having been struck. 

Future 1. τυφϑησόμενος, ἡ, ov, about to be struck. 

Future 2. τυπησόμενος, ἡ, ov, Synonymous with Future 1. 

Future 3. τετυψόμενος, about to remain struck. | 

Aorist 1. τυφϑ εἰς, sion, ἕν, being struck. (§ 53. 3.) 

Aorist 2. τυπείς, εἴσα, ἕν, synonymous with Aorist 1, (ibid. ) 
All participles in og are inflected like σοφός (§ 49. 1). 


82 INFLECTION OF WORDS.: | [ὃ 74. 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present. J strike myself. 
τυπτομαι, like the Present Passive. 


Imperfect. I was striking myself. 
ἐτυπτόμην, like the Imperfect Passive. 


Perfect. I have struck myself. 
τέτυμμαι, like the Perfect Passive. 


Pluperfect. 17 had struck myself. 
ἐτετύμμην, like the Pluperfect Passive. | 


΄ Future 1. J shall strike myself. 
τύψομαι, inflected like the present. 


Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1, 
Ὁ τυπέομαι contr. τυποῦμαι, inflected like φιλέομαι (§ 116). 


Aorist 1. J struck myself. 


5. ἐτυψάμην 1). ἐτυψάμεϑον P. ἐτυψάμεϑα 
ἐτύψω ἐτύψασϑον ἐτύψασϑε 
ἐτύψατο © ἐτυψάσϑην ἐτύψαντο 


, Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1, 
Ἢ ἐτυπόμην, inflected like the Imperfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present. J strike, I may or can strike myself. 
τύπτωμαι, the same as in the Passive. 


Perfect. 7 have, or may have, struck myself. 
τετυμμένος (7, ov) ὦ, as in the Passive. 


Aorist 1. J strike, or may or can strike, myself. 
Suppo 12. τυψώμεϑον P. τυψώμεϑα 
Tuy τύψησϑον τύψησϑε 
τύψηται ο΄ τύψησϑαν, τύψωνται 


; Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τύπωμαι, inflected like Aorist 1. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


Present. I might, &c. strike myself. 
tuntoiuny, the same as in the Passive. 


§ 74.] MIDDLE VOICE. 83 


Perfect. I might, &c, have κὠνοῖ myself. 
τετυμμένος (η, ov) εἴην, as in the Passive. 


Future 1. JZ should or would strike myself. 
τυψοίμην, inflected like the Present. 


Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
τυπεοίμην contr. τυποίμην inflected like φιλεοίμην (ὃ 116). 


Aorist 1. I might, &c. strike myself. 

5. τυψαίμην 7). τυψαίμεϑον P. τυψαίμεϑα 
τύψαιο᾽ τύψαισϑον τύψαισϑε 
τύψαιτο τυψαίσϑην τύψαιντο 

Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τυποίμην, inflected like the Present. 


. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. Strike thyself 


τύπτου, as in the Passive, 


Perfect. Strike thyself. 
τέτυψο, aS im the Passive. 


Aorist I. Strike thyself. 
D. PP, 

τύψαι τύψασϑον - τύψασϑε 

τυψάσϑω τυψάσϑων τυψάσϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ -σϑὼν 


; Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
τυποῦ, inflected like the Present. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present. τύπτεσϑαι, to strike one’s self. 
Perfect. τετύφϑαι, to have struck one’s self. 
Future 1. τύψεσϑαι, to be about to strike one’s self. 


Future 2. τυπέεσϑαι contracted τυπεῖσϑαι, synonymous with 
Future 1. 


Aorist 1. τύψασϑαι, to strike one’s self. 
Aorist ὦ, τυπέσϑαι; synonymous with Aorist f. 


~PARTICIPLE. 


Present., τυπτόμενος, ῃ, ov, striking himself. 

Perfect. τετυμμένος, ἡ, ov, having struck himself. 

Future 1. τυψόμενος, ῃ, ov, about to strike himself. 

Future 2. τυπεόμενος contracted τυπούμενος, ἡ; on; synonymous 
with Future 1. 

Aorist 1. τυψάμενος, ἡ, ον, striking or having ick himself. 

Aorist 2. τυπόμενος, ἡ, ov, synonymous with Aorist 1. 


/ 


Ss. 


84 | | INFLECTION OF WorDs. | [δὴ 75, 76. 
AUGMENT. — 


ἃ 75. 1. The perfect and third future of all 
the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect, 
aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an 
increase at the beginning, called augment. 


2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic 
augment, and the temporal augment. 

The syllabic augment is formed by prefixing a 
syllable or two syllables to the verb. ! 

The temporal augment is formed by lengthening 
the first syllable of the verb. 


SYLLABIC AUGMENT. . 


§ 76. 1. When the verb begins with a con- 
sonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment 
of the perrect is formed by prefixing to the verb 


that consonant together with ane. Εἰ g. 


τύπτω perf. τέτυφα, τέτυμμαι 
γράφω ““ γέγραφα, γέγφαμμαι. 
So ϑύω, τέϑυκχα φύω, πέφυκα" χαίνω, κέχηνα᾽" χρθάω, κέχρη- 


μαι. (δ᾽ 14. 3.) 
This kind of syllabic augment is called reduplication. 


2. When the verb begins with a double con- 
sonant (ζ, & yw), or with two consonants the second 
of which is not a liquid, the augment of the PER- 
FECT is formed by prefixing ane. E. g. 


’ wl ’ 
ζητέω —ssperf. ἐζήτηκα, ἐζήτημαι 

[4 » 57 > 
oxanmta  ‘“ guxege, ἕσχαμμαι. 


Norz 1. Some verbs beginning with a liquid take εἰ instead of the redupli- 
cation. See the Anomalous λαγχάνω, oe λέγω collect, pagan: 
"PE. say. 

Nore 2. Verbs beginning with 8}, Ἂ; uy, are variable in 
the augment of the perfect. Ks. g. γλύφω, ἔγλυφα ΟΥ̓ γέγλυφα" 
μνημονεύω, ἐμνημόνευκα * μιμνήσχω; μέμνημαι. 


δῷ 77-79.] ” Ra Pega τ... ο 88 


Those beginning with yy always 2 ge ane. = g. γνωρίξω, 


ἐγνώρικα. 


Nore 8. In a few instances, verbs vexing with #¢ take the reduplication. 
See the Anomalous πήσ τω, rrjccw. “ 
The verb xrdouas, possess, has perf. pass. tzrnjeou and κέκτημαι. 


Nore 4. The Epic language, in a few instances, prefixes the initial consonant 
together with ang Ἐν ge dia, δείδια for δέδια. 
§ 77. 1. The augment of the PLUPERFECT is 
formed by prefixing an ε to the reduplication of the 
perfect. (§ 76.1.) Ev g. 


τύπτω, τέτυφα  pluperf. ἐτετύφειν. 


2. But when the perfect begins with «, the plu- 


perfect takes no additional augment. (ὃ 76. 2.) E 


σχκάπτω, ἑσκαφα pluperf. ἐσκάφειν. 


Nore 1. The additional augment 8 of the pluperfect 1 is often : 


. omitted. KE. g: τελευτάω, ἐτετελευτήκειν OF τετελευτήκειν. 


Nore 2. The verb terns often lengthens the syllabic augment ¢ into εἰ in 
the pluperfect active. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 


§ 78. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
the augment of the ImpERFECT and aorisT is 
formed by prefixing an «. E.g. 

τύπτω imperf. ἔτυπτον ἃοΥ, ἔτυψα. 


Nore 1. These four verbs, ὀούλομαι; δύναμαι, λαύω, and μέλλω, often take 
the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. See in the catalogue of An- 
omalous Verbs. ὦ 


Nore 2. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and 
mddle often takes the reduplication through all the moods and 
participle. E. g. χάμνω, xéxauor’ λαμβάνω, λελαβόμην. 

In some instances an ε is prefixed to this medaplaesiiinn but 
only in the indicative. E. g. φράζω, πέφραδον or ἐπέφραδον. 


Nore 3. The syllabic augment of the imperfect and of the 
aorist is often omitted by the epic poets. E. g. φέρω, φέρον for 
ἔφερον" τρέπω; toanouny for ἐτραπόμην. 


ὃ 79. When the verb begins with 9, the aug- 
ment is formed by prefixing an ¢, and doubling the 
ρ (ὁ 13). Eg. " 


ῥάπτω, imperf. ἔῤῥαπτον, perf. ἔῤῥαφα, pluperf. ἐῤ Gidget aor, 


273. ς 


ἔῤῥαψα. 


ἊΣ 
ἂς τος 


86 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ 80. 


Nore 1. Ina few instances, Homer does not double the e after the syllabic 
augment. E. g. pila, ἔρεξα for ἔῤῥεξα. 

Norz 2. The verb ῥυσόω, in oa has perf, pass. . part eens for 
ἐῤῥυπωμένα. 


Nore 3. The verbs AEIQO, “MEIPO, and σεύω, in some of the past 
tenses, double the initial consonant after «.- See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
ν : , - 


TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 


§ 80. 1. When the verb begins with a short 
vowel, the augment of all the past tenses is formed 
by lengthening that vowel. 4 and ε pecs > 
and o becomes ὦ. E.g. © 

ἀκολουϑέω, imperf. “ἠκολούϑεον, perf. Si RNa, pluperf. 

ἠκολουϑήκειν, aor. ἠκολούϑησα. 


ἐλεέω, ἡλέεον, ἡλέηκα, ἡλεήκειν, ἠλέησα. 
ὀρϑόω, ὠρϑοόμην, ὥρϑωμαι, ὠρϑώμην, Sotivow. 


So Yxstevw, txérevoy, ἱκέτευσα" Φγιαίνω, ὕγέαινον, ὕγίανα. 


2. If the vowel is already Jong, no change takes place ; 
except that @ (long) is commonly changed into η. Εἰ, g. ἥμε- 
ρόω, ἡμέροον" ὠδίνω, ὥδινον" Hace, ΓΗ : 


3. When the verb begins with a diphthong,, the augment is 


formed by changing the first vowel of that diphthong in the 


manner above specified (§ 80. 1, 2). E. ¢ . αἰτέω, ἥτεον " ᾷδω, 
dor" αὐλέω, ηὔλεον " εὔχομαι, ηὐχόμην" Pe γῆς, ᾧκεον. 


For the iota subscript, see above (§ 3). 


Norte 1. Some verbs lengthen ε not into ἡ but into ¢ Such are ἑάω, ἐϑίφω, 
ἑλίσσω, tAnw, ἑλκύω, ἕρπω, ἕρπύξω, ἐργάζομαι, ἱστιάω. See also the Anomalous 
ἝΛΩ, ἕσω, ἔχω, ‘EO, ings. 


Norg 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment. 
See the Anomalous ἄγνυμι, ἁλίσκομιαι; ὡνδάνω, Elta, ape. EMMQ, zara, 
ἕννυμιγ EPTO, οὐρέω, ὠϑέω, aviouas. 


κ 


Nore 3. A few verbs beginning with a vowel take both the syllabic and tem- 
poral augment at the same time. See the Anomalous ἁνδάνω, ἔϑω, ines, οἴγω, 
ὁράω. See also the pluperfect of the anomalous εἴκω, ἔχπω, and EPL. 


Remark 1, The perfect of the Anomalous ἔϑω lengthens the syllabic aug- 
ment ¢ into «#. (Compare §§ 77. N. 2: 78. N. 1.) 


Remarx 2. The verb togr dw, (originally égré&w) changes te into lh in the 
augmented tenses. Εἰ. g. imperf. ἑώρφαζον. 


$§ 81, 82.] ' ΟΠ AUGMENT. 87 


Nore 4. The temporal augment is often omitted in the 
Attic dialect. E. g. an dLopne; waves τε 6 ete εὕρισκον " 
οἰγόω, οἴνοον. 

Verbs beginning with the diphthong ov are never aug- 
mented. E. g. ovragw, ovrafor, never ωὔταζον. 

‘Those beginning with «are seldom augmented. 


Nore 5. The Epic and the Ionic dialect may omit the tem- 
poral augment in all verbs. E. g. ἀγορεύω, ἀγόρευον " ἕζομαι, 
ἑζόμην " ὁμιλέω, ὁμίλεον. 


§ 91. 1. Some verbs beginning with «, ε, 0, followed by 
a single consonant, form the augment of the perrect by pre- 
fixing the first two letters to the temporal augment, KH. g. 


ay slow perf. ἤγερκα, ἀγ-ήγερκα 
ἐμέω ;- Hence, ἐμ-ήμεκα 
ὀρύσσω Φ ὄὦρυχα, ὀρ-ὥώρυχα. 

This kind of augment is called Attic reduplication. 

Verbs which take the Attic reduplication : ἀλείφω, ἀλέω, 
ἐλέγχω, ἑλίσσω; ἐμέω, ἐρείδω, ὀρέγω, ὁρύσσω. See also the An- 
omalous ἀγείρω, ἄγω, αἱρέω, ANEO?, ἀραρίσκω, ἀχέω, ἐγείρω, 
ἐλαύνω, »βάξέθῷ. ἜΝΕΓΚΩ, ἘΝΕΘΩ, ἐνείκω, πολ ἔχω, 
ἡμύω, ofa, ὄλλυμι, ὄμνυμι, ON, ὄρνυμι. 


2. The ῬΠΟΡΕΝΡΈΟΤ in- this case takes no additional aug- 
ment. E. δ. ἀγείρω, ἀγήγερκα, ἀγηγέρκειν. 

Except ἀκούω, ἀκήκοα, ἠκηκόειν" A ἐλαύνω, ἐλήλαμαι, ἡληλάμην. 
See also the Anomalous EAETON. 


Norr. The epic poets sometimes omit the augment of the second syllable. 
See the Anomalous ἀκαχιμένος, ἀλάοῤιαι, ἀραρίσκω, ἀχέω. β 


AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 


§ 82. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
receive the augment.after that preposition. E. g. 
προσ-7ράφω, imperf. προσ-έγραφον, perf. προσ-γέγραφα, plu- 
perf. προσ-εἐγεγράφειν, aor. προσ-ἔγραψα. 
προσ-άπτω, πρου-ἥπτον, προσ-ἦφα, προσ-ήφειν, προσ-ἥψα. 
So ἐμ- -πίπτω (ὃ 12. 1), ἐν-ἐπιπτον " ἐγ-κρίνω (§ 12.2), ἐνέ- 


κρίνον, ἐγ-κέρικα ᾿ συλ-λύω (§ 12. 3), συν-ἕλυον, συλ-λέλυκα" ov- 
ζυμόω (§ 12. 4), συν-εζύμοον " ἐκ-λύω (§ 15. 3%, ἐξ-ἕλυον. 


eae 
es 


΄΄ a. 


88 i INFLECTION or wonps: —— [589. 


Remark. Prepositions ending ina iia lose.that vowel before the syllabie 
augment ¢. “(ὃ 135. 8.). E. Q.< ἀποκόπστω, ἀπίκοπτον. 

Except σερί and wes. E. g. περικόπφω, περιέκοπτον " προλέγω, προέλεγον.- 
(ibid. ) ἢ ὍΝ 


Nore 1. Some verbs compounded with a preposition take the augment before 


sy» that preposition. Such are ἀμφισξητέω, ἀντιξολέω, ἐμπολάω, ἐναντιόομαι. See 


also the Anomalous auQibwups,, ἀμπέχω, ἀναλίσκω, ἀνοίγω, ἀφίημι, καϑέξοροαι» 


καϑίξω. 


ΝΟΤΕ 2. Some take the augment either before or after the preposition. 
E. g. προϑυμέομαι, ἱκρθνμῆδα.ν ΟΥ̓ προεϑυμβόμην. See also the Anomalous 
καϑεύδω. 


Nore 3. A ἣν verbs take the sintidncat ane and after the preposition at 
the same time, Such are ἀνορϑόω, διαιτάω, διωακονέω, ἐνοχιλέω, «΄ἀροινίω. See 
also the Anomalous meee ἀνέχω, κάϑημιαι. 


2. In verbs compounded » with other words the augment 
stands first. (ὃ 135.) E.g. 


᾿ἀσεβέω, ἡσέβεον, ἠσέβηκα, derived from ἀδεβής (ἀ-, σέβω). 


Nore 4. From ἱπιποτροφίω, derived from ἱπποτρόφος. (Ἴππος; wptow)s Ly- 


curgus forms perf. ἱπποτετρόφηκα for sali fo 


3. Verbs compounded with the particles εὖ and δυσ-, if they 
begin with «, ε, 0, take the augment after these particles. In 
all other cases the augment precedes’ these. mh a or, in 


compounds with εὐ, it may be omitted (ὃ 80. N. 4). ΤῸ, g. 


Spero. einotareoy, εὐηρέστηκα 
δυσαρεστέω, δυσηρέστεον, δυσηρέστηκα 
εὐδοκιμέω, ηὐδοκίμεον, ᾿ηὐδοκίμηκα 
δυστυχέω, ἐδυστύχεον, δεδυστύχηκα. 


VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 


ᾧ 83. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which 
are found in every part of that verb, It is obtained by drop- 
ping w of the present active 9 94: 96). E. g. the root of 
λέγω 15 dey. ; 

The root of a tense consists of those letters which are 
found 3 in every part of that tense. E. g. τυψ is εὐ root of the 
first future active of τύπτω. 


§ 84.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 89 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


§ 84. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
the primary tenses of the indicative. 


Active. | Passive and Middle. 
Person. Ist. 2d. θά." Ist, 2d. od. 
Singular. wit ae po σαι, αι ται 
Dual. wey τὸ τον μεϑον σϑὸν σϑον 
Plural. μὲν τὲ vou peter oFs = vta 


2. The following .are the terminations of the secondary 
tenses of the indicative. 


Active. , Paisine and Middle. 
Person. 1st. 2d. od. rae... οἷ 3d. 
Singular. ν ς -: μην σο, ο΄. το 
Dual. μὲν τὸ τῆν μεϑον σϑὸον σϑην 
Plural. μὲν τὲ σᾶν,ν μεδι᾽͵ os »τὸ 


Norz 1. The terminations μι. δηᾶ σι are found in the indicative of verbs in ws 
(§ 177). In the greatest number of verbs they are dropped.. E. g. σύπτω, 
σύστει, τέτυφα, τέτυφε, for τύπσομι, σύπστεσι, σετύφαμι, τεφτύφεσι. 


Nore 2. The first aorist active has no termination in the first person singular. 


Nore 3. The third person neue of the secondary tenses of the active has 
no termination. 


Nore 4. The termination cay is found in the pluperfect. Also in the im- 
perfect and second aorist of verbs in ws (δ 117)... Also in the aorist passive 
(ὃ 92). In all other cases it drops ca === 4 : 


The Alexandrian dialect frequently uses this termination in the imperfect and 
second aorist. E. g. σχάξω, ἐσχάζοσαν for ἔσχαξζον" EARYOQ, ἤλθοσαν 
for 7A Sov. 


Nore 5. The terminations Til, oo, are found in the perfect and pluperfect 
passive (§ 91). Also in verbs in ws (ὃ 117). Tn all other cases they drop σ- 


The Alexandrian dialect sometimes uses cas in the present passive of verbs in 
w. ἘΣ, g. ὀδυνάω, 2d pers. sing. ὀδυνάεσαι contracted ὀδυνῶσαι- 


Nore 6. Dratects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
lectic peculiarities of the indicative mood. 


Active. Sing. 2d pers. Old oda, ot, fors. The Attic dia~ 
lect uses o9@ in some instances. 
The old termination | σι is found only in 
the old ἐσσί for εἷς from εἰμί, am, 
3d pers. Doric zi for σι, as δίδωμι, δίδωτι for 
δίδωσι. 


90 INFLECTION OF WORDs. [ὃ 85. 


Plur. 1st pers. Doric μὲς for psy, aS ἐρίζω, ἐρίζομες 
for ἐρίζομεν.. 
3d pers. Doric γτὶ for vor, as μοχϑίζω, μοχϑί- 
Corte for’ μοχϑίξουσι ἀμνόν 15 μοχϑίζονσι). 


Passive. Sing. ‘Ist pers. Doric yay for μὴν, as ἐτυπτόμᾶν for 
_ ἐτυπτόμην.. 


Dual. 1st pers. Doric and poetic μεσϑὸν for μεϑον, as 
τυπτόμεσϑον for τυπτόμεϑον. 


Ῥίων. 1st pers. Doric and poetic μεσϑὰ for μεϑα, as 
τυπτόμεσϑα for τυπτόμεϑα.᾽ 

84 pers. Ionic and Epic ἅται, eto, for νται, ντο. 

These terminations are found in the per- 

fect and pluperfect passive. Also in the 

present and imperfect of verbs in μι (δ 117). 

The termination ezo is found also in the 


imperfect of verbs in  (§ 85. N. 6). 


§ 8. 1. The vowel, which stands between the termination 
and the root (S$ 83: 84), is called: the connecting vowel. It 
is an o in the first person of all the numbers, and in the third 
person plural; in all the rest it is an 8. Except that, 


(1) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, and first 
aorist active and middle, is anu. But in the third person 
singular of the perfect and of the first aorist active it 15 an 8. 


(2) The connecting vowel of the pluperfect active is an εἰ. 
In the third person plural it is an εἰ or δ. 


(3) The present and future active lengthen o into w, in the 
first person singular, and ε Into ἐν; ἴῃ the second and third 
person singular. 


2. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 


Pres. & Fut. Active. Pres. & Fut. Pass. ὦ Mid. 
Piet. 98... Bd: . Ist. 2d. 
S. 0 tic et -μαν 8δ- αἰ, ἢν, EL ἔ-ταν 
D. οτμὲν tov ἕ-τον -o-usPov e-oFor 8ισϑὸν 
P. o-usy ste ουσι(δ 12.5) | ο-μεϑα. ε-σϑε O-V TOL 
 Imperf. & 2d A. Act. Imp. Pass.& Mid. & 2.A.Mid. 
Σ΄, lat. 2d. 3d, Ist 2d. 3d. 
5. ον ἔς 8 Ἧ ο-μὴν τοιοῦ ὃ-το 
D. ο-μὲν s-tov ε-τὴν ὁ-μεϑον s-otov εἜ-σϑην 
af oH ἐν &-TE 0-». ᾿ς o-pedor ε-σϑε οο-ντο 


3, 


«“« 


ᾧ 85.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 91 


First Aorist Active. pitted Aorist Middle, 
οι ει 2d. .. 88. | ep hay 2d. 3d" 
3. o ) a-¢ 8 | o-uny α--Ο, ὦ α-τοὸ 

τς 1. ἀσμὲν α-τὸν αἀ-τὴν ἀ-μεϑον α-σϑὸν a-odny 
P. ἀ-μὲν α-ττὸ  a-v> ἀ-μεϑδι᾽. . αἀτσϑὲ ἄ-ντο 
Perfect Active. | 
δα 2d, ERAN Te OD 

S. α ed ἢ 8 

D. o-ew = aetov α-τον 

as Gey ᾿ς ἅπ-τὸ dot (ὃ 12. δ). 

Pluperfect Active. 

Ps. hohe εν RG... | 3d. 

S. &1-Y ες -$t=¢ : δὶ 

D. εἰι-μεν εὐττον ει-τὴν ; 

PP. ει-μεν €l-Ts » ξιτσαν; &-COLY 


ee ee a re 


ware 


ee eo See ae 


Remark 1. For the terminations of the first.and. third person singular of 
the active, see above (ὃ 84. N. I, 2, 3), 


Remark 2. The endings ez, ss, aa, of the second person singular of the 
passive and middle, are contracted into 7 or εἰ», ov, w, respectively. In Attic 
authors, ¢ is more common than 2. 


Nore 1. In some instances the third person plural of the perfect active 
takes ἄν foraz. E. g. γιγνώσκω, ἔγνωκαν. 


Nore 2. In the Alexandrian dialect the second aorist active and middle often. 


takes the connecting vowel « of the first aorist. E. g. ELAQ, εἶδα for εἶδον " 
φεύγω, ἔφυγαν for ἔφυγον " εὑρίσκω, sieduny for εὑρδμεην. 

On the other hand, the first aorist active and middle, in some instances, takes 
the connecting vowels (ὁ, ε) of the second aorist. See the Anomalous Baivw, 
δύω, ἱκνέομεαι- ᾿ 


Nore 8. The Doric dialect uses the short connecting 
vowel « in the second> ‘person singular of the present active. 
E. g. ἀμέλγω, ἀμέλγες for ἀμέλγεις. 


Notr 4. The Epic and the Ionic dialect. ΠΕΙ͂Ν in the singular 


of the pluperfect active, ea, sac, 8, for εἰν, εἰς; εἰ. E. g. yoive, 


ἐκεχήνεα, ἐκεχήνεας, EXEYNVEE. ; : 

The Attics contract these endings into ἡ, x, 7. 

In some instances the ending ¢z of the third person singular 
takes ν movable before a vowel. See the Anomalous L742. — 


Nore 5. In the imperfect and aorist active, the Epic and the 
Doric dialect often use the endings σχον, oxes, oxe, plur. 


ce 


5 ae 


92 _ + INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ἢ 86. 


σκομεν, oxete, oxov. In the imperfect passive and aorist middle 
they often use the endings σκομὴν, oxo, oxeto, plur. σκομεϑα, 
σκεσϑε, σκοντο. 
In the imperfect and second aorist of mute and liquid verbs, 
ane stands between these endings and the reot. ἘΣ, g. 
τύπτεσκον, τυπτεσχόμην for ὃ ἔτυπτον, ἐτυπτόμην 
τύπεσκον, τυπεσκόμην ““ ἔτυπον, ἐτυπόμην. 
In the imperfect of pure verbs these endings are very seldom 
preceded by «. 
In the first aorist active and siiddle ano stands between 
these endings and the root. ἘΣ, g. 
τύψασκον, τυψασκόμην for ἔτυψα, ἐτυψάμηνγ. 
In some instances the imperfect also prefixes an ἃ to these 
endings. E. g. κρύπτω, κρύπτασκον for ἔκρυπτον. 


Norte 6. The Tonic dialect uses the termination aro in the 
imperfect passive; in which case the connecting vowel be- 
comes ε, Εἰ. g. γράφω; ἐγραφέατο for éygaporto. In pure 
verbs the connecting vowel. is omitted before ato. E. g. μη- 
χανέομαι, ἐμηχανέατο. ces > 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


§ 8G. 1. The subjunctive mood uses the terminations of 
the primary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 1). 


2. Its connecting vowels are ὦ and 7. But the second and 
third person singular active have η. 


3. The following table exhibits the. terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 


. Active. * «Passive and Middle. 
Pet... 98. ae, Ist. 2d. 3d. 
S. ὦ 1-3 ἢ τ ὡτμᾶν  ἡταᾶι, ἢ ηπται 
12. ὡ-μὲν ἡ-ῖον -ἡ-τον. ὠ-μεϑον ηἡτσϑὸον -ηἡ-σϑὸον 
P. ὡ-μὲν 4-18 ὦσι (519. 5) |. ὡ-μεϑα η-σϑε ὠ-ν»ται 


Remark. The ending ya: in the second person singular of the passive and 
middle is contracted into 4. 


Nore 1. The perfect of the subjunctive active is sometimes formed by means 
of the perfect active participle and εἰμί, E. g. τεσυφὼς, (υἷα, ὃς) ὦ, ἧς» ἦν for 
τετύφω, ns, ἡ. 


ἐς eT 


.Ξ 


Us ΨΥ) ~~ 
Ver OF THE ARPS 
UNIV 5 Ἀ ΒΈΤΙ 
Note 2. The Epic language often uses cir, ῃ ΒΞ 
w, ἢς, 7» (ὃ 84. Ν. #) E. g. τύχωμι, τύχῃσϑα, τύχῃσι, for τ τύχω, 
ἢ,9) ἢ). 


Note 3. Sometimes the Epic language uses the connecting 
vowels (0, ε) of the indicative. Εἰ, g. ἐρύκω, φϑέω, subj. a. 
ἕξομεν, φϑίεται, for ἐρύξωμεν, φϑίηται. 


* 


§ 87.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATI 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


§ 52. 1. The optative mood uses the terminations of the 
secondary tenses of the indicative (ὃ 84. 2). 

But the first person singular of the optative active takes 
μὲ (ὃ 84. 1); and the third person plural ends in εν. 


2. For its connecting vowel it has o. But in the first 
aorist active and middle it has αἱ. 


3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 


Agia. - Passive and Middle. 

P. ist. 2d. od. | Ast. 2d. od. 
5. οἱ-μι οι-ς ου οἰ- μὴν 01-0 Ol-TO . 
D. οἱμεν οι-τὸον οι-τὴν οιἰτμεϑον οὐτσϑον ot-oFny 
P. οι-μν ots οι-ὲν οιἰ-μεϑα οι-σϑε oi-vT0 : 

First Aorist Active. ; First Aorist Middle. 
ον των, 2d. 3d. Ist. 2d. od. 
S. αἱ-μι CGB Oy De αι- μην αι-ο ἄἅι-το 
D. 'αι- μὲν αι-τον = OLL-THYV αι-μεϑον αι-σϑον o-odny 
P. αιἰτμὲν οαἰττε αἱ-ὲῦ ~ ou-usda. at-oFs αἰς-ντο 


Note 1. The perfect of the optative active is sometimes formed by means of 
the perfect active participle and εἰμί. Ey g. σετυφὼς (via, ὃς) εἴην, εἴης», εἴη, for 
τεέτύφοιμοι; OlSy Obe 


Nore 2. In many instances, particularly: 1 in ‘contract . verbs, 
the optative active takes the endings otyy, οἷης, οἵη, dual οἶητον, 
οιήτην, plural oinwer, οἶητε, oinouy. “E σ. φεύγω, προ γδίηΣ for 
πεφεύγοιμι. : , 


Nore 3. The first aorist active in the optative has ἧς the “RP ht 
endings E10, ELC, ELE, dual sigtoy, εἰάτην, plural scope, εἰατε, sear. 
E. g. τύπτω, τύψεια for τύψαιμι. The second and third person 


a k. es i ae 3 my ‘ “ὁ ἀνα Peg bona δ τοὶ os ony ΧΕ og ὦ Νσὼ Nt re a ng eR 
; ᾿ : a. 
5 i. > a 


94 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 88. 


singular, and the third person: plural, of this form, are more 
common than the corresponding persons of the regular form. 


These endings are said to belong to the Molic dialect. 
Nore 4, In the Epic language the third person plural of 


the optative passive and middle often takes the termination ato 
(§ 84. N. 6). E. g. ἀράομαι, ἀρησαίατο for ἀρήσαιντο. 


Note 5. In some instances the second person singular of 
the optative active takes the termination oda (ᾧ 84. N. 6). 
E. g. κλαίω, κλαίοισϑα for κλαίοις. 


Nore 6. The Alexandrian dialect uses, in the third person 
plural, οἱσαν, coor, for over, aey, (δ΄ 84. N. 4.) E. g. τύπτω, 
τύψοισαν, τύψαισαν, for τύποιεν, τύψαιεν. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. | 


§ 88. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera- 
tive mood. ese : 


Active. Passive and Middle. 


P; 94. 58 τ: Qd. 3d. 

5. οζ[ τω σο, 0 σϑω 

D. τον TOY ofov | σϑων 

P. τε τωσαν, ντῶν ode σϑωσαν, oFwy 


Nore 1. The terminations -9:, co, are used when the ¢onnecting vowel is 
dropped (§§ 91. N. 6, 7: 117). But when the connecting vowel is used, 
9: is dropped, and co becomes ὁ. : 


2. The connecting vowel of the imperative is an «. 


But in the first acrist active and middle it is an w. In the 
-second person singular, however, the first aorist active ends in 
ον, and the first aorist middle in a. 

The termination »twy is preceded by o. But in the first 
aorist active it is preceded by «a. : ie 


8. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 


: Active. Passive. 
Τ. 34, 88, φᾷ. eee 
S. ἐ | ε-τῶ 8-0, OV ε-σϑω 
1). ε-τον. ἐ-τῶν g-oF ov 8-00 wy 
P. 6-18 ε-τωσαν, o-ytwy 1 s-ots s-oF wouy, &-oF oy 


§ 89.] +s‘ VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 95 


First Aorist Active. ‘|. First Aorist Middle. 
FP. 2d. 3d. φᾷ. θά. 
S. ον α-τῶ ' αι α-σϑω 
D. ἀ-τον α-τῶν a-o Foy ἀτσϑων 
P. a-ts _ a-twcay, o-vtwv | o-ote - a-odwoor, ate 


Nore 2. The ending so of the second ᾿ κόρος singular of the Sn bi and 
middle is contracted into ov. 


Nore 3. In some ΝΑ the Jirst aorist takes the connecting vowel ε of 
the second aorist. See the Anomalous ἄγω, ΛΈ ΧΩ, OIL bring. 


las MOOD. 


§ 89. 1. The terminations of the infinitive mood are the 
following. 


Active. " Passive and Middle. 
Present, Future, 2 Aor. y» | All tenses, except Aorist Pas- 
Perfect. . γαν sive (ὃ 92), σϑαι 


2. For the connecting vowel, the present, future, and second 
aorist, active, have an «x. In the first aorist middle. the con- 
necting vowel is an @ In all the other tenses it is an ε. 

- But the first aorist active infinitive ends in ou. 


3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
connecting vowels united. 


Active. baci Passive and Middle. 
Pres., Fut., 2 Aor. δει-ν | Pres., Fut., 2 A.Mid. ε-σϑαι 
Perf e-vai | 1 Ror. Mid. . α-σϑαι 


For the perfect and aorist passive, infinitive, see below 
($$ 91: 92). 


Nore 1. The termination of the infinitive active in the Epic 
language is μεναν Or μὲν, Which is always preceded by the con- - 
necting vowels. E.-g. πίνω, πινέμεναι OF πιγέμεν for πέγειν. 


Nore 2. In the infinitive. active, the Doric has sy or ην for 
ey. E. δ: βόσκω, βόσκεν for Boner χαίρω, χαίρην for χαΐρειν. 


Nore 3. The Ionians change εἶν of the second aorist active 
into guy. E.g. βάλλω, βαλέειν for βαλεῖν. 


96 ' " ἸΝΡΙΒΟΤΙΟΝ OF WoRDS. [$$ 90, 91. 
PARTICIPLE. 


ς 90. 1. The root of the present, jean and second 
aorist, active, participle, is formed by ee οντ to the root 
of the tense (ὃ 83.2). Eig. 


Present. τύπτων, τύπτ-οντ- “ὃς, (ὁ 86. 3, R.1) 
Future 1. τύψων, τύψ-οντ-ος, (ibid.) 
Future 2. τυπέων, τυπέ-οντ-ος, (ibid.) 
Aorist 2. τυπών, τυπ-όντ-ος, ibid.) 
The first aorist active annexes ar to the root of the tense. 
E. g. τύψας, τύψ-αντ-ος, (ἢ 36. 2.) 
The perfect active annexes ot. E. g. τετυφώς, τετυφ-ότ-ος, 
(ᾧ 36. 2.) 
Nore. The olic dialect uses αἷς, oda, in the Jirst aorist 


active participle, for ἃς, Gow. EH. g. δισκέω, δισκήσαις for 
δισκήσας. 


2. The ἀξ ἘΑΧΈΡΣ in 5 the passive and middle ends in μενος. 
But in the first aorist middle it ends in ἄμενος. KE. g. τύπτω, 
τυπτόμενος, τυψάμενος, (ὃ 49. 1.) 

For the perfect and aorist passive stapes je. see below 


($$ 91:92). 


‘PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE AND 
MIDDLE. δ ᾷ 


$91. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle 
have no connecting vowel (§ 85.1). E. g. παύω, 
Perfect. 


npr! S. πέπαυ-μαι, πέπαυ-σαι, πέπαυ-ται, 1. πεπαύ-μεϑον, 
πέπαυ-σϑον, πέπαυ-σϑον, P. πεπαύ-μεϑα, πέπαυ-σϑε, πέ- 
παυ-ται. 


Sup and Ορτ., see below (§ 91. 9, 4, 5). 
ImperAT. S. πέπαυ-σο, πεπαύ-σθω, D. πέπαυ-σϑον, πεπαύ-- 
σϑων, P. πέπαυ-σϑε, πεπαύ-σϑωσαν. 
INFIN. πεπαῦ-σϑαι. 
PART. πεπαυ-μένος, ἡ; ov. 
| Pluperfect. 


{ = , 
S. ἐπεπαύ-μην, ἐπέπαυ-σο, ἐπέπαυ-το, D. ἐπεπαύ-μεϑον, 
ἐπέπαυ-σϑον, ἐπεπαύ-σϑην, P. ᾿ἐπεπαύ-μεϑα, ἐπέπαυ- 
σϑε, ἐπέπαυ-ντο. 


oa 


Ὁ 91.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINA'TIONS. 97 | 


2. In mute and liquid verbs, the third person plural of the 
perfect and pluperfect passive is formed by means of the per- 
fect passive participle and εἰσί, ἦσαν, from cil. E. g. τύπτω, 


Perf. 3d plur. τετυμμένοι (αι, α) eto, for τέτυπονται.. 
Plup. 3d plur. τετυμμένοι (αι, αὐ σαν, for ἐτέτυπο-ντο. 


Nore 1. The Epic language in a few instances drops σ of the termination. 
σαι. E. g. βάλλω, perf. pas. βίβλημαι, BiBanes for βέβλησαι. 


Nore 2. The Epic and Ionic dialects form the-third person 
plural of the perfect and pluperfect A ap its by annexing ara, 
ato, to the root of the verb. (§ 84. N. 6.) Ev Ὁ. φϑείρω, 


Perf. 3d plur. ἐφϑάῤαται for ἐφϑαρμένοι εἰσί 
Plup. 3d plur. ἐφϑάρατο for ἐφϑαρμένοι ἦσαν. 


(1) H is commonly changed into 8 before ato, ato. E. g. 
οἰκέω, οἰκέαται, οἰκέατο, for ὥχηνται; ᾧκηντο. 


(2) The consonants π, β, x, y, are generally changed into 
their corresponding rough ones (φ, z), before ora, ato. E. g. 
λέγω, λελέχαται, λελέχατο. 


(3) Ζ becomes 6 before OTOL, ατο. Β g. ἀγωνίζω, ἀγωνίδαται, 
ἡγωνίδατο. 


9. The perfect passive sussuNcTIVE and ΟΡΤΑΤΙΥΡ is formed 
by means of the perfect pareitg Priiciple and εἰμί. E..g. 


Perf. Subj. τετυμμένος (η, ov) ὦ, ἧς, ἢ; ἦτον ὦμεν, ἦτε, ὦσι. 

Perf. Opt. τετυμμένος (η η, ov) εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, εἴητον, εἰήτην, εἴη- 

μὲν, εἴητε, εἴησαν. 

4, The perfect passive ΒύΒυ ΝΟΤΙΝΕ of verbs in ow, ew, and 
ow, is, in a few instances, formed by prefixing the augment of 
the perfect to the contracted present subjunctive (ὃ 116). 
In this instance ae are contracted into ἡ. E. σ΄. χτάομαι, 


Perf. Subj. κεκτῶμαι, ἢ» ἤται, menses nodov, ὠμεϑα, goes, 
ὦνται. 


5. ‘The perfect dae: OPTATIVE of verbs in aw, sw, and ow, 
is, in a few instances, formed by dropping μαι of the perfect 
passive indicative, and successively annexing the regular ter- 
minations of the optative passive (§ 87. 1) agers: by. E.g. 


κτάομαι, κέκτημαι, 


Perf. Opt. κεχτήμην, 70, ἥτο, ἥμεϑον, ἦσϑον, ἤσϑην, MESO, 
Rots, ἦντο. 


9 


98 . INFLECTION OF ΟΠΡΒ. ~ [§ 91. 


Notre 3. These two verbs, xrdéomue: and μορενήσκω, form the perfect middle 
optative also by prefixing the reduplication to the contracted present middle 
optative. Thus, xexrauny, wo, ᾧ το, &e., μεμνῳ ζῆν, ᾧφ, ᾧτο, το. 

Μιμνήσκω often changes into o, in the perfect middle optative. Thus, 
" petpevoizeny, 010, o1ro, &C. - 

_ In the Ionic and the Epic dialect these verbs change w into ew, in the perfect 
middle optative. E. g. χεκτεῴμην, βιεεμενεῴμοην, for κεχτῴῤοην, μεεμενῳμεήν. 


Nore 4. Adw is perhaps the only verb in vw, which forms the perfect passive 
optative after the analogy of verbs in aw, ew, ow, (ὃ 91.5.) Thus, λύω, λέ- 
Aupes, λελῦμῆην, Vo, Dro, &c., or, more analogically, Asaviueny, vio, vitro, ὅς, 


Nore 5. In the perfect passive subjunctive and optative of verbs in aw, sw, 
ow, uv, (§ 91. 4, 5, N. 4,) some grammarians place the accexT on the ante- 
penult, if the last syllable Πρόπρσοι it (S 20. Εἰ g. they write xexrauny, 
πέκπηο. 3 


Note 6. In some instances the sEcoND PERFECT ACTIVE drops the connect- 
ing vowel in the dual and plural of the indicative, and throughout the impera- 
tive. In this case, the seconp PLUPEREECT follows the analogy of the second 
perfect. See - ἀνώγω, AKIO, ΄ ἐγείρω, EIAQ, εἴκω, EAET OO, κράξω, 


«άσχω, πείϑω, in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs... 


Nore 7. The seconD PERFECT ACTive of a few pure verbs 
in aw, ew, is syncopated (§ 91. N.6.) in the dual and plural of 
the indicative, throughout the imperative, and in the infinitive, 
In the subjunctive and optative it follows the analogy of verbs 
in μὲ (ὃ 117). Inthe participle it is contracted. ἘΣ, g. from 


Ε 


Perfect 2. 
Inpic. S. βέβαα, BéBuac, βέβαε, D. βέβαμεν, βέβατον, βέβατον, 
| P. BéSupev, βεβατε, βεβᾶσι(ν) 
Susy. S. βεβῶ, βεβῆς, βιβὴ, D. βεβῶμεν, βεβῆτον, βεβῆτον, 
P. βεβῶμεν, βεβὴτε, βεβῶσι(ν). 
Oper. 3. βεβαίην, βεβαίης, βεβαίη, D. βεβαίημεν, βεβαίητον, 
βεβαιήτην, P. βεβαίημεν, βεβαίητε, βεβαίησαν. 
Imrer. 3. βέβαϑι (ἢ 88. Ν, 1), βεβάτω, D. βέβατον, βεβάτων, 
P.. βέβατε, βεβάτωσαν. 
INFIN. Before, 
Parr. βεβαώς, βεβαῶσα (sometimes βεβαυϊαὶ, fibers, G. βε- 
βαότος, contracted βεβώς, βεβῶσα, βεβώς, G. βεβῶτος. 
Pluperfect 2, 


S. ἐβεβάειν, ἌΝ ἐβεβάει, D. ἐβέβαμεν, ἐβέβατον, ἐβε- 


βάτην, P. ἐβέβαμεν, ἐβέβατε, ἐβέβασαν. 


Norte 8. The singular of the second perfect and second 
pluperfect of verbs in aw, ew, is not used in the indicative. 


Se ene = 


- Ae eee ν.: oe 


Pe Σ 9c 


+ 


did ed, ΕΣ ἈΝ ΣΤ Bw es, Fahad ΣῪ Ρ Le. ar i 
we age th F A ai tapi ant τι; b ache a, Epa γον Ὁ 
Ρ “* ae τ sie ς ΤΣ 


Ὁ 92.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. ‘99 


Nore 9. The feminine participle of verbs in ow generally 
ends in σα, in the second ew {ts uncontracted form is 
not used. 


Nore 10. The accent of the third person pleral of the 
indicative (ὃ 91. N. 7) is placed on the penult, contrary to the 
general rule (§ 93. 1). 


AORIST PASSIVE. 


§ 92. 1. The root of the first aorist re is formed by 
annexing de or Sy tothe root of the verb. (§ 83. 2.) 

The root of the second aorist passive is } formed by hewted 
ε or η. (ibid.) 


2. The aorist passive uses the terminations of the active 
voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of the second 
aorist active (ἔϑην) of εἰθηϊῶ (δ 117); except that all the reg- 
ular terminations of the indicative, imperative, and science 
are preceded by ἡ. Εἰ. g. τύπτω, 

Aorist 1. 
Inpic. S, ἐτύφϑην, ng, ἡ, D. nusv, nrov, ήτην, P. ses 2 
NTE, NOMY. re 
Susy. S. τυφϑέω, ἕης, én, D. cosy, ἕητον, ἕητον, P. ἕωμεν, 
ἕητε, éwut, contracted τυφϑῶ, ἧς, ἢ, GUE, ἤτον, ἦτον, ὥμεν, 
ἥτε, ὦσι. 
Ορυ. S. τυφϑείην, sing, sin, D. εἴημεν, sintor, ειήτην, P. εἴημεν, 
εἶητε, εἴησαν. 
The syncopated endings εἶμεν, sire, εἴεν, (see the par- 
adigm,) are more commen than the regular ones. 
Imrerat. S, τύφϑητι (δ 14. Ν. 4), ἤτω, 1). ἡτον, ήτων, P. 
ητε, ἥτωσαν Or ἕντων. | 
INFIN. τυφϑῆναι. 
ParT. τυφϑείς, εἶσα, ἐν, G. ἐντος. 
Aorist 2. 
ἐτύπην, throughout like Aorist 1. 


Nore 1. The Epic language often changes ncayv of the third gesige plural 
of the indicative into ev. E. g. κοσμέω, κόσμηϑεν for ἐκοσμήϑησαν. (§ 117. N. 17.) 


Nott 2. The Epic language often changes ¢ in the uncontracted subjunctive 
into. E. g. τυφϑείω for στυφϑέω. (§ 117. N. 17.) Ν 


Nore 3. The Epic language often takes μένα, or 5h for vas, in the infinitive. 


-E. g. συφϑήμενα, or τυφϑῆμεν for τυφϑῆναι. (§ 89. N. 1.) 


Norte 4. The Epic language, in some instances, Urops: the connecting vowels 


in the sEcoND aorist MIDDLE. See the Anomalous ὥἅλλομαι, ἀραρίσκω; yin 


ropes, δέχομαι, “EAD, λέγω, ΔΕ ΧΩ, μέγνυμι, ὄονυμι, πέρϑω. 


100 ον INFLECTION OF WoRDs. ! [$ 99. 
ν 


ACCENT OF VERBS. - 


§ 93. 1. In polysyllabic forms the accent is placed on 
the antepenult, if the last syllable perpits it (§ 20); if not, it 
is placed on the penult. E. g. 


τύπτομεν, τέτυφὰ * ἐτετύμμην, ἐτύφϑην. 


Compound verbs are not excepted. _ E. g. ἀνάγω, ἄναγε. 


2. In dissyllabic forms the accent is placed on the penult. 
E. g. x 
τύπτω, τύπτεις. 

3. The perfect active infinitive, the first aorist active infini- 
tive, the perfect passive infinitive and. participle, and the 
second aorist middle infinitive, take the accent on the ῬΟΝΒ. 
Ἐν 6. 

τετυφέναι; φιλῆσαι, τετύφϑαι, ἐετυμμένος, τύπέσϑαι. 


Also the Epic infinitive in μεν. E. g. πίνω, TLV E WED. 


Nore 1. In the Epic language, the perfect passive infinilive and participle, 
in some instances, take the.accent on the antepenult. See the Anomalous 
mesa ἀλιταίνω, ἀχέω, “EQ. seat. 


4. The second aorist active τ δ είν and participle, and the 
perfect active participle, take the accent on the last syllable. 
E. g. Rais 
τυπεῖν, τυπών, τετυφώς. 

ἄγε 2. The verbs ΕΤ.ΔΩ, EIQ, EAEYOQ, εὑρίσκω, χαμβάνω, in the 
second person singular of the second aorist’ active imperative, take the acute 


on the last syllable. In composition, however, they follow the general rule 
(8 93.1). Seein the catalogue of Anomaloys Verbs.. 


5. The second person singular of the second aorist middle 
tmperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable, 
E. g. τύπτω, τυποῦ. 


6. -In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back 
Ἴδη the augment. E. g. προσέχω, προσεῖχον not AQOVELZOY. 


Nore 3. In verbs compounded with a preposition, the ac- 


cent is placed on that preposition when the augment is omitted, 


(Ὁ 78. Ν. 8.) E.g. ἐμφαίνω, ἔμφαινον for evéparror. — 


Nore 4. When the augment, upon which the accent would 
have been placed (§ 93. 1), is omitted (ὃ 78. Ν. 3), the accent 
is peered on the penult. E. g. πίπτω, πίπτε for ἔπιπτε. 


. ig 
ete Ser ee ee ee a italia 


o> 


δῷ 94, 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 101 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
PRESENT ACTIVE. 


§ 94. 1. The present active indicative is the 
source from which all the other tenses are derived. 


2. Verbs are divided into pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid 
verbs, according as the letter before w is a vowel, a mute (a, 
8,9’ κ, 7. χ᾽ τ, δ, ὃ, also ζ), or a liquid (i, u,v, 0). E.g. 
τιμάω, φιλέω, are pure verbs; λείπω, πλέκω, are mute verbs ; 
μέλω, νέμω, are liquid verbs. 

Nore. 1. These statements apply also to deponent verbs (§ 208), as such 
verbs are supposed to have been derived from a corresponding active voice, 
E. g. aoviouas, a pure verb ; δέχομαι, ἃ mute verb ; ὀδύροροαι, a liquid verb. 

Nore 2. The title, ““ Formarion oF THE TENSES,” relates 
only to the first person singular of the tenses of the indicative. 
For the inflection of the tenses in the other moods, see above 


($§ 83-92). 

§ 95. The penult of a pure verb (§ 94. 2), if 
short, is lengthened in the perfect, pluperfect, future, 
and aorist. a in the penult, when it-is not pre- 


ceded by ε, 4, or ρ, is changed into η: 
For examples, see below. 


Remark. This rule does not apply to the second perfect, 
second pluperfect, second future, and second aorist. | 


Nore 1. Some pure verbs retain the short vowel through all 
the tenses, Such are αἰδέομαι, ἀκέομαι, ἀλέω, arbor, ἀρκέω, 
ἀρόω, ἀρύω, γελάω, ἐμέω, ϑλαω, χοτέω, μεϑύω, γεικέω, ξέω, πτύω, 
ὑπάω, τανύω, τελέω, τρέω, χαλάω. See also the Anomalous ὁ ἄγα- 
μαι, ἀλέομαι, ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀραρίσκω, ἀρέσκω, δαίω divide, δαμάω, 
δατέομαι, δόκχται, ἐλαύνω, ἕννυμι, ἐράω, ἐσϑίω, ἵημι, ἱλάσκομαι, 
καλέω, κλάω break, μαίομαι, μεϑύω, VOLO, ὄμνυμι, ΟΙΝΩΙ, πα 
τέομαι, πετάννυμι, σκεδάννυμι. 


Nore 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs is 
variable. See the Anomalous αἰνέω, aigéo, ἀκαχίζω, βαΐνω, 
γαμέω, δέω bind, δίδωμι, δύναμαι, δύω, ἐρύω, εὑρίσκω, ϑύω, 
ἵστημί, ἴσχω, κορέννυμι,. κρεμάννυμι, λύω, μάχομαι, νέμω, ὄξω, 
πίλνημι, πίμπρημι, πίνω, πίπτω, ποϑέω, PER, σβέννυμι, στερέω, 
στορένγυμι, τέϑημι, φημί, Pn 

Nore 3. Xeéw changes « into ἡ, contrary to the rule. E. g. χρήσω, re 
copa —"Axeodouas does not Fy al a into ἡ) as ἀκροᾶσοῤἑαι- 


πὰ i 


ae tees 


102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. | [ἢ 96. 


Nore 4. TiS: wagdbas ¢ into εἰ in the perfect active and passive. See 
in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, 


§ 96. The present in actual use is not always the foundation 
upon which the other parts ef the verb rest.. Many verbs have, 
or are supposed to have, more than one present. In order there- 
fore to be able to ascertain the original or simple present, the 
learner must become acquainted with the methods by which 
new presents may be derived from a given present. ‘These 
methods are exhibited in the followimg paragraphs. 


1. Some verbs beginning with a consonant, followed by a 
eh or a liquid, prefix that consonant together with. E.g. 


διδόω from JOL 
qioaw =“ TPAN. 


A few rhe beginning with στ, oz, πτ, prefix i. E. g. 


! foraw from s7AN. Also “the verb “ΔΩ, thus, igw. 


Nore 1. A few take the Altic con but without 


the augment of the second syllable. [ὁ 80. ἘΚ E. go ar: ATL 


from ἀ γὼ. 


Nore 2. The Attic reduplication of ea from ‘ONAQ, and the prefix of 
μαιμάω from μάω, are anonialous. 


2. Many verbs, of which the root ἐρῶ in’ a labial (x, β, φ)» 
drop w and annex τω. E. g. 
τύήτω from ΤΎΠΏ, 
πρύπτω “ ΚΡΦΒῺΩ, (ὃ 77. 
ὀίιτω- “ “ῬΙΦΩ, ( 4.) 
So unre (φ), βάπτω. (φ), βλάπτω (f), δρύπτω. (φ), ϑάπτω (9), 
ϑρύπτω (φ), καλύπτω. (6), hemi (a), κόπτω (x), vinta (B), 
dant (gp), σκάπτω (gp). 


Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present. of 
verbs in arw ends in a labial ; generally in z. 


3. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, y, z), 
or lingual (z, 6, 9), drop ὦ with the preceding consonant, and 
annex vow.  E. g. 


φρίσσω from ΦΡΙΚ ΓῈ τάσσω. from TAT 
gonoow “ JIPATQ, Bhicow “ BAIT 
βήσσω “ ΒΗΧΩ, κορύσσω “ KOPTON. 


So ἀλλάσσω (7), βράσσω (ἡ, ἐρέσσω (τ), ἱ ἱμάσσω (7), κηρύσσω 
x), λίσσομαι (τ), μαλάσσω (x), πάσσω (τ), πλάσσω (9), ταράσσω 
) eRe &) . 


—— 
- 
wo. Ὁ 
ΩΝ 
Ω 


§ 96.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 103. 


Hence it appears, that the simple present of verbs in σσω 
ends either in a palatal or in a lingual ; generally in 7 or ὃ. 


Norge 3. Tixew is formed from TEKO ‘by changing ¢ into ὦ and annexing 
# to the root. (§ 96.16.) 


Nore 4. The last sy rlkable of t the simple present of ἀφύσσω and νάσσω is either 
ye or dw. 


4. Some verbs, of wich the root ends in a. palatal (x, y, x) 


or lingual (τ, ὃ, 9), drop ὦ with the preceding consonant, and 
annex ζω. EK. g. | 


zoven from ΚΡΑΓΩ, στάζω §=from >T4rna 
στενάζω “Ὁ στεγάζω ale. = ἢ 


| So ἕζομαι (δ), μαστίζω (y), οἰμώζω (v), στηρίζω (7), στέζω (7), 

Τ᾿ σφύζω (7), τρίζω (7). 7 
Nore 5. In most cases presents in ζω, especially in poly- 

syllabic verbs, are considered simple. LE. g. ἐλπίζω, χωρίζω. 


Sie s iri. 0 


Nore 6. The last syllable of the simple present of ἁρπάξω, βαστάξω, word~ 
fa, παίξω, σαλπίξω, is either yw οτ- δω- 


Nore 7. Some verbs have σσω or ζω in the present. Such are σφάώσσω OF 
σφάξω from ZPATO, ἁρμόξω or ἁρμόσσω from ‘APMOAQ. 


BEER EI eS Ma DD eas 


5. Some verbs annex » to the last letter of the root. E. ξ: 
τέμγω from τέμω, altro from 1114). 


= > 

5 / 6. nick verbs insert » before the last letter of the root. 
a. Eng | 

: ἕ 
Ἵ ΧΑΝΔΏ from, XAAN - >... 

ξ AAMBQ. >. κ΄. AABN, (§ 12.) 

i ENEFKQ + ENEKR, ($12.2) 

a: Malia 2 Bade ΝΣ F) 


. 


gif Oe 


Here belong all verbs in λλω and ego, and some in yy, as 
ψάλλω, ἐ ἔῤῥω. 
οὐ 7. Some verbs annex ove or cure to the root. E. g. avsave 
from ait, ὀλίσϑαΐνω or ὀλισϑάνω from OAISON. 
Ἢ Some annex wre to, and insert ν before the Tast conso- 
Ἢ nant of the root. E. g. | 


Θ 
μαν ϑάνω from M402 
λυμβάνω Ἐξ τος AABR,. (12, 1) 
τυγχάνω Ἐς ΕΙΣ, (ὃ 12. 2.) 


8,.Some annex oxo or toxw to the root. E. 3. γηράσκω 
from γηράω, κυΐσκω from χύω. » 


104 -INFLECTION OF worps. [5 96. 


Sometimes the vowel before oxw.is lengthened. Εἰ. g. 


ϑνήσκω from ONAN. 


9. Some annex γυὼ to the root. In pure verbs this ending 


3 very often doubles the νυ. ΕἸ. g. 


- δεικνύω from JAEIKI 
σβεννύ ὕω tee ἐς ἐκ ὁ 


Sometimes the vowel preceding. this ending is lengthened. 
E. δ. χωννύω from χόω. : | 

10. New presents are very often formed by annexing ao, 
sw, ow, Or vw, to the root of a verb. E. σ 


ῥιπτέω from Zales i 
OMO?2 OM .- 


11. New presents are formed by changing « of the perfect 


intow. EK. εὖ 
φύω, perfect πέφῦκα, new present πεφύκω. 
12. Sometimes the sound of the present is strengthened by 


the endings ua, «Fo, vow. EH. g. διωκάϑω from διώκω, pleyé- 
Sw from φλέγω; φϑινύϑω from φϑένω. 


Nore 8. "Ec3w-comes from ἔδω by annexing 9w to the root; thus ἔδ-ϑω, 
ἔστϑω, ιδ 10. 3.) Ἔσϑιίω is immediately derived from ἔσϑω. 


13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic presents, 
which have ε in the penult, by changing the « into o and annex- 
ing ew. LE. g. πορϑέω from πέρϑω. 


Or by changing ε into w and annexing ow. E. g. στροφάω 


from στρέφω. 


. Nore 9. Πέτομαι gives ONS τις and σωτάομαι. 
14. A few verbs insert o before the last consonant of the 
root. ἘΣ g. μίσγω from ecpaie 


Nore 10. Ἄλον comes Ἂν. διδαχω by changing x into x after the ¢. 


Πάσχω is formed from ILA@Q, by inserting ¢ before 3, and changing 9 
into x. 


15. A few verbs annex ow to the root. E. g. αὔξω from 
AIT, ULZN from ETN. (δὲ 9.2: 10. 2.) 


16. A few change ε into ¢. E. g.. πίτνω from TET, oxi- 
ὅγνημι from SK LA AN. (y 96. 5. > we 


i 


Aa 
= 


“-. 
§ 97.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 105, 


Nore 11. All the tenses of verbs i in πτω, σσω, ba (Ὁ 96. 4), 
yo (§ 96. 5), λλω, gdm, ava OF αἰνῶ (ὃ 96.7), σκω, Lox, vu, 
ato, εϑω, υϑω, So (§ 96. 15), except the imperfect, generally 
come either from the simple present, or ie a new present in 
sw (ἢ 96. 10), or from both. 


17. In dissyllabic verbs ‘the radical vowel is sometimes 
placed after the last consonant of the root. (ὃ 20. 2. ) E. g. 
ΟΠ enan from OANQ 
TMED Pe TEMG 
“@PONR τς ΘΟΡΩ. pay Ἂ 


18. In many instances,: the penult of the original present is 
lengthened : 


a becomes y ΟΥ̓ αι" as AABL, ANBN * PAN, paiva. 


¢ — εἰ, and, before a liquid, 7 + as LPIUIM, ἐρείπω" KPINA, | 
χρῖνω. : : 
8 — εἰ (rarely ἡ) 5 as SEPM, σπείρω. 
| 0 — οὐ aS AKON; ἀκούω. 
/ ᾧ —ev, and, before a liquid, δ᾽ εν ΦΥΓῺΩ, λῶν ΑΙΣΧΥ͂ΝΩ, 


αἰυχύτω. 


On the other hand, a is shortened into. ἅ, εἰ into te or 2, 
gv into ὕ, ἡ into & (rarely into ε), 7 rT into Z, ov into 0, v into ὕ. 


Nore 12. Sometimes εὖ in the penult is shortened into «. 
See the Anomalous geal egy Sew TUN, πλέω, πνέω, dew Sur, HE, 


Nore 13. ᾿Ελαύνω comes fr om ἰλάω ὃν lengthening a into av, and a 
y to the rcot. (ὃ 96. 5.) 


; . The radical vowel is often situa’ £, a, OF ὁ Baap 5) 
This takes place chiefly in dissyllabic verbs, “6 2, N.3.) E 
2HePN, SUAPI, SHOPS. 


Nore 14. In some instances the diphthongs εἰ and εὖ are 
changed into οἱ and ov respectively. See the Anomalous 4142, 
144), εἴκω, LALO, πείϑω, 


IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 


§ 97. To form the imperfect active, drop ὦ of 
the present, annex ον, and prefix its augment. 
E. δ. Ἢ τ 


τύπτω . imperf. ἔτυπτον. 


106 INFLECTION OF “WORDS. [Ὁ 98. 


_FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE. 


§ 9s. 1. To form the perfect active, drop @ 


of the present, annex xa, and prefix its augment. 
E. g. | 


παύω perf. πέπαυκα 

φίλέω — πεφίληκα (ἢ 96). 
δηλόω “Δ ΌΜΕΝ τι: δεδήλωκα (ibid. ) 
ἄδω νὰ; ῇ χα - (§ ΤΌ. 4) 
πείϑω “  - πέπειχα (ibid.) 
ἐλίζω ‘6, ἤλπεικα  (ibid.). 


τς 80 τιμάω, τετίμηκα ῷ 95) ; δράω, δέδρᾶκα oe ); tlw, τετῖ-- 
κα (ibid.) ; δαχρύω, διλάνεῦχα (ibid.).. 


ὉΠ) The first perfect active of liquid gerbe | is always derived 
from the simple present. E. g. ἀγγέλλω, Ἶ Wee ψάλλω, ἔψαλκα" 
paiva, πέφαγκα " καϑαΐφω, κεκάϑαρκα. (ἢ 96. 6, 18.) 


(2) When the vowel is either e, a, or o, the first perfect Ὁ 


of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes a. ἘΠ g. στέλλω, ἔυταλκα" 
φϑείρω, ἔφϑαρκα. (ἢ 96. 6,18, 19.) 


Nore 1. The verbs κλίνω, κρίνω, πλύνω, drop» in-the first perfect active. — 


Thus, κέχλικα, κέκρικα, πέπλυκα. 


2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs 
whose root ends ina labial (π, 8, φ) or a palatal 


(x, 7, 7), drop ὦ οὗ the present, annex a, change — 


the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- 


responding rough mute (ᾧ, y), and prefix its aug- ἢ 


‘ment. E. ¢. 


τρίβω γε. τέτριφα 
γράφω “κ γέγραφα 
πλέκω τε πέπλεχα. 


So τύπτω, τέτυφα ᾿ πράσσω, πέπραχα. (§ 96, 2, 3.) 


The perfect formed according to these rules (§ 98. 1, 2) 
is called the First PERFECT ACTIVE, 


Nore 2. The first perfect of the following verbs changes the radical vowel ¢ 
into ὁ ( » 96. 19 : χλέστω, κέκλοφα * πέμπω, ψέπορφα: retire, τέσροφα 
(sometimes τέσραφα᾽, See also the Anomalous ἄγω, ἔδω, ENE? KO, and 
λέγω collect. 


Nore 3. The anomalous. AEIQO, ‘in the first perfect, ‘diepes εἰ into o 
(8.96. N. 14). See in the catalogue of Anoinalous Verbs. é 


Ce ee 


699. 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


107. 


§ 99. Some verbs form their perfect active also by drop- 
ping w of the present, annexing ἃ, and prefixing the augment. 


. g. 


, 
σήπω 


ACTIVE. 


‘perf. σέσηπα. ἡ ; 
The perfect thus formed is called the sEcoND ‘PERFECT 


The following list eontatins nearly all the verbs which have-a 


second perfect active. 

_ (§ 96). 

ἄγνυμι (AT), 2 ἔᾶγα. 
axovw (AKO), ἀκήκοα. 
avOura (A422), ἔᾶδα. 


 ANEOR, avivoda. 


ἀνώγω, ἀνωγα. 
ἀραρίσκω (APN), ἀρᾶρα. 
βαίνω (BAR), βέβαα: 


AS βιβρώσκω(ΒΡΟ.Ω), part. βεβρῶς. 


βούλομαι (BOTA), ae 
Botta, BéBot tu. 

| γηϑέω (LHOR), γέγηϑα. 

Π γίγνομαι (TEND, coe rae 
im sta, γέγαα. 

© ΤΏ ΝΩ, γέχωνα. i 

᾿ δαίω (4.4.2), δέδηα. ὁ 

— AAN, δέδαα. 

δέρκομαι, δέδορκα. 

δίω, δέδια. 

δουπέω (ΖΟΥ̓Π), ϑέδονκαι 
APEMD?, δέδρομα. 

ἐγείρω (ETERS), ἐγρήγορα. 
ἔδω, ἔδηδα. : 
ος ἔϑω, εἴωϑα. 

_ EIA, οἶδα. 

εἴκω, ἔοικα, οἶκα, εἶκα. 
EAETOR (EATOR), ἐλήλυϑα. 
| ἕλπω, ξολπα. 

ς ENEOD, ἐνήνοϑα. 

 ἐρείπω (EPIL), ἐρήριπα. 

ἔχω, ὄχωκα. 

ϑάλλω (ΘΑ ΔῈ, τέϑηλα. 
OADM, τέϑηπα. 

᾿ ϑνήσκω (ONAN), τέϑναα. 

| ἵστημι (STAN), ἕσταα. 


For the changes of the root, see above 


κεύϑω, κέκευϑα. 

κήδω, κέκηδα. 

κλάζω (KAAT2), Dbabavo, κέ- 
,πλαγγα. 

κόπτω (KO), κέκοπα. ὦ 

κράζω (KPAIL2), κέκρᾶγα. ᾿ 

χτείνω (KTENL), ἔκτονα. 

λάμπω, λέλαμπα. 

λανϑάνω (AAOL), Linda. 

λάσκω (ΔΑ ΚΑ), λέλᾶκα. 

- λείπω, λελοιπα. 

μαΐνω (MANN), μέμηνα, 

μάρπτω (M4APHL), μέμαρπα. 

μάω, MEMO - 

MEIPLL (MEPL), ἔμμορα. 

μέλω, μέμηλα. 

MENS, μέμονα. 

μηδάομαι (MAKIL), μέμηκα. 

ὄξω (042), ὕδωδα. 

οἴγω, ξῳγικ. 

ὄλλυμι ( (OAS), ὄλωλα. 


 # O12, ὅπωπα- 


ὄφνυμι (OP), ὄρωρα. : 

παύχω (TAOS), πέπονϑα, πέ- 
πηϑα. 

πείϑω, πέποιϑα.- 

πέρδω, πέπορδα. 

πήγνυμι (741 2), πέπηγα. 

πίπτω (IETS), part. πεπτώς 

πλήϑω, πέπληϑα. ᾿ 

πλήσσω (IAAT), πέπληγα. 

πράσσω (PAT), mengaya. 

ῥήγνυμι (41:2), ἔῤῥωγα. 


ῥιγέω (PILL), ἔδῥεχα. 


x i γ' - a 
Sy a” 


Ὗ 


108 INFLECTION OF worDs. [δὴ 100 -- 102. 


σαΐίρω (24P2), σέσηρα. φεύγω," a 3 
Onno, σέσηπα. φϑ sigan (VOEPD), ἔφϑορα. 
σπείρω (SULPN), ἔσπορα. φρίσσω (ΦΡΙΚ), πέφρῖκα: 
στέλλω (Σ7 5.42), ἔστολ. . ΦΤΥΖΩ, part. πεφυζώς. 
στέργω, ἐ ἔστοργα Ῥ φίω, πέφυα. 
TNX, TETHXO. χαΐνω (XA W2), χέχηνα. 

᾿ αἰκτω (ΤΕ ΚΑῚ, τέτοκα. ο χανδάνω (XAAN), κέχανδα. 
4.4.2, τέτλαα. soon (Χ ΔΩ), κέχοδα. σι 


τρίξω (1ῬΠ|Ὡ}, τέτρῖ γα 


χλάζω (XAAIN), κἐέχλᾶδα. oF 
φαίνω (DANI), πέφηνα. ; 


Nore. In Homer, a few pure verbs in aw, εῳ, form their second perfect parti- 
ciple by changing @ or ε into ἡ and annexing ὥς. E.‘g. Bagiw, βεβαρηώς. 


_ FIRST. AND SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 


§ £00. To form the first pluperfect active, drop 


α of the first perfect, annex ey, and prefix its aug- 


ment. LE. g: 


τύπτω, Νὰ υύφα | pluperf. ἐτετύφειν. 


§ 101. To form the second pluperfect active, ‘drop α of the 
second portent, annex εἰν, and prefix the. angment. E. g. 


ἀκούω, ἀκήκοα Ὁ pluperf. ἠκηκῦειν. 
. FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE ACTIVE. 


§ 102. To form the future active, drop ω of the 
present, and annex ow. LE. g. 


παύω . fut. “ παύσω 
φιλέω μὰ φιλήσω (ὃ 95) 
δηλόω “δηλώσω (ibid.) 


nw 


λείπω © Jetwo (ᾧ 5. 2) 
πλέχω “< πλέξω (10]4.) ee 
So τιμάω,, τίμησ ω (ὃ 95); δράω, δρᾶσω. (ibid. ji τίω, tie 
(ibid. ) ; duxova, δακρῦσω (ibid. ΤᾺ ; BS scat: τρίψω ($8. 2); γράφω, 


γράψω (ibid.).3 λέγω, λέξω. (3.9 2); τεύχω, τεύξω (ibid.); gba, 4 


gow (ὃ 10. 2); πεέϑω, πείσω. (ibid. 3 Pesan ἐλπίσω. Atay 
σπένδω, οπείσω (§ 12. 5). 


The future thus formed, is-called the rirsT FUTURE ACTIVE. 


OE eS ee  ὰ νά 


§ 103.] FORMATION OF ‘THE TENSES. 109 . 


Nore 1. Futures in Yow, from-verbs in ifm, often drop the- 
o, and are inflected like contract verbs in ew (§ 116). FE. g. 


κομίζω, fut. κομίσω, κομιῶ, LELC, uel, dual εεἴτον, plur. ιοῦμεν, 
LELTE, LOUOL. 


Nore 2. Some futures in gow and sow often drop the o, and. 
are contracted like verbs in aw and sw. (ibid.) E. g. 
ἐλάω fut. ἐλάσω, ἐλάω ἐλῶ 
διασκεδάζω ““ διασκεδάσω, διασκεδάω διασκεδῶ 


τελέω “ς τπελέσω, τελέω τελῶ. 


Note 95. The Doric dialect, in the inflection of the first” 
future active, follows the analogy of contract verbs in ew 
(ibid.). E. g. γνομεύω; fut. γομεύσω, Doric vousvow. 

5 ἂν 


: Norte 4. The Doric often forms futures in ἕω from pure 
- verbs or from verbs in ἕω, which among the Attics have ow in 
| the future. E. g. γελάω, γελάξω " κομίζω, κομίξω. 

| ° Nore 5. The poets often use cow for ow, in order to make’ 
|| the preceding syllable long by position. E. g. aviw, ἀνύσσω " 
| γελάω, γελάσσω. Pes 


δ 1063. To form the future active of a liquid 
verb, drop ὦ of the simple present, and annex εῶ 
contracted ao E.g. 


μένω fut. μενέω contr. μενῶ - 

κρίνω << χργνέω χρινῶ, (ᾧ 96. 18 
ἀμύνω “Φ ἀμύὔνέω. “ ἀμυνῶ,  (ibid.) 
καϑαίρω < — χκαϑαρέω καϑαρῶ, (ibid.): 
κτείνω Ἐς χεεγέω χτεγῶ, o ) 
στέλλω (δ, - otshéw στελῶ, (ᾧ 96. 6.) 


The future thus formed has been called the ssconp EuTURE 
ACTIVE. * 
Nore 1. A few liquid verbs have their future in ew. Such are κύρω, κύρσω" 
Diem, φύρσω " κέλλω (KEAQ), κέλσω. See also the Anomalous ἀραρίσκω». 
| ὄρνυμι. τὰς 
| Nore 2. The pure and mute verbs have no second future active. In the 


᾿ garadigm σύπσω, the second future συπέω συπῶ is introduced merely for exam- 
_ ole’ 5 sake, 


10 


Seek ee 


110 ΠΟ INFLECTION OF WORDS. _ [§ 104. 
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. 


§ 104. 1. To form the aorist active, drop ὦ of 
the present, annex oa, and prefix its augment. E. ¢. 
; παύω aor. ἔπαυσα 
φιλέω ἐς ἐφίλησα (§ 95) 
δηλόω ¢ ἐδήλωσα (1014.}. 
λείπω “ Blea (§ 5.2 
πλέκω “ς Σ᾿ἔᾷἔπλεξα (014. 


So τιμάω, ἐτίμησα (ὃ 95); δράω, ἔδρᾶσα (ibid.); arco, 


ἡνίᾶσα (ibid.) ; τέω, toe (ibid.); δακρύω, ἐδάκρῦσα (1014.});.. 


τρίβω, ἔτριψα (§ 8. 2); γράφω, ἔγραψα (ibid.); λέγω, ἔλεξα 
; 2); τεύχω, ἔτευξα (ibid.); ἄδω, you (ᾧ 10. 2); πείϑω, 
ἔπεισα (ibid.); ἐλπίζω, ἤλπισα (ibid.). 
Nore 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex α instead of σά, See the An- 
omalous ἀλέομαι, dartowas, ΠΩ, ENETKQ, ἐνείκω, καίω, σεύω, χέω. 


Nore 2. Three verbs take κα instead of σα. See the Anomalous δίδωροι; 


ins, and σίϑημι- 

Norte 3. The Dorians often form aorists in && from pure 
verbs, or from verbs in fm E. g. γελάω, éyshosu’ κομίζω, 
ἐκόμιξα. : 

Nore 4. The poets-often double the o after a short vowel. 
E. g. ἀνύω, ἤνυσσα ᾿ γελάω, ἐγέλασσα. 


2. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb, 
drop ὦ of the simple present, annex a, lengthen 
the penult, and prefix its augment. «4, in the 
penult, is lengthened into ἡ, and ¢ into εἰ. E.g. 

κρίνω aor. ἔκρῖνα (§ 96. 18) 

ἀμύνω «© ἤμῦνα  ἀ(ἰθι1ἀά.) 

γέμω “Ὁ. ἕγειμα (ibid.) 

τίλλω ἀ ΕΝ τ Ὁ (§ 91. 6, 18) 
σφάλω “ ἔσφηλα ibid.) ὰ 

Those liquid verbs,which have ain the penult of the pres- 
ent, take ἡ or ἃ in that of the aorist. KE. g. gaivw, ἔφηνα " 
καϑαίρω, ἐκάϑηρα or ἐκάϑαᾶρα. (ᾧ 96. 18.) 


The aorist formed according to these rules (§ 104. 1, Q) 
is called the FIRST AORIST ACTIVE. 


Nore 5. Avow and ὅλλομαι change « into » only in the indicative (in con- — 
sequence of the augment). Thus, ρα, ἄρω, ἄραιμει, ἄρδν, ἄραι, ἄρας" ARCO, 


» 


§ 105.) FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 11 


ἡλάμην, ἅλωμαι, ἅλασθαι, ἁλάροενος. See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
Verbs. 


Nore 6. A few liquid verbs take ca in the first aorist active. Such are 
κείρω (KEPQ), ἔκερσα * κέλλω (ΚΕ ΔΩ), ἔκελσα " κύρω, ἔκυρσα " φείρω 
(ΤΕΡΩ,, ἔτερσα. See also the Anomalous ἀραρίσκω, εἴλλω, dovupes, - 


§ 10. Some verbs form their aorist active by dropping.y// - 
ω of ay at annexing oy, and prefixing the augment, E. 8. δ. 


> 


τέμω aor. ἔτεμον. 
The aorist thus formed is called the sEcOND AORIST ACTIVE. “4 


The following list contains nearly all those verbs which 


have a second aorist active. [or the changes of the root, see 
above (§ 96). 


ἄγω, ἤγαγον. ἐρείκω (EPIK2), ἤρικον. 
ἀκαχίζω (AX2), ἤκαχον. ἐρείπω, (ΕΡΙΠ.), ἤριπον. 
ἀλέξω (AAEKL), ἤλαλκον. ἐρυγγάνω (ΕΡΥΓΩ), 4 ie? 7oRe 
ἁλιταίνω (AAITL), ἤλιτον. ἐρύκω, ἐρύκακον. 

ἀλφαίνω (A192), ἤλφον. εὑρίσκω (ΕΥΡΩ), εὗρον. 


ἁμαρτάγνω( ΑΑΡΤΙ), ἥμαρτον. ἔχω, ἔσχον. 


ἕπω, ἔσπο». δὲ ὀλισϑαίνω (OAIZON), ὦλισϑον. 


| ἀμπλακίσκω (4 ΜΠ.44.Κ),ἢ nu- OADM, ἔταφον. 

7 ahaxov OY ἤπλακον. ϑιγγάνω (OTN), ἔϑιγον. 

᾿ ἁἄνδύάνω (AM), ἕαδον or ἅδον. ϑνήσκω (OAN), ἔϑανον. ; 

᾿ ἀπαφίσχω (ADN), ἤπαφον. ϑροώσχω (ΘΟΡΩ), ἐλέη. 
ἀραρίσκω (APN), ἤραρον. ΚΑ44.), κέκαδον. 
ATPL, αὖρον. καίνω (KAN), ἕκανον. 
βάλλω (BAAD), ἔβαλον. κάμνω (KAM), ἔκαμον. 
βλαστάνω (Β. Α ΣΤ}, ἔβλαστον. κεύϑω (ΚΥΘ.ΩῚ), ἔκυϑον. 
βλώσκω (MOAR), ἔμολον. κιχάνω (KIX2), ἔκιχον. 
BPAXI, ἕβραχον. κλάζω (Κ441 2), ἔκλαγον. 

᾿ς δάκχκνω (ΔΑ ΚΑῚ, ἔδακον. κράζω (ΚΡΑΓΩῚ, ἔκραγον. 

© 44{, Woon ᾿ κτείνω (ΚΤ ΕΙΝΩΔ), ἕκτανον. 

᾿ς δαρϑάνω (AAPON), ἔδαρϑον. κτυπέω (ΚΤΥ ΠΩ), ἔκπυπον. vy 

τ δέρκομαι, ἔδρακον. λαγχάνω (.4Χ.Ω), ἔλαχον. 

» ΖΙΚΩ, ἔδικον. : λαμβάνω (AABN), ἔλαβον. 

τ APAMD, ἔδραμον. λανϑάνω (.44Θ.2),, ἔλαϑον. 

τ EIA (144), εἶδον. λάσκω (AAKI2), ἕλακον. 

| EMM, εἶπον. λείπω (ATL), ἔλιπον. 

| EAETOR (EATON), ἤλυϑον. μανϑάνω (MAOL), ἔμαϑον. 

ΓΤ ΔΩ, εἷλον. _ μάρπτω (Π14ΡΠ.2), “μέμαρπον., 

| ἘΝΕΓΚΩ, ἤνεγκον. ο΄ ΜΕΙΡΩ (ΜΕΡΩ), ἔμμορον. 

| ἐνίπτω (ENUIL2), ἐνέντ πον. μηκάομαι (MAK), ἔμακον. 

᾿ς ἐνίσπω, ἔνισπον. μυκάομαι (ΜΥ ΚΙ), ἕμυκον. 


"ὧν > Re 


112 INFLECTION 
ὀφείλω (OMEAN), apehor. 
ὀφλισκάνω (O®AN), ὠφλον. 
πάλλω (14.4.2), ἔπαλον. 

παάσχω (AOL), ἔπαϑον. 
πείϑω (Π1|1Θ.2), ἔπιϑον. 
πέρδω, ἔἕπαρδον. 

πέρϑω, ἔπραϑον. 

πίπτω (LET), ἔπεσον, ἕπετον. 
πίνω (1112), ἔπιον. 

πλήσσω (ITAAT 2), ἔπληγον. 
ΠΟΡΟΩ,, ἕπορον. 

ataiow (ΠΤ 402), ἔπταρον. 
στείχω { STIX), ἔστιχον. 
στυγέω (ΣΤΥ ΓΙ), ἔστυγον. 


OF WORDS. [$$ 106, 107. 
τίχτω (TEKL), ἔτεκον. 
τιτύσκομαι (ΤὙΚΑΩῚ, ἔτυκον. 
τμήγω (TMA), ἕτμαγον. 
τορέω (ΤῸ ΡΩ)Ρ,, ἔτορον. 
τρέπω, ἔτραπον. 

τρέφω, ἕτραφον. 

τρώγω (ΤΡΑΓ)), ἔτραγον. 
τυγχάνω (ΤΎΧ.Ω), ἔτυχον. 
PAIN, ἕφαγον. 

VEN, πέφνον, ἔπεφν»ον. 
φεύγω (PIT), ἔφυγον. 
φράζω (PPAAN), ἔφραδον. 
yout (ΧΑ44.2),, κέκαδον. 
χαίνω (ΧΑΙΝΙΩῚ), ἔχανον. 


ΤΆ), ἕταγον. 
τέμνω (téuw), ἔτεμον, ἔταμον. 
ΤΕΈΤΙΜΏ, ἕτετμον.. 


χανδάνω (ΧΑ4,.2), ἔχαδον. 
XPAIZMN, ἔχραισμον. « 9 2 


Nore. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist active. See ἀραρίσκω», 
EIMQ, ἘΝΕΓΚΏΩ, χλάξω, καείνω, μάρατω, πάσχω, πείϑω, πέρϑω, πίπτω, 
in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 


PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 


ὃ 106. 1. Τὸ form the present passive, drop ὦ 
of the present active, and annex ova. E. g. 


τύπτω ῬΓΘ68. pass. τύπτομαι. 


2. To form the imperfect passive, drop ouae of 
the present, annex ouyy, and prefix its augment. 


E. g. 


τύπτω, τύπτομαι imperf. pass. ἐτυπτόμην. 
PERFECT PASSIVE. 


§ 107. To form the’perfect passive, drop ὦ of ᾿ 
the present active, annex at, and prefix its aug- 


ment. E. g. 
παύω perf. sora TET OU UCL 
φιλέω πεφίλημαι (ἢ 95) 
δηλόω " δεδήλωμαν (ibid.) 
λείπω sid λέλειμμαν (ὃ 8. 1) 
. πλέκω ΞΡ πέπλεγμαι (ᾧ 9. 1). . 


ᾧ 108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. . 113° 


So τιμάω, τετίμημαι (§ 95); arco, ἡμαμαι (ibid.); τέώ, τέτϊ-- 
por (ibid.) ; δακρύω, δεδάκρῦμαν (ibid.); τρέβω, τέτριμμαι 
(Ὁ 8. 1); γράφω, γέγραμμαι (ibid.); λέγω, λέλεγμαι" τεύχω, τέ- 
τευγμαι (ὃ 9.1); ἄδω, ἥσμαι (δ 10.1) ; πεέϑω, pai (ibid.) ; 
χωρίζω, κεχώρισμαν (ibid. ) 


For the inflection of the perfect passive, see above (§ 91). 


(1) The perfect passive of hquid verbs is always formed 
from the simple present. E. g. ἀγγέλλω, nigga φαίνω, 
πέφαμμαι. (ᾧ 96. 6, 18: 12. 3.) 

(2) When the vowel of the root is either ε, a, or o, the 
perfect passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes α. Εἰ. g. στέλ- 
ho, ἔσταλμαι " φϑείρω, ἔφρϑαρμαι. (ὃ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 


short vowel in the penult (ἢ 95. N. 1, 2), insert o before the 
terminations uo, ται, μεϑον, μεϑα. EH. g. 


τελέω, τετέλεσμαν τετέλεσται, τετελέσμεϑον, τετελέσμεϑα. 


᾿ Norte 1. Some pure verbs, especially such as retain the 


\ Norte 2. The liguid verbs mentioned above (§ 98. N. 1), and a few others, 
/ drop the » in the perfect passive. E. g. κλίνω, κέκλιμαι. 


Nore 3. Some liquid verbs in ym change » before μ into o. 
E. g. paiva, πέφασμαν for πέφαμμαι. 


» Nore 4. If the terminations wou, μεϑον, usta, be preceded 
by two consonants, the consonant immediately preceding them 
is dropped. E. g. τέρπω, τέτερμαι, τετέρμεϑον, τετέρμεϑα. 


Nore 5. In a few instances, the epic poets retain thé lingual (3, 9) un- 
changed before w E.g. KAAQ, κέκαδμαι" κορύσσω (KOPYOQ), κεκό- 
θυϑμαι- 


Nore 6. The following mute verbs change ε into & in the perfect passive: 
ag *daselere ° φρέπω, σέτραμμαι " reidw (OPEDQ), ridcappuan 


ἣν PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 


§ 108. To form the pluperfect passive, drop 
_ pot of the perfect passive, annex μήν, and ‘prefix 
ἢ its augment. E. g. 


τύπτω, τέτυμμαν  plup. pass. ἐτετύμμην. 
105 


πὰ ΩΝ 


hm ging ἢ nor Φ ἮΝ ype a κω κα 
a ἢ om ‘eae 
er te t age 
- Ἐν ss 
114 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ $§ 109, 110. 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE: 


δ 109. To form the aorist passive, drop @ of 


the present active, annex @yyv, and prefix its aug- — 


ment. E. g. 


παύω aor. pass, ἐπαύϑην 


φιλέω “f ἐφιλήϑην (ἢ 95) 
᾿ δηλοὼ “3 ἐδηλώϑην  (ibid.) 
λείπω Δ ἐλείφϑην (ὃ 7) 
πλέκω a ἐπλέχϑην (ibid.). 


So τιμάω, ἐτιμήϑην (ὃ 95); ἀνιάω, ἡνιᾶϑην (ibid.) ; φωράω, 
ἐφωρᾶϑην (ibid.) ; τρίβω, ἐτρίφϑην (8 7) 5 ; γράφω, AGG 


“λέγω, ἐλέχϑην ibid.) ; τεύχω, ἐτεύχϑην  ἄδω, ἤσϑην (ἢ 10. 9); 


πείϑω, ἐπείσϑην (ibid.) ; χωρίζω, ἐχωρίσϑην (ibid. ) 
The aorist passive thus formed is called the rimsT Aorist 
PASSIVE. Ἵ 


(1) The first aorist passive of liquid verbs is always derived ἡ 


from the simple present. EK. g. ἀγγέλλω, ἡγγέλϑην " Rt 
ἐφάνϑην. (ᾧ 96. 6, 18.) 

(2) When the vowel of the root is either ε, @, or o, the first 
aorist passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes a. ΕἾ, g. στέλλω, 
ἐστάλϑην" φϑείρω, ἐρϑάρϑην. (ὃ 96.6, 18,19.) : 


Nore 1. Some pure verbs, particularly such as retain the 
short vowel in the penult (ᾧ 96. N. 1, 2), insert o before: ϑην. 
Hi. g. 


τελέω, ἐτελέσϑην. 


Nore 2. The liguid verbs mentioned above (§ 98. N. 1) often drop the » 


τ μὴ the first aorist passive. E. g. κλίνω, adi commonly ἐκλίϑην. 


§ 210. Some verbs form their aorist passive also τ drop- 
ping ὦ of the present active, annexing nv, and prefixing the 
augment. E. g. 

λέγω aor. pass. ἐλέγην. 


The aorist passive thus formed is called the SECOND AORIST _ 


PASSIVE, 


The following list contains nearly all those ΠῚ which have — 


a second aorist passive. Bor the shit δνι of the root, see Ὶ 


above (ὃ 96). 


ἄγνυμι (AT), ἐάγην or ἐᾶγην. Siksoei (AAAATD), λόγον a 


Ee eee ee ee ὦ μον. ὰ. ᾿Ξ 


δ 110, 111.} | Formation oF THE TENSES. — 


- ἁρπαάζω (APITAT 2), ἡρπάγη». 


- βάπτω (ΒΑΦ.Ω), ἐβάφην. 
βλάπτω (Β.148.2), ἐβλάβην. 

» βλέπω, ἐβλέπεν. 

βρέχω, ἐβράχην. 

γράφω, ἐγραφη». 

44.2, ἐδάην. > . 

δαμάω (JAM), ἐδάμην. 

δέρκομαι, ἐδράκην. 

δέρω, ἐδάρην. 

εἴλω (EAN), ἐάλην. 

ξεύγνυμι (ZIT), ἐζύγην. 

ϑάπτω (OADN), ἐτάφην. 

ϑέρομαι, ἐθέρην. 

ϑλίβω, ἐθλίβην. 

ϑρύπτω (OPTHN), ἐτρύφην. 

κείρω (ΚΕΡΩ), ἐκάρην. 

κλέπτω (ΚΑΕΠ.ΩῚ), ἐκλάπην. 
κλίνω, ἐκλίνην. 

κόπτω (KOMI), ἐκόπην. 

καίω οἵ χᾶω, ἐκάην. ; 

κρύπτω (ΚΡΥΒ.Ω), ἐκρύβην. 

“σ λέγω, ἐλέγην. 
λέπω, ἐλέπην. 
uaive (MAN), ἐμάνην. 
μίγνυμι (MIT), ἐμίγην. 
οἴγω, οἴγην. 

- ὀρύσσω (ΟΡΥΓΩΔ), ὠρύγην. 
πάλλω (Π4.4.2), ἐπάλην. 
πείρω (ITEP), ἐπάρην. 
πήγνυμι (Π41ΓΩ))}, ἐπάγην. 
πλέχω, ἐπλάκην. 

ἃ πλήσσω (Π΄44{122), ἐπλήγην, 

᾿ς ἐπλάγην. 


ὶ 


\ 


115 


πνέγω, ἐπνίγην. 
ῥέω (PTL), ἐῤῥύην. 
ῥήγνυμι (PALL), ἐῤῥάγην. 


, δίπτω (ῬΙΦΑῚ, ἐῤῥίφην. 


σήπω (Σ41Π.2), ἐσάπην. 
σκάπτω (SKADLN), ἐσκάφην. 
σπείρω (SITEPI), ἐσπάρην.. 
στίβω, ἐστέβην. 

στέλλω (STEAN), ἐστάλην. 
στερέω (STEPS), ἐστέρην. 
στρέφω, ἐστράφην. 

σύρω, ἐσύρην. 


_ σφάλλω (SHAAN), ἐσφάλην. 


σφάσσω (ΣΦΑΓΩΔ), ἐσφάγην. 
τάσσω (TAI), ἐτάγην. 
τέμνω (τέμω), ἐτάμην. 

τέρπω, ἐτάρπην. 

τέρσομαι, ETEQOHY. 

τήκω (TAKS), ἐτάκην. 
τμήγω (ΤΙΑ͂ΓΩ), ἐτμάγην. 
τρέπω, ἐτράπηνγ. 

τρέφω and τράφω, ἐτράφην. 
τρίβω, ἐτρίβην. - 

τύπτω (TY), ἐτύπην. 
τύφω (ODN), ἐτύφην. 
φαίνω (DAN), ἐφάνην. 
φϑείρω (DOEPL), ἐφϑάρην. 
φλέγω, ἐφλέγην. 

φράσσω (ΦΡΑΓΩΔ), ἐφράγην. 
φρύγω, ἐφρύγην. 

Quo, ἐφυην. 


᾿ χαίρω (X APN), ἐχάρην. 


ψύχω (ΨΥΓΩ), ἐψύγην 


FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 


δ 111. 1. To form the first future passive, drop 
ϑὴν of the first aorist passive, annex ϑήσομαι, and 


reject the augment. 


E. g. 


τύπτω, ἐτύφϑην 1 fut. pass. τυφϑήσομαι. 
2. To form the second future passive, drop ν of the second 


aorist passive, annex ἡσομαι, and reject the augment. 
2 fut. pass. τυπήσομαι. 


ld , 
τύπτω; ἐτύπην 


E. δὲ 


116 INFLECTION OF worps. | [§§ 112-114. 


§ 112. To form the third future passive, drop 
αὐ of the second person singular of the perfect 
passive, and annex ouo. KE. g. 


τύπτω, τέτυμμαι, τέτυψαν 9 fut. τετύψομαι. 


Nore. Liquid verbs, and verbs beginning with a vowel, very seldom ts a 
third future passive. 


PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLU 
PERFECT, MIDDLE. . 


§ 113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and plu- 
perfect, middle, are the same as in the passive. 


FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE. 


δ 114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop 


c of the first future active, and annex ova. E. g. 


τύπτω, tt 1 fut. mid. TU OM Oa 
Norte 1. When the first future active ends in ὦ (ᾧ 102. 
N. 1, 2, 3), the first future middle ends in otuw. E.g. . 


κομίζω, κομιῶ, 1 fut. mid. κομιοῦμαι, inflected like φιλοῦμαι. 
καλέω, καλῶ, 1 fut. mid. καλοῦμαι. 


_ §So in the Dorie dialect, τύπτω, τυψῶ, 1 fut. mid. τυψοῦμαι. 
The Attics sometimes use ν᾽ ςὨ Doric first future middle. 


2. To form the second future middle, drop ὦ of 
the second future active, and annex ova. LE. g. 


στέλλω, στελέω otela 2 fut, mid. στελέομαι, contracted 
στελοῦμαι. : 


_ Nore 2. In a few instances the second future middle is found in mute and ~—— 


pure verbs. See the Anomalous touss, μανϑάνω, μάχομαι, πίνω, πίπτω, 


’ 
σίκτω. ὰ 


* 
aw 


ὌΝ 


ᾧ 115 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


117 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE. 


§ 115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop 


α of the first aorist active, and annex ἀμῆν. 
1 aor. mid. ἐτυψάμην. 


τύπτω, ἔτυψα 


E. 5. ΕἾ 


2. Some verbs form their aorist middle by dropping 
of the present active, annexing ομην, and prefixing the aug- 


ment. E. g. 
EAN 


aor. mid. εἱλόμην. 


The aorist middle thus formed is called the sEconD AORIST 


MIDDLE. 


The following list contains nearly all thoge verbs which 


have a second aorist middle. 
see above (96). 


ἀγείρω, (4ΓΕΡΩ), ἡγερόμην. 

ἄγω, ἠγαγόμην. 

αἴρω (44), ἠρόμην. 

αἰσϑάνομαι (41ΣΘ.2}), ἦσϑό- 
μὴν. 

ἀλιταίνω (AAITQ), ἡλιτόμην. 

ἀκαχίξω (AX), ἠκαχόμην. 

ἄλλομαι (4.4), ἡλόμην. 

βάλλω (BAAN), ἐβαλόμην. 

γίγνομαι (TEND), ἐγενόμην. 

δαίω (44.2), euouny. 

ἐγείρω (ETEP2), ἡγρόμην. 


_ EIA, εἰδόμην. 


EAL, εἱλόμην. 

ἕπω, ἑσπόμην. 

ἔρομαι, ἠρόμην. 

εὑρίσκω (ΕΥΡΩ), εὑρόμην. 
ἔχω, ἐσχόμην.. 

ixveouce (ἵκω), ἱκόμην. 


Nore. Some of these verbs have also ἃ first aorist middle. 


3% ὥἅλλομιαι; σρίπω. 
x 


For the Changes of the root, 


κέλομαι, ἐχεκλόμην. 

λαμβάνω πον ἐλαβόμην. 

λανϑάνω (AAOR), ἐλαϑόμην. 

λάσκω (44ΚΑῚ, λελακόμην. 

λείπω (AIT), ἐλιπόμην. 

ὄλλυμι (OAL), ὠλόμην. 

ὄρνυμι, (OP), ὠρόμην. 

ὀσφραίνομαι (ΟΣΦΡΙ), ὦσφρο- 
μην. 

πείϑω (7110.2), ἐπιϑόμην. 

πέτομαι, ἐπτόμην. 

πλήσσω (LAAT), πεπληγό- 


μὴν 

τυδιδνμα; (TON), ἐπυϑό- 
μην. 

τέμνω (τέμω), ἐταμόμην. 

τέρπω, ἐταρπόμην. 

τίχτω (TEK2), ἐτεκόμην. 

τρέπω, ἐτραπόμην. 


Such are ΤῊΝ 


, [§ 116. 


118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


§ 116. Pure verbs in aw, e@, and ow, are con- 
tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect. 


Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in sw are contracted only when 
¢ and ε come together. E. g. πλέω, ah e8tg πλεῖς, πλέει πλεῖ, πλέο-- 
μὲν, πλέετε πλεῖτε, πλέουσι. 


Remark. δέω, bind, deviates from this analogy (ὃ 116. N. 1). E. g. : 


δέουσι δοῦσι, δέομεαι δέου 


Nore 2. For the contraction of διψάω, Siw, κνάω, «εἰινάω, σμιέω, χράω, 


Nore 3. The movable ν (ᾧ 15. 1) is very seldom appended 
to the contra#ed third person singular of the imperfect active, 


Nore 4. The Epic dialect sometimes changes the radical 
vowel ε ἰπίο ει. E. g. ὀκνείω for ὀχνέω. 


Nore 5. The Epic contracts geo: into εἴαι, and ¢so into sito. 
E. g. αἰδέεαι αἰδεῖαι, αἰδέεο αἰδεῖο, from αἰδέομαι. Sometimes it 
drops the second εξ. E. g. μυϑέαι for μυϑέεαι from μυϑέομαι. 


Nore 6. The Epic protracts @ or (contracted) into we ΟΥ̓ 
ag, and ὦ (contracted) into ow or ww or wo, and ῳ into οῳ. 
E. g. 

ἀγοράομαι, ἀγοράεσϑε ἀγορᾶσϑε, Epic ἀγοράασϑε 
πεδάω, πεδῶ, Epic πεδόω * πεδάεις πεδᾷς, Epic πεδάᾳς 
ἡβάω, ἡβάουσα ἡβῶσα, Epic sia ck ἡβάοντες ἡβῶντες, 
Epic ἡβώοντες : 
αἰτιάομαι, αἰτιάοιτο αἰτιῷτο, Epic αἰτιόῳτο. : 


In the Epic dialect, verbs in ow sometimes follow the analogy 
of verbs in aw. Εἰ. g. δηϊόω, δηϊόοντο δηϊοῦντο, Epic δηϊόωντο" 
δηϊόοιεν δηϊοῖεν, Epic δηϊόφεν, as if from δηϊάω. 

᾿ 


Norte 7./1n some instances the Epic changes the radical 
vowel α into ὦ. E. g. Caw, Cow. (ὃ 96. 19.) ; 


Nore 8. The Ionic very often changes the radical vowel a 


intos. E. g. φοιτέω for φοιτάω. 


Nore 9. The Ionic often changes ao into «. E. g. μηχα- 
γέωνται for μηχανάονται from μηχαγάομαι. | | 


ΗΝ ΨΥ ὙΓ ΠΠΣΡΘΠΤ 


ἡ se tt hale dial 


᾿ 


6116] 


CONTRACT VERBS, 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


I honor 
5. tipaw 
τιμῶ 
τιμάεις 
τιμᾷς 
τιμάει 
τιμᾷ 


2. τιμάομεν 
τιμῶμεν 
’ 
τιμάετον 
τιμᾶτον 
. σιμάετον 
τιμᾶτον 


P. τιμάομεν 
τιμῶμεν 
τιμάετε 
τιμᾶτε 
τιμαουσι(») 
τιμῶσι(ν) 


5. ἐτίμαον 
ἐτίμων 
ἐτίμαες 
ἐτίμας 
ἐτίμαξ 
ἐτίμα 
1). ἐτιμάομεν 
ἐτιμῶμεν 
ἐτιμάετον 
ἐτιμᾶτον 
ἐτιμαέτην 
ἐτιμάτην 


P. ἐτιμάομεν 
τς ἐτιμῶμεν 
ἐτιμάετε 
ἐτιμᾶτξε 
ἐτίμαον 
ἐτίμων 


INDICATIVE MOOD 


Present, 
I love 
S. φιλέω 
gua 
φιλέεις 
φιλεῖς 
φιλέει 
φιλεῖ 


1). φιλέομεν 
"φιλοῦμεν 
φιλέετον ἡ 
φιλεῖτον 
φιλέετον 
φιλεῦῖτον 


!Ρ. φιλέομεν 
φιλοῦμεν 
φιλέἕετξ 
φιλεῖτε 
φιλέουσι(ν) 
φιλοῦσι(») 


Imperfect. 
S. ἐφίλεον 
ἐφίλουν 
ἐφίλεες 
ἐφίλεις 
ἐφίλεεξ 
ἐφίλει 
1). ἐφιλέομεν 
ἐφιλοῦμεν 
ἐφιλέξτον 
ἐφιλεῖτον 
ἐφιλεέτην 
ἐφιλείτην 
P. ἐφιλέομεν 
ἐφιλοῦμεν 
ἐφιλέξτε 
épideite 
ἐφίλεον 
ἑωΐίλουν 


119 


T manifest 


Onhow 
δηλῶ 
δηλόεις 

δηλοῖς 


᾿ δηλόει 


δηλοῖ 


δηλόομεν 
δηλοῦμεν 

δηλόετον 
δηλοῦτον 

δηλόετον 
δηλοῦτον 


δηλόομεν 
δηλοῦμεν 
δηλόετε 
δηλοῦτε 
δηλόουσι(ν) 
δηλοῦσι(») 


ἐδήλοον 
ἐδήλουν 
ἐδήλοες 
ἐδήλους 
ἐδήλοε 
ἐδήλου 
ἐδηλόομεν 
ἐδηλοῦμεν 
ἐδηλόετον 
- ἐδηλοῦτον x 
ἐδηλοέτην 
ἐδηλούτην 
ἐδηλόομεν 
ἐδηλοῦμεν 
ἐδηλόετε 
“ἐδηλοῦτε 
ἐδήλοον 
ἐδήλουν 


ΙΝ FLE CTION 


OF WORDS: 


SUBJ UNCTIVE MOOD. 


[51 16. Ἧ 


Μ᾿ τιμάω S. φιλέω “ ia: δηλόω 
“Δ τιμῶ φιλῶ δηλῶ 
τιμάῃς φιλέῃς 'δηλόῃς 
τιμᾷς φιλῆς δηλοῖς 
τιμάη φιλέη δηλόῃ 
Ἢ τιμᾷ φιλὴ δηλοῖ 
= Ὦ. τιμάωμεν D. φιλέωμεν 1). δηλόωμεν. 
Ε. αν τιμῶμεν φιλῶμεν “δηλῶμεν 
ἫΝ τιμάητον φιλέητον. ᾿δηλόητον 
ἐν Τ΄ς τιμᾶτον ἡ φιλῆτον τ δηλῶτον 
᾿ τιμάητον φιλέητον δηλόητον 
4 τιμᾶτον φιλῆτον δηλῶτον 
a ΟΡ τιμάωμεν P. φιλέωμεν P. δηλόωμεν 
ὯΝ 3 * τιμῶμεν φιλῶμεν δηλῶμεν 
a τιμάητε φιλέητε Ondonte 
τιμᾶτε. φιλῆτε , δηλῶτε 
τιμάωσι(») φιλέωσι(») : δηλόωσι(ν) 
τιμῶσι(ν φιλῶσι(ν) δηλῶσι(ν) 
“ OPTATIVE MOOD 
S. τιμάοιμν. SS. φιλέοιμι S. δηλόοιμι 
τιμῷμι φιλοῖμι ᾿δηλοῖμι 
3 τιμάοις φιλέοις δηλόοις 
ν΄ τιμῷς φιλοῖς δηλοῖς 
τιμάοι φιλέοι δηλόου, 
τιμῷ φιλοὶ ᾿ δηλοῖ 
D. τιμάοιμεν 1). φιλέοιμεν 1). δηλόοιμεν 
τιμῶ μέν φιλοῖμεν δηλοῖμεν 
ὕλαν τιμάοιτον φιλέοιτον δηλόοιτον 
νος THQ τον φιλοῖτον δηλοῖτον 
oy ΓΙ μκοίτην Ἴ φιλεοίτην͵ δηλοοίτην 
ΤῊΣ Ἂ TTT? φιλοίτην δηλοίτην 
i PL τιμάοιμεν. FP, φιλέοιμεν P. δηλόοιμεν 
τς τιμῶμεν φιλοῖμεν ᾿ς δηλοῖμεν 
τιμάοιτε φιλέοιτε δηλόοιτε - 
Ἂς τιμῷτε φιλοῖτε. δηλοῖτε , 
τιμάοιεν φιλέοιεν δηλόοιν 
- ς΄ τιμῷεν φιλοῖεν δηλοῖν 


ὧν τιμῴην, ῴης, on 


᾿ φημ γ, ῴητον, φήτην. 
‘ oe Yy ῴητε, ῴησαν 


φιλοίην, οἶης, oin 
οἶημεν, οίητον, οἰήτην οἰημεν, οἴητον, οιήτην. 
οἶημεν; οἴητξ, otnooy olnusr, οἶητε, οἴησαν 


ἡγε" 


Or thus (§ 87. N. 2). 


μὲ 4 


δηλοίην, oins, ofn 


x : 


οὐ ΡΟ ἃ 


+ ; - ’ 
—s 


~ §116] 


8. 


τίμαε 
τίμα 
τιμαέἕτω 
; 
τιμάτω 
oy 
τιμᾶτον 
τιμαἕτων 
τιμάτων 
τιμάετδ 
τιμᾶτε 


τιμαέτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 


, 
τιμαόντων 


τιμάτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 


“τιμώντων 


58 ’ 
TLUGELY 
Ὁ" - 

τιμὰν 


, , 4 
τιμάων, ἀουσα, HOY 
τιμῶν, WOK, ὧν 


, 
G. ἄοντος, ὦντος 


F a 


τιμάομαι 
τιμῶμαι 

τιμάῃ 
ss 


᾿ τιμάεται 


τιμᾶται 
τιμαόμεϑον 
τιμώμεϑον 
τιμάεσϑον 
τιμᾶσϑον 
τιμάεσϑον 
δ Ὁ 
τιμασϑον 
τιμαόμεϑα 
τιμώμεϑα 
τιμάεσϑε 
ω 
τιμασϑε 
τιμάονται 
τιμῶνται 


CONTRACT VERBS, 


8. 


P. 


giles 
φίλει 
φιλεέτω 
. φιλεέτω 
φιλέετον 
φιλεῖτον 
φιλεέτων 
φιλείτων 
φιλέετξ 
φιλεῖτε 
φιλεέτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
φιλεόντων 


φιλείτωσαν ΟΥ 


φιλούντων 


φιλέειν 
φιλεῖν 


PARTICIPLE. 
φιλέων, ἑουσα, Eo 
φιλῶν, οὖσα, οὖν 
6. ἕοντος, οὔντος 


S. 


P; 


φιλέομαν 
φιλοῦμαι 
φιλέῃ OF -ἔει 
φιλῇ οΥ -εἶ 
φιλέεται 
φιλεῖται 
φιλεόμεϑον 
φιλούμεϑον 
Φιλέεσϑον 
φιλεῖσθϑον 
φιλέεσϑον 
φιλεῖσϑον 
φιλεόμεϑα 
φιλούμεϑα 


| φιλέεσϑε 


φιλεῖσϑε 
φιλέονται 
φιλοῦνται 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


ΝᾺ 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


121. 


δήλοε 
δήλου 
δηλοέτω 
δηλούτω 
δηλόετον 
δηλοῦτον 
δηλοέτων 
δηλούτων 
δηλόετε 
δηλοῦτε 
δηλοέτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
δηλοόντων 
δηλούτωσαν Or 
δηλούντων 


δηλόειν 
δηλοῦν 


, ld , 
δηλοων, οουσα, oor 
δηλῶν, οὔσα, οὖν 
G. ὄοντος, οὔντος 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. — Present. 


8. 


δηλόομαν 
δηλοῦμαν 
δηλύῃ 
Onhot 
δηλόεται 
δηλοῦται, 
δηλοόμεϑον 
δηλούμεϑον 
δηλόεσϑον 
δηλοῦσθον. 
δηλόεσϑον 
δηλοῦσϑον 
δηλοόμεϑα: 
δηλούμεϑα 
δηλόεσϑε 
δηλοῦσϑε 
δηλόονταυ 
δηλοῦνται 


“ΡΨ ΨΥ 
~~ . 


ee. 
oe] , 


122 


ἐτιμαύμην 
ἐτιμώμην 
ἐτιμάου 
> . 
ἐτιμὼ 
᾿ 
ἐτιμᾶάξτο 
ἐτιμᾶτο 


ἐτιμαόμεϑον 
ἐτιμώμεϑον 
ἐτιμάεσϑον 
ἐτιμᾶσϑον 
ἐτιμαέσϑην 
ἐτιμάσϑην 
ἐτιμαόμεϑα 
ἐτιμώμεϑα 
ἐτιμάεσϑε 
ἐτιμᾶσϑε 
ἐτιμάοντο 
ἐτιμῶντο 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


8. 


D. 


Pp 


Imperfect. 


ἐφιλεόμην S. 
ἐφιλούμην 

ἐφιλέου 
ἐφιλοὺ 

ἐφιλέετο 
ἐφιλεῖτο 


ἐφιλεόμεϑον D. 
ἐφιλούμεϑον 

ἐφιλέεσϑον 
ἐφιλεῖσϑον 

ἐφιλεέσϑην 
ἐφιλείσϑην 


ἐφιλεόμεϑὰ ae 

ἐφιλούμεϑα 
ἐφιλέεσϑε 

ἐφιλεῖσϑε 
ἐφιλέοντο 

ἐφιλοῦντο 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


τιμάωμαι 
τιμῶμαι 

τιμάῃ 
τιμᾷ 

τιμάηταν 
τιμᾶται 


᾿τιμαώμεϑον 


τιμώμεϑον 
τιμάησϑον 

τιμᾶσϑον 
τιμάησϑον 

τιμᾶσϑον 


4 
τιμαωμεϑα 
τιμώμεϑα 
τιμάησϑε 
τιμᾶσϑε 
τιμάωνται 
τιμῶνται 


8. 


φιλέωμαι ΝᾺ 
φιλῶμαι 

φιλέη 
φιλῇ 

φιλέηταν 
φιλῆταν 


φιλεώμεϑον D. 

φιλώμεϑον 
φιλέησϑον 

φιλῆσϑον 
φιλέησϑον 

φιλῆσϑον 


φιλεώμεϑι - P. 
φιλώμεϑα 
φιλέησϑε 
φιλῆσϑε 
φιλέωνταν 
φιλῶνται 


[Ὁ 116. 


᾿ἐδηλοόμην 


ἐδηλούμην 
ἐδηλόου 
ἐδηλοῦ 


ἐδηλόετο “ 


ἐδηλοῦτο 


ἐδηλοόμεϑον 
ἐδηλούμεϑον 

ἐδηλόεσϑον 
ἐδηλοῦσϑον 

ἐδηλοέσϑην 
ἐδηλούσϑην 


ἐδηλοόμεϑα 
ἐδηλούμεϑα 

ἐδηλόεσϑε 

_ ἐδηλοῖσθϑε 

ἐδηλόοντο 
ἐδηλοῦντο 


δηλόωμαι 
δηλῶμαι 

δηλόῃ 
δηλοῖ 


. δηλόηται 


δηλῶται 


δηλοώμεϑον 
δηλώμεϑον 

δηλόησϑον 
δηλῶσϑον. 

δηλόησϑον. 
δηλῶσϑον 


δηλοώμεϑα 
δηλώμεϑα 

δηλόησϑε 
δηλῶσϑε 

δηλόωνται 
δηλῶνται 


. Ὗ 4 ἃ - 
a ee 


S. 


D. 


S. 


D. 


P. 


δ 116.] CONTRACT VERBS. 
| OPTATIVE MOOD 
S. τιμαοίμην S. φιλεοίμην 
τιμῴμην φιλοίμην 
τιμάοιο φιλέοιο 
τιμῷο φιλοῖο 
τιμάοιτο φιλέοιτο 
τιμῷτο φιλοῖτο 
19. τιμαοίμεϑον D. φιλεοίμεϑον — 
τιμῴμεϑον φιλοίμεϑον 
τιμάοισϑον φιλέοισϑον 
τιμῷσϑον φιλοῖσϑον 
τιμαοίσϑην φιλεοίσϑην 
τιμῴσϑην φιλοίσϑην 
Ῥ. τιμαοίμεϑα P. φιλεοίμεϑα 
τιμῴμεϑα φιλοίμεϑα 
τιμάοισϑε φιλέοισϑε 
τιμῷσϑε φιλοῖσϑε 
τιμάοιντο φιλέοιντο 
τιμῷντο φιλοῖντο 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
S. τιμάου S. φιλέου 
τιμῶ φιλοῦ 
τιμαέσϑω φιλεέσϑω 
τιμάσϑω φιλείσϑω 
D. τιμάεσϑον 10. φιλέεσϑον 
τιμᾶσϑον φιλεῖσϑον 
τιμαέσϑων φιλεέσϑων 
τιμάσϑων φιλείσϑων 
P. τιμάεσϑε P. φιλέεσϑε 
τιμᾶϑε φιλεῖσϑε 
τιμαέσϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ φιλεέσϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
τιμαέσϑων φιλεέσϑων 
τιμάσϑωσαν OF φιλείσϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
τιμάσϑων φιλείσϑων 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
τιμάεσϑαι φιλέεσϑαι 
τιμᾶσϑαι φιλεῖσϑαν — 
PARTICIPLE, 
τιμαύμενος, Ny OV φιλεόμενος, ἡ, ov 
τιμώμενος, ἢ, OV φιλούμενος, ἡ, ov 


123. 


δηλοοίμην 
δηλοίμην 
δηλόοιο 
δηλοῖο 
δηλόοιτο 
δηλοῖτο 
δηλοοίμεϑον 
δηλοΐμεϑον 
δηλόοισϑον 
δηλοῖσϑον 
δηλοοίσϑην 
δηλοίσϑην 
δηλοοίμεϑα 
δηλοίμεϑα 
δηλόοισϑε 
δηλοῖσϑε 
δηλόοιντο 
δηλοῖντο 


δηλόου 
δηλοῦ 
δηλοέσϑω 
δηλούσϑω 
δηλόεσϑον. 
δηλοῦσϑον 
δηλοέσϑων 
δηλούσϑων 
δηλόεσϑε 
δηλοῦσϑε 
δηλοέσθϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
δηλοέσϑων 
δηλούσϑωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
δηλούσϑων 


δηλόεσϑαι 
δηλοῦσϑαι 


δηλούμενος, ἡ, ov 
δηλούμενος, ἡ, ον 


124 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 117. 


VERBS IN MI 


§ 117. 1. Some verbs.in aa, ea, ow, vw, form their 
present and imperfect, and their second aorist active 
and middle, by dropping @, and annexing the termin- 
ations without the connecting vowels.. (δὲ 84: 85.) 


The augment of the past tenses of verbs in μὲ follows the 
general rules (δῷ 78-80). 


Nore 1. All verbs in zs may be inflected like verbs in w. E. g. σιϑέω, tes, 
iss, for ciSnus, ng, now, imperf. ἐσίϑεον, ess, et, for ἐσίϑην, ns, ἡ. 


2. The radical vowel (α, ε, 0, v) is lengthened in the singu- 
lar of the present and imperfect INpicaTive Active. A and ¢ 
become ἡ, and o becomes . 

The first and third persons singular of the present indicative 
active end in μι, ov, respectively, (§84.N.1.) E.g. 

ἱστάω gives ἵστημί, ης, yor* ἵστην, ἧς, 4° 
τιϑέω “5. τίϑημι, ns, ησι" ἐτίϑην, yo, 4° 
διδδω “ δίδωμι, ὡς, wor' ἐδίδων, ὡς, ὦ " 
δεικνύω “ῖ“ δείκνῦμι, ὕς, Vor ἐδείκνῦν, Vo, ὕ. 


Norte 2, The termination va: of the third person plural of 
the indicative active is often changed into do. -E. g. τίϑημι, 
τιϑέᾶσι for τιϑεῖσι, that is, for τιϑένσι, (ὃ 12. δ.) 


3. The Inpicative Passive and-Mipp.e generally retains 
the short vowel of the root. E. g. 

ἱστάω, ἵστημι, pass. ἵσταμαι, woul, ata." ἵστάμην, αἀσο, ATO" 

τιϑέω, TLI NUL, “< εἴϑεμαι, E00, star” ἐτιϑέμην, E00, ETO" 

διδόω, δίδωμι, ““ δίδομαι, οσαι, otar* ἐδιδόμην, οσο, οτο " 

δεικνύω; δείκνυμι, “ δείκνυμαι, vo, υται" ἐδεικνύμην, υσο, υτο. 


Nore 3. The terminations σαι, oo, of the second person singu- _ 


lar, often drop the o, and are contracted with the radical 
vowel. ΕἸ. g. τίϑημι, τίϑεμαι, τέϑεσαι, τίϑεαι contracted τίϑη. 

The old writers (as Homer, Hesiod, Herodotus) generally 
use the uncontracted second person singular. 


4. The Sussunctive of verbs in yu: and wy takes the con- 
necting vowels and is contracted. In this case wy and oy are 
contracted into ἡ and y respectively. The subjunctive of verbs 
in vu follows the analogy of τύπτω. E.g. 


ἵστάω, ἵστημι subj. ἱστάω, ans, ey contracted ἱστῶ, ἧς; ἢ 
τιϑέω, τίϑημι “ φυιϑέω, Ens, EN ws TLIO, NS, ἢ 
διδόω, δίδωμι “ διδόω, ons, on γ᾿ διδῶ, ᾧς, ᾧ 


{ςς 


΄ ’ 
δεικνύω, δείκνυμι δεικνύω, UNS, υῇ. 


- ‘Sia er εὐ. in 
δ). ἢ... t μ᾿. 
ye 

ἣν 


δ 1171 vents pO 125, 


Nore 4. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in vgs rejects the connect- 
ing vowel. E. g. διασκεδάννυμι, διασκεδάννῦσι for διασκεδαννύῃ. Such forms may 
be easily mistaken for the corresponding ones of the indicative. (§ 86. N. 2.) 


5. The Oprative Active of verbs in yu and wy: annexes 
to the root of the verb the endings 7», y¢, ἡ, dual roy, τῆν; 
plural ἡμεν, ητε, nour, preceded by». KE. g. 

ἱστάω, tornus οί. act. ἱσταίην, αἴης, ain 
τιϑέω, τίϑημε " τιϑ είην, ins, εἴη 
διδόω, δίδωμι διδοίην, οίης, ot. 

The optative active of verbs in vy follows the analogy of 
τύπτω. KE. g. δεικνύω, δείκνυμι, δεικνύοιμι, Vow, Vor. 


6¢ 


Nore 5. The dual and plural of the optative active often 
drop 7° in which case noay becomes ἐν. See the paradigms. 


Norr 6. In a few instances, the diphthong o in the optative active of verbs in 
wus is changed into» Εἰ, g. δίδωμι, 2 aor. opt. δῴην, δῴης, for doinv, δοίης. 


6. The Oprative Passtve and Mippie of verbs in nus 
and mu: annexes the terminations (ᾧ 87), likewise preceded 
by an. = E. δ' 

ἱστάω, tornuc Opt. pas. ἱσταίμην, ato, ito 
τιϑέω, τέϑημι ne τιϑείμην, E10, ELTO 
διδόω, δίδωμι διδοίΐμην, oto, οἴτο 

The optative passive and middle of verbs in υὑμὲ follows the 
analogy of τύπτω. E. g. δεικνύω, δείκνυμι, δεικνυοίμην, ύοιο, Voto. 


6é 


Nore. 7. In some instances, the optative of verbs in vgs is formed after the 
analogy of verbs in mes or ws. E, g. δαινόω, daivoyes, pres. mid, opt. 3d pers. 
sing. δαίνῦφο (more analogically desire). 


7. The Imperative annexes. the terminations to the 


root. (δ᾽ 88.1.) E.g. 


ἱστάω, tornus imperat. ἕσταϑι, τω" ἵστασο, άσϑω" 

τιϑέω, τίϑημν ““ TLD ετι (ὃ 14, Ν. 4), ἑτω " τέϑεσο, ἐσθω " 
διδόω, δίδω. “ δίδοϑι, ὁτω " δίδοσο, όσϑω" 

δεικνύω, δείκνυμι “ δείκνυϑι, ύτω " δείκνυσο, ύσϑω. 


Nore 8. The second person singular of the imperative active 
sometimes drops $:, and lengthens the radical vowel. E, σ᾿, 
᾿ ὕστημι, ἵστη for tora de? δείκνυμι, δείκνῦ for δείκνυϑι. 


Nore 9. The termination go of the second person singular 
of the imperative passive and middle often drops the o, and is — 
contracted with the radical vowel. LE. g. ἵστημι, ἵστασο, ἵσταο 
contracted ἵστω. 


8. The InrinitivE Active annexes ya: to the root of the 
verb. ἘΣ, g. 
11* 


126 INFLECTION OF WORDS. | [ὃ 117. ον 


ἱστάω, ἵστημι infin. act. “ἱστάναι 
weds, τέϑημι * τιϑέναι 
διδόω, δίδωμι OD overt 

δεικνύω, δείκνυμι " δεικνύναι. 

9. The ΤΝΡΙΝΙΤΙΥΕ Passive and ΜΊΡΡΌΒΕ annexes ὅϑαι to 


ee ee 


the root. E. ΕΣ 
ἱστάω, ἵστημε inf. pas. & mid. ἵστασϑαι, στάσϑαι 
τιϑέω, τέϑημι - τίϑεσθαι, ϑέσϑαι 
διδόω, δίδωμι “ δίδοσϑαι, δόσϑαι 


[1] 


δεικνύω; δείκνυμι δείκνυσϑαι. 


10. The root of the ParricrpLe Active is formed by an- 
nexing yt to the root of the verb. E. g. 


iataw, ἵστημι part. act. στάς, ἄντος, (§ 96. 2) 
τιϑέω, THO QUL ον τιϑείς, ἕντος, (ibid. ) 
διδόω, δίδωμι <4 διδούς, ὄντος, (ibid. 
δεικνύω, δεόκνυμι _ δεικνύς, ὕντος,( 1016, 4 


11. The Particrete Passtve and Mippte annexes μενος to 
the root of the verb. E. g. 
iotaw, totnus part. pas. & mid. ἱστάμενος, στώμενος 


τιϑέω, TEP H Ud s tutéusvoc, ϑέμενος 
διδόω, δέδωμι ‘s διδόμενος, δόμενος 
δεικνύω, δείκνυμι δὴ δεικνύμενος. 


12. The Seconp Aorist ΑΟΤΙΨΕ lengthens the radical vowel 
throughout the indicative and imperative, and m the infinitive. 
A, when. it. isnot preceded by 0» becomes y. BE. g. βιβάω, βίβημι; 

2 aor. ἔβην, ἧς, ἡ, ἥτον, ἥτην, Huey, nte, ἡσαν" Inperat. Bn, 

ἥτω, ἦτον, ἤτων, Ate, ἤτωσαν " infin. βῆναι. ΄ 

Nore 10. KTHMI and OYTHMI retain the short vowel in the second 
aorist active. See the Anomalous xrsivw and οὐφτάω.. See also κλύω. 


Δίδωμι and φσέϑηρω lengthen the vowel. only in the singular of the second 
aorist indicative, and in the second:aorist infinitive. See the paradigms. 

Nore 11. The second person singular of the second aorist imperative, in. ἃ few 
instances, takes ¢ instead of 3. See the Anom. didmpu, ἔχω, intl τίϑημι, φρέω. 

Nore 12. The imperatives B79; and σσῆϑ', from βέβημι and iornus, in com- 
position, often drop 3)» and change: into ἃ. E. g. κατάβα for κατάβηϑες- 

Nore 13. The verbs riSnus, ins, and δίδωμι, lengthen s and ὁ into εἰ and ov 
in the second aorist active infinitive .. thus, Seivas, sivaty. δοῦναι. 

Norge 14. KTIMI, ΠΙΜΙ, ®OIMI, and ITAQMY, i in some. of the parts 
of the second aorist follow. the analogy of verbs in ms or wus. See the 
Anomalous KTIO, vivw, gSivw, and rrdw. 

Note 15. In a few instances, the sEcCOND AoRIST MIDDLE lengthens the 
radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and participle. See the 
Anomalous βάλλω, κιχάνω, ὀνίνηρζι, Wipm Anes 


Norte 16. Those verbs in yu, of which the present is used, 


“" 


ΔΙ1717 VERBS IN μι. 127 


% 
“ 


have no second aorist. On the other hand, when the second 
aorist is used, the present is obsolete. Εἰ. g. δείχνυμνι has no 
second aorist ; and ἔφῦν comes from the. obsolete Φ.,ΙΙ. 

In order, therefore, to complete the paradigm of verbs in 
yu, the second aorist of Jrmr is subjoined to δείκνυμι. 


Nore 17. Drauects. (1) In the rnpicative the Doric has 
τι, yt, for ot, vor. Εἰ. g. τέϑητι, τυϑέντι. (ᾧ 84. N. 6.) 

(2) In the imperfect and second aorist indicative, the Epic 
and Ionic dialects often use oxo», σκόμην, in Which case the 
radical vowel always remains short. E. g. τίϑημι, τίϑεσκον for 
ἐτέϑην  ἵστημι, στάσκον for ἔστην. (ᾧ 85. N. 5.) 

(3) The Epic often drops σὰ in the third person plural of the 
imperfect and second aorist active indicative, in which case the 
preceding long vowel is shortened. E. g. ἵστημι, toréy for ἔστη-- 
σαν τίϑημι, ἔτιϑεν for ἐτέϑεσαν᾽" JITMI, ἔδυν for ἔδῦσαν. 

(4) The Lonic often uses atau, ato, in the indicative passive 
and middle. E. g. τέϑημι, τυϑέαται, ἐτιϑέατο. (ὃ 84. N. 6.) 

(5) The Epic and Ionic often use the uncontracted suB- 
JUNCTIVE. E. g. τίϑημι, ϑέω for Fo. 

(6) Sometimes the Epic, in the subjunctive, lengthens the 
radical vowel ε into εἰ or y. Εἰ. g. τίϑημι, ϑείω, Inns, for ϑέω, 
ϑέῃς. (δ 116. N. 4.) 

(7) It sometimes shortens the connecting vowels of the sub- 
junctive. E. g. τέϑημι, ϑείομεν for Fsiouer. (ᾧ 86. N. 3.) 

(8) In the third person singular of the subjunctive active, it 
sometimes uses σι... E. g. δέδωμι, δῷσι for δῷ.. (ὃ 86. N. 2 ) 

(9) Verbs in wy: sometimes change the radical o into ὦ in 
the subjunctive. E. g. δίδωμι, dow, δώῃς, for da, δῷς. 

(10) The epic poets. sometimes lengthen the radical vowel 
in the INFINITIVE ACTIVE, and PARTICIPLE PASSIVE and MIDDLE, 


’ 


ΕἸ, g. τίϑημι, τιϑήμεναι, τιϑήμενος ᾿ δίδωμι, διδοῦναι. 5 
Norte 18. Accent. The rules stated above (§ 93) apply also to verbs in pes 
We only observe here that, 
(1) The accent of the regular third person plural of the indicative active devi- 
ates from the rule ‘§ 93. 1). 
(2) The dissyllabic forms of the present active indicative of sivi and Oni, de- 
viate from the rule (§ 93. 2). In composition, however, they follow the rule. 
(2) The infinitive active takes the accent on the penult. E. g. ἱστάναι. Ex- 
cept the Epic infinitive in wevas, as σιϑήμεναι. 
(4) The participle active takes the accent on the last syllable. E.g. iords,rideis. 
(5) When the syllabic augment is omitted (§ 78. N. 3), long monosyllabic 


- forms take the circumflex. E.. g. γνῷ for ἔγνω from γιγνώσκω. 


(6) For the accent of the subjwnctive and optative passive of ternus and δίδω- 
pi, see the paradigms. : ' P 

Ajidiwus sometimes throws the accent back on the antepenult in the swbjwnctive 
and optative passive, when the last syllable permits it (§ 20). “Iernus sometimes 
does the same in the optative passive. 


= ΠΝ 
wg 
7 Ἢ 
a) 


τ 


1g 7. ' 


δύμην 


τ 


128 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
Synopti- 
ACTIVE — 
Inpicative. SupsunctTive. OprTaTiveE. 
Present. ἵστη. ἱστῶ iotainv 
Imperfect. ἵστην 
Aorist 2. ἔστην στῶ σταίην 
Present. τίϑημι τιϑώ τιϑείην 
Imperfect. ἐτίϑην 
Aorist 2. ἔϑην ta ϑείην 
Present. δίδωμι διδώ ᾿ διδοίην 
Imperfect. ἐδίδων 
_ Aorist 2. ἔδων - δῶ δοίην 
Present. δείκνῦμε δεικνύω δεικνύοιμι 
Imperfect. ἐδείκνῦν | 
Aorist 2. édvv δύω donv 
PASSIVE AND 
Present. ἵσταμαι ἕστώμαι ἱσταίμην 
Imperfect. ἑἱστάμην ᾿ ων 
2 Aor. Mid. ἐστάμην στῶμαι σταίμην 
Present. τίϑεμαι τιϑῶμαι τιϑείμην 
Imperfect. ἐτιϑέμην 
2 Aor. Mid. ἐϑέμην ϑώμαι ϑείμην 
Present. didouce διδώμαι διδοίμην 
Imperfect. ἐδιδόμην bal ουδὲ 
2 Aor. Mid. ἐδόμην dance doiuny 
Present. δείκνυμαι δεικνύωμαι δεικννοίμην 
Imperfect. ἐδεικνύμην 
2 Aor. Mid. ἐδύμην δύωμαι 


8117. 
cal Table. 
VOICE. 


IMPERATIVE. 
ἵσταϑι 


στηϑι 
τίϑετι 


ϑέτι 


δίδοϑι 
δόϑι 
δείκνυϑι 
Oust 
MIDDLE. 
ἵστασο 
᾿ στάσο 

τίϑεσο 
ϑέσο 
δίδοσο 
δόσο 
δείκνυσο 


δύσο 


VERBS IN μι. 


INFINITIVE. 


ἱστάναι 


στῆναι 


τιϑέναι 


θεῖναι 


διδόναι 


δοῦναι, 


δεικνύναι 


δύναι 


ἵστασϑαι 


στάσϑαι 


τίϑεσθαι 


θέσθαι 
δίδοσθαι 


δόσϑαι 


δείκνυσθαι 


δύσϑαι 


129 


PARTICIPLE. 
ς , 
ἷστάς 


στάς 


τιϑείς 


θείς 


διδούς 


δούς 


δεικνύς 


δύς 


ἱστάμενος 


, 
στάμενος 


τιϑέμενος 


ϑέμενος 


διδόμενος 


δόμενος 


δεικνύμενος 


δύμενος 


190 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present. 
I place I put 1 give 

S. ἵστημι τίϑημι δίδωμι 
ἵστης τίϑης δίδως 
ἵστησι(ν) τἰϑησι(ν) δίδωσι(ν) 

10. ὕσταμεν τίϑεμεν δίδομεν 
ἵστατον τίϑετον δίδοτον 
ἵστατον τίϑετον δίδοτον 

P. ὕσταμεν τίϑεμεν δίδομεν 
ἵστατε τίϑετε δίδοτε 
ἱστᾶσι(ν) τιϑεῖσι(»ν) Or διδοῦσι(ν) or 

τιϑέασι(») διδόδσι(ν) 
Imperfect. 

S. ἵστην ἐτίϑην ἐδίδων 
ἵστης ἐτίϑης ἐδίδως 
ἵστη ἐτίϑη ἐδίδω | 

D. ἵσταμεν ἐτίϑεμεν ἐδίδομεν 
ἵστατον ἐτίϑετον ἐδίδοτον 
ἱστάτην ἐτυϑέτην ἐδιδότην 

P. ἵσταμεν ἐτίϑεμεν ἐδίδομεν 
ἵστατε ἐτίϑετε ἐδίδοτε 
ἵστασαν ἐτίϑεσαν ἐδίδοσαν 

Second Aorist. 

S. ἔστην ἔϑην ἔδων 
ἔστης ἔϑης ἔδως 
ἔστη ἔϑη ἔδω 

..12.. ἔστημεν ἔϑεμεν ἔδομεν 
ἕστητον ἔϑετον “ἔδοτον 
ἐστήτην ἐθέτην ἐδότην 

P. ἔστημεν ἔϑεμεν ἔδομεν 
ἔστητε ἔϑετε ἔδοτε 
ἔστησαν ἔϑεσαν ἔδοσαν 


I show 
δείκνῦμι 
δείκνῦς 
δείκγῦσι(») 


δείκνυμεν 
δείκνυτον 
δείκνυτον 


δείκνυμεν 

δείκνυτε 

δεικνῦσι(») or 
δεικγύασι(ν) 


ἐδείκνῦν 
ἐδείκνῦς.. 
ἐδείκνῦ 
ἐδείκνυμεν 
ἐδείχνυτον 
ἐδεικνύτην 


ἐδείκνυμεν 
ἐδείκνυτε 
ἐδείκνυσαν 


“ἔδῦσαν : 
(ὃ 117. N. 16.) oa 


ae Sa ee ee a eee ee 


7 


Ve “. α . 
ee ee ee ee ee 


» § 117.) ACTIVE VOICE. OF VERBS IN μι. : 191. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present. 

S. tora τυϑὼ διδῶ δεικνύω 
ἱστῆς TOTS διδῷς δεικνύῃς © 
tory τιϑῇ διδῷ δειχκγύῃ 

D. ἱἵἱστῶμεν τυιϑῶμεν διδῶμεν δεικνύωμεν 
ἱστῆτον στυϑῆτον διδῶτον δεικνύητον 
ἱστῆτον τυϑῆτον διδῶτον δεικνύητον 

P. ἱστῶμεν τιϑὼμεν διδῶμεν δεικνύωμεν 
ἱστῆτε τυϑὴτε διδῶτε δεικνύητε 
ἱστῶσι(ν) τιϑῶσι(ν) διδῶσι(»). δεικνύωσι(ν) 

Second Aorist. 
; στῶ in- a inflected δῶ inflected δύω (§ 117. 4.) 
; flect.like like the like the 
Σ the Pres. Pres. Pres. 
ἔ OPTATIVE MOOD. 
ν Present. 
4 S.  totainy τιϑείην διδοίην δεικνύοιμι 
ξ iotaing τιϑείης διδοίης δεικνύοις 
Fe ἱσταίη τυϑείη διδοίη δεικνύον 
Dz ἵσταΐημεν τιϑείημεν διδοίημεν δεικνύοιμεν 
¥ ἱσταίητον τιϑείητον διδοίητον δεικνύοιτον 
& ἱσταιήτην τυϑειήτην διδοιήτην δεικνυοίτην 
PP. ἱσταΐημεν τιϑείημεν διδοίημεν δεικνύοιμεν 
i totaints τυϑείητε διδοίητε δεικγύοιτε ᾿ 
ἕ ἱσταίησαν τιϑείησαν διδοίησαν δεικνύοιεν 
ἱ Or thus (§ 117. N. 5) 
᾿ς 0. ioroitov τιϑεῖτον διδοῖτον 
§ iotaitny τυιϑείτην διδοίτην 
PP. ἱσταῖμεν τιϑεῖμεν διδοῖμεν 
μὴ : ἱσταῖτε τιϑεῖτε ᾿διδοῖτε 
Ls ἱσταῖεν Td Elev διδοῖεν 
3 Second Aorist. ee 
$ otainy in- Θϑείην inflect. δοίην inflect.. diny 
ἃ flect.like like the like the 3 
ἄς the Pres. Pres. Pres. (6 117. N..7.) * 


182 


ἵσταϑι 
ΟΥ ἵστη 
ἱστάτω 
ἵστατον 
ἱστάτων 


ἵστατε 
ἱστάτωσαν 
Or ἱστάντων 


στῆϑι 
στήτω 
στῆτον 
στήτων 
στῆτε 
στήτωσαν 

OF στάντων 


Pres. ἵστάναι 
2 Aor. στῆναι 


Pres. ἕστάς 
2 Aor. στάς 


8. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


-IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Present. 
τίϑετι δίδοθϑι 
τιϑέτω διδότω 
τίϑετον δίδοτον 
τιϑέτων διδότων 
τίϑετε δίδοτε 
τυιϑέτωσαν διδότωσαν 


Or τυϑέντων 


Second Aorist. 


ϑέτι OY ϑὲς δόϑι οἵ δός 
ϑέτω δότω 
ϑέτον δότον 
θέτων δότων 
ϑέτε δότε 
ϑέτωσαν δότωσαν 

ΟΥ ϑέντων or δόντων 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
τιϑέναι διδόναι 
ϑεῖγαι δοῦναι 

PARTICIPLE. 

τιϑεἰς διδούς 
ϑεἰς δούς 


or διδόντων 


: ’ 
ων» 


[8 117, ᾿ 


- 


δείκνυϑι 
ΟΥ̓ δείχκνῦ 

δεικνύτω 
δείκνυτον 
δεικνύτων 
δείκνυτε 
δεικνύτωσαν 

or δεικγύντωγ 


δῦϑι ᾿ 
δύτω 

δῦτον 

δύτων 


εδῦτε 


δύτωσαν 
or δύντων 


δεικνύναι 
δῦναι 


δεικνύς 
δύς 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


ἵσταμαι 
ἵστασαν 


ἵσταται 

ξ΄ 
ἱστάμεϑον 
ec 
ἵἱστασϑον 
ec 
ἱστασϑὸν 
ἱστάμεϑα 
c 
ἱστασϑε 


ἵστανται 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Ἶ Present. 
τέϑεμαι δίδομαν — 
τίϑεσαι . δίδοσαι 

or tidy ‘ 
τίϑεται 'δίδοται 
τιϑέμεϑον διδόμεϑον 
τίϑεσϑον δίδοσϑον 
τίϑεσθον δίδοσθϑον 
τιϑέμεϑα διδόμεϑα 
τίϑεσϑε ᾿'δίδοσϑε 
τίϑενται Ἅ δίδονται 


δείκνυμαι 
δείκνυσαι 


δείκνυται 
δεικνύμεϑον 
δείχνυσϑον 
δείχνγυσϑον 
δεικγνύμεϑα 
δείχνυσϑε 
δείκνυνται 


Ε΄ §n7] 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE OF VERBS 


act 
Wal V EBSSiITyY 


SE LIBRA 


OF THE 


ay 


Imperfect. ἐν, 
3. ἱστάμην ἐτιϑέμην ἐδιδόμην ἐδεικνύμην 
ἵστασο ἐτίϑεσο, ἐδίδοσο ἐδείκνυσο 
Or ἵστω ΟΥ ἐτέϑου ΟΥ ἐδίδου 
ἵστατο, ἐτίϑετο ἐδέδοτο ἐδείκνυτο 
D. ἱστάμεϑον. ἐτιϑέμεϑον ἐδιδόμεϑον ἐδεικγύμεϑον 
ἵστασϑον ἐτίϑεσθον ἐδίδοσϑον ἐδείκνυσϑον 
ἱστάσϑην ἐτιϑέσϑην ἐδιδόσϑην ἐδεικνύσϑην 
P.  ἱστάμεϑα ἐτιϑέμεϑα ἐδιδόμεϑα. ἐδεικνύμεϑα 
ἵστασϑε ἐτίϑεσϑε ἐδίδοσθϑε ἐδείχνυσϑε 
ἵσταντο ἐτίϑεντο ἐδίδοντο ἐδείκνυντο | 
Second Aorist Middle. 
ἐστάμην ἐθέμην ἐδόμην ἐδύμην 
inflected. inflected inflected inflected 
like the like the like the like 
Imperf. Imperf. Imperf. ἐδειχγύμην : 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present 
S. ἱστῶμαι τιϑῶμαι διδῶμαι δεικνίωμαι 
ἱστῇ τιϑὴ διδῷ δεικνύῃη 
ἱστῆται τιϑῆται διδῶται δεικγύηται - 
D. ἱστώμεϑον τιϑώμεϑον διδώμεϑον δειχγυώμεϑον 
ἱστῆσϑον τιϑῆσϑον διδῶσϑον δεικνύησϑον 
| ἱστῆσϑον τιϑήῆσϑον - διδώσϑον᾽ δεικγύησθϑον. 
i P. ἱστώμεϑε τιϑώμεϑα διδώμεϑα δεικγυώμεϑα 
ἔν ἱστῆσϑε τιϑῆσϑε διδῶσϑε δεικνύησϑε τ 
@ ἱστῶνται τιϑῶνται διδῶνται δεικνύωντι ὃ 
» α' oe 
‘ Second Aorist Middle. 
e στῶμαι ϑῶμαι - δῶμαι δύωμαι 
2 like the like the like the like 
᾿ Present. Present. Present. ᾿ δεικγύωμαι 


12 


[ 7. 


[34 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 
| Present. 

S. ἱσταίμην τιϑείμην διδοίμην δεικνυοίΐμην 
ἱσταῖο τιϑεῖο διδοῖο. δεικνύοιο 
ἱσταῖτο τιϑεῖτο διδοῖτο δεικνύοιτο 

D. ἱσταίμεϑον τιϑείμεϑον διδοίμεϑον δεικνυοίμεϑον 
ἱσταῖσϑον τιϑεῖσϑον Ὃδιδοῖσθϑον δεικγύοισϑον 
ἱσταΐίσϑην τιϑείσϑην διδοίσϑην δεικνυοίσϑην 

P. ἱσταίμεϑα τιϑείμεϑα διδοίμεϑα δεικνυοίμεϑα 
ἱσταῖσϑε τιϑεῖσθϑε διδοῖσϑε δεικνύοισϑε 
ἱσταῖντο τιϑεῖντο διδοῖντο δεικγύοιντο 

Second Aorist Middle. 
σταΐμην ϑείμην δοίμην δύμην 
like the like the like the (§ 117. N. 17.) 
Present. Present. Present. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 
S. ἵστασο τίϑεσο δίδοσο δείκνυσο 
or tote or τέϑου or δίδου 
ἱστάσϑω. τιϑέσθω διδόσϑω δειλνύσϑω 

D. ἵστασϑον τίϑεσϑον δίδοσϑον. δείκνυσϑον ὁ 
ἱστάσϑων τιϑέσθων διδόσϑων δεικνύσϑων 

P. ἵἴστασϑε τίϑεσϑε δίδοσϑε δείκνυσϑε 
ἱστάσϑωσαν τιϑέσθωσαν διδόσϑωσαν δεικνύσϑωσαν 


or τιϑέσθων or διδόσϑων οἵ δεικνύσθων 


Second. Aorist Middle, 


or ἱστάσϑων 


στάσο ϑέσο Or Gov doco or δοῦ δύσο 
like the like the like the like 
Present. Present. Present, δείκνυσο. — 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pres. ἵστασϑαι τίϑεσϑαι δίδοσϑαι δείχνυσϑαι 
2Α.Μ. στάσϑαι Boda δόσϑαι δύσϑαι 
᾿ PARTICIPLE. 
Pres. ἱστάμενος τιϑέμενος διδόμεγος δεικνύμενος 
2 A.M. στάμενος ϑέμενος δόμενος δύμενος 


Remark. It is supposed that the aorist of verbs in μὲ originally ended in 
ov, ony, (δὲ 105: 115. 2.) Hence its name second aorist. 


ΕΝ 


§ 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 135. 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


§ 118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are 
supposed to have, more than one present (§ 96). 


2. All verbal forms, which omit the connecting vowel ( 85. 
1), are anomalous; except the perfect and aorist passive 


($$ 91: 92). 


3. The following catalogue contains nearly all fhrobe verbs 
which are apt to perplex the learner. 


Remark. In this Grammar, obsolete or imaginary Presents 
(§ 96) and Nominatives (ὃ 46), are always printed in capitals. 
They are so printed “ in order that the eye may not become 
accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude 
of unused and merely imaginary forms, and thus rendered less 


capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight.” 


A. 

AAN, nyure, A. ἄασα contract- 
ed ἃ “ou, A. Pass. ἀάσϑην, A. 
Mid. ἀασάμην. Pres. Mid. 
3d pers. sing. ἀᾶται. (ὃ 109. 
N. 1. 

ἄγαμαι (ALAND, ATHMI), ad- 
mire, A. Pass. ἡγάσϑην, F 
Mid. ἀγάσομαι, A. Mid, (not 
Attic) ἡγασάμην. (S$ 117: 
95. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 

The Present ἀγάομαι ΟΥ̓ 
ἀγαίομαι, am angry at, envy, 
is used by the epic poets. 
(ἢ 96. 18.) 

ἀγείρω (ἉΓΕΡΩῚ, collect, ays 
ρῶ, ἤγειρα, ἀγήγερκα, ἀγήχερ- 
μαι, ἡγέρϑην, Ὁ Α. Μι 4, nye 

᾿ ρόμην (Epic), Infin. ἀγερέ- 
σϑαι, Part. ἀγρόμενος for 
ἀγερόμενος. (S$ 96, 18: 81. 
1: 26. I. 


ayviur (AT), break, F. ἄξω, 
A. oto (rarely ἦξα), 2 Perf. 
ἔᾶγα, 2 A. Pass, éxyny or 
ἐᾶγην. (δὲ 96.9: 80. N. 2.) 
Notre. The simple ATO was 


originally FATO, whence χαϑάξαις 
(see κατάγνυμιε,, which originally 
was xaF Fagan. (§§ 1. N. 1,3 
10. N. 2.) 

ἄγω, lead, as ἦξα, Perf. ἦχα 
and dies, γμαι, ἤχϑην, 
2 A. ἤγαγον, 2A. Mid. nya- 
youny. (δῷ 96. 19, Ν, Ἰ: 
51.1.) The Perfect ἀ ἀγήοχα 
is not Attic. 

Note 1. ᾿Αγήσχια is formed as 
follows: ἄγω, ATATO, ATOTO, 
ἤγοχα, ἀγήγοχα, ἀγήοχα. The 
omission of the second y is acci- 
dental. 

Nore 2. In Homer we find 
Aor. Imperat, 2d pers. plur. ἄξεσε 
for dare. (ὃ 88. N. 3.) 

AAD, see avdara. 
ἀείρω (AEPQ), regular, 
᾿αἴρω. The epic poets have 
Plupert. Mid. od pers. sing. 
᾿ἄωρτο for 7 ἤερτο. (ἢ 96. 19.) 
ἀέξω, Epic; = αὔξω. 
ἄημι (42), blow, Infin. ἀῆναι, 
Part. asic, Imperf. ὁ ἄην (in 
Homer). Pres, Pass. ἄημαι. 


(ὃ 117. N. 17.) 


αἰνέω, praise, gow and row, eco 


: 
3 
{ 

E 


196 INFLECTION 


“and σα, ηκᾶ, mua, ἐϑην. 
6 95. Ν. 2.) 

αἱρέω, take, rhode. NOW, ηκα, 
μαι, ἐϑην. (ὃ 95. Ν. 2.) 
From “E42, 2 A. εἷλον, 2A. 
Mid. εἱλόμην, 2 F. ἑλῶ (rare). 

In the Perfect, the Ionics prefix 

to this verb a sort of Attic redupli- 
cation with the smooth breathing, 
ἀραΐίρηκα, ἀραίρημαι. ( § 81.) 

αἴρω (APL), raise, ἀρῶ, ἤρα, 
joxe, ἤρμαι, ἤρϑην. (δῷ 96. 
18: 104. Ν. 5.) 

αἰσϑάνομαι (4 [ΣΘΩ), perceive, 
feel, Perf. Mid. ἤσϑημαι, Ἐ᾿. 
Mid. αἰσϑήσομαι, 2. A. Mid. 
᾿ἠσθϑόμην. (δ 96. 7, 10.) 

ἀκαχίζω (AX), trouble, afflict, 
F. ἀκαχήσω, A, ἠκάχησα, 2 A. 
ἤκαχον, 2 A. Mid. ἠκαχόμην. 
Mid. ἀκαχίζομαι, grieve, feel 
grit am afflicted. (§ 96. 
10, N. 1.) 

ἀκαχμένος, ἡ, ov, Sharpened, 
pointed, a defective Perf. 
Pass. Part. from Ax. 
(§ 81. ΝᾺ) 

ἀκούω (AKON), hear, ἤκουσα, 
ἤκουχα (not Attic), οὐσμαι, 
ούσϑην, ούσομαι, 2 Perf. ἀκή-- 
κοα, 2 Pluperf. ἠκηκόειν. 
(δ᾽ 96. 18: 81: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1.) 

ἁλάομαι, wander, rove, Perf. 
Mid. Richie synonymous 
with the Present » Infin. ἀλά- 
λησϑαι, Part. ἁλαλήμενος. 
($$ 81. N.: 93. N. 1.) 

ἀλδαίνω (4442), increase, Im- 
perf. (as if from ἀλδάνω) 
ἤλδανον. (ᾧ 96. 7.) 

ἀλδήσκω (4.44.2), grow, thrive, 
cause to grow, F, ἀλδήσω. 
(ὃ 96. 10, 8.) 

ἀλέξω (44nK2), ward of, F 


OF WORDS. [ὁ 118. 
ἀλεξήσω, A. Mid. ἠλεξάμην, 
2. A. ἤλαλκον. (δὲ 96. 15, 
10, Ν. 1: 96. 1, ) 

Norse. The Aor. ἤἥλαλκον is ob- 


tained in the following manner: 
AAEKO, AAAAEKO, ἠλάλεκον, 
MAGA ROY. 


ἀλέομαι OF ἀλεύομαι, avoid, es- 
cape, A. Mid. ae ae ig 


Giseey, ὮΝ 90. 
04.Ν 


aheis, see si 

ἀλείφω (4.14.2), anoint, εέψω, 
ειψα, Perf. ἀλήλιφα, Sai: 
μαι. (S$ 96. 18: 81.) 

AAISKQ (4.4.2), capture, 
Perf. ἑάλωκα and ἥλωκα have 
been captured, F. ἁλώσομαι 
shall be captured. From 
AANMI, 2 A. ἕάλων and 
ἥλων was captured, ἁλῶ, ἁλοί-- 
ny and ἄλῴην, ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς. 
Pass. ἀλίσκομαι, am cap- 
tured. (S$ 96. 8,10: 80. 
N. 2.: 117. 12, N. 6.) | 

ἀλιταίνω ( AAIT), sin against, 
offend, Ἐς, ἁλιτήσω, 2 A. ἢλι- 
tov, 2 A. Mid. ἡλιτόμην. 
(§ 96. 7, 10.) 

The Perf. Mid. Part. 

" hurt pevos has the force of 
an adjective, that has sinned 
against, that has offended. 
($98. NN. Te 

ἄλλομαι (4.42), leap, spring, 
A. Mid. ἡλάμην, 2 F. Mid. 
ἁλοῦμαι, 2 A. Mid. ἡλόμην. 
(§§ 96. 6: 104. N. 5.) 


Nore. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 2d pers. 


sing. ὦλσο, 3d pers. sing. aAro, - 
Part. ἄλμενος, all with the smooth — 


breathing, for ἥλεσο, ἕλετο, ἁλόμε- 
νος. (ὃ 92. Ν, 4.) 

ἁλόω (442), used only in the 
compound ἀναλόω, which 


§ 118] 


see. See also “443K. 
(ὃ 96. 10.) 

ἀλύσκω (4 47 ΚΏ), shun, avoid, 
PF. ἀλύξω, A. ἤλυξα. (ἢ 96, 
14.) 

ἀλφαίνω OY ἀλφάνω ( (AAD), 
procure, bring, find, 2 A. 
ἤλφον. (ὃ 96. 7.) 

“AAR, See ἀλίσκομαι, ἁλόω, ἅλ- 
λομαι. 

ἁμαρτάνω (4 MAPTS), err, sin, 
MSS, Perf. ἡμάρτηκα, Perf. 
Pass. ἡμάρτημαι, A. Pass. 
ἡμαρτήϑην, ν Μιά. ἁμαρ- 


τήσομαι, Φ.Α. ἥμαρτον. (ᾧ 96.. 


7, 10. 

For ἥμαρτον Homer has al- 
SO ἤμβροτον, with the smooth 
breathing. 

Nore. The Homeric ἤἤἥμεβροσον 
is formed as follows : ‘AMAPTQO, 
‘AMOPTO), ἤμοραον, ἤμροτον, Aum 
βροσον. (§§ 96. 19: 26. 2, N.) 


ἀμβλέσκω and ἀμβλόω, miscar- | 


ry, ἀμβλώσω, ἤμβλωσα, ἢμ- 
βλωκα, ἤμβλωμαι, ἠἡμβλώϑηνγ. 
(ἢ 96.8.) The Present ἀμ- 
βλόω oceurs only in com- 
pounds. 

ἀμπέχω (ἀμφί, ἔχω), wrap ὧ- 
round, clothe, Imperf. « ἀμπεῖ- 
χον, F. ἀμφέξω, τ΄, Mid. ἀμ-- 
φέξομαι, 2 A. ἤμπισχον, 2A. 
Mid. numoyouny. Mid. ἀμπέ- 
χομαι, wear, put on. (δῷ 14. 
3:82. Ν. 1. 


ἀμπισχνέομαιν (ἀμφί, ἰσχνέομαιν, 


ΞΞΞ ἀμπέχομαι. 

ἀμπλακίσκω and ἀμβλακίσκω 
(AMITAAK2), miss, err, F, 
ἀμπλακήσω, 2 A. ἤμπλακον, 
Infin. ἀμπλακεῖν and some- 
times ἀπλακεῖν, without the 


μ. (ᾧ 96. 8, 10.) 
ἀμφιέννυμι (ὐλῳς sae i 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 137 


F. ἀμφιέσω or ἀμφιῶ, A. 
ἡμφίεσα, Perf. Mid. ἡμφίε- 
σμαι, A, Mid. nugiecauny. 
Mid. ἀμφιέννυμαι, put on, 
ne ($$ 102. N.2: 
82. N. 1. 


avahioxe ening ht ᾿ἀναλόω 
(ἀνά, ἍΔΖΙΣΚ.Ώ, ἁλόω), ε:- 
pend, consume, Imperf. ἃ ἀνή-- 
λισκον OF ἀνάλουν, F. ἀναλώ-- 
ow, A. ἀνάλωσα Or ἀνήλωσα, 
Perf. ἀνάλωκα or ἀνήλωκα. 
In double composition, A. 
ἡνάλωσα, aS κατηνάλωσα. 

( §§ 80. N. 4: 82. N. 1.) 
ἁνδάνω (442), please, delight, 
Imperf. ἥνδανον or ἑάνδανον 
or éjvduvor, Εἰ, ἁδήσω, 2 A. 
ἕαδον, or ἄδον, 2 Perf. ἕᾶδα. 
($$ 96.7, 10: 80. N. 2, 3, 5.) 

For ἕαδον Homer has also e#adov, 
with the smooth breathing. 

The Doric has 2 Perf. 22), with 
the smooth breathing. 

Norse. The simple ‘AAQ was 
originally FA AQ, from which came 
2A. iF Fado (like tumogov from 
MEIP®)), which finally was chang- 
ed into εὔαδον. (ὃ 1. N. 1, 3.) 

ANEOD, spring forth, 2 Perf, 
ἀνήνοϑα synonymous with 
the Present. (δῷ 96. 19: 

Ι. 


ἀνέχω (ἀνά, ἔχω), hold up, F. 
id. ἀνέξομαι, 2 A. ἀνέσχον, 
2 A. Mid. “ἠνεσχόμην. Mid. 
ἀνέχομαι, endure, Imperf. ἡ-- 
γεχόμην. (ὃ 82. ΝΝ. 9.) 
ἀνοίγω (ἀνά, οἴγωῚ, open, Im- 
perf. « ἀνέῳγον, EF. ἀνοίξω, A. 
ἀνέῳξα (later ἤνοιξα), Perf. 
avéwya, Perf. Pass. ἀνέῳγμαι, 
A. Pass. ἀνεῴχϑην, 2 Perf. 
ἀνέῳγα stand open, 2 A. Pass. 
(later) ἡνοίγην. (§ 82. N. 1.) 


an? ν ΟΡ Ὁ 
δεν ον. ἀρ δ 5) 


Ἔν τ 


το νὰ 


TY ae) ΡΝ ΑΛ ree Ge ree 
f Ἂ 


INFLECTION 


138 


ἀνωγέω, Imperf. ἀνώγεον, = fol- 


lowing. 

ἀνώγω, command, order, ξω, Ec, 
2 Perf. ἄνωγα synonymous 
with the Present. 

Nort. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. Ist pers. 
plur. ἄνωγμεν, Imperat. avwxS, 
ἀνώχϑω, ἄνωχϑε, for ἄνωγε, ἔσω, 
srs. (§§ 91, N. 6: 88. Ν. 1.) 

The last two forms take the Pas- 
sive terminations ¢Sw, σϑε, ἀνώγ- 
σϑω, ἄνωγ-σϑε. (δδ 11: 7.) 

ἀπαυράω (ἀπό, av aw), take 
away, A. Part. ἀπούρας, Α. 
Mid. Part. ἀπουράμενος. 

ἀπαφίσκω (AON), deceive, F. 
anapjow, 2 A. ἥἤπαφον. 
(§ 96. 8,10, N. 1.) 

ἀπολαύω (ἀπό, davw), enjoy, Im- 
perf. ἀπέλαυον or ἀπήλαυνον, 
F. ἀπολαύσω, A. ἀπέλαυσα Or 
ἀπήλαυσα, F. Mid. ἀπολαύσο-- 
μαι. 

ἀπούρας, see ἀπαυράω. 

ἀράομαι, tnvoke, curse, “ἀσο-- 
μαι, aoouny, regular. From 
APHMI comes Epic Infin. 
ἀρήμεναι. (δ 117. N. 17.) 


ἀραρίσκω (4ΡΩ), ft, adapt, 


join, F. ἄρσω, Α. ἤρσα, Perf. 
Pass. ἀρήρεμαι, QA. ἤρᾶρον, 
2 Perf. ὁ ἄρᾶρα (Ionic ἄφηραλ; 
Part. fem. ἀρᾶρυϊα (δῷ 96 

8, 10, N. 1s wSt. N.: 103. 
N. 1: 104. N . 6.) 

Nore. The syncopated 2 A. 
Mid. Part. ἄρμενος has the force 
of an adjective, suitable, adapted. 
(§ 92. Ν. 4.) 

ἀρέσκω ( AP), please, gratify, 

. ἀρέσω, Perf. Pass. ἤρεσμαι. 
(88. 96. 10, 8: 96. N. 1: 
ΟΝ. 1.) 

ἄρνυμαι (APN), procure, ac- 


δε. “ΠΡ Ce τ ἈΦ ON Oe eae ate eee © tLe NN ae ae 
: bs. tila Τν ae Wr OE eS re = 


OF WORDS. 


[§ 118. 


quire, earn, save, Imperf. 


ἠρνύμην. (§ 96. 9.) 
ἀρόω, plough, tll, ὅσω, οσα, 
᾿ἄρήροκα, ἀρήρομαι, ὄϑην. 


From APQMI, Infin. Act. 
(Epic) ἀρόμμεναι. ($$ 81: 
95. N. 1), δ 


ἁρπάζω, seize, snatch, ἄσω or 


ἄξω, wow OF ata, axa, ασμαι 

ΟΥ̓ αγμαι, ἄσϑην Or ἄχϑην, 2 

A. Pass, ἡρπάγην. (§ 96. 

N. 6.) 

APN, 866 αἴρω, ἀραρίσκω, ἀρέ- 
σκω, exten: 

αὔξω οΓ- αὐξάνω (472), % 
crease, ἘΝ. αὐξήσω, Α. πῶς 
Perf. Pass, ηὔξημαι, A. Pass. 
ηὐξήϑην. (ὃ 96. 15, 7, 10.) 

αὐράω, aves, αὐρίσκομαι, (AT- 
PL ») used i in the compounds 
ἀπαυράω, ἐπαυρέω, ἐπαυρί-- 
σκομαι, Which see. (ᾧ 96. 
8, 10 

ΑὙΡΩ, see the ) preceding. 

ἀφέωνται, 566 ἀφίημι. 

ἀφίημι (ἀπό, ἵημι), let.go, Im- 
perf. ἀφίεον ΟΥ̓ ἠφίεον some- 
times ἠφίην, F. ἀφήσω, A. 
ἀφῆχα, Perf. ἀφεῖκα, Perf. 
Pass. ἀφεῖμαι, A. Pass,’ ἀφέ- 
ny or ἀφείϑην, 2 A. ἀφῆν, 
2 A. Mid. ἀφέμην or ἀφεί- 
μην. (ὃ 82. N. 1.) 

Nore. The form ἀφέωνται, in 
the New Testament, stands for 
Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. ἀφεῖνσαι. 
(See tiny.) 


ἀφύσσω, draw forth (liquids), 


F. ἀφύξω, A. ἤφυσα. (ὃ 96. 
N. 4. 

A DI, see ἀπαφίσκω. 

ἀχέω (41Χ.2), αν. ἀχέων, ουσα, 
afflicted, grieved, Perf. Pass. 
ἀκήχεμαι OF ἀκάχημαι, AM af- 


ἃ 
=i) os - ὶ ᾿ 
ee ΣΥΝ Ν Ἰρομδι »εὶλ,ι- χοω:.....- ἀμ κω» -,.. ΠΡ: 


‘eo 


" 


§ 118.] 


flicted, grieve, Infin. ἀκάχη- 
σθαι, Part. ἀκαχήμενος or 
ἀκηχέμενος. (δῷ 96. 10: 95. 
N.2: 81. Ν. : 93. N. 1.) 

ἄχϑομαι (AXON), am offended, 
pained, feel indignant, A. 
Pass. ἠχϑέσθην, F. Mid. 
ἀχϑέσομαι. (δῷ 96. 10: 95. 
N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 

ἄχνυμαν Or ἄχομαι (AX), = 
"διά σᾷ which see. (§ 96, 


AXN, see ἀκαχίζω, ἀχέω, ἄχνυ-- 
Ol. 


μ 
ἄω, blow, Imperf. ἄον. (§ 80. 
N. 5. 


aw, sleep, Aor. ἄεσα OF aoa. 
- (ἢ 96. 10.) 
uw, satiate, Infin. ἄμεναι (Ep- 
ic) for ἄειν, dow, aoa. Pass. 
ἄομαι, 3d pers. sing. ἄται 
Epic ἄδται. (Ὁ 116. N. 6.) 


ἄωρτο, 866 ἀεέρω. 


B. 
βαίνω and βάσκω (BAN), go, 
walk, I". βήσω shall cause to 
go, Perf. βέβηκα, Perf. Pass. 
βέβαμαι (only in composi- 
tion), A. Pass. ἐβάϑην (only 
in composition), Εἰ, Mid. 
βήσομαι, A. Mid. (Epic) ἐβη-- 
σάμην and ἐβησόμην, 2 Perf. 
βέβαα, Subj. βεβῶ, Infin. Bs- 
Bayer, Part. BeBaic. From 
βίβημι, 2 A. ἔβην, Ba, βαίην, 
βῆϑι (in composition often 


> 
91. N. 7.) 

Nort. The Homeric βέομοαι or 
βείορεαι, I shall live, isa 2 A. Mid. 
Subj. for Bawa. (δῷ 116. N. 8, 
4+ 117. N. 17: φῖδι N,.7.) 

βάλλω (BAAR), throw, cast, 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


Ba), βῆναι, Bec. ($$ 96. 5, 
18,8: 95. N. 2: 85. N.2: 


139 


Ε΄. βαλῶ sometimes βαλλήσω, 
Perf. βέβληκα, Perf. Pass, 
βέβλημαι, A. Pass, ἐβλήϑην,. 
F. Mid. βλήσομαι (Epic), 
2 A. ἔβαλον, 2 A. Mid. ἐβα- 
λόμην. (ὃ 96. 6, 10, 17.) 

From BAEN, BAHMI, 2 
A.. ἔβλην, 2 A. Mid. ἐβλή-- 
μην, Subj. 3d pers. sing. 
βλήεται for βλῆται, Opt. βλεί-- 
μην, Infin. βλῆσϑαι, Part. 
βλήμενος, all Epic. (δὲ 117. 
N. 15, 17: 96. 19.) 

βάσκω, 566 βαίνω. 

βαστάζω, carry, ἄσω, ασα, α- 
γμαι, ἄχϑην. (δ. 96. N. 6.) 

BAN, see βαΐνω. 

βέομαι OF βείομαι, See βαίνω. 

βιβάω or βίβημι (BAN), = 
βαίνω, which see. (§ 96. 1.) 

βιβρώσκω (BOP), eat, F. 

Bowow, Perf. βέβρωκα, Perf. 

Pass. βέβρωμαι, A. Pass. 
ἐβρώϑην, 3 OF. βεβρώσομαι, 
2 Perf. Part. βεβρώς. From 
ΒΡΩ͂, 2 A. ἔβρων. (SS 96. 
ΤΕ, 8.:.117.:19. 

Brow, live, moo, ὦκα, ὠμαι, ὧσο-- 
μαι. From ΒΙΩΙΙ͂, 2 A. 
ἐβίων, Bia, Broiny and βιῴην, 
βιῶναι, βιούς. (§ 11%. 12, 

¥-G, 


βιώσκομαι (Brow), revive, bor- 
rows the other tenses, ex- 
cept Imperf, from the pre- 
ceding. 

βλαστάνω (BAASTN), bud, 
sprout, F. βλαστήσω, A. é- 
βλάστηκα, 2 A. ἔβλαστον. 
(δὲ 96. 7, 10: 76. Ν. 2.) 

BAAN or BAEN, see βάλλω. 


βλώσκω (MOAR), come, go, 


140 INFLECTION 


Perf. μέμβλωκα, 2 Aor. ἔμο--: 
λον, 2 Εἰ. Mid. μολοῦμαι. 
(δῷ 96. 17, 8: 26. N.) 
Notre. The Present βλώσκω is 
formed as follows: MOAQ, 
MAOQ, MBAOD, μβλώσκω, 


βλώσκω. The μὲ is dropped because 


the combination #@a cannot begin a 
Greek word. (§ 16. N. 1.) 


βοάω, cry out, now, now, ηκα, 
μαι, ἤϑην, ἤσομαι, regular, 
From the simple BO. come 
the Ionic forms ἔβωσα, ἐβώ-- 
σϑην, βώσομαι. (ᾧ 109. N.1.) 
BOAER (BAA), Perf. Pass. 
Ἔχε ρρϑῆς = βάλλω. (ᾧ 96. 
19, 10. 


BOAR, see βούλομαι. 

ΒΟΡΩ, see βιβρ ὥσκω. 

Booxm (BOM), FF) pasture, 

βοσκήσω, A. ἐβόσκησα. 

(§ 96. 8, 10.) 

povionas (B OAM), will, Imperf. 
ἐβουλόμην or ἡἠβουλόμην, Perf. 
Pass. βεβούλημαι, A. Pass. 
ἐβουλήϑην or ἠβουλήϑην, F. 
Mid. βουλήσομαι, 2 Perf. βέ- 
fovla comp. in Homer προ- 
βέβουλα. (δῷ 96. 18, 10: 78. 
N. 1.) From the simple 
Present come Pres. Pass. βό- 
λομαι, 2d pers. plur. βόλεσϑε. 

BON, see βοάω, βόσκω. 


BPAX2, crash, rattle, 2 A 
ἔβραχον. 

ΒΡΟΩ, see βιβρώσκω. 

βρὕχάομαι (BPTX2), roar, 


ἥσομαι, ησάμην, Perf. βέβρῦ-. 
χα synonymous with the 
Present. ee 10.) 


γαμέω (rata, marry, Ἕ. 
γαμῶ, A. ἔγημα, (later ἐγά- 
μησαὶ), Perf. γεγάμηκα,' Perf. 
Pass. γεγάμημαι, A. Pass. 


| 
OF worDs. [ὁ 118, ἢ 


ἐγαμήϑην, Part. fem. also 
γαμεϑεῖσα, I. Mid. γαμέσσο- 
μαι (in Homer), OS 96. 10° 
95. N. 2: 102. Ν. δ. 

TAN, see ΓΙΓΊΝΩ. 

yeyove and γεγωγέω (ΠΩ ΝΣ), 
call aloud, 2 Perf. γέγωνα 
synonymous with the Pres. 

γείνομαι (LEN), beget, bring 
forth, am born, A. Mid. 
ἐγεινάμην begat, brought 
forth. (§ 96. 18.) 

γέντο, See 7ίγνομωι, “EAN. 

TENS, see γίγνομαι. 

γηϑέω (THOR), reotice, you, 
ησα, 2 Perf. yéynda synony- 
mous with the Present. 
(ᾧ 96. 10.) 

γηράσκω and γηράω, grow old, 
“ow, aco, oxo, ἄσομαι. From 
THPHMI, 2 A. ἐγήρᾶν, yn- 
eaves, γηράς. (δ 117. 12.) 

TITND (TENN, FAN), pro- 
duce, cause to exist, Perf. 
Mid. γεγένημαι, Pass. ἐγενή- 
ϑην, F. Mid. γενήσομαι, 2 
Perf. γέγονα (poetic also 
yéyou), 2 A. Mid. ἐγενόμην. 


Mid. γίγνομαι or γίνομαι, 


produce myself, make myself, 
become. (δὲ 96. 1, 5, 10, 
19: 26. 1.) 

The 2 Perf. γέγαα is in- 
flected, as far as it goes, 
like βέβαα (δ 91. N. 7.) 

Nore. For 2. Α. Mid. 3d pers. 


sing. ἐγένετο, we find Zyevro or vive 


vo. (ὃ 92. N. 4.) 
γιγνώσκω( ΓΝ Ὁ), later γινώσκω, 


ow, A. ἔγνωσα (chiefly i ine 


composition), Perf. ἔγνωκα, 


Perf. Pass. ἔγνωσμαι, A. Pass.- © 


ἐγνώσϑην, F. Mid. γνώσομαι. 
From ΖΊΝΩ ΠΗ͂Ι, 2 Α, ἔγνων, 


“ 


Ἢ 
“ 


8118] 


yo, γνοίην, γνῶϑι, genes 
γνούς. (SS 96. 1, 8: 76. 
N. 2: 107. N. He 109. 
N. 1: 117. 12.) 


γοάω (I'0s2), bewail, regular. 
Imperf. also ἔγοου. From 
roHmy, Infin. Epic γοήμε- 
vow. (S$ 96.10: 117. N. 17.) 
TANM, see γεγώγω. 
A. 
δαινύω or δαίω, give to eat, 
entertain, F. δαίσω, A. ἔδαι.-- 
σα, A.Pass. ἐδαίσϑην, A. Mid. 
ἐδαισάμην. Mid. δαίνυμαι, 
feast, Opt. 84 pers. sing. 
daivito. (δῷ 96. 9: 109. 
N. 1: 117. N. 7. 
δαίω (4492), divide, Perf. Pass, 
δέδασμαι, 3d pers. plur. ds- 
δαίαταν (in Homer), Εἰ. Mid. 
δάσομαι, A. Mid. ἐδασάμην. 
GS 96.18: 107. N. 1: 95. 


ie. avai burn, 2 Perf. δέ- 
Sno, 2 A.Mid. Hokuign Mid. 
δαίομαι, am on fire, burn. 
(96. 18.) 

δάκνω (AAKN), bite, Perf. dé- 
Onya, Perf. Pass. δέδηγμαι, 
A.Pass. ἐδήχϑην, F.Mid. ng 
Eouon, 2 A. ἔδακον. (ᾧ 96. 5 
18. 


an a Ot gat ee ee en 


o> alle 


δὰμαν (4412), subdue, tame, 
δαμάσω, ἐδάμασα, Perf. δέ.- 
ὅμηκα, δέδμημαι, A. Pass. 
ἐδμήϑην, 2 A. Pass. ἐδάμην. 
; (δὴ 96. 10, 17: 95. N. 1.) 
δάμνημι (δαμυωὴ Pass. δάμνα-. 
μαι, = preceding. (ὃ 96. 5.) 
δαρϑάνω (AAPOSL), sleep, Bere 
δεδάρϑηκα, A.Pass. ἐδάρϑην, 
τς ~F.Mid. δαρϑήσομαι, 2 A. 
> ἔδαρϑον or ἔδραϑον. (δῷ 96. 
4, 10: 26, 2: 11. 


ΑΞ ἘΞ πὰ 
φ- ΔΨ 


ANOMALOUS VERBS, 


141 


δατέομαι, divide, share, A.Mid. 
ἐδατεάμην. (ὃ 104. N. 1.) 

MAN, See δαίω. 

AAN, cause to learn, teach, 
Perf. δεδάηκα have learned, 
Perf. Pass. δεδάημαι, F.Mid. 
δαήσομαι, 2 A. ἔδαον, 2 Perf. 
δέδαα have learned, 2 A, 
Pass. ἐδάην I learned. From 
AEAAN, Pass. δεδάομαι. 
(ᾧ 96. 10, 11.) 

δεδίσκομαι OF δεδίσσομαι, = δει-- 
δίσκομαι. 

δεῖ (δέω), ἐξ behooves, one must, 
Impersonal, F. δεήσει, A. 
ἐδέησε. 

δειδίσκομαι Or δειδίσσομαι (δίω), 
frighten, scare, A.Mid. ἐδει-- 


διξάμην. (S$ 96. 11, 8, 9: 
76. N. 4.) 


δείδω, see JZETN. 

δείκνῦμι (JEIKN), show, ἘΝ, 
δείξω, A. ἔδειξα, Perf. Pass. 
δέδειγμαι, A. Pass. ἐδεέχϑην. 
(ᾧ 96. 9.) 

The lonic has δέξω, ἔδεξα, 
δέδεγμαι, ἐδέχϑην. 

AEFI or δίω or δείδω, fear, A. 
ἔδεισα. (in Homer ἔδδεισα), 
Perf. δέδοικα am afraid, 
Τὴ ΜΙά. detcouon, 2 Perf. δέ- 
δια am afraid. (S$ 96. 18, 
N. 14: 98. Ν 3: 79. N. 3.) 

Nore. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. deidiusv, δεί- 
dure, Imperat. δείδιϑ,, 2. Pluperf. 
ἐδείδιμεεν. (δ 91.N.6: 76. N. 4: 
88 


ἘΝ 1.) 
δέμω, build, A. ἔδειμα, Perf, 


δέδμηκα, ‘A. Mid. ἐδειμάμην. 
(ᾧ 96. 17.) 


δέομαι, see δέω, want. 


δέρκομαι, see, 2 A, ἔδρακον, 
2 Perf. δέδοοχα, A. Pass, 


142 


ἐδέρχϑην, 2A. Pass. ἐδράκην. 
($$ 96. 19, 17°: 26. 2.) 


δέχομαι, receive, δέδεγμαι, ἐδέ- 
χϑην, δέξομαι, ἐδεξάμην, regu- 
Jar. | 
Norse. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A.Mid. ἐδέγρεην, 
ἔδεκτο, (for ἐδεχόμην, ἐδέχεσο,) In- 
fin. δέχϑα, (for δεχέσϑαι,, Part. 
δέγμενος as Present. (ἐᾷ 92. N. 4: 
9.1: 7:11.) 
δέω (rarely δίδημι), bind, “ie 
NOU, EXO, ἔμαι, ἔϑην, 
δεδήσομαι. OS § 95. N. 2: 
96. 1: 116. R.) 
δέω, am wanting to, want, ἘΝ, 
δεήσω, A. sina A. Pass. 
ἐδεήϑην, F. Mid. δεήσομαι. 
Mid. δέομαι, want, need, 
pray, beseech. (ἢ 96. 10. .) 
For A. 3d pers. sing. 
ἐδέησεν, Homer has δῆσεν. 
AHKN, see δάκνγω. 
dja (442), as Future, shall 
nd. 
διδάσκω (A4IAJAXN), teach, F. 
διδάξω (poetic also. διδασκή-- 
ow), A. ἐδίδαξα (poetic also 
ἐδιδάσκησα), Perf. δεδίδαχα, 
Perf. Pass. δεδέίδαγμαι, A. 
Pass. ἐδιδάχϑην. (ὃ 96. 10, 
Ν. 10. 


δίδημι, See δέω, bind. 


διδράσκω (JPAN), run away, 
Perf. δέδρακα, F.Mid. deaco- 
μαι. From JPUME, 2 A. 
E0007, δρῶ, δραίην, δρᾶϑι, 
δρᾶναι, δράς. (δὴ 96. 1, 8: 
117. 12.) This verb occurs 
only in composition. 

δίδωμι and didow (JON), give, 
F. δώσω, A. ἔδωκα, Perf. 
δέδωκα, Perf. Pass. δέδομαι, 
A.Pass. ἐδόϑην, A.Mid, ἐδω- 


INFLECTION 


OF WORDS, 


κάμην (not Attic), 2 A. ἔδων, 
δῶ, δοίη», dod: Or doc, δοῦναι, 
δούς, 2 A. Mid. ἐδόμην. 
OS. 96. 2) 117: 104. N. 2: 


ine aie F.Mid. διζήσομαι. 
Mid. δίξημϑι; seek, retains 
the ἡ throughout, as Part. 
Seyi on ($$ 96. 10: 117. 
3.) 


AIK, cast, fling, 2 A 2tiase 

dim, see JEIN, δειδίσκομαι. 

AMAR, AMEN, see δαμάω, 
δέμω. 

δόαται Or δέαται, ἐξ seems, Im- 
personal, A. Mid. ee 
to, Subj. δοάσσεται, Epic. 
($$ 102. N. 5: 86. N. 3.) 

δοκέω (JOKN), seem, think, 
Ε΄. δόξω, A. ἔδοξα, Perf. Pass. 
δέδογμαι. The regular forms 
δοκήσω, nou, μαι, are not 
common. (§ 96. 10.) 

δουπέω (AOTT), resound, 
sound heavily, A. Biinaok 
(also éydouvnyouw), 2 Perf. δέ- 
δουπα. (ᾧ 96. 10.) 


Νοτε. The A. ἐγδούπησα comes. 


from TAOYIIEQ, which is formed 
after the analogy of xrvxiw from 


TYIIM. (§ 7.) 


4PAMR or JZPEM?, Perf. ds- » 


δράμηκα, Perf. Pass. δεδρά- 
μημαι (little used), 2A. ἔδρα- 
μον, & Perf. δέδρομα (Epic), 
Ε΄, Mid. δραμοῦμαι, ---- τρέχω; 
‘which see. (ᾧ 96. 10, 19.) 


δύγαμαν (ATNAL, ATNUM!)y 


am able, can, Imperf. ἐδυνα-- 
“μὴν Or ἀδηοχο νὼ Perf. Pass. 
δεδύνημαι, A.Pass. ἐδυνήϑην 
or ἡδυνήϑην (and ἐδυνάσϑην), 
F. Mid. δυνήσομαι, A.Mid. 
(in Homer) ἐδυνησάμην. 


[§ 118. 


“τ π ΠΡ « 


δ 118. - ANOMALOUS VERBS. | 143 
(SS 78. Ν. 1: 95. N. 2:4" Nore 1. The Attic reduplication 
109. N. 1.) of ἐγρήγορα is anomalous. 


δύω and δύνω, enter, set, cause 


Note 2. Homer has 2 Perf. 3d 
- ay = pers. plur. ἐγρηγόρϑασι for ἐγρηγό- 
to enter, I. δῦσω, A. ἔδῦσα, ρασι, as if from EVEPOQ. 


Perf. δέδῦκα, A.Pass. ἐδύϑην, Norte 8. Forms without the con- 
F. Mid. δύσομαι, Α. Μια. necting vowel, 2 Perf. Imperat. 
ἐδυσάμην (Epic also ἐδυσό- 24 pers. plur. ἐγρήγορϑε, Infin. 


μη»), Part. δυσόμεγος as ἐγρηγόρϑαι» with the terminations 

Present, selfing. . From — the Passive, δῆ, “omen 

ATMI, 2 A. ἔδῦν, Siw, ὅδην, 200, 5866 ἐσϑί. 

δῦϑι, δῦναι, δύς. (δὴ 96.5: EAM, see the following. 

95. N. 2: 85, N. 2: 117. ἕζομαι (EAR), seat myself, sit, 

12, N. 7.) Imperf. ἑζόμην, A. Pass. ἕ- 
E. σϑην (later), 2 F.Mid. édov- 


ἑάφϑη or ἐάφϑη, was fastened, μαι. (δὴ 96.4: 114. N. 2.) 


Aor. Pass. 3d pers, sing., This verb is chiefly used in 
found only in Homer, the compound καϑέζομαι, 


se ας (4 T'EPL), wake, rouse, which see. 


éyeow, A. ἤγειρα, Perf. ἐθέλω or ϑέλω, will, F. ἐθελήσω 


; ήβῦκα, Perf. Pass. ἐγήγερ- οἵ ϑελήσω, A. ἠϑέλησα, Perf. 


μαι, A, Pass. ἡγέρϑην, 2 Pert. ἠϑέληκα. (§ 96. 10.) 

ἐγρήγοφα am awake,2 A. ἐγρό- ἔϑω, am accustomed, 2 Perf. 
μην, ἐχροίμην, ἔγρεο (Epic), εἴωϑα (lonie ἔωϑα) synony- 
ἐγρέσϑαι. Mid. ἐγείρομαι rise. mous with the Present. 


(§§ 96. 18: 81: 26. 1.) (δῷ 96. 19 : 80, Ν. 8, R. 1.) 


ΕΙΔΩ (TAN), see, F. εἰδήσω (rare) shall know, F.Mid. εἴσομαι 


shall know, A.Mid. εἰσάμην seemed, 2 A. εἶδον (rarely ἴδον») 
saw, ἴδω, ἴδοιμι, ἴδε and ids, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών, 2 Α. ΜΙά. εἰδόμην saw, 
ἴδωμαι, ἰδοίμην, ἰδοῦ (as interjection, ἰδού, behold ! ), ἐἰδέσϑαι, 
ἰδόμενος, 2 Perf. οἶδα know, εἰδῶ, εἰδείην, tod, εἰδέναι, εἰδώς, 
2 Pluperf. 7dew knew. Pass. εἴδομαι, seem, resemble. (δῷ 96. 
18, 10, N. 14: 98. N. 2: 80. N. 4. 

The 2 Perf, οἶδα, and 2 Pluperf. δεῖν, are inflected as 
follows : 


Perfect 2. 

Inp. S. οἶδα D. ἴσμεν P. ἴσμεν 
οἶσϑα ἴστον ἴστε 
οἶδε(ν) ἴστον ἰσὰσι(ν) 

Suns. 8. εἰδῶ, εἰδῇς, εἰδῇ, D. εἰδῆτον, P. εἰδῶμεν, ἐπ" 


εἰδῶσι(ν). 

Opt. S. εἰδείην, εἰδείης, εἰδείη, D. εἰδείητον, εἰδειήτη», P. 
εἰδείημεν, eidsinte, εἰδείησαν. 

Imp. 5. ἴνϑι D. ἴστον. P. ἴστε 


ἴστω ἵστων . ο ἤἥστωσαν 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


144 


INF. εἰδέναι. 
ParT. εἰδώς, via, oc, α΄. ὅτος. 


_ Pluperfect 2. 


S. ἤδειν, ἤδη D. ἤδειμεν, mousy P. ἤδειμεν, ἢ Homey 
ἤδεις, ἤδειδϑα, ἤδειτον, ῆστον ἤδειτε, ἡστδ 
Ἰδησϑαὰ ᾿ Ἶ 
᾿δει, ἤδη, HOEY  ἡδείτην, ἤστην ἤδεσαν, ἦσαν 
_ Nore 1. Perfect. Inv. 2d pers. sing. οὖσϑα stands for οἴδασϑα. (§§ 84. 
N 6: 91. N. 6: 10. 2.) In the dual and plural, the forms ieroy, ἴσμεν, 
irre, stand for roy, usr, ἴδσε. (§§ 91. N. 6: 10, 1, 3.) Ἶ 
‘Sups. and Opr. εἰδῶ, εἰδείην, come from EIAEQ, whence αἷβο the F. _ 
εἰδήσω. (§ 91. N. 6.) : 
᾿ 


Imr. ἔσϑι, ἴστω, ὅτε. for 7391, ἴδτω, &e. (δὲ 91. N. Vy 88. Ν 1: 10. 3.) 9 


Pluperfect. For Ist pers. sing. ἤδη, and Sd pace, sing. ἤδη or ἤδειν, See 
above (ὃ 85. N. 4.) — For 2d pers. sing. ἤδεσθα or ἤδησϑα, see above 
(δὲ 84. N. 6: 85. N. 4.) — For the syncopated forms ἧσμεν, ἦστε; ἧσαν, 
O) Te ee a. 6°: 10,°1,.2. 5.) 


Nore 2. The regular forms of the Perfect οὔδας, οἴδαμεν, oldarov, οἴδαφεν. ; 
οἴδασι, belong chiefly to the later Greek. 


Nore 8. Dratecrs. Perfect. Inv, Ist pres plur. Epic and Ionic 2ysy 
for ἴσμεν. 


Inv. Epic ἔδμεναι for idtweves for εἰδέναι. (ὃ 89. N. 1.) 


Pluperfect. Epic and Ionic ἠείδειν, ng, εἰ or n; plur. ἠείδειμεν, εἰσε, 3d pers. 
ἦσαν. (δὲ 85. N. 4: 91. N. 6: 10. 2.) Here the prefix ἡ seems to be 
the syllabic augment lengthened. (ὃ 80. Ν, 2. ) ee. 3d δεν sing. #08, — 
Herodotus (1, 45) has eds. 


εἴκω, scem, resemble, 2 Perf, εἴλλω or εἴλω or εἰλέω (EAN), 


ἔοικα, Sometimes εἶκα (Lonic 
oixe), Synonymous with the 
Present, 2 Pluperf. ἐῴκειν. 


(§§ 96. N. 14: 80.N. 2,3, 


4) 

For 2 Perf. 3d. pers. plur. 
ἐοίκασι We sometimes find 
εἴξασι. 

Norse. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 Perf. ἔοιγμεν, 
Zixroyv, for ἐοίκαμεν, teinarov, 2 Plu- 
perf. tixeny for ἐῳκείτην. (δὲ 91. 
N. 6: 9. 1.) 

The epic poets have also #ix¢o or 
Zixro for ἐῴκει, with the Passive ter- 
mination ro (ὃ 84, 2), 


roll up, drive to, F. εἰλήσω, 
A. εἴλησα, Infin. also ἔλσαι 
or ἐέλσαι, Part. also ἕλσας, 
Perf. εἴληκα, Perf. Pass. 
εἴλημαι, ἕελμαι, A.Pass. εἰλή-- 
ϑην, 2 A. Pass. ἐάλην, Infin. 
ἀλῆναι, Part. adeic. (δὰ 96. 
18, 10, 6: 104. N. 6: 80. 
N. 2.) 


Nore. The form ἐόλησο for Plu- ὦ 


perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. εἴλησο, is 
formed as follows: EAQ, OAEQ, 
ὀλήμην, ἐολήμην, -ησο, ἐόληφο. (ὃ ὃ 96. 
13 : 80. N. 2.) 


εἵμαθμαι, see ΕΙΡΩ. 


fi 


ᾧ 118.] ANOMALOUS’ VERBS. 145 


εἰμί (EN, ESS), wage ὦ, εἴην, ἔσϑι, εἶναι, ὧν, Imperf. nv (some- 
times juny), F. ἔσομαι, ἐσοίμην, ἔσεσϑαι, ἐσόμενος. 


Present. 
Inv. S. εἰμί 1). ἐσμέν PR. ἐσμέν 
εἷς, εἶ ἐστόν ο ἐστέ 
éati(y) ἐστὸν  εἰσί(») 


Suns. S. @, 73, ἢ» D- ὦμεν, ἦτον, ἦτον, P. ὦμεν, ἦτε, wary). 
Orr. S. εἴην, sing, εἴη, D. εἴημεν, εἴητον, εἰήτην, P. ἐὔημεν, 
εἴητε, εἴησαν». 


Imp. S. ἔσϑι D. ἔστον P. ἔστε : 
ἔστω ; ἔστων . ἔστωσαν, ἔστων 


InF. εἶναι, to be. | 
| τ ν : 
Part. ὦν, οὖσα, ὃν, Gs ὄντος, being. 


Imperfect. 
ΨΚ. ἣν, ἦ D. ἦμεν ἦ P; ἦμεν. 
ἧς, ἤσϑα ἤτον, ἥστον ἦτε, NOT’ 
ἢ, ἦν ἤτην, ἤστην ἦσαν 
Future. 


Inv. S. ἔσομαι, ἔση ΟΥ ἔσει, ἔσεταν ΟΥ̓ ἔσται, D. ἐσόμεϑον, 
ἔσεσϑον, ἔσεσϑον, P. ἐσόμεϑα, ἔσεσϑε, ἔσονται. 


Orr. S. ἐσοίμην, ἔσοιο, ἔσοιτο, D. ἐσοΐμεϑον, ἔσοισϑον,ἐσοί-- 
σϑην, P. ἐσοίμεϑα, ἔσοισϑε, ἔσοιντο. 


Inv. ἔσεσϑαι, to be about-to be. 
Part. ἐσόμενος, ἡ, ov, about to be. 


Nore 1. Present Inn, The 2d pers. sing. εἶ belongs to the Middle 
voice. ( Compare φιλέομαι; 2d pers. Φιλέῃ or φιλέει contracted φιλεῖ.) — 
The forms ? ἐστί, ἐσμῖν, ἐστόν, ἐστέ Come from the original EZO.— The 3d 
pers. plur. εἰσί is formed from EQ after the analogy of φτιϑεῖσι from τίϑημον 

Susy. and Orr. ὦ, εἴην are formed from E©. after the analogy of σιϑϑῶ, 
σιϑείην, from τίϑημι. 

Ime. σϑι, ἔστω, &c. come from the original EQ... In the 2d pers.. 
sing. the radical vowel s becomes «. 

Part. ὦν, οὖσα, ov, stands for ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν. (See next Note.) 


Imperfect. The 1st pers. sing. ἢ is contracted from ἔα. (See next Note.) 
— For the 2d pers. sing. feSa, see above (ὃ 84. N. 6. )— The 3d pers: 


sing. ἦν is contracted from ἦεν. (See next Note.) — The forms jeroy, ἤσσην,. 


nore, come from the original EZ. 


νι Nore 2. Drazects. Present. Iwp. Ist pers. sing: Doric ἐμμί for εἰμέ.. 
_  . -- 2d pers. sing. old ἐσσί for sis, from the original EZQ. (8 84. N. 6.) — 
ΠΡ . $d pers. sing. Doric vei, not to be confounded with the 3d pers. plur. — 


΄ 


oe 


ΤΥ oe ee 


— -ν 


146 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ὃ 118. 


Ist pers. plur. Tonic εἰμέν, poetic ἐμέν. -- 84 pers. plur. Ionic tae: (like 
φιϑέασι from cifnus), Doric ἐνσί (§ 117. N. 17). 

ὅσσ. uncontracted ἕω, 2s, ἔῃ, gamer, ἕητε, twos(v), Ionic. 

Orr. uncontracted ἔοιμει, fo ἔοι, ὅτε. Lonic, 

Imrer. 2d pers. sing. ἔσο, after the analogy of the Middle, — 3d pers. 
sing. ἤτω for ἔστω. 

Inr. Epic ἔμμεναι, ἔμωμεεν, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν, Doric ἢ ἧκεν, ness. (§ 89. N. 1. ) 


Imperfect. Ist pers. sing. Tonic ἔα. or ἦα, tov, ἔσκον. (ὃ 85. N. 5.) — 
2d pers, sing. lonic ἕας, exes, Epic ἔησϑα. (§§ 84. N. 6: 85.N.5.)— ὦ 
Sd pers. sing. Ionic ἦε(ν), ἔσκε, Epic ἔην, anv, Doric ἧς. (§ 80, N.2.)— 
3d pers, pret Ionic and Doric ἔσαν. 


Nore 3. The 3d pers. sing. ἐσφί takes the accent on the penult, eri, 
when it signifies he, she, or it exists. “Also when it comes after εἰ, ox, ὡς» 
ἀλλ᾽ (for ἀλλά), and rove’ (for σοῦφο) ; as οὐκ ἔσει, ἀλλ᾽ ἔσει. 


εἶμι (10, EN, EIQ), 20, shall 89; ἴω, ἴουμι Or ioiny, ἴϑι, ἱέναι, 
ἰών, Imperf. ἤειν, Εἰ, Mid. εἴσομαι (Epic), A. Mid. (Epic) 
εἰσάμην. - (SS 96. 18: 87. N. 2.) 
The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows : 


Present. ἘΣ: 
Inv, S. εἶμι 1). ἔμεν OP. ἵμεν 
εἷς, εἶ itoy ἴτε 
εἰσι(ν) : ἴτον ἴασι(ν) 
ϑυΒ.. S. iw, tye, ths D. ἴωμεν, ἴητον, ἕητον, P. ἴωμεν, ἴητε, ' 


ἴωσι(»). 
Ορυ. S. iow, tov, ἴοι, ‘D: ἴοιμεν, ἴοιτον, ἰοίτην, P. ἴοιμεν, 
Youre, ἴοιεν. 


Imp. S. 791, si D. ἴτον. P. its “2 
> . 


, yy , ? ᾿ 
ἴτω ἴτων. ἴτωσαν ΟΥ̓́Σγτω, 


INF. ἐέναι. 
Part. ἰών, ἰοῦσα, tov, G. ἰόντος. 


ΨΥ νῶν Ὁ τ 


ἐωρεγίθοῖ. : 
Ss. jeu : D. 3, ἤξιμεν, ἦμεν P34 ἤειμεν, ἦμεν 
iets, ἤεισϑα ἤειτον, ἤτον gets, τε. 
3 ἤει, ἤξιν . ῃδίτην, ἤτην : ἤεσαν 


Nore 1. Present. Inv. The 2d perss sing. εἶν like εἶ from εἰμί, follows 
the analogy of the Middle. — The 3d avis plur. ze follows the analogy 
of Siac; from σίϑημι, (3 117. N. 2.) 

Imp. 2d pers. sing. εἴ is used only in posspoticlon, ἡ as ἔξει for %:9 fram 
ἔξειμι. Compare § 117. N. 8. ) 

Inv. ἰέναι comes from the imaginary THEO, ΓΗ ΜΙ, after the analogy of 


τι ϑέναι from sitio, σίϑηροι. » 


Imperfect. The forms ἤειν, EIS he follow the analogy of the ἘΝ ‘ 
Active. 


ΝΟ ΟΝ Oe ee eS ee ee 


§ 118] 


Nore 2. Diarects. 


Inr. Epie ἤν Ἄρα οὗ ἔμεν," without the connecting vowel ε. 


Imperfect. 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


147 


Present. Inn. 2d pers. sing. Epic εἶσϑα for 


(§ 89. N. 1.) 


1st pers. sing. Tonic ἡ Hie, ἦα, Epic ἤτον, ἦον. The Ionic forms 


are often used by the Attics, — 3d pers. sing. Ionic ἤϊε, Epic ἔς. —-8d pers. 
dual Epic ἢ ἤτην. — Ist pers. plur. mes e Howey. — Sd pers. plur. Tonic ἤϊσων» 


Epic ἢ ἦσαν, ἴσαν. 


εἰξασι, 5866 sted 

EW (EM), say, A. εἶπα, 
2 A. εἶπον, εἴπω, εἴποιμι, 
εἰπέ, εἰπεῖν, εἰπών. § 96. 
18: 104. N. 1: 93. N.2.) 
From “PES (which see), 


Perf. ceiags Perf. Pass. εἰ- Ὁ 


θημαι, A. Pass. ἐῤῥήϑην or 
ἐῤῥέϑην, 9 εἰρήσομαι. 
From εἴρω, Εἰ, ἐρέω ἐρῶ. 
The epic poets have also 

2 A. ἕειπον ( 80. Ν. 2.) - 

εἵργνῦμι Or εἵργω (old ἔργω, 
corey inclose, include, shut 
an . εἵρξω, A. εἶρξα or 
ἕρξα, Perf. Pass. εἴργμαι or 
ἕεργμαν OF ἔργμαι. (99 96. 
18,9: 80. N. δ.) 

εἴρω (EPQ), Ε΄, ἐρέῳ ἐρῶ, = 
Elm, which see. (ᾧ 96. 
18.) 

gioxw OF ἴσκω (six), liken, 

compare, Imperf. ἤϊσκον or 

ἴσκον. (ὃ 96.14.) 
εἴωϑα, see ἔϑω. 

ἐλαύνω (rarely ἐλάω), drive, 
march, Ἐς, ἐλάσω or ἐλῶ, A. 
ἤλασα, Perf. ἐλήλακα, Perf. 
Pass. ἐλήλαμαι, later ἐλήλα- 
σμαι, A. Pass. ἡἠλάϑην, later 
ηλάσϑην. (SS 96. N. 13: 95. 
Ν. 1: 102.N.2: 107. N.1: 
109. N. 1.) 

EAETON (EATON), F. Mid. 
ἐλεύσομαι, 2 A. ἤλυϑον com- 
monly ἤλϑον, Fw, Pout, 
ἐλθέ, ἐλθεῖρ, ἐλθών, 2 Perf. 


ἐλήλυϑα (rarely ἤλυϑαν, = 
ἔρχομαι, Which see. (δῷ 96. 
18: 26,1: 93 N. 2.) 
Νότε. Homer has 2 Perf. εἰλή- 
Aousa, Ist pers. plur. εἰλήλουθκεεν 
~ for εἰληλούϑαρεν, (δὲ 96. N, 14: 
81: 91. N. 6.) 
ἔλπω, cause to hope, give hope, 
2 Perf. ἔολπα as Present, 2 
Pluperf. ἐωώλπειν as Imper- 
fect. Mid. ἔλπομαι, cause 
myself to hope, simply I 
hope. (Ὁ 80. N, 2, 3.) 
EAD, F. doa (rare), 2. A, 
εἷλον, ἕλω, ἕλοιμι, ἕλε, ἑλεῖν, 
ἑλῶν, 2 A. Mid. εἱλόμην 
(Alexandrian -ethany), 
aiogéw, which see. 80. 
N. 1: 85. N. 2) δὰ 
Nore. It may be supposed that 
*EAQ was originally FEAQ, of 
which the 2 A. Mid. 3d. pers, 
sing., without the connecting vowel, 
would be Féaro or Févro (like 
BtNeiwros for βέλειστος). The 
form Ἐένσο was finally changed into 


yivro, he seized, which is found in 
Homer. (§§ 1. N. 3: 92. N. 4.) 


EAN, see εἴλλω. 


ENETK2 (ENEK2), A. ἤνεγ- 
κα, Perf. ἐνήνοχα, Perf. Pass, 
ἐνήνεγμαι, A. Pass. ἠνέχϑην, 

2A. ἤνεγκον, = φέρω, which 
see. (§ 96.6: 104, N. 1: 
98. N. 2: 81.) ; 

ENEON,. float, lie on, sit, 2 
ge ἐνήνοϑα. (δὴ 96.19: 

Ι. 


ἘΝΈΚΩ, see ἘΝΈΓΚΩ. 


148 


événw OF ἐγνέπο) OF ENTITS2 or 
ἘΝΙΣΠ, (ἐν, ETN), F. ἐνι-- 
σπήσω Or ἐνέψω, 2A. ἕνισπον, 
poetic, = E1172, which see. 
(§ 96. 14, 16, 10.) “ἡ 

ἐγίπτω Or évicow (ἘΝΙΠΙΩῚ), 
chide, 2 A. ἐνέγζπον and (as 
if from ENTAIL), ἡνίπα- 
πον. (ὃ 96. 2, N. 1.) 

ENISHI, see ἐγέπω. 

ἐννέπω, see ἐνέπω. 

ἕννυμι (5.2), put on, clothe, F. 
ἕσω, Perf. Pass. εἷμαι ΟΥ̓ 
ἕσμαι, Pluperf. Pass. siuny or 
ἕσμην or δέσμην, A. Pass. 
ἔἕσϑην, A. Mid. ἑἕεσάμην, 
poetic. (δῇ 96.9: 95. N.1: 
107. N. 1: 109. N. 1: 80. 
N. 2.) 

ἐόλητο, see εἴλλω. 

ἐπαυρέω OF ἐπαυρίσκομαι (ἐπί, 
αὐρέω,. αὐρίσκομαι), 
F. Mid. ἐπαυρήσομαι, 
ἐπηῦρον, ἐπαύρω, ἐπαυρεῖν, 
2 A.Mid. ἐπηυρόμην, ἐπαύρω-- 
μαι, ἐπαυρέσϑαι and ἐπαύ- 


ρθασϑαι.- 


ἐπίσταμαι. (EMIST AN, En 


2THMI), understand, Im- 
perf. ἠπιστάμην, A. Pass, ἠπὶ-- 
στήϑην or ἐπιστήϑην, F.. Mid. 
ἐπιστήσομαι. (§§ 117: 80. 
N. 4, 


ENN, see EIN. | 
ἕπω, am occupied with, am 
busy, Imperf. εἶπον, F. Mid. 
ἕψομαι, 2 A. ἔσπον, σπῶ, 
σπεῖν, σπών, 2 A. Mid. ἕσπό- 
μήν, σπῶμαι, σποίμην, σποῦ, 
σπέσϑαι, σπόμενος. Mid. ἕπο-- 
μαι, follow, (§ 80. N. 1.) 
The old poets have 2 A. 
Mid. Subj. ἕσπωμαι, Inf. 
ἑσπέσϑαι, Part. ἑσπόμενος. 
Nore. It seems that ἕπω was 


INFLECTION 


enjoy, 


OF WoRDs. ἢ 118, 
originally ZEIIOQ, whence 2 A. 
ἔσεπον, syncopated ἔσσον. (Compare 
ὗς, σῦς, SUS ; ; ἕσομεαι; Sequor ; ὑπέρ, 
super; ὑπό, sub; ἕ, se; ἥμισυς, 
semis; ἕξομαι, or rather ‘EAQ, 
_— ; ἅλς, sal, salum.) 

ἐράω (poetic ἔραμαι, inflected 
like ἵσταμαι), love; am in love 
with, A. Pass, nous 9 nr, A. 


Mid. nov oauny (pectic) fell 


in love. (§§ 95. N. 1: 109. 
N. 1.) 
EPI2 or ἔρδω, see ῥέζω. 
éosinw (EPIL), demolish, 


throw down; ἐρείψω, ἤρειψα, 
ἠρειψάμην, 2A. ἤριπον fell 
down, 2 Perf. ἐρήριπα have 
fallen. down, Pluperf. Pass. 
od pers. sing. ἐρέριπτο. 
“($$ 96. 18: 81. Ν᾿ 
ἐρέω, 566 ἔρομαι. 
ἐριδαίνω (EPIAN), quarrel, vie 
with, A. Mid. Inf. ἐριδήσα- 
σϑαι. (ὃ 96. 7, 10.) 
ἔρομαι (EP2Q), Tonic - εἴρομαι, 
Epic also ἐρέω, ask, inquire, 
F. Mid. ἐρήσομαι, 2 A. Mid. 
ἠρόμην, ἔρωμαι, ἐροίμην, ἐροῦ, 
ἐρέσϑαι, ἐροβένοι, (8 96. 18, 
10. 


The Present 3 ἔρομαι 1S not 
Attic. 
ἔῤῥω (EPI), 80 forth, go to 
perdition, I’, ἐῤῥήσω, A. ἠῤ- 
- ῥησα. (ὃ 96. 6, 10.) 

Nors. From the simple Present 
comes the Homeric A. 3d pers. 
sing. teat, in composition ἀπόερσε, 
he caused to go gig: he hurried 
sg (§ 104. N. 6.) 

éovyyave Or doetiyouai( EPITD); 
eructate, 2 A. ἤρυγον. (§ 96. 
7, 18. 

ἐρυϑαίνω, (ΕΡΥΘΩ), make red, 

5 ἐρυϑήσω, A. ἡἠρύϑησα, 
Perf. ηρύϑηκα. δ 96. 7, 10.) 


§ 118 


ἐρύχω or ἐρυχάνω Or ἐρυκανάω, 
impede, keep, 2 A. (Epic) 
ἐρύκακον (as if from EPr- 
KAK22), Inf. ἐρῦκακέειν. 
($$ 96. 7,10: 89. N. 2.) 

ἐρύω OF εἰρύω, draw, ἐρὕσω, 
Perf. Pass, εἴρῦμαι, A. Mid, 
εἰρῦύσάμην. (ὃ 95. N. 2.) 
From ΞΙΡΥΙΙ, Pres. Inf. 
εἰρύμεναι, Pres. Pass. Inf. 
εἴρυσθϑαι Or ἔρυσθϑαι, Imperf. 
Pass. 3d pers. sing. εἴρυτο or 
ἔρυτο, all Epic. 

ἔρχομαι, 0, come, Imperf. ἡ ἠρχό: 
μην. From EAETON (which 
see), Εἰ, Mid. ἐλεύσομαι, 2 A. 
ἤλυϑον commonly ἠλϑον, 
ἔλϑω, ἔλθοιμι, eds, ἐλϑ εἴν, 
ἐλϑών, 2 P. ἐλήλυϑα. 

EPI, see ἔρομαι, ἔῤῥω. 

ESOEN, Perf. Pass. Part. 

 ἐσθημένος Οὐ ησϑημένος, ἢ; OV, 
clothed, dressed. 

éodiw, poetic ἔσϑω or ἔδω, eat, 
Perf. Pass, ἐδήδεσμαι, 2 A. 


Pass. ἠδέσϑην, 2 Perf. ἔδηδα — 


(Epic). Pres. Pass. ἔδομαι, 
as Εἰ, Active, shall eat. From 
PATS (which see), 2 A. 
ἔφαγον. (δ 96.10, 19, N. 8: 
98. N. 2:81: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1.) 
Homer has Inf. Act. Ὥμεναι 

(for ἐδέμεναι), and Perf, Pass. 
ἐδήδομοαι. (ὃ 89. N. 1.) 

ἔσπω (£1122), used only in the 
Imperat. 2d pers. plur. ἔσπε-- 
te (poetic), = £72, which 
see. (§ 96. 14.) 

svuds, 566 ἀνδάνω. 

εὕδω, sleep, Imperf. ηὗδον, F. 
εὑδήσω. (ὃ 96. 10.) 3 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


“149 


εὑρίσκω (ErP2), Jind, F. εὑρη- 
ow, Perf. εὕρηκα, Perf. Pass. 
εὕρημαι, A. Pass. εὑρέϑην, 
2 A. εὗρον, 2 A.Mid. εὑρόμην 
and, in writers not Attic, 
εὑράμην. (δῷ 96. 8, 10: 95. 
N. 2: 85. N.2.)__ ; 

ἔχϑω, hate, Perf. Pass. ἤχϑημαι, 
EF. Mid. ἐχϑήσομαι, 2 A.Mid. 
ἠχϑόμην. Pres. Pass. ἐχϑά- 
γομαν (later ἔγϑομαι), used 

‘chiefly in the compound 
ἀπεχϑάνομαι, am hated. 
(ὃ 96. 10, 7.) 

ἔχω (EX), have, Imperf. εἷ- 
yor, Εἰ, ἕξω, 2 A. ἔσχον, σχῶ, 
σχοίην, σχεῖν, σχών, 2 A. Mid. 


ἐσχόμην, σχῶμαι, σχοΐέμην, 
σχοῦ, σχέσϑαι, σχόμενος. 


(§§ 14. Ν. 5: 80.Ν. 1: 

.87. N. 2.) From, Σ ΧΩ, 
ΣΧΗΜΙ, 2 A. Imperat. 
αχές. ἰδ 117. N. 11} 

The forms σχήσω, ἔσχηκα, ἔσχη- 
μαι, ἐσχιέϑην, which commonly are 
subjoined to ἔχω, in strictness be- 
long to jizz, which see. 

Nore 1, 
ἔχωκα (Il. 2, 218), formed as fol- 
lows : ἔχω, ΟΧΩ (§ 96. 19), 
ὦχα, ὄχωχα, dxwxe contrary to 
the rule (§ 14. 3). 

-~ Norz 2. It would seem that the 
original form of ἔχω was ΣΕ ΧΩ, 
whence 2 A. icexov, syncopated 
ἔσχον. (Compare tam, ) 

ἕψω (rarely ipéw), cook, boil, 
F. ἑψήσω, A. ἕψησα. (ὃ 96. 
10.) 

EN, am, see εἰμί. 

‘EQ, put on, see ἕννυμι. 

“EN, send, see ἵημι. 


‘EN, place, cause to sit, set, A. sioa, Perf. Mid. ἦμαι sit, Pluperf. 
Mid. 7 ἥμην sat, F. Mid. εἴσομαι, A.Mid, εἱσάμην. (ὃ 80. N. 1.) 


13 * 


* 


Homer has a 2 Perf. 


150 ᾽ 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


TA at. Leh ee. ὁ 
~ - ᾿ 
Ω 
᾿ d 
. ᾿ 


[§ 118. 


The Perfect and Pluperfect Middle are inflected as follows: 


: Perfect Middle. : 
Inv. &. ἦμαι - D. ἥμεϑον Ρ. ἥμεϑα 
σαν ἦσϑον ote 
ἧται, ἧσται ῇσϑον ἦνται 


Susy. ὧμαι, used only 1 in the: compound κάϑημαι, which 


see, 


‘Opt. οἵμην, only in the compound κάϑημαι. 


Imp. S. ἧσο D. ἦσϑον P. ἦσϑε 
-  nodo ἥσϑων ἤσϑωσαν 
INF. ἦσϑαι. 
Part. ἥμενος, η, ον, (§ 93. N. 1.) 
Pluperfect Middle. _ 
S. ἥμην D. ἥμεϑον P. ἥμεϑα 
σο ἦσϑον — ἦσϑε 
= bad 
NTO, στο ἤσϑην nvto 


Nore 1. For the forms feras, fore, see above (§ 107. N. 1.) 
Nore 2. For ἧνται, ἦντο, the Ionic has fara, fare. (§ 91. N. 2.) 


ἕωνται, See ἵημι. 
Zz. 

ζάω, live, ζήσω, ἔζησα, ἔζηκα, ἡ 
ζήσομαι. (ὃ 116. Ν. 2.) 
From ZHMI, Imperat. ζῆϑι 
(sometimes fy), Imperf. ἔζην. 
(ὃ 117. Ν. 8.) 

ξεύγνθυμι (ΖΥΓΩ), yoke, F. 
ζεύξω, A. ἔζευξα, Perf. Pass. 
ἔζευγμαι, A. Pass. ἐζεύχϑην, 
2 A. Pass. ἐζύγην. (ὃ 96. 
18, 9. 

ζωννῦμι ZO); gird, F. ζώσω, 
A. ἔζωσα, Perf. ἔζωκα, Perf. 
Pass. ἔζωσμαι, A. Pass. ἐζώ-- 
σϑην ΑΥ 96.9: 107. N. 1 
109. N ΠΝ 


ἦμαι, see “EN, aes 
ἡμί, say. The Imperfect 7 ἣν, Nr 
is used chiefly in the formulas 


ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, said I; ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, 
said he. 

ἡμύω, bend down, regular. 
Homer has Perf. 3d pers. 
sing. ιἐμνήμῦκε (in composi- 
. tion ὕπεμνήμῦκε) for ἢ mere. 


(§ 81.) 


OANN, see ϑνήσκω. 
S00 re and ϑηέομαι, admire, 
Mid. ϑηήσομαι, A. Mid. 
ἐθησάμην ‘and 
(δ 96. 18, 10.) 
ϑάπτω (0462), bury, Sapo, 
ἔϑαψα, τέϑαμμαι, 2A. Pass. 
ἐτάφην. (S$ 96.2: 14. 3.) 
OADN, am astonished, 2 A. 
“ ἔταφον, 2 Perf. τέϑηπα (con- 
trary to§ 14.3) synonymous 
with the Present. (§ 96. 18.) 
OAN, eae suck, A. Mid. 


ἐθηησάμην. 


Μᾷ 


§ 118. 


ἐθησάμην. Pres. Mid. Inf. 
ϑῆσϑαι (contracted from 
ϑάεσϑαι, § 23. N. 1). 

ϑέλω, see ἐθέλω. 

OEPN, warm, F. Mid. ϑέρσο- 
μαι, 2 A. Pass. ἐ ἐθέρην. Mid. 
ϑέρομαι, warm myself. 
(δ 103. N. 1.) 

ϑέω (OETN), run, F. Mid, 
ϑεύσομαι, Bente: ($$ 96. 
N. 12: 114. N. 1.) 

ϑέω, put, see τέϑημι. 

ϑηέομαι, see ϑάομαι. 

ϑιγγάνω (ΘΙΓΩ)), touch, ¥.Mid, 
ϑίξομαι, 2 A. 28 pes; ϑιγεῖν, 
ϑιγών. (ᾧ 96. 7.). 

ϑνήσκω (ΘΑ͂ΙΝΩ), die, Ῥετῖ, 
τέϑνηκα am dead, 2 A. ἔϑα- 
γον, 2 Perf. τέϑναα, τεϑναίην, 
τέϑναϑι; τεϑνάναι, τεϑνεώς 
(Epic τεϑνηώς or τεϑνειώς), 
F. Mid. ϑανοῦμαι. 
TEONHKN, ἡ τεϑνήξω, 
τεϑνήξομαις. (SS 96. 17, 8, 
11: 91. Ν. SS . N.) 


ἕημι and ig (EN), send, Imperf. 
Perf. εἷκα, Perf. Pass. εἶμαι, A. 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


From: 


151 
OOPN, see Foaoxw. 
OPE@GN, see τρέφω. 
ΘΡΕΧ.Ώ, 866 τρέχω. 
ϑρύπτω (OPTO®N), crumble, 


ϑρύψω, ἔϑρυψα, ὦ A. Pass. 
ἐτρύφην. (δῷ 96.2: 14 3.) 

ϑρώσκω (OOPL), leap, spring, 
2 A. ἔϑορον, F. Mid. ϑοροῦ- 
μαι. (ὃ 96. 17, 18.) 

OTHN, see τύφω. 

ovo, sacrifice, Siow, ξἔϑῦσα, 
τέϑῦκα, ἐτύϑην. (δὴ 95. Ν, 
2: 14. N. 3.) : 


L. 


idovw, locate, vow, vou, vxe, 
ὑμαι, Α. Pass, ἱδύϑην and 
ἱδρύνϑην. (ᾧ 95. 5.) 

TAN, see ETAN. 

ἱέω, 566 ἵημι. 

ἵζω and ilove (£42), seat, sit, 
Ε΄. fow and ia, A. ἴσα, F.Mid. 
ἱζήσομαι. (OS 96. 16, 4, 7, 
10: 102. N. 1.) Ὁ 


iny OF ‘ovr, F. jow, A. ἧκα, 
Pass. . ἔϑην οἵ εἴϑην, 2 A. ἦν 


(not used in the sing. of the Ind.), ὦ, εἴην, Ev ΟΥ̓ ἕς, εἶναι, 
εἵς, 2 A. Mid. ΚῊ ΟΥ εἵμην, ὧμαι, εἵμην, ἕσο OF οὗ, ἔσϑαι, 


ἕμενος. (δῷ 96.1: 104, 


N. 11, 13.) 


N. 2: 


80. N. 1: 95. N. 2: 117. 


The Present and Ἠρϑῤδῖει, and the. Second Aorist Active 
and Middle are inflected as follows : 


Present Active. 
Inv. S. ἕημι 


D. e 


laut <x: 
istou(y), ἱᾶσι(») 


Present Passive and Middle. 
S. ἕεμαι 
ἵεσαι, ty 
ἵεται 
1)... ἐέμεϑον 
ec 
Leo Dov 
tso Sov 
ἐέμεϑα 
ἵεσϑε. 
LEYT OL 


152 INFLECTION 


Sus. io, ike 19a from 
τέϑημι. 
Opt. ἱείην, like τιϑείην. 


Imp. S. ie91, igtw, D. ἵε-- 


tov, ἱέτων, P. iste, 


ἱέτωσαν. 
INF. ἱέναι. 
PART. fsic, εἴσα, ἐν. 


Imperfect Active. 

S. in, ing, ty, D. ἵεμεν, 
ἵετον, ἱέτην, P. ἵεμεν, 
ἵετε, ἵεσαν. 

. Second Αὐταὶ Active. 

Inv. S. ἦν. 


iz 


D. τ εἶμεν 
Ἄλον ἕτον, εἷτον 
“Ων ae, εἵτην 


~~ k 


"κα ἕμεν, εἶμεν 
ἕτε, site 
ἕσαν, εἷσαν 


Svuss. ὦ, inflected like the 
Present. 


Opt. εἴην, like the Pres- 
ent. 


| Imp. £91, like the Present. 
Nr. εἶναι. 


Parr. εἴς, εἷσα, ἕν. 


Nore 1. The Present Ind. 3d pers. plur. i 


(§ 117. N. 2.) 


OF WORDS, 


[§ 118. 


Sus. tou, like τυϑῶμαι. 


Opt. isiuny, like τυϑείμην. 

Imp. S. ‘eco or ἵου, ἱέσϑω, 
D. ἵεσϑον, ἱέσϑων, P. ἵεσϑε, 
ἑέσϑωσαν. 

INF. ἵεσθαι. 


PART. ἱέμενος, ἡ, ou. 
Imperf. Passive and Middle. 


S. iguny, isco or tov, isto, 

D. ἱέμεϑον, ἵεσϑον, ἱέσϑην, 
PR. ἱέμεϑα, ἵεσϑε, ἵεντο. 
Second Aorist Middle. 


S. ὃ ἕμην, εἵμην 
Ego | 
᾿ ἕτο, sito 
Dz. ἕμεϑον, εἵμεϑον 
ἥν 
ἔσϑον, εἶσθϑον 
ἔσϑην, εἴσϑην 
P. ἔμεϑα, εἵμεϑα 
ἔσϑε, εἶσϑε 
ἕντο, εἶντο 


Suns. ὧμαι, inflected like the 
Present. 


Opt. εἵμην, like the Present. 


Imp. goo, like the Present. 


INF. fo Fo. 


ao. is contracted from fac. 


Nore 2. For Imperf. Act. inv, there occurs a form ὕειν, found only in 


composition. 


Nore 3. Homer has F. ἕσω, A. toa, ἕηκα. (§§ 95. Ν, 2: 80. N. 3.) 


Nore 4. The form fwyrai for Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. siveas, is obtained 


as follows: 
ἀφίημι. 


ἝΩ, ‘OO, dua, tapas, ἕωνται. (§§ 96. 19: 80. 


N. 3.) See 


4118. 


ἱκγέομαι and χάνω ἃπά ἵχω, 
come, Perf. ἵγμαι, F. Mid. 
ἵξομαι, 2 A. Mid. ἱκόμην. 
(ᾧ 96. 5, 10, 7.) . 
Nore. Homer has A. Act. 3d 


pers. plur. ov for ἵξαν. (ὃ 85. 


N. 2.) 

‘TAHMI (LAA), am propitious, 
Imperat. ἵλαϑι- ΟΥ̓ thynde, 
Perf. (as Present) Subj. ἱλή- 
κω, Opt. ἱλήκοιμι, F. Mid. 
ἱλάσομαι, A. Mid. ἱλασάμὴν. 
Mid. ἱλάσκομαι (rarely ἱλάο- 
μαι), propitiate. (δὰ 96.8: 
95. Ν. 2.) 


intayor (IITA, ἹΠΤΉΜΙ),, 


EF, Mid. πτήσομαι, 2 A. é- 
πτην, 2 A. Mid. ἐπτάμην, = 


πέτομαι, Whichsee. (ᾧ 96. 1.) 


ἴσκω, 566 ἐΐσκω. 

ἵστημι (STAN), place, cause to 
stand, Εἰ, στήσω, A. ἔστησα, 
Perf. ἕστηκα stand, later 
éotaxa have placed, Pluperf. 
ἑστήκειν OF εἱστήκειν was 
standing, Perf. Pass. ἕστα- 
μαι, A. Pass. ἐστάϑην, 2 Perf. 
ἕσταα stand, iota, ἕσταίην, 
ἕσταϑι, ἑστάναι, ἑστώς, 2 A. 
ἔστην stood, στῶ, σταίην, στῆ-- 
Sr, στῆναι; στάς. Mid. ἵστα-- 
μαι, cause myself to stand, 
stand, (δὲ 96. 1: 117: 77. 
N. 25°99 NO7: 95. ΝΟ 95 

Norr. The augment of the 

Perfect and Pluperfect, in this verb, 
takes the rough breathing. 

ἰσχανάω. and ἰσχάνω, — ἔσχω, 
which see. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 

ἐσχνέομαι, = ἴσχομαι. (ὃ 96. 5, 
10.) | 


ἔσχω (ἔχω), take hold of, hold, 
restrain, F. σχήσω, Perf. 
ἔσχηκα, Perf. Pass. ἔσχημαι, 
A. ἐσχέϑην, Ἐς Mid. σχήσο- 


_ ANOMALOUS VERBS. 153 


“μαι, 2 A. ἔσχον. Mid. tuzo- 
μαι, restrain myself. (δὴ 96. 
1, 10: 95. 2.) | 
1, see εἶμι, 90. 
KAAN, see καΐνυμαι. 
καϑέζομαι (κατά, ἕζομαι), sit 


‘down, Imperf. ἐκαϑεζόμην, A. 


Pass, ἐκαϑέσϑην (later), 2 F. 
Mid. καϑεδοῦμαι. (SS 14. 1: 
82..Ν.1.) & 

καϑεύδω (κατά, sudo), sleep, 
Imperf. χαϑηῦδον or. καϑεῦ- 
doy or ἐκάϑευδον, F. καϑευ-- 
δήσω. (δὴ 14. 1: 82. N. 2.) 

κάϑημαι (κατά, juar), sit down, 
Subj. κάϑωμαι, Opt. καϑοί-- 
μην, Imperat. κάϑησο (later 
κάϑου), Inf. καϑῆσϑαι, Part. 
καϑήμενος, Pluperf. Mid. xa- 
ϑήμην Or ἐκαϑήμην sat down. 
(88 14.-1: 82. N. 8) 

καϑίζω and χκαϑιζάνω (κατά, 
ἵζω, iLavw); seat, cause to sit 
down, sit down, Imperf. ἐκά- 
ϑιζον, F. χαϑίσω or καϑιῶ, 
A. ἐκάϑισα, Perf. κεκάϑικα, 
F. Mid. καϑιζήσομαι. (δὴ 14. 
1: 82. N. 1. 


καίνυμαι, surpass, excel, Im- 


perf. ἐκαινύμην, Perf. Pass. 
(from KAA), κέκασμαν ΟΥ̓ 
κέχαδμαι. (ᾧ 107. Ν. 5.) 
καΐω ΟΥ̓ xiw, burn, A. (Epic) 
᾿ἔχηα ΟΥ̓ ἔκεα ΟΥ̓ ἔκεια, Ὁ 
Pass. ἐχάην. From ΚΑ7,., 
EF. xatvow, A. ἕκαυσα, Perf. 


“Pass. χέκαυμαι, A. Pass. é- 


καύϑην. (δῷ 96. 18: 104. 
N. 1 . : 


καλέω (ΚΑ44), call, F. χαλέσω 
_ or χαλὼ, A. ἐκάλεσα, Perf. 


κέκληκα, Perf. Pass. κέκλημαι, — 


Opt. κεκλήμην, Inf. κεκλῆ- 


rs > ͵ 5 
Vee “ἄς Ἵ ; mae i ‘ eis. es . 
RE eye SE ye δν Bae the Tt areca τος Fes i ᾿ς, ὁ ΕΣ j τ ΤΣ οἱ 
SN ee Re τος σοι. λύπας Se eee) Oe Σ δὰ 


104 


σϑαι, Part. κεκλημένος, A. 
Pass. ἐκλήϑην. (SS 96. 10, 
17: 95. N. 1: 91. δ: 102. 

κάμνω (KAM), labor, am 


weary, Perf. χέχμηκα, 2 A. 


ἔχαμον, FE. Mid. 
(ὃ 96. 5, 17.) 
καταγνῦμι (κατά, ἄγνυμι), break 
down, break to pieces, ἘΝ. 
καταξω (also κατεάξω, with 


καμοῦμαι. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


the augment of the Aor, 


Ind.), A. χατέαξα, Part. xo- - 


teasog With the augment of 
the Indicative, 2 Perf xazé- 


aya am broken to pieces, Ὁ. 


A. Pass. κατεάγη». 
Nore. For Aor. Opt. 2d pers, 
sing. κατάξαις, Hesiod (Op. et Ὁ. 
692) has καυάξας (see ἄγνυμι). 
καυάξαις, see the preceding. 
KATLN, see καίω. 


κεῖμαι (κέω, xelw, KEIMI), lie down, recline, κέωμαι, κεοίμην, 
κεῖσο, κεῖσϑαι, κείμενος, Imperf. éxsiunry, Ε΄, Mid. κείσομαι. 


(δὲ 96. 18: 117.) 


he Present and Imperfect.are inflected as follows : 


Present. 

Inv. S. χεῖμαι D. κείμεϑον P. κείμεϑα 
κεῖσαι κεῖσϑον Koss 
κεῖται κεῖσϑον κείγτοαυ 

Susy. κέωμαι, like τύπτωμαι.. 

Opr. xsoiuny, like τυπτοίμην. ‘ 

Imp. S. χεῖσο SD. κεῖσϑον RP. niches 5 

“ xsioFa-. κείσϑων κείσϑωσαν 

INF. κεῖσθαι. 

Part. κείμενος, ἡ; ov. 

= Imperfect. 
IS. ἐκείμην D, ἐκείμεϑον P. ἐκείμεϑα 
ἔκεισο ἔκεισϑον ἔκεισϑε 
ἔχειτο ἐκείσϑην ἔκειντο 


Nore. The Present κέω or χείω has the signification of the Future, shall 


lie down; also, desire to lie down. 


κέλομαι, command, F. Mid. xs- | 


λήσομαι, A. Mid. ἐκελησάμην, 
2 A. Mid. éxexdouny for éxe- 
κελόμην. {SS 96. 10: 78. 
N. 2: 26. 1.) , 
κεντέω, prick, regular. From 
KENTA, A. Inf. κένσαι. 
($$ 96.10: 12. Ν. 4.) 
κεράννῦμι (poetic κεράω), mr, 
F. χεράσω, A. ἐκέρασα, Perf. 


xéxoaxy, Perf. Pass. χέκραμαι 
or κεκέρασμαι, A. Pass. é- 
κράϑην Or ἐκεράσϑην. (δῷ 96. 
9; 26.1: 107. N. 1: 109,” 
Meee | 
For Aor. Act, Inf. κερᾶσ 


Homer has HON Che 


κερδαίνω (ΚΕΡΔ), gain, Ἐς 


κερδανῶ (in writers not. Attic 
κερδήσω), A. ἐκέρδανα (not 


[5 118. ͵ 


ἀν ae ὡὶ 


§ 118] 


Attic ἐκέρδησα), Perf. κεκέρ- 
δακα or χεχέρδηκα. (ᾧ 96. 
7, 10. | 

κέω, 566 κεῖμαι. 

κήδω (KAA), trouble, vex, 
worry, F. Mid. περ νύκνι, 
A. Mid. Imperat. 94. pers. 
sing. κήδεσαι, 2 Perf. κέκηδα 
am anxious. Mid. κήδομαι, 
an anxious about, care for. 
($$ 96. 18, 10, 11: 95. N.2.) 

κίδνημι, Mid. κίδναμαι, = oxt- 
Ovnut, -αμαι. 

κικλήσκω (KAAN), = καλέω. 
(ὃ 96. 17,4, 8.) _ : 

κίρνημι and wiavoank, = κεραν-- 
yum. (Ὁ 96. 16, 6.) 

κιχάνω (KIXL), reach , find, F. 
Mid. κιχήσομαι, Α. Mid. ἐχι- 
χησάμην, 2 A. ἔκιχον. From 
KIX HMI, 2 A. ἐκίχην, Subj. 


κιχῶ (Epic κιχείω), Opt. κι-- 


χεΐην, Inf. κιχῆναι, Part. κι 
χείς. 2 A. Mid. Part. κιχη- 
μένος. (SS 96. 7,10. 117. 
N. 17,1 

κίχρημι Be lend, the rest 
from χράω, which see. (§ 96. 
1.) 

κίω, go, Imperf. ἔκιον. 

κλαΐζΐω (KAATR), clang, F. 
κλάγξω, A. ἔκλαγξα, 2A. ἔ- 
κλαγον, 2 Perf. κέκληγα or κέ- 
κλαγγα. From κεκλήγω; Pres. 
Part. κεκλήγων. 
0,.18,11.} 

biel ea or κλᾶω, weep, ἘΝ, κλαιήσω 
or χλαήσω. From KA4A4ro, 
A. ἔκλαυσα, F. Mid. κλαύσο-- 
μαι, κλαυσοῦμαι. (ὃ 96. 10: 

| 114. N.-1) 


| xhaw, break, κλάσω, ἔκλασα, κέ-- 


κλακα, κέκλασμαι, ἐκλάσϑην. 
From KAHMI, Φ.Α. Part. 


(Ὁ 96. 4, 


ANOMALOUS. VERBS. 155 


xhac. (δὰ 95. N. 1: 107. 
N. 1: 109. N. 1: 117.) 

κλύω, hear, Imperf. ἔκλυον sy- 
nonymous. with the Aorist. 
From ΚΑΤ, 2.A. Imperat, 
κλῦϑι and χκέκλύϑι, 2 A. Mid. 
Part. κλύμενος as oe 

_ celebrated, famous. (δ 78 
Ν.9: ΠΏ Ν. 10.) ᾿ 

KMAQ, see κάμνω. 

κορέννῦμι (KOPIN), satiate, F. 
κορέσω, A. ἐκόρεσα, Perf. 
κεκόρηκα, Perf. Pass. κεκόρε- 
σμαν (lonic χεχόρημαι), A. 
Pass: ἐκορέσϑην. (δὴ 96. 
10, 9: 95. N. 2: Gene: 
109. N. 1.) 

merce (ΚΡΑΓΩ), ery, ἘΝ. sollte 

F. Mid. © χράξομαι, 2 Perf. 

κέχραγα synonymous with 


the ave τς From KE- 
rei F. Mid. κεχκρά- 
ξομαι, A. (later) ἐχέκραξα. 


(δ 96. 4,11) 


Nore. dos without, the con- © 


necting vowel, 2 Perf. ‘Ist pers. 

' plur. κέκραγεν, ἌΝ 2d pers. 
sing. néngare Ss, 2 Pluperf. Ist. pers. 
_ plur. ἐκέκραγμεν. (ὃ 91. N. 6.) 

κρέμαμαι (κρεμαὼ, KPEMHMI, 
suspend myself, hang, Suly. 
κρέμωμαι, Opt. κρεμαΐμην or 
xosuotuny, EF, Mid, ᾿κρεμήσο-- 
μαι. (δ 117. 

κρεμανγῦμι (later bai, sus- 
pend, hang, F’. χρεμάσω or 
κρεμῶ, A: ἐκρέμασα, A. Pass. 
ἐκρεμάσϑην. ($$ 90.9: 95. 
N.1 1: 102. N.2: 109. N. 1.) 

κρήμνημι, πρήμναμαι, Imperf. 
ἐχρημνάμην, == preceding, 
(ὃ 96.606: 117.) 

κτάομαι, possess, Perf. Mid. κέ- 
-xtnjuos and ἔχτημαι, Subj. κε-- 


ΠΡ ΤΡ Ca 


156 


ατῷμαι, Opt. κεκτήμην and 
HEXTOUNY (lonic HEXTED μη»), 
Infin. KEXTHO TOL, Part. ne 
ee F, Mid. χτήσομαι, 
A. Mid. ἐκτησάμην, 76. 
N. 3:91. Ν. 8) ὧν 
κτείνω and χτίννῦμι (K ΤΈΝΩ, 
ΚΎΛΩ), kill, F. χτενῶ, A. 
ἔκτεινα, Perf. ἔχτακα and ἐ- 
κτόνηκα, Perf Pass. ἔκταμαι, 
A. Pass. ἐκτάϑην (sometimes 
exter yy), 2 A. ἔκτανον, 2 
Perf. i ἔχτονα. From KTHMI, 
2 A. ἔχτᾶν, κτῶ, κταίην, κτά- 
vou, κτάς, 2 A. Mid. ἐχτάμην, 
᾿κτάσϑαι, κτάμενος. (δὰ 96. 


ὅ,.19, 18, 16, 9, 13:.117. 
N. 10. ) - 
Homer has also F. κτανίω, κα'ι- 
νέομιαι. 


ΚΊΙΩ, KTIMI, build, 2 A. 
Mid. Part. χτίμενος, ἡ, ov, 
built. (§§ 117. N. 14.) 

κτυπέω (KTTULQ), make noise, 


thunder, OO, NOH, ἡκα, we : 


᾿ηϑην, 2 A. ἔκτυπον. 1.36 
10.) 

κυγέω (KT2), kiss, F. χύσω, 
A. ἔχυσα. - The compound 
προσκυγέω, prostrate myself, 


adore, is generally regular, 


as Εἰ, προσκυνήσω. (δὴ 96. 
ὅ, 10: 95. Ν. 1.) 

κύω ΟΥὙ κυέω OF κυΐσκω, con- 
ceive, to be pregnant, F. 


᾿κυήσω, A. ἐκύησα, A. Mid. - 


- ἐκυησάμην, poetic ἐκυσάμην. 
(ὃ 96. 10, ey | 


AABN, see pas aa yarn Na: 
λαγχάνω (AAXN), receive by 
lot, obtain, F. Mid. λήξομαι 
(Tonic λάξομαιν 2A. ἔλαχον, 
Perf. εἴληχα and λέλογζα. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


[$ 118, 
(§§ 96. 7, 18, 19, 6: 76. 
N. 1.) ᾿ 


AAON, see λανϑᾶάνω. ὃ 
AAKN, see λάσκω. ΕἸ 
λεμβονῶ (.148.2), receive, take, ὦ 
Perf. εἴληφα, Perf. Pass. i. @ 
λημμαι, A. Pass. ἐλήφϑην, F. 
Mid. “λήψομαι, 2 A. ἔλαβον, 
RA. Mid. ἐλαβόμην. (δῷ 96. 
7, 18: 76. N.1.) = 
From AAMBQO, the Ionic has 
Perf. Pass. λέλαριμαι, A. Pass, 

᾿ ἐλάμφϑην, F. Mid. Adupouns It 
has also Perf. oe 9, ($$ 96. 
6, 10: 107. N. 
λανϑάνω (AAO 2, Ay Fw), an 
. hid, escape notice, Perf. Pass. 
λέλησμαι (in Homer λέλα.. a 
oot), I, Mid. λήσομαι, 2 A. 
ἔλαϑον, 2 Perf. λέληϑα,ι 2A. 
Mid. ἐλαϑόμην. Mid. iovda- 
γομαι (sometimes Ay Fount), r. 
“ΩΣ get. (§ 96. 7, 18.) Bi 
λάσκω (,44ΚΩ), talk, gabble, 
A. ἐλάκησα, F. Mid. hoxyjoo~ 
frou, 2 A. ἔλακον, 2 Perf. λέ- 
λᾶκα (Lonic λέληκα), 2Α. Μιά, © 
(Epic) λελακόμην. (S§ 96. 
14, 10: 78. N. 2.) ; 
ΟΝ ἕλαυον ΟΥ̓ εν hovow, 
ἔλαυσα, used only in the ~ 
compound ἀπολαύω, which 
see. (5 18. Ν.1.) % 
AAXD, see Δα ΝΥΝ a 
λέγω; collect: Sm, ga, Perf. sido- 
χα, Perf. Pass. εἴλεγμαι, 2A. 
Pass. ἐλέγην. (δὴ 76. N. 1: 
98. N.2.) «λέγω, say, 18 
regular. a 
‘Nore. Forms without the con-. = 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iatyuny, Ὁ 
3d pers. sing. λέκφο, for ἐλεγόμην, 

᾿ς ἐλέγετο, (δὰ 92. N. 4: 7.) 3 
AEX 2, cause to lie down, fw, So, ὦ 
A. Mid. ἐλεξάμην lay down, — 


δι, 8 
‘eat 


“ 


ΤΣ 
% 


ἮΝ μαίομαι 


§ 118.] 


Imperat. (in Homer) λέξεο, 
Inf. déSucFou, 2 A. Mid. 
ἐλέγμην lay down, 3d_ pers. 
sing. λέκτο, ΝΣ at. λέξο. 


(§§ 88. Ν. 3: 92. Ν. 4: 9. 
1: 7 : 


AHBN, see λαμβάνω. 

ληϑάνω or λήϑω, cause to for- 
get, F. λήσω, 2 A. (Epic) 
λέλαϑον, 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
λελαϑόμην. (SY 96. 7: 78. 
N. 2.) See also dav Fave. 

ληκέω, Lonic, = λάσκω, which 
see, 

ALIX, see λαγχάνω. 

hovw (old iow, λοέω), wash, 
bathe, λούσω, ἔλουσα, λέλουκα, 
λέλουμαι. Mid. λούομαι, com- 


monly λοῦμαι, wash myself, 


bathe. (§ 96. 18, 10.) 

The Present and -Imper- 
fect commonly drop the con- 
necting vowels ὁ and- 

E. g. Pres. λοῦμεν for hoto- 
μεν, λοῦται for λούεται, λοῦν-- 
ται for λούονται, Jot cia for 
λούεσϑαι, Imperf. ἔλουν for 
ἕλουον, ἐλοῦτο for éhoveto. ἡ 

λύω, loose, solve, λῦσω, ξλῦσα, 
λέλυῦκα, Lite, lv Fnv.(§ 95. 
N. 2.) 

From AYMI, 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
3d pers. sing. Avro as Passive. — 
For the Perf. Pass. Opt. 3d pers. 

‘sing. λελῦτο, see above ἘΣ 91. Ν. 

4.) 
MAOM, see μανϑάνω. 
μαιμάω, 566 μάω. ; ' 
(uaw), feel, touch, 
handle, F. Mid. μάσομαι, A. 
Mid. ἐμασάμην.. (ὃν 96. 18: 
95. N. 1.) : 


MAK, see μηκάομαι. 
μανϑάνω (MAOL), learn, un- 
14 


ANOMALOUS VERBS, 


157 


derstand, Perf. μεμάϑηκχα, 
F, Mid. μαϑήσομαι, 2 A 
ἔμαϑον, ἃ F. Doric μαϑεῦμαι 
contracted from μαϑέομαι. 
(ὃν 96. 7; 10: 114. N. 2: 
23. N. 1.) 

μάρναμαι, fight, Opt. μαρναί- 
μὴν oF μαργοίμην, Imperf. 
ἐμαρνάμην, inflected like 
ἵσταμαι. — 

μάρπτω (MAPITL); take hold 
. Of, seize, FE. μάρψω, A. | 
ἔμαρψα, 2 A. ἔμαρπον (also 
ἔμαπον, Without the @), ὦ. 
Perf. μέμαρπα. (ὃ 96. 2.) 

μάχομαι (Tonic μαχέομαι), Sight, | 
combat, Perf. Mid. μεμάχη- 
- pot, I. Mid. μαχέσομαι (Epic . 
μαχήσομαι), A. Mid. ἐμαχε- 
σάμὴν, 2 F. Mid. μαχοῦμαι. 
OS, 96. 10: 95. N. 2: 114. 

2.) 


me “and μαιμάω, desire, am 
eager, strive, feel a-strong 
impulse, 2 Perf. μέμαι 5γ- 
nonymous with the Present. 
Mid. “μάομαι, desire,. seck, 
Imperat. μώεο, Inf. κὔσϑαι. 
(S$ 90. Ν. 2: 116. Ν, 7.) 

The 2 Perf. μέμαα is inflected, 
as far as it goes, like βέβαα. (ὃ 91. 
N. 7.) : 
μεϑύσκω (μεϑύω), make drunk, 
intoxicate; F. wedtow, A. 
ἐμέϑῦσα, A, Pass. ἐμεϑύσϑην. 
Mid, μεϑύσκομάι, an intoxi- 
cated. “(SG 96. 8: 95. N. 1.) 
μεϑύω, am intoxicated, equiva- 
lent to the Middle of the 

᾿ preceding. 

MEIP2.( MEPQ), divide, share, 
Perf. Pass. 8d pers. sing. 
εἵμαρται it is fated, Part. 
εἱμαρμένος fated, destined, 


153 


Pluperf. Pass, 3d pers. sing. 
εἵμαρτο tt was fated, 2 A. 
ἕμμορον I obtained, 2 Perf. 
ἔμμοφα have obtained. Mid. 


μείρομαι, receive a. share, 
obtain. (δὰ 96. 18, 19: 76. 
N. 1: 79. N. 3.) 


The augment « of the Perf. 
and Pluperf. Pass. takes the rough 
breathing. 

The forms peuconras, eespuoguivos 
are sometimes used for εἵμαρται; 
siuagusyos. () 96. 13.) 

μέλλω, am about to be or do any 
thing, shall, Ἐς. μελλήσω, A. 


ἐμέλλησα. (8 96. 10.). 


μέλω, am α concern to, F. us 


λήσω, A. ἐμέλησα, 9 Perf. 
UEpie) μέμηλα. (ὃ 90. 10, 
18,) 


The epic poets have Perf, Pass. 
Sd pers. sing. μέμβλεφαι for μεμέ- 
Atrase (ὃ 26. N 
μένω and 
μενῶ, A. ἔμεινα, Perf. μεμέ- 
γηχα. (δὲ 96. 1, 10: 26. 1.) 
MEW (not to be confounded 
_ with the preceding), intend, 
purpose, 2 Perf. μέμονα sy- 
nonymous with the Present. 
(ὃ 90. 19.). 
μηκάομαι (MAKN), bleat, QA. 
guaxor, 2 Perf.- μέμηκα. 
From μεμήκω, Imperf. ἐμέ- 
μηκον. (§ 96. 18, 10, 11.) 
paiva, stain, regular. Homer 
(Il. 4,146) has A. Pass. 3d 
pers. plur. μιάνϑην for. μέαν-- 


N. 1. 
μίγνῦμι and μίσγω (MIT), 
mix, F. μέξω, A. ἔμιξα, Perf. 
Pass. a es A. Pass. 
ἐμίχϑην, 2 Pass. ἐμίγην. 
τὸ 


(ὃ 96. 9 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


μέμνω, remain, F.. 


dey for. ἐμιάνϑησαν. (Ὁ. 92. 
}" 


[δ 118, 


Nort. Form without the con- 
necting vowel 2 A. Mid. 3d ‘pers. 
sing. Yecrce or μίκαο for iuiysro. 


(δὲ 91. N. 4: 7) 

μιμνήσκω (MNALM), anys to 
remember, remind, ἘΣ, μνήσω, 
Α. 'ἕμνησα, Perf. Mid. μέμνη- 
μαι remember, Suly. μεμνῶ-- 
μαι, Opt. μεμνήμην. OF μεμνῴ-- 

μὴν OY μεμγοίΐμην (onic 
μεμνεῴμην), Imp. μέμνησο, 
Inf. μεμνῆσϑαι, Part. μεμνη- 
μένος, A. Pass. ἐμνήσϑην, 
| Beurjooucn, F. Mid. 
at A. Mid. ἐμνησάμην. 

μεμνήσκομαι, remind 
mye remember. (δὲ 96. 
: 91. Ν. 8: 109. N. 1.) 

ΜΕΝ see μένω. 

MNAN, SCE μιμνήσκω. 

MOAM, see βλώσκω. 

μὕκάομαι (MPKL), bellow, 700- 
μαι, ᾿ησάμην, 2 A. ἔμυκον, 
2 eR μέμῦκα. (ὃ 96. 10.) 


IN. 
vaio (IVAN), dwell, A. ἔνασα 
caused to dwell, placed, Perf. 
_ Pass. νένασμαι, A. Pass. ἐνά- 
σϑην, F. Mid. νάσομαι, A. 
Mid. ἐνασάμην. (δῷ 96. 18: 
95. N. 1: 107. N. 1: 109. 
ree . | 
γάσσω, pack closely, stuff, F. 
.vakw, A. ἔναξα, Perf. Pass. 

γένασμαι. (ὃ 96. N. 4.) 

NAM, see ναίω. 
νέμω, distribute, Εἰ. νεμῶ or 
γεμήσω, A. ἔνειμα, Perf. γερέ- 
μηκα, Perf. Pass. γερέμημαι, 
Ἂ; Pass. ἐνεμήϑην or ἐνεμέ- 
“ϑην. (S$ 96.10: 9ὅ. N. 2.) 
γέω (ΝΕ7Ω), swim, Α΄: ἔγευσα, 
Perf. -neyetKe F. Mid. VEVOO- 


v 


re ee 


γοέω (NOD), 


~ 


SS ee ee ee ee es 
* - *. 4 


—2 ἀσνεν ————E——————————E——— EE, 


§ 118.] 


μαι, γευσοῦμαι. (δὲ 96. N. 
12: 114. N. 1.) 

vito OY γέπτω (NIBS2), wash, 
γέψω, ἕνιψα, νένιμμαι, ἐνίφϑην. 
(ᾧ 96. 2. : 

think, νοήσω, 
ἐνόησα, νενόηκα, γενόημαι, 
ἐνοήϑην. (ὃ 96. 10.) 

The Ionic has νώσω, ἔνωσα, &e. 

all from the simple Present. 

γυστάζω, feel sleepy, γυστάξω 
and γυστάσω, ἐνύσταξα and 


ἐνύστασα. Ὁ: 96. Ν. θη 


πὰ and Sugden (Ξ TPN), shave 
regular. Mid. ἀυρέομῶς ἄο-- 
μαι, commonly ξύρομαι, shave 
myself, shave. 
0. 
ofw (O12), emit an oder, have 
the smell of, smell, ἘΝ, Bho 
(Ionic ὀζέσω), A. ὠζησα, 2 
Perf. ὁδωδὰ synonymous with 
the Present. SS 96. 4, 10: 
95. Ν. 2.) 
οἴγω Or οἴγνῦμι, open, Imperf. 
ἔῳγον, Εἰ, οἴξω, A. ἕῳξα, Perf. 
ἕῳχα, Perf. Pass, ἔῳγμαι, Α. 
Pass. ἐῴχϑην, 2 Perf. ἔῳγα 
stand open. (δὰ 96. 9: 80. 
. 3.) See also ἀνοΐγω. 
The epic poets change the diph- 
thong ῳ into wi, as wiza for aka. 
οἶδα, See HIAN. 
οἰδαίνω Or οἰδάνω OF οἰδέω, 
swell, F. οἰδήσω, A. ᾧδησα, 
Perf. adnxe. 
οἴχομαι, depart, am gone, Perf. 
οἴχωκα (in Homer also @yn- 
xa), Perf. Pass. ᾧχημαι, Εἰ. 
Mid. οἰχήσομαι. (ᾧ 96. 10.) 


} 


οἴω or ὀΐω (both Epic), think, 


suppose, A. Pass. φήϑην 
(Epic ὠΐσϑην), Εἰ, Mid. οἰή-- 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 159 


σομαι, A. Mid. ο͵σάμην 
(Epic). Mid. οἴομαι or οἶμαι 
(Epic ὀΐομαι), synonymous 
with the Active, Imperf. 
ῳόμην or ᾧμην. (ἢ 96. 10: 
109. N. 1) 


orn, F. οἴσω, A. ᾧσα (rare), 
Imper. οἷσε, ¥, Pass. οἰσϑή- 
σομαι, = φέρω, which 566. 
(S$ 88. Ν. 3: 109. Ν. 1.) 

ὀλισϑαίνω and ὀλισϑάνω (OAL 
.ΣΘ.Ω),51ἰρ, shde, F clic d-noa, 
A. ὠλέσϑησα, Perf. ὠλίσϑηκα, 
2 A. ὦλισϑον. (ᾧ 96. 7, 10-) 

δλλῦμι (OAR), destroy, cause 
to perish, I. diego, OF ὀλῶ, 
A. ὄὥλεσα, Perf. ὀλώλεκα, 2 
Perf. ὄλωλα have perished, 
F. Mid. ὀλοῦμαι, 2 A. Mid. 
whouny. Mid. ὄλλυμαι, perish. 
(86 | 96. 6,10: SL.) 

Nore. The poetic 2 Α. Mid. 
Part. ὀλόμενος or obAdmevos has the 
force of an adjective, destructive, 
, fatal, pernicious. 

i (OM2), swear, A. ὧμο- 

a, Perf. ὁ ὁμώμοκα, Perf Pass. 

| jib poojiai and ὁ ὁμώμομαι, A. 
Pass. ὠμόϑην, F. Mid. onov- 
μαι. (δῷ 96. 9, 10: 95. Ν, 
1: 107. N. 1: 81.) 

ὀμόργνῦμι (OMOPI2), wipe 
off, F. ὁμόρ Ew, A. ὦμορξα, 
A. Mid. ὠμορξάμην. (§ 96. 
9.) 

ὀνίνημι (ONAR?, ONHM1), bene- 

fit, F. ὀνήσω, A. ὦνησα, ὦ A. 
Mid. ὠνάμην and ὠνγήμην. 
Mid. ὀνίναμαι, derive benefit, 
enjoy. (SS 96. N. 2: 117. 
N. 15. 


ΟΝ ΜΙ (ΟἸΝΟ.Ώ, ON), Pass. 
ὄνομαι (inflected like didouce 
from δίδωμι), blame, find 


ee ee ee Ae ΠΡ — oe ee ee 
ν᾿ ἕ ‘ aie ee WY ae ᾿ ᾿ 


160 ” INFLECTION 
Sault with, insult, A. Pass. 
ὠνόσϑην, B. Mid. ὀγόσομαι, 
A. Mid. ὠνοσάμην and ὠνά- 


μην. (δὴ 96.-10: 95. Nu 1: - 


109: Ν. i: 117.) : 
The form οὔνεσϑε (Il. 24, 241) 
stands for Pres. Pass. -2d ~pers. 
plur. ὄνεσϑε from OND. 
O72, Perf. Pass. ὠμμαι, A.Pass. 
ὠφϑη», ει - Μιά. ὄψομαι, ‘A. 
Mid. ὀψάμην (little used), 
2 Perf. ὄπωπα (poetic), = 
ogaw, Which see. (§ 81.) 
ὅράω, see, Imperf. ἑώραον (Ionic 
ὥρων), Perf. ἑώρακα, Perf. 
Pass. ἑώραμαι. From LIAR 
(which see), 2 A. εἶδον, ἴδω, 
ἔδοιμι, ἰδέ, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών, 2 A. 
Mid. εἰδόμην, ἔδωμαι, ἰδοέμην, 
ἰδοῦ, ἰδέσϑαι, ἰδόμενος. From 
Om(whichsee), Perf. Pass. 
auuat, A. Pass. ὥφϑην, F. 
Mid. ὄψομαι. (ὃ 80. N. 3.) 
θρνῦμι (OPM), rouse, excite, ἘΝ, 
ὄρσω, A. ὠρσα, Perf. Mid. 
ὀρώρεμαι, 2 Perf. ὄρωρα have 
risen, 2 A. Mid. wgounp. 
Mid. ὄρνυμαι, also ὄρομαι, 
ὀρέομαι, rouse myself, arise. 
(S§ 96. 9, 10: 103, N. 1: 
104. N..6: 81... 
. Nore. Forms without the con- 
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
_ sing. ὦρτο, Imperat. 2d pers. sing. 
eco and ὄησεο, Inf. dedas, Part. 
douevos. (δὲ 92. N. 4: 11.) 


ὀσφραίνομαι (OLPPN), smell, 


_ F. Mid. ὀσφρήσομαι, A. Mid. 
ὠσφρησάμην (later); 2 A. 
Mid. ὠσφρόμην rarely ὠσφρά- 
ἢ}. ($$ 96. ἦν 10: 88. 

οὐρέω, mingo, Imperf. ἐούρεον, 

; 2 ‘ ων, οὐρήσομαι. (ᾧ 80. 


‘OF WORDS. 


[ᾧ 118. 


οὐτάω, wound, regular. From 
OTTHMI, 2 A. ovtay, Inf. 
(Epic) οὐτάμεναι or οὐτάμεν, 
2 A. Mid. Part. οὑτάμενος 


as Passive, wounded, (δ 117. — 


N. 10,17). ay 

ὀφείλω. (OPEAN),; owe, must, 
ought, F. ὀφειλήσω, A. ὠφεί- 
Ajow. (ὃ 96. 18, 10.) 

The Z A. ὥφελον and ὄφελον, ts, 
εν) always expresses a-wish, O that! 
would to God! (§ 217. N. 8, 4.) 

ὀφλισκάνω (ODAN), incur, for- 
feit, F. ὀφλήσω, Perf. ὠφλη-- 
καὶ 2 A. ὠφλον. (ὃ 96. 8, 7, 
10... , 


HI. 

TAON, see πάσχω. 

παίζω, play, jest, ἔπαισα, πέ- 
παίσμαι, ἐπαίσϑην, Ε΄. Mid. 
παίξομαι, παιξοῦμαι. In later 
writers, ἔπαιξα, πέπαιγμαι; 

᾿ ἐπαίχϑην. (δ 96. N. 6: 
114. N. 1.) : 


παίω, strike, F. παίσω and 


παιήσω, A. ἔπαισα, Perf. πέ- 


none, Perf, Pass. πέπαισμαι, 
A. Pass, ἐπαίσϑην. (SY 96. 
10: 107. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
πάσχω (ITAON, ENOL), suf- 
Fer, A. ἔπησα (not common), 
ΕΝ Mid. πείσομαι (rarely πή- 
σομαι), 2 A. ἔπαϑον, 2 Perf. 
πέπονϑα (rarely πέπηϑα). 


(δᾷ 96. 6, 18, 19, N. 10: 
15 8: 


Νοτε. The form wixerS: (Od. 


23,-53°, for πεπόνθατε, is ob- τ 


tained as follows: ΠΑΘΏ, ΠΟῸΟ- 
OO, πέσοϑα, πέπο-σϑε (for πέποϑ- 
σϑεὶ with the Passive termination 
σϑε. (δ 96. 19: 10, 2.) 
πατέομαι (AR), eat, Perf. 
Pass. πέπασμαι, A. Mid. 


he Le ee oe 


= “ΠΟ, δα» τ - 


§ 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 10.» 
ἐπᾶσάμην. (δὴ 95. N. 1: πέσσω, later πέπτω, boil, digest, 
107. N. 1 πέψω, A, ἔπεψα, Perf. 


HAN, Pert Mid. ie pos- 
sess, acquire, A. Mid. ἐπᾶ- 
ψιέμὴν. 

πείϑω (TION), persuade, πεί-- 
OW, ἕπεισα, πέπεικα, πέπει- 
σμαι, ἐπείσϑην, 2 A. ἔπιϑον, 
(poetic), 2 Perf. πέποιϑα 
trust, ὦ A. Mid. ἐπιϑόμην. 
Mid. πεέϑομαι, trust, believe, 
obey. (ὃ 96. 18, N. 14.) 

Norz. The form tortaiS wey 
stands for 2 Pluperf. 1st pers. plur. 
ἐχεσοίθειμεν. (δ 91. N. 6.) 

πελάζω and πελάω, cause to 
approach, bring near, ap- 
proach, come near, πελάσω, 
ἐπέλασα, ἐπελάσϑην and ἐπλά- 
ϑην. From ΠΙΔΉΗΠΩΙ͂Ι comes 
2 A. Mid. ἐπλήμην. (S$ 26. 
1: 117. N. 15.) 

πέλω, revolve, sea about, am, 
Imperf. 3d. pers. sing. ἔπλεξε 
for ἔπελε. Mid. πέλομαι sy- 
nonymous with the Active, 
Part. πλόμενος used only in 
composition, Imperf. 2d 
pers. sing. ἔπλεο ἔπλευ thou 
art, 3d pers. sing. ἔπλετο he 
tS. (8§ 26. 1; 23. N. 1.) 

ΠΕΙΝΘ.Ώ, see πάσχω. . 

πέποσϑε, 5866 παδχω. 


_négdw, pedo, Ἐϊ. Mid. παρδήσο- 


μαι, 2 A. ἔπαρδον, 2 Perf. 

πέπορδα.. Mid. πέρδομαι, 5γ- 

nonymous with the Active. 

(ἢ 96. 19, 10.) : 
πέρϑω, sack, πέρσω, ἕπερσα, 

2 A. ἔπραϑον. (S$ 96. 19: 

26. 2.) 

Nore. Homer has 2 A. Mid. 

Inf. xigSa: without the connecting 

vowel. for περϑέσϑα.. (ὃ ὃ 92: N. 
_ 4:10, 2: 11.) 

14* 


Pass. πέπεμμαι, A. Pass. 
ἐπέφϑην. (Ὁ 96..2.)΄ 
πετανγῦμι (ETAL), expand, 
spread, Ἐς, πετάσω OF πετῶ, 
_ A. ἐπέτασα, Perf. Pass. πέ- 
aroma, A. Pass. ἐπετάσϑη»γ. 
($$. 96. 9: 95. N. 1: 102. 
N. 2: 109. N. 1: 26. 1. :) 
πέτομαι, fly, Ἐ. Mid. πετήσο-- 
μαι, 2 A. ᾿ἐπτόμην (for ἐπετό-- 
μή»), πτῶμαι, πτοίμην, πτέ- 


odo, πτόμενος. (δὰ 96.10: 
ἘΠ | 


ETS, see ninto. ᾿ 
HETOR, see πυνϑάνομαι. 
πέφνον, see DENI. 
πήγνῦμι (ΠΆΓΩ), later πήσσω, 
fix, fasten, F. πήξω, A. ἔπηξα, 
Perf. Pass. πέπηγμαι, A.Pass. 
ἐπήχϑην, 2 Perf. πέπηγα 
stand fast; Α΄. Pass. ἐπά- 
γην. (ὃ 96. 18, 9, 3.) 
HHO, see neoyo. 
HIOER (102), obey, follow, 
trust, πιϑήσω also πεπιϑήσω, 
-éntonoa. (§ 96. 10, 11.) 
HION, see πείϑω and the pre- 
ceding. 
πίλνημι and πιλνάω (πελάω), 
" ΜΙά4. πίλναμαι, ee _medator, 
‘which see. (Ὁ 96. 16, 6.) 
πίμπλημι and πιμπλάω (IEAA?), 
fill, F. πλήσω, A. ἔπλησα, 
Perf. πέπληκα, Perf. Pass. 
πέπλησμαι, A. Pass. ἐπλή- 
σϑην, 2 A. Mid. ἐπλήμην, 
Opt. πλείμην, Imperat. πλῆ-- 
oo, Part. eliaie (Y Γ᾿ 
1: 107. N. 1: 109. 
117. Ν, 15). 
The letter , in the first sylla. 
ble, is dropped when, in composition, 


a 


another μὲ comes to stand before the 
first syllable of this verb; as in 
wimknps, not. tu-rizwanus The 
same is observed of rizwrenus. 
niumonu and πιμπράω (TPA), 
burn, Εἰ, πρήσω, A. ἔπρησα, 
Perf. Pass. πέπρησμαι, <A. 
Pass. ἐπρήσϑην. (δὰ 96.1: 
107, N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
For the omission of μὲ» in com- 
position, see riuwranps. 
πίνω (1112), drink, 2 A. ἔπιον, 
2 I. Μιά. “πιοῦμαι (later). 
Pass, πίομαι, as Εἰ, Active, 


shall drink. From 77102,. 


Perf. πέπωκα, Perf. Pass. 
πέπομαι, A. Pass. ἐποϑην. 


From army, 2A. Imperat. 


Qd pers: βιησ, πῆϑι. (% 96. 
52° ΜΕΝ: 2: 98. Ν 2: 
117. N. 14.) 

πιπίσκω (ITI), cause to drink, 
give to drink, Ἐπ πίσω, A. 
ἔπισα. (ὃ 96. 1, 8.) 

πιπράσκω (περαάω), sell, Perf. 
πέπραχα; Perf. Pass. πέπρα- 
μαι, A. Pass. ἐπράϑην, 8 F. 
πεπράσομαι. (δὴ 96. 1,8: 
20. 1.) ΑΝ 


πίπτω (ZETA), fall, A. ἔπεσα 


(little used), Perf. πέπτωκα, ᾿ 


2 A. ἔπεσον (Doric ἔπετον), 
2 Perf. Part. πεπτεώς, né- 

- πτηώς, πεπτώς, 2 F. Mid. πε-- 
σοῦμαι. (δῷ 96.1, 19,17, 
15: 114. Ν. 2.) ὃ 

πιτνάω and πίτνημι (ΠΕΊΤ 4.2), 
= πετάνγυμι, which see. 
(ὃ 96. 16,6: 117.) 

πιτνέω( TET R),—=ninto, which 
see. (ᾧ 96. 16, 5, 10.) 


πιφάσκω OF πιφαύσκω (PAN), 


show, make known, communi- 
cate. (δ 96.1, 8.) 
DIN, see πίνω, πιπίσκω. 


INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


[§ 118, 


IAAT, see nhalw, πλήσσω. 

πλάζω (IZAAT 2), cause to wan- 
der, Ἐς, πλάγξω, A. ἔπλαγξα, 
A. Pass. ἐπλάγζϑην. Mid. 
πλάζομαι, wander about; rove. 
(Ὁ 96. 9, 6.) 

πλέω (ITAETN), sail, ἔπλευσα, 
Perf. πέπλευκα, Perf. Pass. 
πέπλευσμαι, A. Pass. ἐπλεύ-- 
σϑην, EF. Mid. πλεύσομαι, 
πλευσοῦμαι. (S$ 96. N. 12: 
107. N. 1: 114. N. 1. 

πλήσσω (IJIAATR), rarely πλή-- 
᾿γνῦμι, strike, Εἰ, πλήξω, A. 
ἔπληξα, Perf. Pass. πέπλη-- 
“μαι, 2 A. πέπληγον (Epic), 
δ Perf. αὐδννα ἃ . Pay 
ἐπλήγην (in composition ἐ- 
πλάγην), 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 

᾿ πεπληγόμην. (SS 96. 18, 3, 
9: WB NTR) 


πλώω (πλέω), wow, Sic. 2 A. 
" (from J242.M1) ἔπλων, Part. 
πλώς, G. πλῶντος, Ionic, = 
πλέω, which see, (δῷ 96. 
19: 117. N. 14.) 
πνέω (INETA, INTL), blow, 
breathe, A. ἔπνευσα, Perf. 
πέπνευκα, Perf. Pass. πέπνευ-- 
σμαι, A. Pass. ἐπνεύσϑην, F. 
Mid. πνεύσομαι, πνευσοῦμαι. 
§ 96. Ν. 12: 107. N. 1: 
109. N. 1: 114. N. 1.) 
Poetic forms, Perf. Pass. σέσνυ- 
pai, am prudent, animated, intelli- 
gent, A. Pass, 3d pers. sing. ἐσνύνθη 
» used in the compound dy-arvivdn, 
from ἀναπνέω, 2 A. Mid. (from 
IINYMI) ἐσνύῦμην. (δὲ 96. 6: 
117. N. 15.) | 
ποϑέω, long for, desire, miss, 
ποϑέσω and ποϑήσω, ἐπόϑη- 
σα, πεπόϑηκα, πεπόϑημαι, 
ἐποϑέσϑην. (δὴ 95. N. 2: 
109: N. 1.) 


‘ 


Be λα," « = < ia. at »5, τ Ὧν “»... i = - 
nN Ray Cert SE Pe ne Se a PN oa Te OES 
TS ig i Pere © AE TE eae eR τερον τιν a te cei re 

ἀν ΛΝ oe oot ges tay Ae ee sshiagied 


ST ee ae TE ee 


ai on ne νὰ 
ἐξ’ - τὰ ee Ἔχ ed 


— 
te te 


elas, 


τὰς 
ΦΥῊΝ 


<= ἄσσον δ νὰ 
Ne ve > 
ἜΝ κε πος τὰ 


Sn 
ies 


§ 118. 


HOP, give, 2A. ἔπορον, Perf. 
Pass. 3d. pers. sing. πέπρω- 
ται it has been decreed by 
fate, Part. πεπρωμένος des- 
tined. (ὃ 96. 17.) 

HON, see πίνω. 

TPA, see πίμπρημι. 

HPIAMAI, buy, -2 A. Mid. 
ἐπριάμην, πρίωμαι, πριαΐμην, 
πρίασο ΟΥ̓ πρίω, πρέασϑοαι, 
πριάμενος. (δ᾽᾿ΊΙ17. Ν. 9.) 

PON, see IOPSI. 

TAN, see ἵπταμαι, πτήσσω. 

atnoow, crouch, F. πτήξω, A. 
ἔπτηξα, Perf. ἔπτηχα. From 
HTAN comes 2 Perf. Part. 
πεπτηώς. From ΠΤΉΠΗΙ, 2 
A. 3d pers. on dual πτή- 
τη», IN composition κατα- 
πτήτην. (S$ 96. 3: 99. Ν.: 
11. ¥2.) ᾿.: δὲ es 

HTOM, see πίπτω. 

πυνϑάνομαι (TON), poetic 
πεύϑομαι, inquire, Perf. Mid. 
πέπυσμαι, I. Mid. πεύσομαι, 
2 A. Mid, ἐπυϑόμην. 
18, 7.) 

P. 

‘PAT, see ῥήγνυμι. 

δαίνω, sprinkle, regular. From 
ῬΑΔΩ, A. Imperat. 2d pers. 
plur. ῥάσσατε, Perf. Pass, 3d 

ers, plur. ἐῤῥάδαται, Epic. 
(δῷ 104. N. 4: 91. N. 2.) 
68m Or ἔρδω or EPI, F. δέξω, 


A. £6 5850s (Epic also oka), 


2 Perf. ἔοργα, 2 Pluperf. zag- 
yew. (ᾧ 80. N. 9, 9. 

δέω (PETN, PrN), flow, A. 
ἔῤῥευσα, Perf. ἐῤῥύηκα, F. 
Mid. ῥεύσομαι or ἡυήσομαι, 
2 A. Pass. ἐῤῥύην. ( 
10, N. 12.) 

- ‘PEQ, Perf. εἴρηκα, Perf. Pass. 


ANOMALOUS VERBS, 


(§ 96. 


§ 96.18, 


163 


εἴρημαι, A. Pass. ἐῤῥήϑην 
or ἐῤῥέϑην (not Attic εἰρή-- 
ϑην, εἰρέϑην), 3 Ἐς, εἰρήσο-- 
μαι, Ξξξ EIN, which see. 
($$ 76. Ν. 1: 95. N. 2.) 

ῥήγνῦμι (PAT), later ῥήσσῶω, 
tear, burst, Ἐ', ῥήξω, A. ἔῤῥη-- 
Ea, 2 Perf. ἔῤῥωγα am torn 

᾿ς to pteces, 2 A. Pass. ἐῤῥάγην. 
(Ὁ 96. 18, 9, 3, 19.) 

étyéw (PIT), shudder, διγήσω, - 
&c. 2 Perf. ἔῤῥι γα synony- 
mous with the Present. 
(§ 96. 10.) 

‘POR, see ῥώννυμι. 

“PTL, see ῥέω, flow. 

‘PAT N, see ῥήγνυμι. 

δώννυμι (POR), strengthen, F, 
:ῥώσω, A. ἔῤῥωσα, Perf. ἔῤῥω-- 
κα, Perf. Pass. ξόῥωμαι, Imp. 
ἔῤῥωσο farewell, &c. A. Pass, 

᾿ ἐῤῥώσϑην. (δῷ 96.9: 109. 
N. 1.) 


> 

σαλπίζω (SAAMIT), sound a 
trumpet, ἘΠ, σαλπίγξω, later 
σαλπίσω, A. ἐσάλπιγξα, later 
ἐσάλπισα. (ᾧ 96. 6, N. 6.) 

caow (rarely σάω), save, σαώ- 
ow, S&c. From ΣΑΙ 
comes Imperf. Act. 3d pers. 
sing. (Epic) cam. ($$ 96. 
10: 78. N. 3: 117.) 

σβέννῦμι (SBEN), extinguish, 
F. oféow, A. ἔσβεσα, Perf. 
Pass. ἔσβεσμαι, A. Pass. ἐσβέ-- 
σϑην. From SBHMI, 2 A. 
ἔσβην, σβείην, σβῆναι. (δῷ 96, 
9:95. N.2: 107. N. 1: 109. 
N, 1.) 


σεύω (ΣΎ), shake, move, agi- 
tate, F. σεύσω, A. ἔσσευα, 
Perf. Pass. ἔσσυμαι, Pluperf. 
Pass. ἐσσύμην, A. Pass. éo- 


INFLECTION 


164 


σύϑην sometimes ἐσύϑην. 


From - ΣΥΠΙ, 2 A. Μιά.. 


ἐσσύμην and: σύμην. Mid. 
σεύομαν and, without the 
connecting vowel, σεῦμαι. 
(δὲ 96. 18: 104. N. 1: 78. 
N.3: 79. N. 3.) 

σκεδάννῦμι (ΣΚΕΖ 4.2), scatter, 
disperse, spread, F. σχκεδάσω 
or oxedw, A. ἐσκέδασα, Perf. 


ἐσκέδακα, Perf. Pass. goxéda-~ 


σμαι, A. Pass. ἐσκεδάσϑην. 
($9 96.9: 102. N. 2: 107. 
N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
oxthiw( SKEAN, SKAAN),dry, 
-  cause-to wither, F. σκελῶ, 
A. ἔσκηλα, Perf. ἔσκληκα am 
dried up, ¥. Mid. σκλήσομαι. 
From SKAHML, 2 A. ἔσκλην, 
σκλαίην, σκλῆναι. Mid. σκέλλο-- 
μαι, wither. (ᾧ 96. 6, 17,18.) 
σχέδνημι (SKEAAN), Mid. oxi- 
ὄναμαι, = σκεδάννυμι, which 
see. - (§ 96. 6, 16.) 
σοῦμαι (σεύω), Imp. 2d. pers. 
sing. govoo, 2 A. Pass. 3d 
pers. sing. ἔσσουα, in compo- 
sition ἀπέσσουα (Laconic) 
he. is gone, he is dead, = 
σεῦμαι from σεύω, which see. 
(δ 96. N. 15.) 
Gow, see σώζω. 
σπέσϑαι, See Eo. - 
STAN, see torn. 
στερέω OF otégiocxw (STEPM), 
deprive, bereave, 1". στερήσω, 
A. ἐστέρησα, Perf. ἐστέρηκα, 
Perf. Pass. ἐστέρημαι, 
Pass. ἐστερήϑην, 2A. Pass. 
Part. στερεὶς (poetic). Pass. 
στερέομαι OF στέρομαι. (δ 96. 
8, 10.) 
στορέννῦμι OF στόρνῦμι OF στρών-- 
γῦμι (ΣΤΟΡΩ), strew, spread, 
F’. στορέσω, στρώσω, A. ἐστό- 


[Ὁ 18. 


ρεσα, ἔστρωσα, Perf. Pass, 
ἔστρωμαι, A. Pass. ἐστορέ- 
σϑην, ἐστρώϑην. (δὰ 96. 10, 
9,17: 95. N. 1: 109. Ν.1. 
στυγέω (TIT), fear, hate, 
στυγήσω, ὅτο: 2 A. ἔστυγον. 
Aor. also ἔστυξα I terrified. 
“(ὃ 96. 10.) . 
σχεῖν, SCe ἔχω, ἴσχω. — 
σώζω (Epic σόω), save, σώσω, 
ἔσωσα, σέσωκα, σέσωσμαι, 
ἐσώϑην. 


σώω (ocw),—preceding. (δ 116. 
“Ne”.) 


OF WORDS. 


ἔξ 

TATN, see TAN, take, - 

TAAAN, bear, suffer, venture, 
A. ἐτάλασα, Perf. τέτληκα, 2 


Perf. τέτλαα, Opt. terhainy, — 


Imp. τέτλαϑι, Infin. τετλάναι. 
From TAHMI, 2 A. ἔτλην, 
tlw, τλαίην, τλῆϑι, τλῆναι, 
thes. (§§ 26.1: 9ὅ. Ν. 2: 
SEN. 117..199 

τάμνω, Εἰ. ταμέω, Ἰοηΐο, = τέ- 
pve. 

TAR, TATN, take, Imperat. 
2d pers. sing. τῇ (contracted 
from tas) take thou, 2 A. 
Part. τεταγών, Epic. (δῷ 238. 
Ν. 1: 78. Ν. 9. | 

τείνω (TENR, TAN), stretch, 
extend, F. teva, A. ἔτεινα, 
Perf. τέτακα, Perf. Pass. τέτα-- 
μαι, A. Pass. ἐτάϑην. (§ 96. 

. 19, 5, 18.) 

ΤΈ ΚΙ, see tixto. 

τέμνω (rarely téuw), cut, F. re- 
wo, Perf. τέτμηκα, Perf. Pass. 
τέτμημαι, A. Pass. ἐτμήϑην, 2 
A. ἔτεμον and ἔταμον, 2 A. M. 
ἐταμόμην. (ᾧ 96.5, 17, 19.) 

τέτμον OF ἔτετμον, L found, met 

᾿ with, a defective 2 A. Act 
(ὃ 78. N. 2.) 


Ἔν ΒΡ ae 


§ 118. 


- TETXA, see τυγχάγω. - 


τὴ, see 1.4.2, take. 

TIEN, Perf. Part. τετιηώς. af- 
flicted, Perf. Μιά. τετέημαι 
am afflicted, am sorrowful. 
(4 99.Ν) Ὁ 

τίϑημι ee τιϑέω, ᾿ϑέω), 
put, place, Ἐς. ϑήσω, A. ἔϑη-- 
κα, Perf. τέϑεικα, Perf. Pass. 
τέϑειμαι, A. Pass. ἐτέϑην, A. 
Mid. éFnuduny (not Attic), 
2 A. ἔϑην, Fo, ϑείην, ϑέτι 
or θές, ϑεῖναι, ϑείς, 2 A. 
Mid. ἐθέμην. (S$. 96. 1: 
104. N. 2:95. N. 2, 4: 14. 
3, N.3: 117. N. 11, 13.) 

τίχτω (TEKS), bring forth, F, 
τέξω, A. Pass. (later) ἐτέχϑην, 
F’, Mid. τέξομαι, 2 A. ἔτεκον, ἢ 2 
Perf. τέτοκα, 2 Εἰ. Mid. τεκοῦ-- 
μαι, 2A, Mid. (poetic) ἐτεκό- 
μην. (55 96. Ν,.8:114.Ν.92. 


tive, τίνῦμι, τίννῦμι, = τίω, hon-. 


or, which is regular. (ἢ 96. 
5, 9.) 
τιτράω (TPAD), bore, EF. τρή-- 


ow, A. ἔτρησα, Perf. τέτρηκα, 
Per. Pas. τέτρημαι. (Ὁ 96. 1.) 


τιτρώσκω (ΤΌΡΩ), wound, F. - 


towow, A. ἔτρωσα, Perf. τέ-- 
τρωκα, Perf. Pass. τέτρωμαι, 
A. Pass. ἐτρώϑην. (§ 96. 
17, 1, 8. 
τιτύσκομαι (TTKL), prepare, 
take aim at, 2 A. τέτυκον, 
2 A. Mid. οὐγοκόμην, Epic. 
($$ 96. 1, 14: 78. N. 2.): 
TAAM, 586 TAAAN. . 
TMED, TMA, see τέμνω. 
τορέω (TOPS), pierce, τορήσω, 
&c. 2 A. ἕτορον. (ὃ 96. 10. 
ΤΟΡΩ, 566 τιτρώσκω, TOQEW. 
τόσσαι, τόσσας, = τυχεῖν, τυχῶν, 
from, τυγχάνω, which see. 


ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


165 


TPAT£&, see τρώγω. 
TPAD; see τιτράω. 


τρέφω (OPED), nourish, feed, 


, support, F. ϑρέψω, A. ἔϑρε- 
wo, Perf. τέτροφα, Perf. Pass, 
téFouupor, A. Pass. ἐϑρέ- 
pony, 2 A. ἕτραφον (Epic), 
2 A. Pass, ἐτράφην. (δὲ 14, 
9: 96.19: 107. N. 6.) 


τρέχω (OPEXN), run, A. ἔϑρε- 


fo, Εἰ, Mid. ϑρέξομαι. From 

APAMN or JPEMN (which 

see) come Perf. δεδράμηκα, 

Perf. Pass. δεδράμημαι, 2 A. 

ἔδραμον, 2 Perf. ᾿ δέδρομα 

(SL F. Mid. δραμοῦμαι. 
1 

τρώγω (rear) eat ohaw, F, 
Mid. ἘΠ ἘΝ, 2 A. ἔτραγον. 
~ (9 96. 19. 

τυγχάνω ᾿ὙΧΩΣ, happen, at- 
tain, A. ἐτύχησα (Epic), Perf. 
τετύχηκα, Perf. Mid. (poetic) 
τέτυγμαι OF τέτευγμαι, I’. Mid. 
τεύξομαι, 2 A’. ἔτυχον. 9 96. 

τἶἦφ 10, 18.) - 


τύπτω (Tr), strike, F. τύψω 


commonly τυπτήσω, ΔΑ. ἔτυψα, 

Perf. τέτυφα, 2 Perf. τέτυμ- 
μαι commonly τετύπτημαι, A. 
Pass. ἐτύφϑην, 2 A. Pass, 
ἐτύπην. (ᾧ iy: 2, 10.) 


ἵὑπεμνήμυχε, see τπ νὰ 


ὑπισχνέομαι and ὑπίσχομαι (ὑπό, 
ἰσχνέομαι, ἴσχομαι), promise, 
Perf. Pass. ὑπέσχημαι, 
Pass. ,ὑπεοχέϑην, F. Mid. 
ὑποσχήσομαι, ‘2 A. Mid. ὑπε-᾿ 
σχομην. 


Oo. 

ATA, 2 A. ἔφαγον, Pass. φά- 

γομαι (later) as F. Active, 
= ἐσθίω, which see. 


109 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 118. 


φάσκω, 866 φημί. ἘΣ ; (which see), A. 7 ἤνεγκα, Perf. 
DAN, see πιφάσκω, DENN, ἐνήνοχα, Perf. Pass, ἐνήνεγμαι, 
φημί. A. Pass. ἠνέχϑην, 2 A. ἤνεγ- 
DENN (GAN), kill, Perf. Pass. κχον. 
πέφαμαι, 3 E. ποψήθοε ἢ Α. φεύγω (ΦΥ ΤΩ), flee, escape, 
πέφνον OF ἔπδῳνον, Κορε 96. Ἐς Mid. φεύξομαι, φευξοῦμαι, 
ὅ,.19 : 95. Ν ὦ νὰ A. ἔφυγον, 2 Perf. πέφευ- 
26. 1) ae «(δὲ 96 18: 114, N. 1.) 
sy, oir lon «Siegen? of Fig hs Prono Me lgtea has also 2 Perf. Part. 
perf. ἔφερον. From O10, F. ao ieseee (as form ΦΥΖΩ), and 


οἴσω, A. Imperat, 2d pers. Perf. Pass. Part. πεφυγμένος hav- ὁ 
sing. ois. From ENETKSU ing escaped. 


φημί and φάσκω (4.4), say, Imperf. 2 ἔφην, F., φήσω, A. i ἔφησα, 
Perf. Pass. πέφασμαι, 2 A. Mid, ἐφάμην, Imperat. pao (Epic), 
Infin. φάσϑαι. (δὲ 96. 8: 95. N. 2: 107. Ν. 1: 117. N. 9.) 
The Present and τς ailaeaes Active are inflected as fol- 
lows : } 


Present. 
Inv. S. φημ D. φαμέν P. φαμέν | 
φής φατόν 3 φατέ 
φησί») -. φατὸν ο΄ φασί(ν) 


. Suns. S. φῶ, φῇς, Pip D. φῶμεν, φῆτον, φῆτον, P. φῶμεν, 
φῆτε, φῶσι(»ν 
Orr. 3. φαίην, φαΐης, φαίη, Ῥ. φαίημεν, φαΐητον, φαιήτην, 
Ρ. φαίημεν, paints, φαίησαν ΟΥ̓ φαῖεν. 
Imp. S. φάϑι(814.Ν,.4 D.garov PP. pare 
φάτω φάτων ᾿ φάτωσαν, φάντων 
InF. gare. | 
Part. φᾶς, φᾶσα, φάν, G. φάντος. 


Imperfect. | 

SS. ἔφην . D. ἔφαμεν Ρ᾿ ἔφαμεν 
ἔφης, ἔφησϑα ες ἔφατον ἔφατε 

EQN : ἐφάτην ἔφασαν 


Nore 1. The Qd pers. sing, of the Ind. is very often written φής. | 
Nore 2. For the 2d pers. sing. of the te eit a see above (§ 84. N. 6). ‘ 


φϑάνω (DOAN), conve before, MI, 2A. ἔφϑην, φϑῶ, φϑαί- 
anticipate, Ἐ. φϑάσω, ΔΑ. ην, φϑῆγαι, φϑάς, 2 A. Mid. 
ἔφϑασα, Perf. ἔφϑακα, F. ἐφϑάμην, Nie a ($$ 96. 
Mid. φϑήσομαι. From ®OH- 5: 95. N.2: 117.) 


8.113. 


φϑίνω, φϑίω, consume, perish, 
φϑίσω, ἔφϑισα, ἔφϑικα, ἔφϑι- 
μαι. From ΦΘΙΠΙ͂Ι, ὦ A. 
Mid. épFiunry, Subj. φϑίω- 
μαι, Opt. pFiuny, Inf. pdi- 
ofa, Part. φϑίμενος. 
(δὲ 96. 5: 117. N. 14.) 

φιλέω, love, regular. From the 
simple @IAR, A. Mid. égi- 
λάμην, Imperat, 2d pers. sing. 
φῖλαι, Epic. 

φορέω, carry, bear, wear, regu- 
lar. From ®OPHmT, Inf. 


(in Homer) φορῆναι. (ὃ 117. 


N. 17. 


᾿ς φρέω (φέρω), φρήσω, ὅσο, used 


only in composition. from 
@®PHMI comes 2 A. Imp. 
goss. (S$ 96. 17: 117. Ν, 
11. : 
@ITN2, SBTZLL, see φεύγω. 
φύω, produce, pow, ἕφυσὰ, πέ- 
φυκα am, 2 Perf. πέφυα am, 
2 A. Pass. (later) ἐφύην. 
From ®rmi, 2 A. ἔφυν am, 
Subj. gia, Opt. φῦην, Inf. 
φῦναι, Part. gis. (ὃ 117. 
N. 738. ity 
X. 
XAAN, see χάζω, χανδάνω. 
χάζω (XAIN, KAAN), yreld, 
give way, F. κεκαδήσω shall 
deprive, 2 A. κέκαδον I made 
to give way, deprived, 2 A. 
Mid. xexadounr.. (SS 96. 4, 
10,11: 78. Ν. 2. 


| χαίνω (XANQ, XAN), com- 


monly yaoxw, gape, 2 A. 
ἔχανον, 2 Perf. xéynva, F. 
Mid. χανοῦμαι. (ἢ 96. ὅ, 18, 
8. 


| χαίρω (ΧΑΡΩ)Ὶ, rgoice, EF χαι- 


ρήσω, Perf. κεχάρηκα, Perf. 
Pass. κεχάρημαι (poetic κέ- 


ANOMALOUS VERBS, 


167 


χαρμαι),, A. Mid. ἐχηράμην 
(poetic), 2 A. Pass. ἐχάρη», 
2 A. Mid. χκεχαρόμην (E pic). 
Homer has also F". κεχαρήσω, 
χεχαρήσομαι. (SY 96.18, 10, 

TESSN 80. 

χανδάνω ae XANAQN, 
XENAN), contain, hold, re- 
ceive, F. Mid. χείσομαι, 2 A. 
zyadoy, ὦ Perf. χκέχανδα. 
ASS 96. 6, 7,19: 12. δ.) 

χάσκω, 866 χαίνω. 

χέζω (XEA2), caco, A. ἔχεσα 
and ἔγεσον, Perf. Pass. κέχε- 
σμαι, I. Mid. χέσομαι, χεσοῦ-- 
μαι, 2 Perf. χέχοδα. (88 96. 
4,19: 85. Ν. 2: 114.N.1.) 

χέω (ΧΕΥΏ, ΧΥΩ), pour, F, 
χέω sometimes ᾿χεύσω, 
΄ ἔχεα Sometimes ἔχευσα (Epic 

᾿ἔχευα), Perf. χέχυχα, Perf. | 
Pass. χέχυμαι, A. Pass, ἐχύ- 
ϑην. From xrmi, 2 A. Mid. 
ἐχύμην. (δῷ 96. 18, N. 12: 
95. N. 1: 102. N. 2: 104. 
be 117.) 

χόω, 566 χώνγυμι. 

ΧΡΑΙΣΊΜΩ, help, ¥. χφαισμήσω, 
ἊΣ ee ert 2 A. ἔχραι- 
σμον. (§ 96. 10.) : 

χράω, deliver an oracle, LONI, 
&c.. Mid. χράομαι, use. 
($§ 95. N. 3: 116. N. 2.) 


707 (χράω), it as necessary, Im-. 


personal, Subj. χρὴ, Opt. 

χρείη, Inf. χρῆναι, Part. 

~ neut. χρεών, Imperf. ἐχρῆν. 
or χρὴν, F. χρήσεϊ. 

The compound « ἀπόχρη, it 

is enough, has Inf. ἀποχρῇν, 
Imperf. anyon. 3 


Nore. The Inn. xen regularly 
would be χρῇ, (§ 116. N. 2.) 
_ The Orr. χρείη and the Ine, 


[68 _-INFLECTION 


φῆναι! come from xeiw- Aeneas 
<PHMI. (δ΄ 116. N,.8: 117. 
1 > & eee 

The Part, χρεών stands for 
χράον." (δ 116. N. 9.) 

The Imperfect ἐχρῆν is contracted 
from ἔχραιν (ὃ 116. N. 3). τὸν 

χρῆν, see above (δὲ 78. N. 3 
93. N. 4: 98. N. 3), 

χρώννῦμι (XPO2), color, F. 

χρώσω, A. ἔχρωσα, Ῥογῇ, χέ- 


OF WORDS. 


[$ 119. 

ψύχω, cool, ψύξω, &c. 2 A. 

Pass. yer ae if from 
RE, Tit) 


ὠϑέω (2020), _ push, Imperf. 
ἐώϑεον, Ε΄ ὠϑήσω or ὦσω, 
Α. E0000, Perf: ξωκα, Perf. 
Pass. ἔωσμαι, A. Pass. ἐώ- 


i ape eae 
bods ple ἐνῶ 


i ar aie Ae al Sy til? Sel 


oye δα 


zxowxa, Perf, Pass. xéyamouar, σϑην, Τὶ, Mid. ὥσομαι. (δὴ 96. 
A. Pass, ἐχρώσϑην. OS 96. 10: 80. N, 2. 
9: 107; N.1: 109. N.1.) ὠνέομαι, buy, Imperf. ἐωνεόμην, 
wove (yo), heap up, dam, Perf. Pass. ἐώνημαι, Εἰ, Mid, 
F. yoow, A. ἔχωσα, Perf. xé- ὠνήσομαι, A. Mid. (not Attic) 
χωκα, Perf. Pass. κέχωσμαι, ἐωνησάμην Or ὠγησάμην. (δ 80, 
A. Pass. ἐχώσϑην. (ibid. ) Ne. 


Nore. In the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, tenses of 
easy formation (as a Pass.) 3 are not generally given. 


ADVERB. 


§ 119. 1. Many adverbs answering to the question πῶς, 
How! IN WHAT MANNER? are formed from adjectives, pro- 
nouns, and participles, uv changing og of the nominative or 
genitive into ws. Εἰ g. | | 


σοφῶς, wisely, from σοφός, wise ; 

χαριέντως, gracefully, from yagies, evtos, graceful: 

ἀληϑέως, contracted ἀληϑῶς, truly, from ἀληϑής, ἑος, true ; 
’ οὕτως, thus, from οὗτος, this ; ὩΣ 

ύντως, indeed, from ὦν, ὄντος, being. 


2. Some adverbs of this class end in δὴν or ἀδην. Such 
adverbs are derived. from verbs. , Εἰ. g. γράβδην, scratchingly, 
from γράφω, scratch; λογάδην, silectecly. from λέγω, select, 


collect. - (δῷ 7: 96. 19.) 
3. Some end in δόν or ηδόν. Such adverbs. are TIS from 
nouns, Εν g, ἀγεληδόν, im herds, from ἀγέλη, herd; τετραποδη- 


Sov, like a quadruped, from 3 τετράπους, οδος, four-footed. 


- 4, Some end in ὦ or εἶ, τί or tei. E. σ. ἐϑελοντί, voluntarily, 
from ἐθέλων, οντος, willing ; βαρβαριστὶ, like a barbarian, from 


᾿βαρβαρίζω, act like a barbarian. 


ΝΣ ΟΞ ΨΥ» a ey ἢ 


Δ κυνῶν δ α΄ ὦ 


eae ae ee ee ΤΟΣ 


δῷ 120, 121.] ADVERB. 169 


5. Some endin & E.g. ἐγαλλάξ, by turns, crosswise, from 
ἐνναλλάσσω, place across. 


6. A few adverbs of this class end in ἐνδην. Εἰ, g. πλουτίγ- 
δην, according to (his) wealth, from πλοῦτος, riches. 


§ 120. Adverbs answering to the question ποσάκις; 
HOW oFTEN? end in «xc. Such adverbs are derived from 
adjectives. E. g. συχνάκις, often, from συχνός, frequent. 

For the numeral adverbs, see above (§ 62. 4). 


§ 22H. 1. Adverbs answering to the question 76. or 
ποῦ, WHERE? IN WHAT PLACE? end in & or σι(ν). E. g. 

αὐτόϑι, in that very spot, from αὐτός. 

The termination o.(y) is chiefly appended to names of towns, 
It is preceded by ἡ but when the nominative singular of the 
noun ends (or would end) in ἃ pure or ρα, it is preceded by a. 
E. g. ‘Adnrna, at Athens, from ᾿“ϑῆναι, Athens; Θεσπιᾶσι, at 
Thespie, from Θεσπιαΐ, Thespie. 


(1) Some adverbs of this class end in ov or oyov. E. g. 
αὐτοῦ, there, from αὐτός " πανταχοῦ, everywhere, from πᾶς, παν- 
τός. 

(2) Some end in οἵ. E. g. ᾿Ισϑμοῖ, at the Isthmus, from 
᾿Ισϑμός, Isthmus. ς - 

(3) The following adverbs also answer to the question 
WHERE? ἄγχε OF ἀγχοῦ, ἀνεχάς, ἄνω, ἐγγύς, ἑκάς, ἐκεῖ, ἐκτός, ἔνδον, 
ἔνϑα οἵ ἐνθάδε or ἐνταῦϑα (lonic ἐνθαῦτα), ἐντός, ἔξω, ἔσω, ἵκταρ, 
κάτω, πέλας, πέρα and “πέραν, πλησίον, πόῤῥω, πρόσω, τῆλε ΟΥ̓ 
τηλοῦ, ὧδε, and some others. 

Nore 1. The adverb οἴκοι, at home, from οἶκοςγ house, takes the acute on the 
penult, (§ 20. N. 1.) ; 


2. Adverbs answering to the question πόϑεν, WHENCE? 
FROM WHAT PLACE? endin de. Εἰ g. 
᾿4ϑήνηϑεν, from Athens, from 749701, Athens ; 
οὐρανόϑεν, from heaven, from οὐρανός, heaven. 


Here belongs ἔνϑεν or ἐνθένδε or ἐγτεῦϑεν (Lonic ἐνθεῦτεν), 


hence, thence, whence. 


3. Adverbs answering to the question 2608, WHITHER? TO 
WHAT PLACE? end in σε, dz, or fe. Εἰ, g. 
ἐκεῖσε, thither, from ἐκεῖ, there ; 
oixovds, to the house, home, from οἶκος, house ; 
Θήβαζε, to Thebes, from Θῆβαι, Thebes. 
15 ᾿ 


ἢ 


ye INFLECTION OF WORDS. 


Nore 2. In strictness, the ontng δε is appended to the accusative singular or 
plural of the noun. 


Nore 8. The adverbs οἴκαδε, home, and φύγαδε, to flight, imply nom. OIX, 
ΦΥΞ, whence accus. oixa, Piya. : 
4. Adverbs answering to the question πῆ, IN WHAT DIREC- 
TION? end in ἡ or oy. E, g. 
οὐδαμῇ, in no way, from οὐδαμός, none ; 
ἀλλαχῆ, in another direction, trom ἄλλος. 


Norr 4. The ending 1 becomes » only when the nominative of the adjective, 
from which such adverbs are derived, is not obsolete. 


§ 122. The following adverbs answer to the question 
πότε, WHEN? IN WHAT TIME 1 ἀεί, αὔριον, ἑκάστοτε, ἔπειτα, 
ἐχϑὲς or χϑές, νεωστί, νύκτωρ, νῦν, ὀψέ, πάλαι, πάντοτε, πέρυσι, 
πρίν, προχϑές, πρώην, πρωΐ, σήμερον, τῆτες, ὕστερον, and some 


[$$ 122, 128. 


others. 


§ £23. The Siicwing table exhibits the adverbs derived 
from 02, ὍΠΟΣ, TOS, and os. (S$ 73. 1: 63. N. 2: 71.) 


[nterrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 
ποῦ Or πόϑι, πού ΟΥἩ ποϑί, τόϑι, here, οὗ or ode ΟΥ 
where? somewhere in this ὅπου OF On0- 
place 31, where 
πόϑεν, whence? ποϑέν, from τόϑεν, thence ὅϑεν or δπό- 
some place Sev, whence 
ποὶ OF πόσε, ποῖ, SOMeE- wanting οἵ OF ὅποι; 
whither 7 whither whither 
πῆ, in what πή, in some τῇ or τῇδε OF ἢ OF ὅπη, 
direction 7 direction ταύτῃ, inthis in which 
direction direction 
mots, when? ποτέ, at some τότε, then ὅτε OF ὅπότε 
time, once when 
τ 
πῶς, how ? πώς, some- τώς OF ὧδε OF ὡς OF ὅπως, 
how οὕτως, thus,so as 
’ . " , Cig 
πηνίκα, at wanting τηνίκα, τηγικατ ἡνίκα OF 
. - c 
what time? δε, τηνικαῦτα, οπηνίκα, at 
᾿ αὐ this or that which time 
time 
πῆμος, When? wanting τῆμος OF Ty- ἦμος OF ὁπὴ- 
μόσδε or ty-_ oc, when 
μοῦτος, then 
wanting wanting τέως, so long ἕως, until 
wanting - wanting τόφρα, so long ὄφρα, as long as 


ee ee 


δῷ 124, 125.] ADVERB. | 171 


Nore 1. The forms 7491, σοϑί, 769i, ὅϑ,, σόϑεν, οἷ, Tas, πῆριος, τῆμος, KOs, 
φόφρα, ὄφρα, are poetic. 

Instead of ews, the poets sometimes use ὥς, with the acute accent. 

Nore 2. The letter / is annexed to the demonstratives radrn, ὧδε, οὕσως, for 
the sake of emphasis. Thus, ταυτηῖ, ὡδί, οὑτωσί. (ὃ 70. N. Ὁ 

Nore 3. Also the adverbs δεῦρο, ἐνθάδε or ἐντεῦθεν, and νῦν, take i. Thus, 
Bevel, tvIads or ἐνταυϑέ, ἐντευϑενί, νυνί, 


Nore 4. Some of the relative adverbs are strengthened by πέρ or οὖν, or 
by both united. E. g. ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσπεροῦν, ass ὅπον, ὁπουοῦν wherever. 


§ IZA, 1. Some genitives, datives, and accusatives are 
used adverbially. E. g. δημοσίᾳ, publicly, from δημόσιος, pub- 
lic; τέλος, finally, lastly, from “τέλος, end. 


2. Especially the accusative singular or plural of the neuter 
of an adjective is often used adverbially. E. g. μόνον, only, 
from μόνος, alone; πολύ or πολλά, much, from πολύς, much. 


Norte. In some instances, a word with the preposition, which governs it, is 
used adverbially. E. g. ragaxenua (παρὰ χρῆμα), aeagny 3 προύργου (wee 
ἔργου)» to the purpose ; καϑάπερ (καϑ' ἅπερ), as. 


COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 


§ 125. The comparative of an adverb derived from an 
adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the compara- 
tive, and the superlative is the same with the neuter plural of 
the superlative, of that adjective. E. g. 


σοφῶς, wisely, σοφώτερον, more wisely, σοφώτατα, most wisely, 
from σοφός, wise. (ᾧ 57. 


ἡδέως, pleasantly, ἥδιον, more pleasantly, ἥδιστα, most pleas- 
antly, from ἡδύς, pleasant. (§ 58.) 


Nore 1. Some adverbs of the comparative. degree end in ws. Ἐν 5. χαλε- 
Tis; χαλεπωτέρως, from χαλεσός. 
Superlatives in ὡς are rare. 


Nore 2. Some comparative and superlative adverbs end in w, particularly 
when the positive ends in w LE. g. ἄνω, up, ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω. 


Nore 8. The following adverbs are anomalous in their comparison: 


ἄγχι or ἀγχοῦ, near, ὦσσον, ἄγχιστα. (Compare ὃ 58. N. 1.) 

ἑκάς, afar, ἑκαστέρω, ἑκαστάτω. (ὃ 125. Ν. 2.) 

ἔνδον, within, ἐνδοτέρω, ἐνδοτάτω. ibid.) 

μάλα, very, μᾶλλον, More, rather, μάλεσσα, very much, especially. 

νύκσωρ, nightly, by night ; yuxriairegoy, farther back in the night, that is, ear- 
lier in the morning, νυκπσιαίτατα, very early in the morning. 

πέρα, farther, beyond, περαιπσέρω or περαΐτερον, περαιτάτω. ibid.) 

προύργου, to the purpose, σπρουργιοωίφερον; more to the purpose, προυργιαίτατα, 
very much to the purpose. 


Pre 
δι ν Κ΄ 


172 | INFLECTION OF worDs. [$$ 126, 127. 


DERIVATION OF WORDS. 


§ 126. All words, which cannot be proved to be deriva- 
tive, must be considered as primitive. | 


DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 


§ 127. Substantives derived FROM OTHER SUB- 
STANTIVES end in 


ἰδης, ἄδης, eadyg, ἔων, ic, ἄς, tym, ιώγνη, patronymics : 
Lov, ἔδιον, ἄριον, ὕλλιον, ὕδριον, ύφιον, ἰσκος, ὕλλος OF ύλος, ἰσκή, 
ic, diminutives: 


Los, Lins, ἄτης, ἥτης, ιἄτης, ιώτης, ἄνός, ηνός, νος, EUG, α, ἰς, ας» 
ὧν, ὠνιά, της, τις, σσα, toda, appellatives, 


1. Parronymics, that is, names of persons derived from —— 


their parents or ancestors, end in δης, adyg, ιαδης, gen. ov, and 
wav gen. wyvoc, masculine: ἐς gen. wos, ἃς gen. adoc, and wy, 
ιὥνη, feminine. : : 

(1) Patronymics from nouns in ἧς or ας; of the first declen- — 
sion, end in adyg (fem. ag). ΕἸ. g. Ἱππότης, Ἱπποτάδης son of 
Hippotes ; Βορέας, Βορεάδης son of Boreas. 

(2) Patronymics from nouns in og and ιος, of the second 
declension, end in dye (fem. ἐς) and vady¢ (fem. vag) respec- 
tively. E. g. Κρόνος, Κρονίδης son of Saturn; ᾿Δσκληπιός, 
*Aoxlymiadng son of Alsculapius. : 

In this case, the poets often use_cay (fem. wy, ἑωνη) for ιδης 
E. g. Κρονίων for Κρονίδης * “Adenotos, ᾿Αδρηστίνη daughter of 
Adrastus. : 

(3) Patronymics from nouns of the third declension are 
formed by dropping og of the genitive of the primitive, and 
annexing ἰδης (fem. ic) or cadyg. EK. g. Πέλοψ, πος, Πελοπίδης 
son of Pelops ; Φέρης, ητος, Φερητιάϑδης son of Pheres ; "Athas, 
uvtocg, Athaytic daughter of Atlas. 

The poets sometimes use ἐὼν for wdc. Εἰ. g. Πηλεύς, ἕος, 
IInieiwy son of Peleus. 


Nore 1. The epic poets often form patronymics from nouns in tvs, by drop- 
ping os of the Ionic genitive (§ 44. N. 2), and annexing ιαδης, ss. E. g. 11η- 
λεύς, Hos, Πηληϊάδης son of Peleus ; Βρισεύς, nos, Βρισηΐς daughter of Briseus. 

Feminine patronymics in ais are sometimes contracted in the oblique cases. 


E. g. Νηρεύς, Hos, Nuenis daughter of Nereus, Nereid, gen. plur. Nugqdwy. 


2. A ΡΙΜΙΝΟΤΙΥΕ signifies a small thing of the kind denoted 
by the primitive. οἵ 


§ 125] — DERIVATION OF WORDS. 173 


Diminutives end in voy, dior, aguoy, ὕλλιον, υδριον, ugror, 
neuter : .oxoc, υλλος Or vaoc, Masculine: ἐσχή; ἰς gen. wos, fem- 
inine. E. g. ἄνθρωπος, man, ἀνϑρώπιον, a little fellow; στέφα- 
voc, crown, στεφανίσκος, α little crown; μεῖραξ, xos, girl, μειρα-- 
κίσκη, α little girl. 

Nore. 2. The first syllable of .d:0v is contracted with the preceding vowel. 


E. g. βοῦς, βοός, ox, βοίδιον, a little om; λέξις, ews, word, λεξείδιον, a little word. 
In this case, the ending εἰδιον often becomes τδιον. 


* 


Nore 3. Many diminutives in jy have lost their diminutive signification. 
E. g. πέδον, πεδίον, plain. 


3. National APPELLATIVES end in 10g, erns, ατῆς, TNS, ιατῆς; 
TNS, ανος, ἡγος, Log, gen. ov, and eve gen. soc, masculine: «, 
ἐς gen. doc, and ας gen. adoc, feminine. Εἰ. g. Κόρινθος, Cor- 
inth, Κορίνϑιος, a Corinthian; Στάγειρα, Stagira, Σταχγειρίτης, 
a Stagirite; Tsyéa, Tegea, Τεγεάτης, a Tegean. 

Nore 4. When the nominative singular of the noun denoting the place ends 


(or would end) in « or m, the ending μος is generally contracted with the preced- 
ing vowel. E. g- ᾿Αϑῆναι, ᾿Αϑηναῖος. 


4, Nouns denoting a place, where there are many things of 
the same kind, end in wy or we. Εἰ, g. δάφνη, laurel, δαφνών, 
laurel-grove ; ῥὅδον, rose, δοδωνιά, rose-garden. 


5. Many masculine appellatives end in τῆς gen. ov. Εἰ. g. 
πόλις, city, πολίτης, citizen; ἵππος, horse, ἱππότης, horseman, 
Those in ity¢ have the x in the penult long. | 

Feminine appellatives of this class end in τις, Εἰ. g. πολῖτις, 
female citizen. . : 


6. Some masculine appellatives end in svg. E. g. ἵππος, 
horse, ἱππεύς, horseman. 


7. Some feminine appellatives end in oo or wooo. E. g. 
Θρᾷξ, a Thracian, Θρᾷσσα, a Thracian woman ; βασιλεύς, king, 
βασίλισσα, queen. 


_ § 128. Substantives derived FROM ADJECTIVES end 
M ia, τῆς Zen. ητος, σύνη, o¢ gen. soc, α gen. ας, and 7. Such 
substantives denote the anstTract of their primitives. E, g, 


κακία, VICE from κακός, wicked 
ὀξύτης, sharpness * ῥξύς, sharp 
δικαιοσύνη, justice ‘* δίκαιος, just 
βάϑος, depth eee βαϑύς, deep. . 


Norz 1. If the ending μα be preceded by ε or δ, a contraction takes place. 
E. g. ἀλήϑεια, truth, from ἀληϑής,» tos, true; ἄνοια, folly, from ἄνοος, foolish. 


15* 


ae, « all 


on " 


a; 
we 


174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 129. 


The ending s often becomes fa. E. g. ἀμαϑία for ἀμάϑεια, ignorance, 
from &a97s, ignorant. : 


Note 2. Those in rns are always ϑϑκέμον. They are generally paroxy- 


tone. (§ 19. 2.) 
Nore 3. If the penult of the primitive be short, the ending οσύνη becomes 
ὠσύνη. ἘΣ, g. ἱερωσύνη; priesthood, from ἱερός, sacred. 


Nore 4. Those in o¢ ate always derived from adjectives in v¢ (§ 51), by 
changing vs into os. 


Nore 5. Abstract nouns in « or ; from adjectives in os, are always paroxy- 
tone (ὃ 19. 2). Εἰ g. ἔχϑρα, enmity, from tx Seis, enemy. 


§ 129. Substantives derived FROM VERBS end in 
α, ἢ, ος, τηρ, Τῆς, TH, EUs, ης, ας, σις, σία, μός, μα, μη. 
1. Verbal nouns in α, ἡ, and ος gen. ov or soc, denote the 
ABSTRACT Of the primitive. ἘΣ. g. 
χαρά, JOY from χαίρω, rgoice, (ᾧ 96. 18) 
μάχη, battle “ μάχομαι, fight 
ἔλεγχος, confutation “* ἐλέγχω, confute 
πρᾶγος, thing ““ πράσσω, do, (ᾧ 96. 3.) 


Note 1. When the radical vowel is either ¢, «, or o, (§ 96. 
19,) verbal nouns of this class (ὃ 129. 1) have o in the penult. 
E. g. λόγος, word, from λέγω, say. 


Nore 2. Feminines in t/a come from verbs in tum E. g. βασιλεία, sove- 


reignty, from βασιλεύω, reign. 


2. Verbal nouns denoting the sussecrr of the verb (ὃ 156) 
end in THO (fem. τειρα, τρια, τρίς Fen. idoc), τῆς, TWO, εὕς, ης 
(fem. ἐς gen. idoc), ag, and og gen. ov, ‘The penult-of those in 
TNO, τῆς, ne is gepenly like that of the perfect passive 
(Ὁ 107). E 

in one who draws fom: Prfn, draw 
ποιητής, maker — « ποιέω, make 
ῥήτωρ, speaker - “PEL, speak 
γραφεύς, writer * - γράφω, write. 


Nore 8. Those in ης, ας, gen. ov, annex these endings. to 
the last consonant of the verb. They are chiefly found in 
composition. E. g. γεωμέτρης, Seometer, from γέα, earth, and 
μετρέω, Measure ; φυγαδοϑήρας, hunter of fugitives, from φυγάς, 
Sugitive, and ϑηράω, hunt. 


Nore 4. Those in og are generally found in composition. 
E. 5: μητροφόνος, @. matricide, from μήτηρ and ®ENSL 


δῷ 180, 131.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 175 


3. Nouns denoting the action of the verb end in σις, ova, 


pos. Their penult is generally like that of the perfect passive 
(δ 107). Eg 
ὅρασις, Vision from o ὁράω, 866 
εἰκασία, conjecture “5 εἰκάζω, LT conjecture 
διωγμός, pursuit ““ διώκω, pursue, (ἢ 9. 1.) 


__ 4, Nouns denoting the ΒΡΡΕΟΥ of the verb end in μα. Their 
penult is generally like that of the perfect passive (ᾧ 107). 
me i. g. 
μόμμα that which is cut off, piece, from κόπτω, cut, (δὴ 96. 
So: 6. 1) | 


5. Verbal nouns in μη sometimes denote the action and 
' sometimes the effect of the verb. ὦ. σ΄. ἐπιστήμη, knowledge, 


from ἐπίσταμαι, understand; γραμμή, line drawn, from γράφω, 
write, (ἢ 8. 1.) 


DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 


ὃ 130. Adjectives derived FROM OTHER ADJEC- 
TIVES end in ιος, σίος, κος, ἄκος. E. δ. ἐλεύϑερος, free, ἐλευ-- 
B'S, liberal; ἑκών, ὄντος, willing, ἑκούσιος, voluntary, (δ 12, 

53) ϑῆλυς, female, ϑηλυκός, feminine. 


Ths AB. Adjectives derived FROM SUBSTANTIVES 
end in 
Los, αἰος, L0G, οἵὸς, Mog’ 10g " £06, 81906, LVOS* EQOS, QOS, 
wléos, nhoc, whog* yuog* ἥξεις, ἰεις, ὅεις " ὥδης. 
1. The endings tog, αἰος, sos, οιος, MOS, ὑποῦ, denote be- 
longing to or relating to. E. g. αἰϑήρ, ἐρος, ether, αἰϑέριος, 


ethereal; Θῆβαι, Thebes, Θηβαῖος, Theban ; PER poet, 


ποιητικός, poetic, 


_ 2. The endings ¢o¢, e:vog, wvog, Generally denote the material 
_ of which any thing is made. KE. g. χρυσός, gold, χρύσεος, 


᾿ς golden; δρῦς, oak, δρύϊνος, oaken. 


3. The endings €90¢, 7906, αλεος, nhoc, whos, denote quality. 
E. σ, τρυφή, luxury, τρυφερός, luxurious ; ; ϑάῤῥος, courage, 
ϑαρῤδαλέος, courageous. 


| 4. The ending ἐμὸς cy denotes fitness. E. g. ἐδωδή, 
food, ἐδώδιμος, eatable. 


5. The endings neve, reg, os1¢, generally denote fulness. E. g. 
τιμή, value, τιμήεις, valuable ; χάρις, grace, χαρέεις, graceful. 


ΦΧ ΠῚ νυν Δ΄ 


ι 
“a 
| 
-““ 


176 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 182-184, — 


6. The ending ὡδὴς denotes resemblance. E. g. πῦρ, fire, 
πυρώδης, like fire. 2 ik 

§4132. Adjectives derived FROM VERBS end in τός, 
τέος, hoc, OS, NS, 0S, MOY. 

1. Verbal adjectives in tog are equivalent to the perfect 
passive participle. E. g. ποιέω, make, ποιητός, made. 

_ Frequently they imply capableness. E. g. ϑεάομαι, see, ϑεα- 
τός, visible, capable of being seen. | 


Nore 1. Sometimes verbal adjectives in σὸς have an active signification. 
E. δ. καλύα τω, COVEr, καλυπτός, covering. 

2. Verbal adjectives in τεὸς imply necessity, obligation, or 
propriety. E. g. ποιέω, make, ποιητέος, tobe made, that must 
be made. 

Nore 2. The penult of adjectives in ros and reos is generally like that of the 
perfect passive (§ 107). 

3. A few verbal adjectives end in jog, voc. E. g. ZEIN, 
fear, δειλός, timid, δεινός, terrible. 


4. Many adjectives are formed from verbs by annexing ἧς 


gen. soc, og gen. ov, to the root. Such adjectives are generally 
found in composition. E. g. ἀμαϑής, ignorant, from ἀ-- and 
μανϑάνω, (δῷ 96. 7: 135. 4;) πολυλόγος, talkative, from πολύς 
and λέγω, (S$ 135. 1: 96. 19.) ᾿ ; ; 


5. Verbal adjectives in wor are active in their signification. 
E. g. ἐπιστήμων, knowing, from ἐπίστῶμαι, know. 


-§ 133. A few adjectives in wog are derived FROM AD- ἡ 


VERBS. E. g. χϑές, yesterday, χϑεσινός, yesterday’s, of 
yesterday. | 


DERIVATION OF VERBS. 


§ 134. Derivative verbs end i in aw, ἕω, dof, svw, ἄζω, ἰζω, 
αἰνω, ύνω, σείω, LOO. 


1. In verbs derived from nouns of the first and second de- 
clension, the verbal ending takes the place of the ending of the 
nominative (δῷ 31.1: 33.1). E. δ. 


τιμή, honor τιμάω; 1 honor 
κοινωνὸς, partaker HOWOVED , partake 
μισϑός, wages 3 μισϑόω, let, hire 


δίκη, justice ο δικάζω, judge. 


§ 135.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 177 


In verbs derived from nouns of the third declension, the 
ending takes the place of the termination og of the genitive 
(ὃ 35. 1). But when the nominative singular ends in a vowel, 
or in ¢ preceded by a vowel (ὃ 36. 1), the verbal ending 
generally takes the place of the ending of the nominative. Εἰ. g. 

οἴαξ, xoc, rudder ᾿ οἰακέζω, steer 
ϑαῦμα, wonder ϑαυμάζω, admire 


Nore 1. Verbs in a:w, ὑνω, generally come from adjectives in os, us gen. 
tos, respectively. Ἐπ g. μωρός, foolish, μωραίνω, act in a foolish manner ; 
βαϑύς, deep, βαϑύνω, deepen. 


_ Nore 2. Verbs in cew express a desire, and are formed by 
annexing this ending to the root of the primitive verb. E. g. 
δράω, do, δρασείω, desire to do. 
Also some verbs in vw or aw express a desire. Such verbs 
__ are derived from substantives. E. g. στρατηγός, general, στρα- 
_ tyyvaw, desire to become a general. . 


2. Some verbs are formed from nouns by changing the end- 
ing of the nominative into ὦ, and modifying the penult accord- 
ing to§ 96. E. g. χαλεπός, injurious, χαλέπτω, injure, (§ 96. 
2;) μαλακός, soft, μαλάσσω, soften, (ἢ 96. 3;) ἄγγελος, mese 
senger, ἀγγέλλω, announce, (ὃ 96. 6;) καϑαρός, clean, καϑαίρω, 
I clean, (§ 96. 18.) : 


COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 


§ £35. 1. When the first component part of a word is a 
noun of the first or second declension, its ending is dropped, 
and an ο is substituted. E. g. 

μουσοποιός, singer from μοῦσα, ποιέω 

ἱεροπρεπής, holy “ς ἱερός, πρέπω. 
But when it is a noun of the third declension, the termina- 
_ tion ος of the genitive is dropped, and an o is substituted. E. g. 


παιδοτρίβης, tnstructor, from παῖς, παιδός, τρίβω. 


Nore 1. The o is generally omitted when the root of the 
first component part ends in αὖ, 1, ov, v. (§ 36.1, R.1.) E, g. 
᾿ nohinog Sos, city-destroying, from πόλις, πέρϑω. 


Nore 2. The o is often omitted when the last component 
part begins witha vowel. E. g. vewrntos, newly bought, from 
γέος, WYNTOS. 


178 INFLECTION OF WORDS.  [§ 185. ᾿ 


Nore 8. The o is sometimes omitted when the root of the first component - . 
part ends i in y. (ibid.) E. g 8. μελάγκαρπος, ἌΜΜΟΝ black fruit, from μέλας, ᾿ ie 
saves, καρπός. (§ 12, 9.) ὯΝ 

Nore 4. When the first component part is γία, earth, the o is changed into : | 
ὦ. E. g. γεωγράφος, geographer, from yia, γράφω. a 


2. When the first component part is a verb, the connect [ 


letter ise ors. Sometimes » becomes σι. E. 8: 


μενέμαχος, brave | from μένω, μάχη 
ἀρχικέραυνος, ‘thunder-ruling ἄρχω, κεραυνός. 
δεξίδωρος, receiving presents “« δέχομαι, δῶρον, (ὃ 9. 9). 


ΝΌΤΕ 5. Sometimes o drops ‘4 before a vowel. E, ge ῥίψασσις (for ian & 
gris, that is, fewoahoniewre)s coward, from pirrw, ἀσαίς. (§§ 96.2: 8. 2.) 4 


3. The primitive PREPOSITIONS are the only ones with which — 
other words are compounded. (§ 226. 1.) 9 


_ ‘These prepositions generally lose the final vowel, when the ; 
word, with which they are compounded, ΗΝ with a vowel ; 
except περὲ and πρό. E. g. 


av-cyo, lead up from ἀνά, ἄγω 
ἐπ-αινέω, praise — “6. ἐπί, αἰνέω 
περι-ἔχω, contain $f περί, ἔχω 
προ-ἔχω, excel ‘* πρό, ἔχω. 


'N ore 6, In πρό, the o is often contracted with the following — ἡ 
vowel. E. g. προύχω for προέχω. 3 


Nore 7. ᾿Αμφί often retains the s before ἃ vowel. E. g. ἀμφιξννυμοι from : 
ἀμφί, ἵννυμι. ’ 
Note 8. The Epic language often drops the final vowel of a 
preposition even before a consonant. LE. g. ἀπενέμεῳ for ἃ ἅπο- 
πέμπω. 


4, The negative prefix ἀ- (called alpha privative) corre- 4 
sponds to the English prefix un-, or to the suffix -less. Before 
a vowel it Mtg | becomes a-. KE. 8: ; 

ἄ-σοφος, unwise from. ἃ a; σοφός 
&-yonotos, useless . “ a-, ξουαιὸς 
ἀν “ειος, unworthy ““ ἀ-, ἄξιος. 


PARTIII. 
SYNTAX. 


SUBSTANTIVE. 
ὃ 186. 1. A’ substantive annexed to another 


substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of explana- 
tion or emphasis, is put in the same case. Εἰ g. 


Ξέρξης βασιλεύ Ἢ King Xerzes. Here βασιλεύς is an- 
nexed to ξέρξη 
Ἐμὲ τὸν Ων οὶ Με Tereus. 


A substantive thus annexed to another substantive 1 is said to 
be in APPOSITION with it. 


Nort 1. Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the sake of emphasis. 


E, g. AwoSin ϑυγάτηρ "ArArao yigovros* "AArew, ὃς Λελέγεσσι φιλοσσο- 
λέμοισιν ἀνάσσει, Laothdé the daughter of old Altes ; of Altes who rules over the 
_ warlike Leléges. . 


Nore 2. The repeated noun (ὃ 136. N.1) is, in some instances, put in the 


: nominative. KE. g. *Avdeomdan, Suyarne μεγαλήτορος "Heriwvos* Ἢ:ε- 
 φίων, ὃς ἔναιεν ὑπὸ ΤΙλάκῳ ὑληΐέσσῃ, Andromache the daughter of magnanimous 
 Eélion; Eétion, who dwelt at the foot of woody Placus. 


Nore 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of an adjective. E. g. 


 Σάνη «όλις Ἑλλάς, Sané, a Grecian city, where the substantive “Eaads, 


Greece, stands for the adjective ‘Eaanvxn, Grecian. 


Remark. Personal or national appellatives are often accompanied by the 


_ word ἀνήρ, man. E. g. Βασιλεὺς ἀνήρ, a man who is a king, simply a king. 
—"Avdees ᾿Αϑηναῖοι, men of Athens, simply Athenians. 


Nore 4. An abstract noun is often used for the cofresponding concrete. 
E. g. ᾿Ωκεανὸν, ϑεῶν γένεσιν, Oceanus, the parent of the gods, where the 


abstract γένεσιν, production, stands for the concrete yevirny, producer. 


Nore 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive (ὃ 173), 


| sometimes stands in _ 2pposition with the limited noun, E. g. Δέκα μναῖ 
| εἰσφορά, for Δέκα μνῶν εἰσφορά, a contribution of ten mine. 


2. A substantive in apposition with two or more substantives_ 


| is put in the plural. E. g. 


Apiotens, ᾿Αρταφρένης, καὶ Μεγαβάζης, ταγοὶ Περ- 
σῶν, Amistres, Artaphernes, and Megabazes, leaders of 
the Persians, 


« 


ye eee =—_* = 
- ͵ 


ae 
isp 


180 SYNTAX. [δ 187. 


ADJECTIVE. 


§ 137. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. E. 
ἀνὴρ σοφός, A wise man. ᾿Ανδρὸς σοφοῦ, Of a wise 
man, 
ἄνδρες copol, Wise men. “‘Avdgar σοφῶν, Of wise 
men. 
This rule applies also to the article, to the possessive, inter- 
rogative, and demonstrative pronouns, and to the participle. 


Nore 1. A- feminine substantive in the dual often takes a 
masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle. E. g. 


Tovtw τὼ τέχνα, for Ταύτα τὰ τέχνα, These two arts. 
Nore 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle has reference to 
the gender implied in the substantive. E. g. Yuxn OnCaiov Τειρεσίαο, 


χρύσεον σκῆπαρον Ex wy, the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holding a golden 
sceptre, where the masculine ἔχων is used on account of Τειρεσίαο. 


Nore 3. In some instances the gender and number of the adjective or par- 


ticiple are determined by the noun governed by its substantive. E. g. Tey. — 


γῶν ἀγέλαι ὑσοδείσανεες, flocks of birds fearing, where the masculine 
ὑποδείσαντες refers to rrnvwy, although it agrees in case with ἀγέλαι. 


2. If an adjective, pronoun, or participle refers to two or 


more substantives, it is put in the plural. If the substantives — 


denote animate beings, the adjective, pronoun, or participle, is 
masculine, when one of the substantives is masculine. If 
they denote inanimate beings, the adjective, ὅσο, is generally 
neuter. Εἰ. g. 


Βοῦν καὶ ἵππον καὶ sina hor ὅλους OntOVs, An Or, a 


horse, and.a camel, roasted whole. 
Aitor te χαὶ. πλίνϑοι καὶ ξύλα ἀτάκτως ἐῤῥιμμένα, 


Stones, clay, wood, and brick, thrown together without 


order. 


Norte 4. The adjective often agrees with one of the substan- 
tives. E. g. "Al ozxot καὶ νήπια τέκνα ποτιδέγμεναι, wives 
and infants expecting. 


Note 5. The adjective or participle is often put in the dual, 


<n At refers to two substantives. KE. g. Καλλίας καὶ ᾿4λκι- 


Bradys ἡκέτην ἄγοντε τὸν Πρόδικον, both Callias and Al- 
cibiades came bringing Prodicus. 


3 
a 
t 
& 
᾽ 
δ᾽ 
' 
ζ. 
[. 
ἡ 


ee SS »  Ψ. ΌΆΨΗΝ 


δῷ 138, 139.] ARTICLE. 181 


3. A collective substantive inthe singular often takes an 
adjective or participle in the plural. E. g. 
Τροίην ἑλόντες ᾿Αργείων στόλος, The army of the Greeks 
having taken Troy. Here the plural participle ἑλόντες 
agrees with the singular substantive στόλος. . 


Nore 6. A noun or a personal pronoun in the dual often 
takes a participle in the plural. E. g. No καταβάντες, we 


both going down. | 


λυ ον ον 
“- » a 


FARES FROG ie HS TRIE 


που τ σ᾿ 


lam 


: 
ἣ ᾿ 
5 


On the other hand, a noun in the plural sometimes takes 
a participle in the dual, in which case only two things are 
meant. E. g. Αἱγυπιοὶ κλάζξοντε, two vultures uttering 
loud shrieks. 


Note 7. In Homer, the dual nouns ὄσσε and δοῦρε are accompanied by plural 
adjectives. E. gs "Ooce Qatsvd, two bright eyes. "AdAxima δοῦρε, two 
Stout spears. 


Nore 8. The duals δύο and ἄμφω are frequently joined to plural substantives. 
E. g. Ado ψυχάς, for Δύο ψυχά, two souls. 


§ 138. 1. An adjective is often used substantively, the 
substantive, with which it agrees, being understood. E. g. 
Φίλος 80. ἀνήρ, A friend. 
Οἱ ϑνητοί, sc. ἄνϑρωποι, Mortals. 


2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle is often 
equivalent to the abstract (ὃ 128) of that adjective or participle. 


In this case the article precedes the adjective or participle. 


E. g. To καλόν, the beautiful, beauty. To μέλλον, the future. 


Nore 1. Masculine or feminine adjectives often supply the 
place of adverbs. Εἰ. g. Ζεὺς χϑιζὸς ἔβη, Jupiter went yester- 
day, where the adjective γϑιζός, hesternus, is equivalent to the 
adverb γϑές, yesterday. : 

So all adjectives in αἷος answering to the question ποσταῖος, 
on what day? (§ 62.3.) E.g. Τριταῖος ἀφίκετο, he came 
on the third day. 

Nore 2. It has already been remarked, that the neuter of an adjective is often. 
used adverbially. (ὃ 124. 1.) 


ARTICLE. 


§ 139. 1. In its leading signification the Greek article 
corresponds to the English article the. E. g. 


Ὃ ἀνήρ, The man. OF ἄνδρες, The men. 

Ἢ γυνή, The woman. Ai γυναῖκες, The women. 

To δένδρον, Thetree. Ta δένδρα, The trees. 
16 


182 SYNTAX. ἰὼ [ὁ 149. 


2. A Greek noun without the article is equivalent to the 
corresponding English noun with the article a or an. E, g. 
ἀνήρ, α man; γυγή, a woman; δένδρον, a tree. 


3. Proper names very often take the article. But the article 
is-generally omitted when the proper name is accompanied by 
a substantive with the article, (ὃ 136.) E. g. 

Ὃ Ὄλ ὑμπος, Olympus. 

Πιττακὸς 6 Μυτιληναῖος, Ῥ' ittdicus the Mytilenian. 


Nore 1. The article accompanies the leading character of a well-known story . 


or anecdote. Ἐπ, Ta Σεριφίῳ FCS ὅσι [Θεμισφοκλῆς]) οὐ δι’ αὑτὸν, 
ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν πόλιν εὐδοκιμοῖ, toa Seriphian saying, that he [Themistocles] had 
become famous not through himself, but through the city, where the article σῷ is 
used, because the remark ‘of the Seriphian and the reply of Themistocles were 
well known in Athens. 


Ἂ, 


Note 2. The article sometimes accompanies the second accusative after γε 
signifying to call (§ 166). E. ge ᾿Επιχειροῦσι βάλλειν σὸν Δέξιππον, & να x ἀ- 
λοῦντες «ὃν reoddeny, they attempted to strike Dexippus, exclaiming, 
“ The traitor !”’ not calling him a traitor, 


§ 49. 1. The article is very often separated from its 
substantive by an adjective, possessive pronoun, participle, or 
by a genitive depending on the substantive (ὃ 173). E. g. 


Ὃ καλλ ἐδπ ὴ ς ‘Ayadwv, The elegant Agdthon. 
Tov ἐμὸν ἵππον, My horse. 
Ὃ Θεσσαλῶν βασιλεύς, The king of the Thessalians. 


The article is also separated by other words connected with 


the substantive, in which case a participle (commonly γενόμε- 


γος ΟΥ̓ wy) may be supplied. E.g. Τοῦ κατ᾽ ἄστρα Ζηνός, 
of Jupiter, who dwells among the stars. 


Remarx 1. Two or even three articles may stand together. E. g- Τὸ «ἢ 


πόλει συμφέρον, that which is profitable to the city. Τὰ ras «ὧν πολλῶν 


ψυχῆς ὄμματα, the eyes of the souls of the majority of mankind. 


Nore 1. In Ionic writers, the article is often separated from its substantive 
by the word upon which the substantive depends (δ 173). E. g. Te τις 
στρατιωὼων ἔων, for Tay στρατιωτέων ΩΣ one of the soldiers. ~ 


Remark 2. Sometimes the article is separated from the word, to which’ it 
belongs, by an incidental proposition. Εἰ. g. ᾿Αποπαύσας « οὔ, ὁπότε βούλοιντο 
ἕκαστοι, γυναῖκα ἄγεσϑ α.»ν for ᾿Αποπαύσας rod γυναῖκα ἄγεσθαι, ὁπότε βού- 
λοιντοὸ ἕκαστοι, having stopped them from marrying whenever they wished. 


2. The words connected with the substantive are often 
placed after it, in which case the article is repeated. The 
first article however i is often omitted. E. g. 


Khe γένης ὃ μεκρ ὄς, Little Cligénes. 
Τὰς ὥρας τὰς ἑτέρας, The other seasons. 


a "ΗΝ 


; 4801 ω ARTICLE. 183 


c 


: 


—_ δ ὉὅἌΨῈΝ 


Ὕ ῆς ΨΚ αν σιν" 


ἕο. i Md 


This arrangement is more emphatic than that exhibited 
above (ἢ 140. Ey , 


Nore 2. In some instances this order is inverted. E.g. Τ᾽ ὧλλα φςἀγαϑά 
for TayaSe τἄλλα, the other good things. 


3. The participle preceded by the article is equivalent 
10 ἐκεῖνος ὃς, he who, and the finite verb. Ἰὼ g, Τοὺς 
πολεμήσαντας τοῖς βαρβάροις, those who fought against the 
barbarians, where τοὺς πολεμήσαντας is equivalent to ἐκείνους οἵ 
ἐπολέμησαν. But πολεμήσαντας τοῖς βαρβάροις Would mean hav- 
ing fought against the barbarians. 


Nore 9. Hence, a participle preceded by the article is 
often equivalent to a substantive. E. g. Οἱ φιλοσοφοῦντες, equiv- 
alent to Οἱ φιλόσοφοι, the philosophers, 


Norte 4. When the adjective stands before or after the sub- 
stantive and its article, the substantive with the article involves 
_ the relative pronoun ὃς. EK. g. Ou βάναυσον τὴν τέχνην ἔκτη- 
oan, equivalent to ‘H τέχνη, ἣν ἐχτησάμην, οὐ βάναυσός ἐστιν, 
the art which I possess is not low. 


4, When a noun, which has just preceded, would naturally 


_ be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone expressed. E. g. 


Τὰν βίον τῶν ἰδιωτευόντων, ἢ τὸν τῶν τυραγνευόντων, The 
life of private persons, or that of those who are rulers. 


Nore 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the 
article. ‘The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly the 
plowing; 


γῆ, land, country, as Εἰς τ ὴ y ἑαυτῶν; To their own country. 
γνώμη, opinion, as Κατά γε τὴν ἐμὴν, In my opinion at least. 
ὁδός, way, as Τὴν ταχίστην, The quickest way. 

πρᾶγμα, thing, as Ta τῆς πόλεως, The affairs of the state. 
υἱός, son, ἃ5 Ὃ Κλεινίου, The son of Clinias. 


5. The demonstrative pronoun, and the adjective πᾶς or 
ἅπας, are placed either before the substantive and its article, 
or after the substantive. E. δ: 


Οὗτος ὃ ὄρνις, or Ὃ ὄῤνις οὗτος, This bird. 
Τὸ βάρος τοῦτο, or Τοῦτο τὸ Bagos, This burden, | 
Ἅπαντας τοὺς ἀριϑμούς, ΟΓ Τοὺς ἀριϑμοὺς ἅπανγ- 
tac, All the numbers. — 
The article, however, in this case is often omitted. E. g. 
Οὗτος ἀνήρ, thisman. Πάντες ἄνθρωποι, all men, 


- 


184 serine: - [$$ 141, 142. 


Nore 6. Πᾶς in the singular without the article oe means every, each. 
E. g. Πᾶς ἀνήρ, every man. ee 

Note 7. Ὅλος and txaeros often imitate σᾶς. Ἕ. 85. Τοῦ σκάφους 
ὅλου, of the whole ship, Τὸν ὁαλίτην txacroy, every heavy-armed sol- 
dier. ‘Exdorns τῆς οἰκίας, of every house. 


Norte 8. Τοιοῦσος is sometimes preceded by the article.: E. g. Ἔν vais 
τοιαύταις ἐπιμελείας, in such pursuits. 


Nore 9. The article is sometimes placed. before the interrogative pronoun 
vis and the pronominal adjective ποῖος. E. g. Τὸ vi; what isit? Τὰ «οἵα 
σαῦτα; such as what? 


Nore 10. The indefinite pronoun δεῖνα is preceded by the article. E. g. 
‘O δεῖνα, such-a-one. 


§ L449. 1. An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent 
to an adjective. FE. g. Οἵ τότε ἄνθρωποι, the men of that 
time, the men who lived in those days. 


2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- 
tive expressed, has the force of a substantive. E. g g. “I αὖ- 
ριον, SC. ἡμέρα, the morrow. 


Note 1. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly ‘affect the adverb before 
which it is placed. E. g. Τὸ σάλαι or σοαάλαι, in olden time, anciently. 
Τὰ νῦν or τανῦν, now, at the present time. To airixa, immediately. 


3. The neuter singular of the article often stands before an — 


entire proposition, E. g. Τὸ ὁμοίως ἀμφοῖν ἀκροᾶσϑαι, to hear 
both impartially, 


4, The neuter singular of the article is often placed before 
single words which are explained or quoted. E, g. To ὑμεῖς 
ὅταν εἴπω, τὴν πόλιν λέγω, when I say YOU, 1 mean the state. 
To εἶναι χρῆσϑαι, καὶ τῷ χωρίς, to use the words εἶναι, 
and χωρίς. 


Nore 2. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive which refers . 


to the quotation. E. g. Καλὴν ἔφη παραίνεσιν εἶναι ny καδδύναμιν 
ἔρδειν, he said, “Τὸ sacrifice to the gods according to thy power,” is very 
good advice, where the gender of the article before the expression xadddvapuy 
ἔρδειν is determined by the substantive παραίνεσιν. 


Nore 3. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an independent 
object takes the gender of the name of the part of speech, to which it belongs. 
E. g. ‘H ἐγώ SC. ἀντωνυμία, the pronoun ἐγώ, I. Ἢ ὑπό sc. weottors, the 
preposition ὑπό, under. ‘O γάρ sc. σύνδεσμος, the conjunction γάρ, for. 


§ 142. 1. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the 
article is very often equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, 
or to αὐτός in the oblique cases, E. g. 


|| 
} 
| 
Ἢ 
; 
f 


ET ea a 


§ 143.] PRONOUN. | 185 


Τὸν ὄνειρον, equivalent to Τοῦτον τὸν ὄνειρον, This dream. 
Τῆς δὲ σχεδὸν HAP Ῥνοσίχϑων, And the Shaker "of the earth 
came near her. Here τῆς is equivalent to αὐτῆς. 


The Attic dialect also often uses the article in this sense, 


eiarly | in the formula ὃ μὲν. - ὃ δέ, ἢ the one .... the other, 


one.... another. E. g. 


Ὅταν ὃ μὲν τείνῃ βιαίως, ὃ δ᾽ ἐπαναστρέφειν δύνηται, When 
the one pulls violently one way, and the other is able to 
pull back. 

Tots μὲν προσέχοντας τὸν γοῦν, τῶν δὲ οὐδὲ τὴν φωνὴν 
ἀγεχομένους, Paying attention to some persons, but not 
tolerating even the voice of others. 


Norte 1. The article is; equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, when it 
stands immediately before the relative ὅς, ὅσος, or οἷος. E. g. Οὐδενὸς rav ὅσα 
αἰσχύνην teal φέροντω, none of those things which bring shame. Muctiv rods 
οἷός so οὗσος, to hate those who are like this man. 


Nore 2. The Proper name to which ὁ μεέν refers is sometimes joined with it. 


_ E. g. Ὁ μὲν οὔτασ᾽ ᾿Ασύμνιον ἐξέ; δουρὶ, “Avriroxos, the one, namely, An- 


τῆς pierced Atymnius with the sharp spear. 


Nore 3. ‘O μὲν and ὁ δέ are not always opposed to each other, but, instead 
of one of them, another word is sometimes put. E. g. Τεωργὸς μὲν tis, ὃ δὲ 
οἰκοδόμος, the one a husbandman, the other a builder of houses. 


Nore 4. The second part (ὁ δὲ) of the formula ὁ piv. .... 6 δέ pate 
refers to a person or thing different from that to which the first part (ὁ μέν) 
refers. 


_ 2. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the article is 
often equivalent to the relative pronoun. EK. g. ἔορνις igos, τῷ 
οὔνομα φοίνιξ, a sacred bird, the name of which is Phenix, 
where τῷ stands for ᾧ. 


Nore 5. The tragedians (A¢schylus, Sophocles, Euripides) sometimes use 
the article in this sense. 


PRONOUN. 
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 


§ 243. The personal pronoun of the third person may refer 
either to a person or thing different from the. subject of the 
proposition, or to the subject of the proposition, in which it 
stands. E.g. (Il. 4, 533-5) Θρηϊκες, of ὃ ὦσαν ἀπὸ σφεΐων, 
the Thracians who drove him away from their position, where 
é refers to the person driven away, and ogesiwy to Θρήϊκες, the 


antecedent of oi. 
16 * 


oa ee εκ i 


Seven, |) Avera 


oe 


186 SYNTAX, [ὃ 144. 


It often tiers to the subject of the preceding proposition, 
if the proposition, in which it stands, is closely connected with 
the preceding. Ἐπ g. ἀῤῥωδέων μή ti οἵ γένηται κακόν, 
fearing lest any evil should befall him, where οἱ refers to the 
substantive with which ἀῤῥωδέων agrees. 


Nore 1. In Homer and Herodotus the pronoun of the third person generally 
refers to a person or thing di ifferent | from the subject of the proposition, in which 
it stands. In the Attic writers, it is generally reflerive, that is, it refers to the 
subject of the proposition, in which it stands, or of the preceding, if the second 
be closely connected with it. ' : 

Nore 2. In some instances the personal pronoun of the third person stands 
for that of the second. Εἰ, g. (Il. 10, 398: Herod. 3, 71.) ΄ 

Nore 3. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same proposition 
for the sake of perspicuity. BE. g. "Evol μὲν, εἰ χαὶ μὴ xad’ Ἑλλήνων 
χϑόνα σεϑράμμεϑ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ξυνετά mos δοκεῖς λέγειν, to us, although we 
have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks, nevertheless thou seemest to 
speak intelligible things. 


Nore 4. The forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοὶ, ἐμέ, are more emphatic than 
the corresponding enclitics μοῦ, μοί, μέ. E. g. Δὸς ἐμοΐ, give 
to ME, but 4ός μοι, give me. . 

After a preposition only ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμὲ are used. Except μέ 
in the formula πρός we, to me. 


§ 144. 1. Αὐτός, in the genitive, dative, and accusative, 
without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, it, them. 
E. g. 

“O γόμος, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐᾷ, The law does not permit him. 

Ἔχει περὶ αὐτοῦ τίνα γνώμην; What does she think of him? 


Norte 1. Αὐτός in the abovementioned cases is sometimes used in this sense, 
when the noun, to which it refers, goes before in the same proposition. This 
happens when the noun is separated from the verb, upon which it depends, by 
intermediate clauses. E. g. ᾿Εγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα, ᾧ πολλὰ οὕτως toch τὰ 


σύμμαχα, εἴπερ προϑυμεῖτα, ἡμᾶς ἀπολίσαι, οὐκ olde ὃ os δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι, 


now, for'my part, I do not see why the king, whose resources are so great, should 
swear to us, if he really meant to destroy us. 


Remark 1. Αὐσός in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the relative 
pronoun for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. Ὧν ὁ μὲν airway, one of whom. 
Examples of this kind often occur in the Septuagint and New Testament. 


2. Autos, joined to a substantive, signifies self, very. In Γ᾿ 
this case, it is placed either before the substantive and its 
article, or after the substantive.. The article, however, is often de 


omitted. ἘΣ. δ. 


π᾿ αὐτὸν τοὐρανοῦ τὸν κύττα yee, Under the were vault 


- of heaven, 


 Κ 146.] PRONOUN. 187 


Nore 2. The personal pronouns ἐγώ, ov, ἡμεῖς, ὑμεῖς, with 
which αὐτός is put in apposition, are very often omitted ; in 
which case αὐτός has the appearance of these pronouns. E. g. 
Αὐτοί ἐνδεεῖς ἐσμὲν τῶν καϑ᾽ ἡμέραν, we are in want of our 
daily bread. Αὐτοὶ -φαίνεσϑε μᾶλλόν τούτοις πιστεύοντες, 
you seem to place more confidence in these men. 


NoreE 3. Αὐτός often signifies μόνος, alone. E. g. Αὐφοὶ γάρ ἰσμεν, κοὔπω 
ξένοι πάρεισιν, for we are by ourselves, and strangers have not yet come. 

Remark 2. Αὐτός is used when a person or thing is to be opposed to any 
thing connected with it. EH. g. Πολλὰς δ᾽ ἰφϑίμους ψυχάς "Ards προΐαψεν 
ἡρώων, αὐτοὺς δὲ ἑλώρια φεῦχε κύνεσσιν, and sent prematurely many brave 
souls of heroes to Hades, and made their bodies the prey of dogs, where αὐφούς» 
them, that is, the heroes, or rather, their bodies, is opposed to ψυχάς. 

Remark 8. Αὐτός denotes the principal person as distinguished from servants 
or disciples. Ἐκ g. (Aristoph. Nub. 218 -- 19) Tis οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ; MAO. 
Αὐτός. ΣΤΡ, Tis αὐτός, MAO. Σωχράτης, Pray who is that man ? 
Disc. Jt is uz. ὅτε. What az? Disc. Socrates, 7 


Nore 4. Αὐσός is often appended to the subject of a proposition containing 
the reflexive pronoun ἑαυτοῦ, for the sake of emphasis. E. g. Π]αλαιστὴν νῦν 
παρασκευάξεται ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸς adem, he is preparing a combatant against himself, 

In such cases αὐσός is placed as near ἑαυτοῦ as possible (§ 232). : 


Nore ὅ. Αὐτός is often used with ordinal numbers, to show 
that one person with others, whose number is less by one than 
the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of. E. g. “Higédy 
πρεσβευτὴς ἐς “Δακεδαίμονα αὐτοκράτωρ, δέκατος αὐτός, he, 
with nine others, was appointed plenipotentiary to Laccdemon, 
where δέκατος αὐτός is equivalent to wet’ ἄλλων ἐγνέα, with nine 
others. 


Nore 6. In some instances, αὐσός is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun. 
E. α. ᾿Ασέσευσ᾽ αὐσήν, I despise that (woman). 


3. Αὐτός, with the article before it, signifies the same. E. g. 

Περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας οὐ ταὐτὰ γιγνώσκχο- 
μεν, We do not have the same opinion concerning the 
same things on the same day. 


REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 

§ 24. The reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of the 
proposition in which it stands, or to the subject of the preced- 
ing, if the second be closely connected with it. E. g. 

Σαυτὴν ἐπιδείκνυ, Show thyself. ᾿ 

Ζητεῖτε συμβούλους τοὺς ἄμεινον “φρογοῦντας ὑμῶν αὖ- 

τῶν, You wish to have those for your advisers, who reason 
better than you. 


ΡΥ» δ ἘΠῚ ΨΥ ΝΜ δ΄. —_— ee 
ὦ ἐν Ἵ ΞῪ 4 
: Ῥ' v 


188 . SYNTAX. [$$ 146-148. 


~ 


Nore 1. Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person stands for that of 
the first or second. E. g. Asi ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι twurods, we must ask ourselves, 
where ἑαυσούς stands for ἡμᾶς αὐτούς. Méigev τὸν αὑτῆς οἶσθα, thou knowest 
thy lot, where αὑτῆς stands for σαυτῆς. : 


Nore 2. Sometimes this pronoun in the third person dual and plural stands 
for the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. KaS’ αὑφοῖν, for Kar’ ἀλλήλοιν, against 
each other. ΦΟϑονοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς, for Φϑονοῦντες ἀλλήλοις, envying one 
another. Y 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 


§ 146. It has already been remarked, that the possessive 
pronouns are, in signification, equivalent to the genitive of the 
personal predculty (δ 67). E. g. 

Οἶκος ὃ σός, equivalent to Ὃ οἶκός σου, Thy house. (δ 173.) 

Παῖς σός, equivalent to Παῖς σου, A son of thine. (ibid.) 


Nore 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively. E. g. Σὸς 
πόϑος, my regret for thee, not thy regret for others. (§ 173. N. 2.). 


Nore 2. In some instances the possessive pronoun of the third person is put 
for that of the first or second. E. g. Φρεσὶν ἧ σιν, for Φρεσὶν ἐμοαῖς, in my soul. 


ΠΟ Nore 3. Sometimes is, his, stands for σφέσερος, their, and σφέφερος for ἱός, 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. ! 


§ 14'7. The interrogative pronoun τίς is used either in 
direct or in indirect questions. E. g. Σὺ tic si; who art 
thou? Oide ri βούλεται, he knows what (it) wants. 

This head includes also the interrogative pronominal adjec- 
tives (δ 73). E. g. Kore ποΐας πύλας εἰσῆλϑες ; through what 
gates did you come in? 


Nore 1. It is to be observed that τίς does not always stand 
at the beginning of the interrogative clause. 


Nore 2. Τίς is sometimes equivalent to ποῖος. Εἰ. g. Τίνα 
αὐτὸν φήσομεν εἶναι; what kind of person shall we call him? 


INDEFINITE PRONOUN. . δ 


§ 148, 1. The indefinite pronoun τὶς annexed to a substan- 
tive means a certain, some, ΟΥ̓ simply, a, an. KE. g.”Ogwdig 
τινες, some birds. “Iuovay τινα, a well-rope. 


2. Without a substantive it means some one, somebody, a 
certain one. E. g. ᾿Αντισϑένην τις καλεσάτω, let some one 
call Antisthenes. 


y 


Ὁ 119] - PRONOUN. | 189 


Nore 1. Tis is sometimes equivalent to ἕκασσος. E. g. Ed rss δόρυ ϑηξά- 
σϑω, let every one sharpen his spear well. 


Nore 2. Sometimes σὺς refers to the person who speaks, and sometimes to 
the person addressed. E. g. ΠΟ rss φύγοι, where can one (that is, 1) go? 
“Hass rw κακόν, misfortune is coming to some body (that is, to thee . 


Nore 3. Tis is often joined to adjectives of quality or quantity. E. g. Γυνὴ 
ὡραιοτάτη Tis, a most blooming woman. ΦΘιλόπολίς vis ἔσϑ᾽ ὃ δαίμων, the 
god is friendly to the city. Ἰ]όσος ris; how great? Ἡμέρας ἑβδομήκοντά 
Tivas, some seventy days, or, about seventy days. 

Nore 4. Tis sometimes means somebody, in the sense of a distinguished 
person, a man of consequence, and ri means something great. E. g. Daivoyai 
ris wuss, I seem to be some body, that is, a man of consequence. “Edokt 
Ts εἰπεῖν, he seemed to say something great. 

Nore 5. Sometimes the poets double cis. E. g. "Ἔστι cis οὐ πρόσω 
Σπάρτης πόλις τις) there is a certain city not far fron’ Sparta. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 


§ 149. 1. Οὗτος and ὅδε regularly denote that which 
is present or near. in place ‘or time, or something just men- 
tioned. KE. δ. Οὗτος δ᾽ ἀνήρ, this man. “Hde ἡ γυνή, this 
woman. αὕτα ἀκούσας, hearing these things. 


Nore-1. Ogres and δὅδὲ are sometimes equivalent to the adverbs tvrai9a, ads, 
here. E. g. Aten δέ σοι γῆς περίοδος πάσης. ‘Ogas; Αἵδε μὲν ᾿Αϑῆναι- 
Here thou hast a map of the whole earth. Seest thou? Here is Athens, 

2. Ἐκεῖνος regularly refers to a remote person or thing. 
E. g. Τουτονὶ γοῦν oid 4, ἐγὼ, κακεινονί, L know this one. 
and that one. , 


Nore 2. °Extivog sian refers to that which immediately 
precedes, in which case it corresponds to the English he. Εἰ, g. 
Ἐκεῖνος εἶχε τὸν τραγῳδικὸν ϑρόνον, he had possession of the 
tragic throne. 

Nore 3. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun refers to a noun which goes 
before in the same proposition, if that noun has been separated from the govern- 
ing word by intervening clauses. E. g. Tov μάντιν, ὃς εἵπετο τῇ στρατιῇ 
ταύτῃ, Meysoriny «ὃν ᾿Ακαρνῆνα, cece. TOUTOY σὸν εἴπαντα ἐκ τῶν ἱρῶν 


7% μέλλοντά σῷ, ἐκβαίνειν, φανερός ἐστι Λεωνίδης ἀποπέμπων, it is evident that 


Leonidas tried to. send away the soothsayer Megistias the Acarnanian, who 
followed this army, .... + I mean the one who prophesied what would sha to 
them. 


Nore 4. The demonstrative pronoun sometimes follows the 
relative in the same proposition. E. δ: “dor ποταμὸν, ὃς κρο- 
χκοδείλους δεύτερος οὗτος ποταμῶν πάντων παρέχεται, the river 
Indus, which is the only river in the world, except one, that 
produces crocodiles. 


οὐδ es Tae 


_ μεγίστην ἔχει δύναμιν, concerning war and peace, which have 
_ very great power. 


190 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 150. 


RELATIVE PRONOUN. 


§ 150. 1. The relative pronoun agrees with the 
noun, to which it refers, in gender and number. 
Its case depends on the construction of the clause 
in which it stands. E. g. 


Νεοκλείέδης, ὃς «ἐστι τυφλός, Ni eoclides, who is blind. 

Mion πολέτην, ὅστις ὠφελεῖν πάτραν βραδὺς πέφυκε, ἴ 
hate that citizen who i ts slow to aid his country. 

Tov δώδεκα μνῶν, ἃς ἔλαβες, Θ᾿ the twelve mine, which 
thou receivedst. 

The word, to which the relative refers, is called the ante- 

cedent. 
This head includes also the relative pronominal adjectives 


(§ 73). E.g. Ἄλλοι ὅσοις μέτεστι tov χρηστοῦ τρόπου, as 


many others as possess a good character. 


Nore 1. In some instances a masculine relative pronoun in 
the dual refers toa feminine noun. E. g. “Ἡμῶν ἐν ἑκάστῳ δύο 
τινέ ἐστον ἰδέα ἄρχοντε καὶ ἄγοντε, οἷν ἑπόμεϑα, MM each one 
of us there are two ideas governing and leading us, which 
we follow. : 

Nore 2. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the gender 
implied in the antecedent. E. g. Tas ᾿Αϑήνας, of γε tut καὶ πατέρα roy 
ἐμὸν ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες, Athens, which city began first to injure me and 
my father, where οἵ refers to the inhabitants of Athens. 

‘Nore 3.. The relative often agrees in gender and number 
with the noun which is joined to it by a verb signifying to call 
or name, to be, to believe, (ὃ 166.) E. g. ἄκρην, at xalevytow 
Κλήϊδ ες, ἃ promontory, which 1s called Cleides. Ὃ φόβος, 
ἣν ie ὦ εἴπομεν, that kind of fear, which we called respect. 


2. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it is 
generally put in the plural. If the nouns denote animate 
beings, the relative is masculine when one of the nouns is 
masculine. If the nouns denote inanimate objects, the relative 
is generally neuter. E. ὃ. Αἴας καὶ Τεῦκρος, οἵ μέγιστον they- 
χον ἔδοσαν τῆς αὑτῶν ἀνδρίας, Ajax and Teucer, who gave the 
greatest proof of their valor. Περὶ πολέμου καὶ εἰρήνης, ἃ 


Nore 4. The relative often agrees in gender with one 


ET, Oe Ce Rn κυλος; ν μένας 


1)" “Ὁ 
--. 


“Ὡς ἐπ ἢ 


came there where they had killed the spy of Hector, then τῷ 


πα ν ΝΒ, 
πετῶ Pes SFr ee eter es ν᾿ 


WE λόχοι Ξε TC ἢ». 


ah ces etl Nan παν ον πα 
~ are eRe. 


SE LIBR4 


Que 


: OFe THR 
§ 150.] PRONOUN. UNLV Fig I qT v 
of the nouns to which it refers. E. g. “Ana gine. πολέμων δ 
χαὶ κινδύνων καὶ ταραχὴ ς, 8c ἣν, ae Ag Se beng ever rom . 


wars, dangers, and trouble, to which, 8c. 


3. The relative is often put in the plural, when it refers 
to a collective noun in the singular. E. g. μεῖπελαὸν οὕς 
τάφρος ἔρυκεν, he left the people, whom the ditch kept back. | 
Πᾶς τις ὄὕμνυσι, οἷς ὀφείλω, every one, to whom L happen to ae 
owe money, swears. | 


Remark. The relative is put in the plural also when it 
refers to a whole class of persons or things implied 1 in a singu- 
lar antecedent. E. g. “4yj9, αὐτουργὸς, οἵπερ σώζουσι γῆν, 
a man of the goriane class, which class are the safety of the 
land. 


Nore 5. The relative in the singular often refers to an 
antecedent in the plural, when one of the persons or things 
contained in that antecedent is meant. E. g. Oives σε τρώει 
μελιηδῆς, ὃς τὲ καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει, ὃς ἂν μιν χανδὸν ἕ; ἕλῃ, Sweet 
wine affects thee, which injures whoever else takes it freely, 
where ὃς refers to any person contained in ἄλλους. 


4. The proposition containing the relative is often placed 
before the proposition which contains the antecedent, when 
the leading idea of the whole period is contained in the former. ὶ 
This is called ὁ inversion. KE. g. Οὕς ἂν τῶν λόγων ἀλγὼ κλύων, 
τούσδε καὶ πράσσειν στυγῶ, I do not dare to do those _ lungs, 
which it gives me pain to hear. Meifov’ ὅστις ἀντὶ τῆς αὑτοῦ 
πάτρας φίλον νομέζει, τοῦτον οὐδαμοῦ λέγω, whoever thinks 


| that he has a dearer friend than his own country, him I call a He 


contemptible man. 
This version often takes place also for the sake of emphasis. 


Nore 6. This remark applies also to the relatwe adverbs. 


(Ὁ 129.) E. g. ὋΣ δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ δ᾽ ἵκανον, ᾿ ὅϑι σκοπὸν Ἕκτορος ’ 


ἔχταν, ἔν ϑ᾽ ᾿Οδυσσεὺς μὲν ἔρυξε ὠκέας ἵππους, and when they 


Ulysses stopped the swift horses. 


5. The antecedent is often omitted, when it is either a gen- 
eral word’ (χρῆμα, πρᾶγμα, οὗτος, txatvoe' or one which can be 
easily supplied from the context. E. g. ‘A βούλεσϑε λέγοντες, 


saying what you like, where ἃ ἡ refers to πράγματα governed by * 
λέγοντες. Τὸ μέγεϑος, ὑπὲρ ov συνεληλύϑαμεν, the magnitude 
of the business, for which we are assembled. es 


So in the formula Eioty of λέγουσιν, there are who say. 


neg 
Ἶ 
a 
» 


192 SYNTAX. | [§ 16]. 


Nore 7. In some instances the antecedent is implied ὁ m a 
possessive pronoun. E.g. ‘Averdoie τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ, οἵτιν ἐς σε 
οὐ διεσώσαμεν, through the cowardice of us, who did not save 
thee, where ἡμετέρᾳ 15 equivalent to ἡμῶν, to which the relative 
οἵτινες in reality refers. 


§ 151. 1. In general, when the relative would 
regularly be put in the accusative, it is put in the 
genitive or dative, according as the antecedent is in 
the ica or dative. ‘This is called arrRacTion. 
EK. g. } 

“Ex το UT OY, ὧν λέγει, From these things, which he says. 

Here ὧν stands for the accusative « after λέγει. (ἢ 163. 1.) 


Ἔν αὐτοὶς οἷς ἐπαγγέλλονται, In those things which they 
profess. Here ois stands for ἃ after ἐπαγγέλλονται. (ibid.) 


Remark 1. If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, 
this pronoun is generally omitted (§ 148. 5); and the relative 
takes its case. E. g. Στέργοντας οἷς av ἔχωμεν, for Στέργοντας 
ἐκείνοις, ἅ ἂν ἔχωμεν, being satisfied with what we have. 
Ἔξιμεν ἐξ ὧν τυγχάνομεν ἔχοντες, for ‘ES ἐκείνων, ἃ τυγχάνομεν 
ἔχοντες, We ZO away from those possessions which we happen to 

ave. 


Remark 2. In attraction the noun joined to the relative 
pronoun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to beheve, (ὃ 166 ») 
also takes the case of the relative. Ἐς g. Τούτων, ὧν σὺ 
δεσποινῶν καλεῖς, for Τούτων, ἃς σὺ δεσποίνας καλεῖς, of these, 
whom thou callest mistresses. 


Nore 1. In some instances the relative, even when it would be in the nomi- 
native, is attracted by the antecedent. E. g. (Herod. 1, 78) Οὐδέν κω εἰδότες 
Ta» ἦν περὶ Σάρδις, for Οὐδέν κω cidores ἐκείνων ἃ ἦν περὶ Σάρδις, as yet know- 
ing nothing of what happened in Sardes. 


Remark 3. The nominative of the pronominal οἷος is often attracted by the 
antecedent. E. g. ἸΠρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηροὺς, οἵους καὶ “ASnvaious, to 
daring men, such as the Athenians are, where οἵους καὶ ᾿Αϑηναίους stands for 
οἷοι καὶ ᾿Αϑηναῖοί εἶσι. 


Remarx 4. In some instances the personal pronoun, connected with οἷος» 
remains in the nominative, though οἷος has been attracted by its antecedent, 


E.g. Neavias δὲ, οἵους σὺ, διαδεδρακότας; but young men, like thee, 


decamping, where οἵους σὺ stands for οἷος σὺ εἶ. 


Remark 5. Ἡλίκος sometimes imitates οἷος (ὃ 151. R. 3). E. g. “Exsivo 
Desvdy «οῖσιν HAL KOLO νῷν; that isa hard thing to men of our years, where 


ἡλίκοισι νῷν stands for ἡλίκοι νῴ tomer. 


ἀν ὦ τὰν a ρὐ ν. 


§ 162.1 ᾿ PRONOUN. 193 


Nore 2. Relative adverbs (§ 123) also are attracted by the 
word to which they refer. E. g. “Ex γῆς, oder προύκειτο, 
from the place where it lay, where ὅϑεν stands for $9: or ὅπου. 


~ 2. On the other hand, the antecedent is sometimes put in 
the case of its relative. E. 


Mehéayoos τὰς μὲν τιμὰς ἃς ἔλαβε φανεραΐ, The honors which 
Meleager recewved are well known, where τὰς τιμὰς stands 
for αἵ τιμαὶ. 

Οὐκ οἶσϑα μοΐρας ἧς τυχεῖν αὐτὴν χρεών; Knowest thou not 
the fate which she must meet ὁ for μοῖραν ἧς. 


Nore 3. The same: is true of relative adverbs. KE. g."Ai- 
λοσε ὅποι ἂν ἀφίκῃ ayannoovot σε, they will love thee in 
other places whither thou mayest go, where ἄλλοσε stands for 
ἄλλοϑι or ἀλλαχοῦ. 


3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent is 
put after its relative. Εἰ g. 


: Κατασκευάζοντα ἧς ἄρχοι χώρας, for ποτασνδυάξ οντα τὴν χώ- 
ραν, ἧς ἄρχοι, Improving the country, which he governed. 


Remark 6. Frequently the principal words are attracted by, 
and placed after, the relative. E. g. Οἴχεται φεύγων, ὃν ἦγες 
μάρτυρα, for Ὃ μάρτυς, ὃν ἢγες, οἴχεται φεύγων, the wit- 
ness whom you brought has decamped. Οἱ παλαιοὶ ἐκεῖνοι, 
ὧν ὀνόματα μεγάλα λέγεται ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ, “ιττα κοῦ te καὶ Βίαν- 
toc, those ancient persons, Pittacus and Bias, who are re- 
nowned for wisdom, where wy attracts only the proper names, 


Remark 7. The antecedent may be placed after its relative 
even W hen apparently no attraction takes place. E. g. ᾿“ποφύ- 
yors ἂν ἥντιν᾽ av Govly δέκην, you can get clear am any 
lawsuit you please. 


Nore 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the antecedent is placed 
after the relative. E. g. Λόγους ἄ ἄκουσον, οὕς σοι δυστυχεῖς ἥκω φέρων, for 
Λόγου; ἄκουσον δυστυχεῖς, οὕς σοι ἥκω φέρων, hear the ramen: news which I 
have brought to thee. 


§ £42. The relative pronoun often stands for the demonstra- 
hive pronoun, especially in the Epic language. I. g. Πάτροκλον 
κλαίωμεν " ὃ γὰρ γέρας ἐστὶ ϑανόντων, let us mourn Patroclus, 
for this (that is, to mourn) ts honor to the dead. . 


So in the formula ὃς μὲν. .... ὃς δέ, equivalent too péy.... 
ὃ δέ, (ὃ 142. 1.) : 
17 


ἤν δὲ λους ὡς 


Ψ' 


194 SYNTAX. [ὧδ 168 -- 166, 
So in the formula Kat ὃς, for Kat οὗτος. E. g. Kai ὃς, ἀμ- 

βώσας μέγα, ἀναϑρώσκει, and he, uttering a loud cry, jumps up. 
So in the formula δ᾽ ὅς, said he, used parenthetically. 


Nore 1. Frequently the relative: is apparently put for the 
demonstrative. E. g. (II. 10, 314, et seq.) ‘Hy δὲ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι 
Δόλων, Εὐμήδεος δα, ...- ὃς Oa τότε Towoty TE καὶ Ἕκτορι μῦ- 
Sor ἔειπεν, there was among the Tragans a certain Dolon, son 
of Eumédes,..... that man, I say, spoke to the Trojans and 
to Hector. 


Nore 2. This μος oi 152) applies also to the relative ad- 
verb. we. (ὃ 123. N 


§ 153. The relative often stands for the interrogative tic, 
but only in indirect interrogations. Εἰ. g. Φράζει τῷ ναυκλήρῳ 
ὅστις ἐστί, he declares to the captain of the who he is. 


Nore. Ὅστις is particularly used when the person, who is 
asked, repeats the question before he answers it. KE. g. (Aristoph., 
Nub. 1496) ἄνθρωπε, ti ποιεῖς ; ΣΤΡ. Ὅ τι ποιῶ; Man, what 
are you doing 7 ὅτε. What am doing? 


§ 144. Frequently the relative has the force of the con- 


junction ba, in order that, that. KE. g. πρεσβείαν πέμπειν, 
ἥτις ταῦτ᾽ ἐρεῖ, to send an embassy to say these things. - 


RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 


§ 155. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the 
subject of the proposition in which it stands, which subject is 


either in the dual or plural. E.g. Τοιαῦτα πρὸς ἀλλήλους 


ἀγόρευον, such things were they saying to one another. 


Nore. Sometimes ἀλλήλων stands for ἑαυτῶν. E.g. Δήφϑειραν ἀλλήλους, 
they destroyed themselves, that is, each destroyed himsel oY: 


_ SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


§ 186. 1. The subject of a proposition is that of which 
any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed 
of the subject. E. g. “aluifiadye εἶπεν, Alcibiades said, where 
᾿Αλκιβιάδης is the subject of the proposition, and εἶπεν, the 
predicate. Eye ἄτολμός εἶμι, I am timid, where. eyes is the sub- 
ject, and ἀτολμός εἰμι, the predicate. 


2. The subject is either grammatical or logical. 


Se ee ὙΠ ν 


eee ee ee 


pee ea ae 


oa ee 


OS Se ee σι αδοὶη Sa, ee κὰν 
πω et | Ee ye ἢ 


arg 


tgs Faas 


§ 157.] SUBJECT _— PREDICATE. 195 


The grammatical subject is either a substantive or some 
word standing for a substantive. 

The logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with 
the words connected with it. E. g. in the proposition ἀκούσας 
ταῦτα ὃ K ὕρος ἐπείϑετο, Cyrus, hearing these things, was 
persuaded, Κῦρος is the grammatical, and exovoug ταῦτα ὃ 
Κῦρος, the logical subject, 


§ 157. 1. The susseEcT OF A FINITE VERB 
is put in the nominative. 


A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative 
in number and person. Εἰ g. 
Ἐγὼ λέγω, I say. 
Σὺ λέγεις, Thou sayest. 
‘Exsivosg λέγει, He says. 


2. The nominative of the neuter plural very often takes the 


verb in the τ pat E. g. 


To στρατεύματα ἀγωνίζεται, The armies are fighting. 
Ταῦτα ἐγένετο, These things happened. 


Nore 1. Sometimes masculines and feminines dual or plural take the verb in 
the singular. E. σα. RavSal κόμα, κατενήνοϑεν ὥμους, her auburn hair 
was flowing over her shvulders. Ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔστι κάρυ᾽ ἐκ φορμίδος δούλῳ 
σ΄αραῤῥιπαοῦναε Fos ϑεωμένοιςγ we do not exhibit two slaves throwing nuts 
out of a basket to the spectators. 

So in the phrase ΓΕ σειν of, (ὃ 150. 5,) there are who. 


3. If the verb belongs to more than one subject, it is put 
in the plural and in the chief person. - The chief person is 
the first with respect to the second or third, and the second 
with respect to the third. E. g. 

Tote μητιόωντο Ποσείδάων καὶ Anoiiay τεῖχος ἀμαλ- 

δῦναι, Then Neptune and Apollo resolved to demolish the 
wall. 


Note 2. Frequently the verb agrees in number with one of 
the substantives, and especially with that which stands nearest 


tite. BE: g. Σὺν δ᾽ Eveos TE νότος τ᾿ ἔπεσε, Ζέφυρός TE δυσαῆς, 


καὶ Βορέης, Eurus and Notus rushed together, the blustering 
Lephyrus and Boreas. 


Remark 1. The verb is often put in the dual, if it belongs 
to two substantives in the singular. E. g. ἯΙ λυροποιικὴ καὶ ἡ 
κιϑαριστικὴ πολὺ διαφέῤετον ἀλλήλοιν, the art of making lyres, 
and the art of playing on the harp, differ much from cach other. 


196 SYNTAX. ‘, | § 157. 


Nore 3. When the substantives are connected by the con- 
junction 7, or, the verb is put either in the plural or in the 


singular, Εἰ. g. δὲ δὲ x’ Ἄρης ἄρχωσι. μάχης, ἡ Ψοῖβος “Anol- 


λων», but if Mars commence the fight, or Pichns Apollo. Ὅν 
nev ἐγὼ ἀγάγω, ἢ ἄλλος ᾿Αχαιῶν, whom I or any other of the 
Achaans may bring. 


4. A collective noun in the singular very often has the verb 
in the plural. E. g. 


To πλὴ ϑος οἴονται, The multitude think. 
Φάσαν ἡ πληϑύς, The multitude spake. 


This rule applies also to the pronominal adjectives & ἕκαστος 
and ἄλλος. Ἐπ g. “Euehiov λάξεσϑαι ὀρχηδὺν ἕκαστος δέκα 
δραχμάς, each person was to have for his share ten drachme, 


Nore 4, A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb. 
E. g. Σφῷ σαώσετε, you two will save. 


On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in the 
dual, when only two persons or things are meant. KE. g. 
(1. 3, 278-9) Of τίνυσϑον, you two who punish, where οὗ 
refers to Pluto and Proserpine. 


Nore 5. The nominatives ἐγώ, νῷ, ἡμεῖς, are of the first — 


person ; ov, σφῴ, ὑμεῖς, are of the second person ; all other 
nominatives are of the third person. 

The nominatives of the first and second person are usually 
not expressed, except when emphasis is required. 


Norte 6. The verb which agrees with the relative pronoun 
is in the first or second person, according as the antecedent is 
of the first or of the second. person. E. g. “wiv ov ϑύετε, 
αἵτινες τηροῦμεν ὑμᾶς, you do not sacrifice to us, who pre- 
serve you. ᾿Αμέτρητ᾽ Ano, ὃς ἔχεις τὴν γὴν μετέωρον, O thou 
immeasurable Air! who holdest the earth suspended, 

So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun 
(§ 150. N. 7). E.-g. ᾿Ἀνανδρίᾳ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ, οἵτινἐς σε οὐ 
διεσώσαμεν, through the cowardice of us, ‘who did not save 
thee. 


ΡΣ ᾿ ieee ΡΝ 
ᾧ gee he ἐδ υ ΣΌΣ RB ao 


“ἀμὸν 


Ὁ 


εἴ 
ΕΥ̓ 
ἢ 


wpe ET 
Ce Ὁ 


i SN ia al δ νι ς 
Pe Sh ie ES pe 


: Se ae 
ee es oe, χων τὰν υολα 


Remark 2. Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal pros 


noun (§§ 136: 157. N. 5) of the first person, may have the verb in the first 
person. E. g. Osuucronans ἥκω παρὰ σέ, I, Themistocles, have come lo thee. 


Norte 7. Sometimes the verb agrees in number with the nominative in the 
predicate § 160. 1). This takes place chiefly when the nominative in the pred- 
icate precedes the verb. E. g."Earéy δύο λόφω ἡ ἡ ᾿Ιδομεένη ὑψηλώ, equivalent 
to ἥ ᾿Ιδομίνη ἐστὶ δύο λόφω ὑψηλώ, Idomene is two high hills. 


ᾧ 158.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 197 


Nore & The third person of a verb is.often found without 
a subject, | 

(1). When any thing general and indefinite is expressed. 
E. g. Οὐδὲ κεν ἔνϑα τεόν ye μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο, SC. Tis, 
even here no one would find fault with thy valor and strength. 
Aéyover OF φασί 80. ἄνϑρωποι, they say. 

Frequently the word πρᾶγμα is to be supplied. E. g. 4ηλω- 
ϑήσεται, the thing will show itself. Οὕτως ἔχει, it ts so. IMol- 
λοῦ δεῖ, ἐξ wants much, far from tt. deiker δὴ τάχα, the event 
will soon show. 

(2) When the verb indicates the employment of any person, 
the word denoting that person is generally omitted. E. g. 
Exnovte τοῖς “Elnou παρασκευάσασϑαι, SC. ὃ κήρυξ, the herald 
proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves. Τὸν νόμον 
ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἀναγνώσεται, SC. ὃ γραμματεύς, the secretary shall 
read to you the law itself. : 

(3) Frequently the verb is changed into the third person 
singular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative 
(Ὁ 206, 2). E. g. Τοῖς πολεμίοις εὐτύχηται, for Οἱ πολέμιοι 
εὐτυχήκασι, the enemy have succeeded. Καλῶς σον ἀπεκέκριτο, 
for Καλῶς ἀπεκέχρισο, thou hadst answered well. 

(4) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather 
or the operations of nature is not expressed. Ik. ¢. “rev, τέ rains. 
Nips, it snows. Ἔσεισε, there was an earthquake. Συσκοτάζει, 
tt grows dark. 

Nore 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition becomes 
the immediate object (§ 163. 1) of the verb of the preceding 
proposition. EE. g. Φέρε viv ἀϑρήσω πρῶτον τουτονὶ, ὃ τι 
δρᾷ, for Φέρε νῦν ἀϑρήσω, ὃ τι δρᾷ οὕτοσί, now let me see first 
what this fellow here is doing. : 

Norse 10. The verb εἰμί, am, is very often omitted, but 
chiefly when it is a copula (ὃ 160.1). E. g. Ὥρα ἀπιέναι, se. 
ἐστί, it is time to go. 

Remark 3. Other verbs also may be omitted, but only when 
they can be supplied from the context. 


Nore 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative. 
E. g. Φίλος, for Φίλε, friend. 
| § 158. 1. The sussecT oF THE INFINITIVE 
| moop is put in the accusative. ΕἾ. g. 


“Βούλεσϑε αὐτὸν ἐλϑεῖν; Do you wish him to come? Here 
the accusative αὐτὸν is the subject of the infinitive ἐλϑ εἶν. 
Εἶναι ϑεοὺς ἐνόμιζεν, He belicved that there are gods. 
Φασὶν αὑτὸν βασιλεύειν, They say that he reigns. 
17 


108 SYNTAX, [§ 158. 


_ 2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed 
when it is the same with the subject of the pre- 
ceding proposition, Εἰ δ. 

Οἶμαι εὑρηκέναι, { think I have found. Here the sub- 
ject (ue) of εὑρηκέναι is not expressed because it refers to 
the subject (ἐγώ) of οἶμαι. 

~Tvghos γνῶναι δοκεῖ τοῦτο, A blind man seems to know this. 
᾿"“πιϑυμῶ ἀπομερμηρίσαι, L wish to doze. 


Note 1. Sometimes the accusative of the personal or reflerive pronoun is — 
expressed before the infinitive, contrary to the preceding rule (ὃ 158.2). E.g. — 
"But φημι λελασμένον ἔμεναι ἀλκῆς, I say that I have forgotten my valor, 


Nore 2. The subject of the infinitive is frequently put in 
the case of the subject of the preceding independent. proposi- — 
tion. ‘This takes place chiefly when both subjects refer to the — 
same person or thing.  E. g. , 

Νομίζεις ἡμᾶς μὲν ἀνέξεσϑαί cov, αὐτὸς δὲ τυπτήσειν; — 

Dost thou imagine that we shall tolerate thee, and that — 
thou canst strike? Here αὐτός stands for σαυτόν. 3 
‘Eui οἴεσ ϑ᾽ ὑμῖν εἰσοίσειν, ὑμεῖς δὲ νεμεῖσϑαι; Do you © 
think that I shall contribute, but that you will enjoy the — 
contribution? Here ὑμεῖς stands for ὑμᾶς. 


So’Ep yoda Κρονίωνι οἴη λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι, thou saidst that — 
thou alone avertedst destruction from the son of Saturn. Were 
οἴη stands for οἵαν agreeing with σέ understood. a 


Nore 3. Frequently the subject of the infinitive is wanting — 
even when it is different from that of the preceding independ- — 
ent proposition. E. g. Πηημοναῖαι κάμπτομαι, πάσχειν ἄλγειτ 
votow, Lan afflicted with sufferings painful to endure, where — 
the subject of πώσχειν (τινὰ understood) is different from that — 
of κάμπτομαι. (See also ὃ 219. N. 3.) a 


3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed — 
also when it is the same with the object of the pre- 
ceding proposition. E. g. 4 

ἜἘδετο αὐτῶν Bon ety ἐμοῖ, He prayed them to aid me. — 

Here the subject (αὐτούς) is not expressed, because it re= — 
fers to the object (αὐτῶ») of ἐδεῖτο (ὃ 181). - 7 
Παρήγγειλεν ἡμῖν καϑεύδειν, He commanded us to sleep. 
Here the subject (ἡμᾶς) of καϑεύδειν is omitted because it a 
is the same with the object (ἡμῖν) of παρήγγειλεν (ὃ 196.2). 
"Avdoe δύω κελεύομεν ἀλλήλων πειρηϑῆναι, We request — 


νι! 
Nese tut 


τὸ αι 
= 


a δα 
je i ies Datel ae Kaul he fale 


δῷ 159, 160.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 199 


two men to try each other’s skill. In such instances the 
accusative denoting the object of the verb (ᾧ 163) ae 
not be mistaken for the subject of the infinitive.” , 


Note 4. A par ticiple agreeing with the omitted subject of 
the infinitive is very often ‘put ‘in the accusative. E. g. ‘Lye 
ὑμῶν δέομαι καταψηφίσασ Fat Θεομνήστου, ἐγ δυο ε: 
γους, ὅτι οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο TOUTOU μείζων ἀγών μοι, 1 beseech 1 you 
to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider that 1 could not 
have had a severer trial than this, Fevia ἥκειν παρήγγειλε, 
λαβόντα τοὺς ἄνδρας, he repeaters Xenias to take the men and 


come. (δ 158. 3.) | 


Nore 5. When the infinitive has the force of a neuter sub- 
stantive (§§ 159. 2: 221), its subject is frequently omitted, in 
which case the accusative of rig or αὐτός is to be supplied. 
E. g. Joav ταῦτα zor, 50. τινὰ, one must do these things. 


§ 149. 1. In general, any word or clause may be the 
subject of a proposition. Ey. σ, | 
PIAO μέν ἐστιν ἀρχὴ τοῦ καλοῦ, The word ΦΙΖΟ indeed is the 
beginning of the evil. 


2. Particularly, the subject of a proposifion may be an 
infinitive with the words connected with it. E. g. 


Πρόχειρόν ἐστιν ἐπαινέσαι τὴν ἀρετήν, It is casy to praise 
virtue. Here ἐπαινέσαι τὴν ἀῤετὴν is the subject of the 
proposition. 


Nore 1. The subject of δεῖ, δοκεῖ, ἐνδέχεται, πρέπει, προσήκει, 
συμβαΐ vet, χρή, and some others, is generally an’ infinitive. 
E. g. 

Ast ἐμὲ λέγειν, L must say, or It is necessary that I should 

say. Here ἐμὲ λέγειν is the subject of dei. 


Nore 2. Verbs, of which the subject is an infinitive are called mPERSONAL. — 
Such verbs must not be confounded with those, of Which the subject is not 
expressed (§ 157. N. 8). 


3. The subject of an infinitive is frequently another infini- 
tive with the words connected with it. Εἰ g. Ov φησι χρῆ- 
VOL TOUS νέους τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀσκὶ εἶν, he says that young men 
ought not to crercise the tongue, where τοὺς νέους τὴν γλῶσαν 
ἀσκεῖν is the subject of χρῆναι (δ. 159. N. 1, 2). 


§ 1690. 1. The prepicare, like the subject δ 156, 2), 


is either grammatical or logical. — 


209 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 161. 


The grammatical predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb 
(commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called), and a sub- 
stantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter case, 
the verb is called the copula. a 

The logical predicate consists of the grammatical predicate 
with the words connected with it, E. g. Ἦν Korduaving τύ-᾿ 
ραννος Σαρδίων, Candaules was king of Sardes, where ἦν 
τύραννος 15 the grammatical, and 9» τύραννος Σαρδίων, the logical 
predicate. 


2. A substantive in the predicate is put in the same case as 
the subject when it refers to the same person or thing. (ὃ 136.) 
ΕἸ g. 

Ἐγώ εἶμι Πλοῦτος, Lam Plutus, Here Πλοῦτος agrees in 

case with ἐγώ. ᾿ | 

Ἦν Κανδαύλης τύραννος Σαρδίων, Candaules was king 

of Sardes. Here τύραννος in the predicate agrees with 
the subject Κανδαύλης in case. ᾿ 


3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, standing 
in the predicate, and referring to the subject, are determined 
by ὁ 187. E.g. 

᾿Εγὼ adavartos εἶμι, Lam immortal. 

Βούλευϑε αὐτὸν γενέσϑαι σοφόν; Do you wish him to be 

come. wise ? Pree : 


Note 1. When the subject is any word but a nominative 
(§ 159), the adjective or pronoun in the predicate is neuter 
(commonly neuter singular), E.g. Οὐ δίκαιόν ἐστι τοὺς 
κρείττους τῶν ἡττόνων ἄρζειν, tt is not right, that the stronger 
should rule the weaker. 


Note 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate 
refers to a masculine or feminine noun. E. g. Φιλοίκτιστον 
γυνή ἐστι, woman is a very tender-hearted thing. 

In such cases, the word πρᾶγμα is sometimes expressed. 
E. g. Γυναῖκα δ᾽ εἶναι πρᾶγμ ἔφη νουβυστικόν, but wo- 
man, he said, is a prudent thing. 


§ 161. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex- 
pressed (ὃ 158. 2, 3), the substantive or adjective, standing in 
the predicate and referring to the omitted subject, is put in the 
case, in which the subject has already appeared. E. g. 

‘Ryou εἶναι δοκεῖς, Thou seemest to be pale. Here the ad- 

jective is put in the nominative on account of σύ with 
which δοκεῖς agrees (§ 157. N. δ). : 


§ 162.] OBJECT. 201 


Κύρου ἐδέοντο προϑυμοτάτου γενέϑαι, They besanerht 
Cyrus to be very eager, 

Διακελεύσομαι τοῖς ἰοῦσιν εἶναι προϑυμοτάτοις, ({ will 
command those who go to be very eager. 


Nore. This construction (ὃ 161. 1) may take place also when the infinitive 
has the article before it (ὃ 221). E. g. Ὁ Αἰσχύλος πάλιν ἄπεισιν οἴκαδε, 
διὰ τὸ συνετὸς sivas, Aeschylus returns home because he is wise. 


It takes place also when the infinitive comes after the particle dare ay 220), 

Also when the infinitive depends on a participle (§ 219). E.g. Πολλοὶ 
Tay προσποιησαμίνων εἶναι σοφιστῶν, for Πηλλοὶ εἰ οἵ σροσε- 
ποιήσαντο εἶναι σοφισταί, many of those who pretended to be sophists, (§ 140. 3.) 

2. When a proposition is made the subject of another propo- 
sition (§ 159. 2, 3), the substantive, adjective, or participle in 
the predicate or subject of the former proposition is often put 
in the case of the noun which is in the predicate of the latter. 
E. g. Ey’ ἡμῖν ἔσται τὸ ἐπιεικέσι καὶ φαύλοις εἶναι, for 
To ἡμὰς ἐπιεικεῖς καὶ φαύλους εἶναι ἔσται ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, to be respecta- 
ble or worthless will depend upon us, where the proposition τὸ 
ἐπιεικέσι... .. εἶναι is the subject, and ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔσται, the 
predicate. 

In such cases the predicate always precedes the subject. 
Further, this takes place only when the attracting word in the 
predicate i is in the dative, 


OBJECT. 


δ 162. 1. That on which an action is δύ ρον or to 
which it refers, is called the object. : 
The object is put in the accusative, genitive, or dative. 


2. Participles and verbal adjectives in τεὸν 
(§ 132. 2) are followed by the same case as the 
verb from which they are derived. 

For examples, see below. 

Nore 1. The verbal in Eats with ἐστί (expressed or under- 


stood) represents de (ὃ 159. N. 1) and the infinitive active or 
middle of the verb from which it is derived. E: g. 


ἀκούω, hear, ἀκουστέον equivalent to δεῖ ἀκούειν, one must hear. 

μιμέομαι, tmilale, μιμητέον ὩΣ ΌΜΩΝ to δεῖ μιμεῖσϑαι, one 
must wmulate. 

In some instances it represents δεῖ sad the infinitive passive. 

E. g. ἥτταομαι, am surpassed, ἡττητέον, one must be surpassed. 


202 SYNTAX. [δῷ 163, 164. 


~Nore 2. The neuter plural of the verbal adjective in τεὸν 
is often used instead of the singular. E. g. ἀκουστέα for 
ἀκουστέον. ᾿ 
3. Any word or clause may be the object of ἃ verb. E. g. 
Κῦρος ἐκείνῳ δῶρα ἔδωκε, ἵππον χρυσοχάλινον, καὶ στρεπτὸν χρυ- 
σοῦν, καὶ τὴν χώραν μηκέτι ἁρπάζεσθαι, Cyrus gave him 
resents, a horse wih a golden bridle, a golden necklace, 
_ and that the country should no longer be plundered, where the 
proposition τὴν χώραν μηκέτι ἁρπάζεσϑαι is one of the objects 
of ἔδωκε. 


-ACCUSATIVE. 


§ 163. 1. The immediate object of a transitive 
VERB is put in the accusative. E. g. 


Ταῦτα ποιῶ, I do these things. 
Ποιήσας ταῦτα, Having done these things. (§ 162. 2.) 
Hointéov ταῦτα, One must do these things. ibid.) 


2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi- 
tive in Greek: Τὸ g. ‘Adavarovs ἀλιτέσϑαι, to sin against 
the immortals. a 

Verbs of this class are alitaivw, ἀποδιδράσκω, δορυφορέω, 
ἐπιορκέω, ὄμνυμι, ἐπιτροπεύω, λανϑάνω, and many others. 


§ 644. The accusative of a substantive is often joined to 
a verb of which it denotes the abstract idea, (ᾧ 129.) In 
this case the accusative is generally accompanied by an adjec- 
tive. E. g. ) ν 

Πεσεῖν πτώματ' οὐκ ἀνασχετα, To fall an insupportable 

_ fall. 

Hisav δρόμημα δεινόν, They rushed furiously. 


So in English, To die the death of the righteous. To run 
@race. : 


Norge 1. A substantive js, in the poets, often joined to a verb signifying to 
see, to look, (βλέπω, digxoua:, χεύσσω, δράω,) to mark the expression of the look. 
E. g. Φόβον βλέπων, looking terrible. ‘H Βουλὴ ἔβλεψε var, the 
Senate looked mustard, that is, looked displeased. . 

Sometimes the substantive δέργρα is to be supplied after these verbs. E. g. 
Katarroy βλέπει, he looks thievish. 


Note 2. Verbs signifying to conquer (as γικάω) are often 
followed by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or 


§ 165.] ACCUSATIVE, 203. 


nature of the conquest. Ἐν g. Maznv νικᾷν, to gain a battle. 
Ὀλύμπια νενικηκώς, having conquered in the Olympic games. 


The nouns following verbs of this description are chiefly 
ἀγών, γνώμη, μάχη, ναυμαχία, πόλεμος. Also the names of the 
public games, ᾿Ολύμπια, Ππύϑια, ἹΝέμεα, ᾿σϑμια. 


Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person 
conquered i is added. KE. g. Ἱιλτιάδης ὃ ὃ τὴν ἐν Magadan μά- 
χὴν τοὺς βαρβάρους νικήσας, Miltiades who conquered the 
barbarians at the battle of Marathon. 


§ 165. 1. Vers signifying to ask, to teach, to take 
away, to clothe, to unclothe, io do, to say, and some 
others, are followed by two aecusatives, the one οἵ 
a person, and the other of a thing. E. g. 


Ταῦτά we ἐρωτᾷς, Thou askest me about these things. 

Αἰτεῖν tov δῆμον φυλακάς, To ask guards of the people. 

Tov δῆμον χλαῖναν ἤμπισχον, I clothed the people with 
robes. 


Verbs of this class are αἰτέω, ἀμπέχω, ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀναγκάζω, 
ἀναδέω, ἀπαιτέω, ἀποστερέω, ἀφαιρέομαι, διδάσκω, δράω, ἐκλέγω, 
ἐχκδύνω, ἐνδύνω, ἐξαίρέομαι, ἐ ξειπεῖν, ἐξετάζω, ἕρδω ΟΥ̓ δέζω, ἐργά- 
Sopa, ἔρομαι, ἐρωτάω, κρύπτω, λέγω, mada ves, πείϑω, πιπίσκω;, 
ποιέω, πράσσομαι, στεφανόω, συλάω, and a few others. 

Nore 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes the abstract of the 
verb (ὃ 164). E. g. Ὃ Φωκικὸς πόλεμος ἀείμνητον παιδείαν αὐτοὺς 
ἰσαίδευτεν, the Phocian war taught them an ever memorable lesson, ‘Ewv- 
Tov AwBaras λώβην ἀνήκεσπσον, he injures hinself incurably. 


Nore 2. Frequently verbs signifying to do, or to say, are 
followed by an accusative and the adverb εὖ, well, or χακῶς, 
badly. E. g. Tous φέλους εὖ ποιοῦσι, they do good to their 
friends, where εὖ ποιοῦσι is equivalent to ἀγαϑὰ ποιοῦσι. Ka- 
κῶς λέγουσιν οἵ ἀγαϑοὶ τοὺς κακούς, the good speak 
wl of the bad, where χαχῶς haga is equivalent to κακὰ 
λέγουσι. 

Nore 3. Sometimes the word denoting the person is put in the dative (§ 196. 


4). E.g, Πολλὰ κάκ᾽ ἀνθρώποισιν ἐώργει, he did much evil to men, 
Μηδὲν ἀγαϑὸὲν ποιήσας τῇ πόλει having done no good to the state. 


Remark. ’A ποσσερέω, and, in the later writers, ἀφαιρέομαι, are often followed 
also by the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing. (δ 181. 2.) 

“ὦ. Verbs signifying to divide take two accusatives. ΕἸ. σι 
Τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμξ δώδεκα μέρη, he divided. the 
army into twelve parts. 


204 SYNTAX. : [§§ 166, 167. 


The preposition εἰς is often found before the accusative 
denoting the number of parts. E. g. Σφέας αὐτοὺς ἐς ἕξ 
μοΐρας διεῖλον, they divided themselves into six parts. 


Nore 4. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in the geni- — 


tive (§ 173), and depends on the accusative denoting the parts. ΕἸ. g. Διελό- 
μεϑα τῆς Ἢ SANE εἴδη δύο, equivalent to Διειλόμεϑα σὴν sidwro- 
αοιἰκὴν εἰς εἴδη δύο, we divided the art of making images into two parts. 


§ 166. Verss signifying, to name or call, to choose, to 
render or constitute, to esteem or consider, are followed by two 
accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g. 


Στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξεν, He appointed him general. 
“Τὸν υἱὸν ἱππέα ἐδιδάξατο ἀγαϑόν, He caused his son 
to be brought up a good horseman. 


Nore 1. In the passive such verbs become copulas (δ 160. 1). E. g. 
Zreatnyis ἀπεδείχϑη, he was appointed general. ‘O υἱὸς ἐδιδάχϑη ἱπαεὺς 
ἀγαϑός, the son was brought up a good horseman. (ὃ 206. 1.) 

Nore 2. Frequently the infinitive sivas is expressed before the second accu- 
sative. E. g. Σοφιστὴν ἀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα sivas, they call him a 
sophist, or rather, they say that he is a sophist. 

So in the passive, ᾿Απεδέχϑη τῆς ἵσσου tlvas ἵπααρχοςν he was ap- 
pointed master of the horse. 


§ 167. The accusative is very often used io 
limit any word or expression. Eu g. 


Κροῖσος ἦν Δυδὸς τὸ γένος, Cresus was a Lydian by birth. 
Here the accusative γέρος limits or explains further the 
meaning of “υδός. 

Ταῦτα ψεύδονται, They lie in these things. 

Ἢ ϑάλασσα οὐδὲν γίγνεται πλείων, The sea does not become 
larger, literally The sea becomes larger in nothing. 


The accusative thus used is called the syNeEcpocHICAL 
ACCUSATIVE. 


Remark. The neuter accusative τέ (from τίς) often means 
for what? why? E.g. Ti ταῦτα μανϑάνω, for what am I 
learning these things? 


Nore 1. Here belong most of the accusatives which commonly are said to 
be used adverbially (§ 124). 


Nore 2. Hither we may refer parenthetical phrases” like 
the following. To λεγόμενον, as the saying ts. To τοῦ Ὁμή- 
gov, as Homer has it, or according to Homer. Πᾶν τοὐναντίον, 
on the contrary. 


4 


§ 168.] ACCUSATIVE. | 205 


Nore 3. Sometimes the preposition κατά OF εἰς is used before this accusative. 
E. g. Καϑαρὸν καὶ κατὰ τὸ σῶμα καὶ κατὰ σὴν ψυχήν, pure in body 
and in soul. Aivis ἀϑανάτησι Seis tis ὦπα ἔοικεν, she ΡΝ re= 
sembles the immortal goddesses in looks. τῇ 


Nore 4. The accusative is sometimes subjoined to a i ai 
in order further to qualify the contents of it. E. g. Καὶ με 
ϑητεύειν πατὴρ ϑνητῷ παρ΄ ᾿ ἀνδρὶ, τῶνδ᾽ ἄποιγ᾽, ἠνάγκασεν, and 
the Sather compelled me to serve with a mortal man as a recom- 
pense for these. Τὼ. παῖδε τὼ σὼ μέλλετον, τολμήματ᾽ αἴσχιστα, 
μονομαχεῖν, thy two sons are about to Sight a duel, a most dis- 
graceful act, where τολμήματα qualifies τὼ παῖδε τὼ OW μέλλετον 
μονομαχεῖν. ~ ~Eya δ᾽ ἂν, αὐτὴ ϑοιμάτιον δεικνὺς τοδὶ, πρόφα- 
σιν, ἔφασκον, and I, showing to her this garment here, as @ 
pretext said, 


§ 168. 1. A noun pon a DURATION OF TIME 
is put in the accusative. E. g. 


Δέκα ἔτη κοιμῶνται, They sleep ten years. 

Τοῦτον μετὰ Σιτάλκους ἔπινον τὸν χρόνον, During this 
time I was feasting with Sitalces. 

Πολὺν χρόνον ὕβρικε, He has insulted a long time. 


2. Frequently the accusative answers to the question WHEN? 
E. g ᾿ἘΕντειλάμενος τὴν ὥρην ἐπαγινέειν σφίσι τὰς αἶγας, Come= 
manding (him) to bring the goats to them at the regular time, 


Norte 1. When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal 
number (§ 61), it denotes duration of time past. EK. σ. Ενν ἁ- 
την ἡμέραν γεγαμημένην, married mine dar ys ago, oF having 
been married nine days. 

Also when it is accompanied by cimdiaad numbers. E. δ. 

Ὃς τέϑνηλε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη, who has beén, dead these three 
years. 


Nore 2, Sometimes the accusative is equivalent to the 
genitive absolute (§ 192), particularly the following neuter 
accusatives : - δεδογμένον, δοκοῦν, δόξαν, from δοκέω" εἰρημένον 
from “PEQ* ἐξόν from. ἔξειμι" ov from sil’ παρέχον from πα-- 
ρέχω " προσῆκον from προσήκω᾽ τυχόν from τυγχάνω ᾿ and a few 
others. E. δ. 

᾿Εξὸν αὐτοῖς ἀποδοῦσιν “Ἑλένην ἀπηλάχϑαι τῶν παρόντων 

κακῶν, Although it was in thew power to give up Helen, 
and be delivered from the impending danger. The con- 


struction of the clause "ESo» αὐτοῖς «++. κακῶν, in the © 
indicative would be ἤξξεστιν αὐτοῖς ..... κακῶν, (ἢ 159. 
2, N. 1, 2.) 


18 


206 SYNTAX, [δῷ 169-- 172. 


Nore 8. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a preposition (chiefly iwi) is 
placed before this accusative. E.g. Ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ καὶ εἴκοσ, trea ἧ ἥρχον τῆς 
ms οἱ Σκύϑαι, the Scythians ruled Asia for eight and twenty years. 


§ 169. The accusative is used to denote Ex- 
TENT OF SPACE. E. g. 


Διέσχον ἀλλήλων τριάκοντα στὰ (δια, ey were thirty 
stadia from each other. | 
᾿ Stradi ous δὲ πέντε καὶ τεσσαράκοντα διακομίσαντες o ἀπέ- 
κοντο ἐς τὸ ἱρόν, And carrymg (her) forty-five stadia they 
arrived at the temple. 


§ 1:70. Sometimes the accusative answers to the question 
WHITHER? E. g. 
Aiyhn παμφανόωσα δι᾿ αἰϑέρος οὐρανὸν ἵκεν, The bright 
effulgence went to heaven through ether. 
᾿Αγλαὰς ἔβας Θήβας, Thou camest to allustrious Thebes. 


§ 171. The accusative follows the particles of protesta- 
tion wa and v7. KE. g 
Μὰ τὴν ᾿Αναπνοὴν, μὰ τὸ Χάος, μὰ τὸν ᾿4έρα, By Breath, ὃν 
Chaos, by Air. ᾿ 
Νὴ τὸν Ποσειδῶ φιλῶσε, By Neptune I love thee. 
Nore 1. Μά is used only in negative, and v7 only in affirmative, propositions, 
But when vai, yes, certainly, is placed before μά, the proposition is affirmative. 


Nore 2. Sometimes za is omitted. E. g. Οὐ, τόνδ᾽ "Ὄλυμπον; no, by 
this Heaven. 


Nore 3. Sometimes the x name of the god sworn by is omitted after these 
particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always expressed. 
E.g- Μὰ τὸν --- ἐγὼ μὲν. οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐσιϑόμην, by — 1 should not believe it. 


§ 172. The accusative is put. puter the following 
PREPOSITIONS. 


Aug, about, around. “Augi δείλην, about εν. Aug. 
αὐτόν, around him. So 1 in connection with numerals. “Augi 
τὰ ἑκκαΐδεκα ἕτη γενόμενος, being about sixteen years old. 

” Ave, on, in, through, throughout, during.” Ava tov πόλεμον, 
during the war, throughout the war, “Ava στρατόν, wn the 
army. “Ava μυρίκην, ona tamarisk. 

With numerals it means at the rate of, a-piece. "Ava πέντε 
παρασάγγας τῆς ἡμέρας, at the rate Of five parasangs a day. 

- du, through, on account of, ἐπ. “4 νῦν ὀφείλω: διὰ .σέ,. which 

I now owe on your account. Διὰ νύκτα, in the night. 

Eis, to, into. Eig Κιλικίαν, to Cilicia. 


§ 173.] GENITIVE. 207 

With numerals it generally means about. Eis taty α-- 
κισχιλίους, about four thousand men, 

Frequently εἰς is found before a genitive, the noun, to 
which it properly belongs, being omitted. Eis παιδοτρί- 
βου, sc. οἶκον, to the teacher's house. 

‘Eni, upon, against. “Ent 9oovov, upon a throne. “Ew 
αὐτόν, against him. 

Κατά, according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during. Kata 
τὸν “Ὅμηρον, according to Homer. Κατὰ τὸ σῶμα, inre- 
lation to the body. Kara τὸν πόλεμον, during the war. 

Meta, after. Meta δὲ ταῦτα, and after these things. 

Παρά, to, besides, along, contrary to, on account of. Παρὰ 
Καμβύυσεῖ; to Cambyses. Παρὰ ταῦτα, besides these. 

After comparatives it means than. ζενοίατ᾽ ἂν καὶ παρὰ 


τὴν ἑωυτῶν φύσιν ἀμείνονες, they might become superior to 


their nature. 
Περί, synonymous with aug. 
Πρός, to, in respect. to, towards. Πρὸς πάντας, to all men. 
Bolas πρὸς δρόμον, good ὃ ἴῃ running, ora good racer. 
“πέρ, over, beyond, against. “mig τοὺς ἄλλους, over the 
others, 
“Ὑπό, under, at. “Ὑπὸ γῆν, under the earth, “πὸ Ἴλιον, 
under Ilion. | : 
“Ως, synonymous with εἰς. It is always placed before nouns 
denoting intelligent objects. 


GENITIVE. 


δ 173. A sussrantive which limits the mean- 
ing of another substantive, denoting a different 
person or thing, is put in the genitive. E. g. 


To τὲμ δὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ, The temple of the god. 
Tov Ἱππάρχου ϑάνατον, The death of Hipparchus. 
Σκυϑῶν βασιλεῖς, Kings of the Scythians. 


This rule applies also to the personal, reflexive,.and recipr6é 


cal pronouns, and to the indefinite pronoun δεῖνα. 


The genitive thus used has been called the apNoMINAL 
GENITIVE. 


Note 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, 
the most common of which are those of possession, quality, 
subject, object, material, source, a whole, component parts. 


Ve 


"ὦ SYNTAX, [ὁ 174; 175. 


Nore 2. The adnominal genitive is called subjective when 
it is equivalent to the- subject-nominative (¢ 157. 1). It is 
called oljective when it denotes the object of an action (ᾧ 162. 
1). ΕΠ. Ἔργον Ἡφαίστου, the work of Vulcan, that which 
Vulcan did, where the genitive is used subjectively. “H ἀκρό- 
σις τῶν λεγόντων, the act of hearing the speakers, where 
the genitive is used objectively. — : 


Nore 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two geni- 
tives denoting different relations. E. g. Τὴν Πέλοπος ἁπά- 
σης Πέλοποννήσου καταλείψιν, the taking of the whole of 
Peioponnésus by Pelops. 


ἢ 854. Possessives pronouns and adjectives implying 
possession, are frequently followed by a genitive, which is in 
apposition with the genitive wmplied in the possessive pronoun 
or adjective (Sf 67: 131.1). E. g. 

Tov ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ tov ταλαιπώρου βίον, The life of me, 
a miserable man. Here αὐτοῦ τοῦ ταλαιπώρου is in appo- 
sition with ἐμοῦ implied in ἐμὸν. 
Tooyeiny κεφαλὴν, δεινοϊὸ πελώρου, The head of Gorgo, 
a terrible monster. Here Togysiny is equivalent to the 
genitive Togyovs with which πελώρου is in apposition. 
Nore. Under this head belong the adjectives 7310s, ἱερός, κοινός, οἰκεῖος. E. g. 
Τοῖς αὐτῶν ἰδίοις πρῥοσίχειν τὸν νοῦν, to attend to their private affairs. Ἱερὸς 
γὰρ οὗτος τῶν κατὰ χϑονὸς ϑεῶν, for he is consecrated to the infernal deities. 
"Epyov κοινὸν Λακεδαιμονίων τε καὶ ᾿Αϑηναΐων, a work performed by 


the Lacedemonians and Athenians in common. “A οἰκεῖα τῶν καλῶς Ba- 
σιλευόντων tori, which belong to those who rule well. 


175. The genitive is put after verbs signify- 
ing to be, to belong, to denote the person or thing 
to which any thing in any way BeLones. Εἰ g. 

Ὃ παῖς Auxedarpoviny ἐστί, The boy belongs ta the 
Lacedemonians. . Pray 
᾿Ανοίας ἐστὶ τὸ ϑηρᾶσϑαι κενά, It is characteristic of folly 
to be in pursuit of vain things. 
Εἶναι ἐτῶν τριάκοντα, To be thirty years old, 
Verbs of this class are γέγνομαι, εἰμί, κυρέω, πέφυκα and ἔφυν 
from φύω. | | . soli 
Nore 1. This genitive is often preceded by the preposition πρός. E. g. 
Δεξιοῦ πρὸς ἀνδρός tors, it is the characteristic of a man of parts. 
Nore 2. Frequently the genitive after these verbs denotes 
the person or thing from which any thing proceeds. E. g. 
dugsiov καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, of Da- 


$$ 176, 177.) GENITIVE. 209 


rius and Parysitis two children were born, or Darius and 
Parysitis had two sons. Θνητοῦ πέφυκας πατρός, thou 
art the offspring of a mortal father. 

Sometimes the genitive, in such instances, is preceded by ἐκ. 
E. g. Πατρὸς ἐκ ταὐτοῦ γεγώς, beng born of the same father. 


Nort, 3. Frequently the adjective εἷς or the pronoun σὴς is to be supplied 
before this genitive (ὃ 175). Εἰ, g. Τούφων γενοῦ, become one of these. 


§ 176. The neuter of the article followed by a substantive 
in the genitive denotes something to which that substantive is 
related. E. g. 


Δεῖ φέρειν τὰ τῶν — We must bear what comes from 
the gods. 
To tov Ὁμήρου, That which Homer says. 


Note. This idiom gives rise to phrases like the following : 
Τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς, for “H ὀργή; anger, wrath. Ta τῆς ἐμπειρίας, for 

Ἢ ἐμπειρία, experience. Τὰ τῶν Θετταλῶν, for Ot Θετταλοί, the 
Thessalians. To τῶν ἐπιϑυμιὼῶν, for Αἱ ἐπιϑυμίαι, desires. 


§ 177. 1. ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, and AD- 
VERBS, denoting a PART, are lollowed by a genitive 
denoting the wHoLE. E. g. 


Lxaory τῶν πόλεων, Each of the states. 

Οὐδεὶς τῶν μειρακίων, No one of the young men. 

H ov γῆς; Where on earth ? 

Ὃ ἥμισυς τοῦ ἀριϑμοῦ, Half the number. 

Τὴν πλείστην τῆς στρατιᾶς, The greatest part of the 

army. | 

Τῆς μαρίλης συχνήν, A good deal of coal-dust. 

This rule applies to the genitive after numerals (δ᾽ 60: 61: 
62. 4), after interrogative, indefinite, demonstrative, and relative 


words (ὃν 68-71: 73: 123), after superlatives, and in general, 
after any adjective or adverb designating a part. 


Note 1. A participle preceded by the article is often fol- 
lowed by the genitive, ($ 140. 3.) E. δ. Οἱ καταφυγόντες 
αὐτῶν, equivalent to ᾿Εχεῖνοι αὐτῶν οἵ ἜΗΙ ΤΟΝ such of 
them as escaped. 

Sometimes ἐκ is used in such cases. E. g. Ἐκ τῶν ἀνϑρώ- 
may τοῖς εὖ πράττουσι, to the prospering part of mankind. 


Norr 2. The nature of the noun denoting the whole determines the number, 
in which the genitive is put. 


18* 


210 SYNTAX. [ὁ 178. 


Nore 8. The adjectives δαιμόνιος, δῖος, τάλας, σχέσλιος, and a few others, are 
often followed by the genitive plural E. g. Ava γυναικῶν, divine woman. 
Ἰάλαινα «“αρϑένων, unfortunate virgin. Zyiras’ ἀνδρῶν, unfortunate 
man, ; 

It is supposed by many that the idea of superlativeness lies in these adjectives. 


2. Frequently the genitive denoting a whole depends on a 
neuter adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun. E. g. 

Μέσον ἡ μέρας, The middle part of the day. 

Τῆς στρατιῆς τὸ πολλὸν, The greater part of the army. 

Τὸ τετραμμένον τῶν βαρβάρων, The defeated part of 

the barbarians. τ 

Εἰς τοῦτο ἀνάγκης, To this degree of necessity. 

Nore 4. In some instances the neuter plural is used before this genitive 
(δ 177. 2). E. g."Aonpwe Bors, ἴον ἸΆσημον Bors, indistinct noise. 

Nore 5. The genitive of the reflexwe pronoun often follows 
an adjective of the superlative degree; in which case the 
highest degree, to which a person or thing attains, is expressed. 
E. g.“Ore δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα yoda, when your skill in 
these matters was highest. Th εὐρυτάτη ἐστὶ αὑτὴ ἑωυ τῆς, 
where ἐξ is widest. 


δ 178. 1. The genitive may be put after any 
VERB, when the action does not refer to the whole 
object, but toa part only. E. g. 


Πέμπει τῶν Δυδῶν, He sends some of the Lydians. But 
Πέμπει τοὺς Avdovc, He sends the Lydians. 

Τῶν κρεῶν ἔκλεπτον, I stole some pieces of the meat. 

“Μαβόντα τῶν ταινιῶν, Taking some of the fillets. 


2. Particularly, the genitive is put after veRBs 
signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit. 


FE. g. 
Metéyo ϑράσεος, I partake of courage. 
Τῆς δυνάμεως κοινωνοῦσι, They partake of the power. 


Verbs of this class are ἀντιάω, ἀπολαύω, ἀτυχέω, ἐπαυρίσκο-- 
μαι, κληρονομέω, κοινωνέω, xUQEW, λαγχάνω, μεταλαγχάνω, μεταλαμ- 

4 ‘ya, Ove χά ἀ e others 
βάνω, μετέχω, ονίναμαι, συναίρομαι, τυγχάνω, aNd SOM . 

Nore 1. Sometimes μέρος, part, is found after μεταλαγᾳάνω and μετέχω. 
E. g. Μεϑέξειν σάφου μέρος, about to partake of burial. 


Μετέχω is also found with the accusative in. which one participates. E. g. 
Mersives τὰς ἴσας wanyes ἐμοί, thou didst receive the same number of 
slripes wilh me. 


ὑπο πα ὦ τὰ, Ss 


ON al GENITIVE. | 211 


᾿Ασολαύω, λαγχάνω, and φσυγχάνω are often followed by the accusative. 
E. 5. ᾿Απολαύειν τι, to enjoy any thing. ᾿Αγκῶνα τυχών, hitting the 
elbow. 

Kangovowiw, inherit, in some instances takes the accusative of the thing in- 
herited. The name of the person of whom one inherits is put in the genitive, 
and depends on the thing inherited. E. g. Kangovowsiv ra κτήματά 
rivos, to inherit the possessions of any one. Later authors put even the name 
of the person in the accusative. 


Nore 2. The genitive in connection with μέτεστι and προσ-- 
ze. depends on the sulject (expressed or understood) of these 
verbs, Ei. g.'Qy μηδὲν μέρος τοῖς πονηροῖς μέτεστι, in which 
the wicked do not participate. Οὐκ ᾧετο προσήκειν οὐδενὶ 
ἀρχῆς, he thought that no person ought to rule. 


Nore 3, The preposition ἐξ or ἐκ is sometimes used before this genitive 
(δ 178. 1). Ἐς 5. Δαβὼν ἐκ τῶν ἀσπίδων, taking some (or one) of the 
shields. 


δ 179. 1. Verss signifying fo take hold of, to 
touch, to feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed 
by the genitive. E. g. 

“άβεσϑε τούτου, Lake hold of this man. 

Ἅπτεοϑαι αὐτῶν, Lo touch them. 


Γεῦσαι τῆς ϑύρας, Knock at the door, literally Taste of 
the door. 3 


Verbs of this class are aio Favomet, ale, ἀκούω, ἀχροάομαι, 
ἅπτομαι, γεύομαι, δράσσομαι, ἔχομαι, ϑιγγάνω, κλύω, λαμβάνομαι, 
ofa, oopouivomct, πειράομαι, πυνϑάνομαι, ψαύω, and some 
others. : 


2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are frequently followed 
by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive 
of the part by which itis taken. E.g.’ElAaBovto τῆς ζώνης 
τὸν Ορόντην, they took Orontes by the girdle. 


Nore 1. ᾿Ακούω and its synonymes, and ϑιγγάνω and Watw, are frequently 
followed by the accusative. E.g.’Axovoas radra, hearing these things. 


Nore 2. Frequently ἀπκούῳ and its synonymes take that which is heard in the 
accusative, and that from which the thing heard proceeds, in the genitive. E. g. 
Tov ἄνδρα πσπυνϑάνου τῶν ὁδοιπόρων; inquire of the travellers about the 
man. 


Note 3. Τεύω, cause to taste, is followed by the accusative of the person, - 
and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Τ᾽ εύειν αὐτόν rivos, to make him 
taste of any thing. : | 

Frequently this verb is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Τ᾽ εύσω σε 
μέϑυ, I will give thee wine to taste. 4 


212 SYNTAX. [§§ 180, 181. 


§ 180. 1. VeERBs denoting fo let go, to cease, 
᾿ς to desist, to free, to miss, to separate, to escape, are 
followed by the genitive. E. g. 


Τούτου. μεϑίεσ ϑαι, To let this man go. 
“Ayame ror λὴγ ἔριδος, Agamemnon left off his wrath » 
Διέσχον ἀλλήλων, They separated from each other. 


Verbs of this class are ἀλύσκω, ἃ ἁμαρτάνω, ἀμπλακίσκω, ἀπέ-- 
χομαι, ἀπολείπομαι, ἀποστατέω, ἀφίεμαι, διέχω, εἴκω retreat, ἐκ- 
φεύγω, ἐλλεέπω, λήγω, μεϑέημι commonly μεϑέεμαι, μεϑίσταμαι, 
παφαχωρέω, συγχωρέω, φεύγω, χωρέω, and some others. 


2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive of the immediate, and the ‘genitive of the remote, object. 
E. g. 
Hato os τούτου, I make thee cease from this. 
τὴν Aoiny Ar Oversee τῆς «Αιβύης, Separating Asia 

From Libya. 


Such verbs are ἀμύνω, ἀπαλλάσσω, ἀπέχω, ἀφίστημι, διοοίζω, 
εἴργω, ἐλευϑερόω, ἐρητύω, ἀφϑφίρα, κωλύω, λύω, παύω, and some 
others. 

Note. The genitive in connection with verbs signifying to Sree, to cease, 


sometimes depends on the preposition ἐκ or ἀπό. E. g. ILadoov ix κακῶν 
ἐμέ, deliver me from evil. - 


δ 51. 1. ,ΈΚΒ5, ADJECTIVES, and ADVERBS, 
implying fulness, emptiness, bereavement, are fol- 
lowed by the genitive. E. g. 

Πενίας ἡ πόλις ἔγεμεν, The city was full of poverty. 

Kevov δοξασμάτων πλήρεις, Full of vain notions. 

Τῶν τεϑνηπκότων ἅλις, Enough of dead persons. 

Words of this class are ἄδην, ἅλις, ἀμηχανέω, ἀπορέο,, ἄτος, 
ἀφνειός, β Beiter, γέμω, δέω and Bails ἐπιδεής, ἔρημος, καϑαρός, 


κενός, μεστός, πένης, πένομαι, πλέως, πλήϑω, πλήρης, πλούσιος, 
σπανίζω, χρήζω, and some others, ἡ 


2, Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. 
E. g. 

Πάριν γοσφιεῖς βίου, Thou wilt deprive Paris of life. 


Such verbs are ἀποστερέω, ἐρημόω, κενόω, κορέννυμι, Hoven, 
γοσφίζω, πίμπλημι, πληρόω, and some others, 


$$ 182, 183. ] GENITIVE. ὁ 213 


Nore 1. 4 and χρή. are followed by the accusative of a 
person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. Αὐτόν oe dei 
Προμηϑέως, thou thyself needest a Prometheus. Téo os 
χρή, what wantest thou? 


Nore 2. 4si sometimes takes the dative of the person and 
the genitive of the thing. E. g. Δεινῶν σοι βουλευμάτων. 
ἔοικε δεῖν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἐξ seems that thou must employ profound 
reasoning against him. 


§ 182. Vergs signifying to remember, to ζῶ. 
get, to admire, to contemn, to desire, to care for, 
to spare, to neglect, to consider, to understand, are 
followed by the genitive. E. g. 


Μέμνησό μου, Remember me. . 
Ἄγαῦϑαι τῆς ἀρετῆς, To admire virtue. 
Μεγάλων ἐπιϑυμεῖς, - Thou desirest great things. 


Verbs of this class are ἄγαμαι, ἀλεγίζω, ἀντιποιέομαι, χλίχομαι, 
εἰδέναι, ἐμπάζομαι, ἐνθυμέομαι, ἐπιϑυμέω, ἐπίσταμᾶι, ἔραμαι, ἐράω, 
ἐφίεμαι, ϑαυμαζὼ, ἱμείρω, καταγελάω, καταφρονέω, κήδομαι, λαν-- 
ϑάνομαι, λιλαίομαι, μιμνήσκομαι, μνημονεύω, ὀλιγωρέω, ὀρέγομαι, 
συνίημι, ὑπεροράω, φείδομαι, φροντίζω, and some others. — 


Nore 1. Most verbs of this class often take the accusative instead of the ~ 
genitive. E.g. Doovrigovras τὰ rosadra, caring about such things. 


Note 2. Μιμνήσκω and ληϑάνω or λήϑω, and their compounds, are followed . 
by the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Ὕ wré- 
μὠνησέν τί ὃ πατρός, and he reminded him of his father. "Ex δὲ ws Ta v 
tay Andaves,and makes me forget all things. : 

Sometimes ῥμμνήσκω is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Οἱ ᾿Ε γεσφαῖοι 
ξυμμαχίαν ἀναμιμνήσκονσες petted atte the Ligestians reminding 
the-Athenians of their alliance. 


Nore 3. Méass, ἐξ is a care, it is α concern, is generally followed by the 
dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. ge Μέλει cos τούφου;, 
thou carest for this. (ὃ 157. Ν. 8.) 


Norte 4. The genitive in connection with some of these verbs sometimes de- 
pends on a preposition. E. g. ILasdés πέρι rod ἐμοῦ μὴ μνησϑῆσε 
ἔσι, as to my son, make no more mention of him. ἹΠερὶ «τῶν ἐν Αἰγύπεῳ καὶ 
ἐν Σικελίᾳ δύνασθαι Peovrigssy, to be able to take care of the affairs of Egypt 
and Sicily. 

δι 58. 1. Virss sion fyinae to accuse, to prose- 
cule, to convict, are followed by the accusative de- 
noting the person accused, and the geniltye denot- 


ing the crime. E. g. 


24. ᾿ SYNTAX. [5 184. 


Aiosouui os δειλίας, [will pr osecute you for cowardice. 
Κλέωνα δώρων ἑλόντες, Convicting Cleon of bribery. 


Verbs of this class are αἱρέω, αἰτιώομαι, δικάζω, δια ss εἰσάγω, 
καλέομαι. 


Remarx I. Φεύγω, am accused, and ἁλῶναι, to be convicted, are followed 
only by the genitive. Ἐπ g. ᾿Ασεβείας φεύγοντα, accused of impiety. 
"Edy cis ἁλῷ κλοσῇς, if any one shall be convicted of theft. 

- Aiviéouas, accuse, is sometimes followed by two accusatives. 


2. Verses of this class compounded. with the 
preposition κατά are followed by the genitive of 
the person and the accusative denoting the crime 
or punishment. Ἐπ g.— 


Σεαυτοῦ καταδικάζεις ϑάνατον, Thou condemnest thy- 
self to death. : 


« a y » Ν ; 
Such verbs are χαταγιγνώσκω, καταδικάζω, κατακρίνω, καταζχει-- 
ροτονέω, καταψεύδομαι, καταψηφίζομαι, κατερεῖν, κατηγορέω. 


Remark 2. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs (§ 183. 2). 
E. g. Karnyoesiv αὐτοῦ, to accuse him. 


Note l.. Karnyogta i is sometimes followed by éwo genitives. E. g. TLaeae 
πρεσβείας αὐτοῦ κατηγορεῖ ὦ to indict aie pr unfaithfully deities 
his duties as ambassador. 


Nore 2. The noun denoting the punishment ἢ is sometimes put in the genilive. 
In classical Greek, however, only Savacov is found in connection with ‘verbs of 
this sort. Εν g. Θανάτον ὑπαγαγὼν Miducitdsa ἐδίωκε, he accused Mililia- 
des capitaily. 


Note 3. ἔδνοχος, under sentence, guilty, which generally is 
ployed by the dative (ὃ 196. 1), sometimes takes the genitive. 


‘“PrevIvvog, guilty, is followed by the genitive denoting the 
crime. 


§ 154. 1. γ οι signifying to begin, to rule, 
to surpass,.are followed by the genitive. E. g. 


ἄρχε. μάχης», Begin the fight. 
Σπάρτης. ἀνάσσων, Ruling Sparta. 
Πάντων διαπρέπεις, Thou surpassest all men. 


Verbs of this. class are avavow, ἀριστεύω, ἄρχω, βασιλεύω, δε- 
σπόζω, διαπρέπω, διαφέρω excel, ἐπιστατέω, καλλιστεύομαι, κραΐνω, 
κοιρανέω, κρατέω, περιγίγνομαι, περίειμι, προέχω, “προΐσταμαι, 
aaa OTOUTHYED, τυραννεύω, ὀπερβάλλω; ὑπερέχω, and some 
others. 


δῷ 185, 186.] GENITIVE. Q15 


Nore 1. Those deriyed from. substantives or adjectives may be said to take 
the genitive in consequence of the noun implied in them, E, σ. Tay xa?’ 
ἑαυτοὺς ἀνθρώπων ἀριστεύσαντες is equivalent to Of ἄριστοι τῶν xad’ 
ἑαυτοὺς ἀνθρώπων ἦσαν, having surpassed the men of their times, (ὃ 177.) 


Nore. 2. Some verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the dative or 
accusative. E. g. Κιλίκεσσ᾽ ἄνδρεσσιν ἀνάσσων», ruling over the 
Cilicians. 


Nore 3. seed ὅροι in Homer, sometimes followed by the preposition werd 
with the dative. g. (Il. 1, 252.) 


' 2, Causative verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
tive and genitive. ἘΣ g- Νικᾷ με ἢ ἀρετὴ τῆς ἔχϑρας, his 
valor affects me-more than his enmity. (§ 205. 2.) , 


Such verbs are γικάω, a προκρίνω, and some 
others. 


“ 


§ 185. Many ΨΈΕΕΒΑΙ; ἀρ βοἠθφες ΠῚ have 
an active signification are followed ‘by the aesuieres 
EK. g. 

Τρίβων ἵππικ ἧς» Skilled in ΕΠ τς 

᾿Δρχικὸς ἀνθρώπων, Qualified to rule men. 


Adjectives of this class are ἀγνώς, ἀΐδρις, αἴτιος, ἀπαίδευτος, 
ἴδρις, λυσανίας, τρίβων. Also many adjectives in’ ἡρίος, ἱκος, as 
δηκτήριος, ἀρχικός, (S$ 131. 1: 129.2.) Also, many adjectives 
IN ἧς, ος, μῶν, AS ἀνήζοος, ἀδαής, δαήμων, (ὃ 139. 4, 5.) 


Nore 1. Sometimes adjectives of this class are followed by the accusative, 
provided the verbs, from which they are derived, take the accusative. E. g, 
Τρίβων τὰ «οιάδε, skilled in such things. . 


Nore 2. Adjectives of this class, which are derived from verbs followed by 
the genitive, are often said to take the genitive in consequence of the verb im- 
plied in them. E. g. ἀνήκοος takes the genitive because ἀκούω is followed by 
the genitive (§ 179). 


Nore 3. Sometimes the genitive or accusative, in. connection with adjectives 
of this class, depends on the preposition wegi. 


§ 186. 1. The genitive is put after ADJECTIVES 
and ABVERBS of the COMPARATIVE degree to de- 
note that with which the comparison is made. E. g. 

Κρείττων τούτου, Superior to this man. Ht, 

Nore 1. When the substantive which is compared is the 


same as that with which it is compared, the latter is omit- 
ted, provided it be mite? by a genitive (ὃ 173). The 


216 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 187. 


ambiguity which may arise from this construction can be re- 

moved only by considering the nature of the statement. E. g. 
Xwgav ἔχετε οὐδὲν ἧττον ἡμῶν ἔντιμον, for Xogay ἔχετε. 
οὐδὲν ἧττον τῆς χώρας quay ἔντιμον, you have a country not less 
valuable than ours. 


2. The genitive is put after some positive adjectives and 
adverbs implying a comparison. E. g. Ἑτέρους τῶν νῦν 
ὄντων, other than those who now are. 


-Adjectives of this class are ἀλλοῖος, ἄλλος, ἀλλότριος, δεύτερος, 
διάφορος different, i ἕτερος, ἡμιόλιος, περιττός. Also numeral ad- 
jectives in πλοὺς or πλασιος (ᾧ 62. 2). 


Remarx. Διάφορος and ἀλλότριος are sometimes followed by the dative. 


Nore 2. ’"Evayrios, which comihonly is followed by the dative, sometimes 
takes the genitive. The following example shows, that the idea of comparison 
lies in this adjective: Totdvaveiov δρῶν, ἡ προσῆκ᾽ αὐτῷ ποιεῖν, doing ἔφορος 
to what he ought to do, (Aristoph. Plat. 14,) . 


Nore 8. Διαφέρω, differ, and its derivative διαφερόντως, εἶ ifferently, are fol- 
lowed by the genitive, because they imply a comparison, Εἰ g. Διαφέρει 
ἀνὴρ τῶν ἄλλων ζώων, man differs from the other animals. 


Nore 4. Sometimes this genitive depends on ἀνσί or πρό. E. g. Meigoy’ 
avrl τῆς αὑτοῦ ra Teas Piroy youiTes, he loves another more than his own 
country. Οἷσιν nh συραννὶς πρὸ ἐλευϑερίης nv aowucrdrseoyv, to whom 
tyranny was more welcome than liberty. 


Nore 5. When the conjunction 7, than, is introduced, the 
word compared, and the noun with’ which it is compared, are 
put in the same case. E. g. ηέλλεις én’ ἄνδρας στρατεύεσϑαι 
ἀμείνον ας ἢ Σκύϑας, thou art about to march against men 
Superior to the Scythians. Tots βασιλ evo τῶν Λακεδαιμο-- 
γίων ἀδικεῖν ἧττον ἔξεστιν ἢ τοῖς ἰδιώταις, the kings of the 
Lacedemonians have less power to do harm than private indi- 
viduals. 

Nore 6. Sometimes the nominative is used after w, the context determining 
its verb. KE, 5. “Tots νεωτέροις καὶ μᾶλλον ἀκμάζουσιν ἢ ἤ ἐγὼ, “«΄ἀραινῶν 
SC. ἀκμάξω, I advise the young who are more vigorous than Iam. Ἡμῶν 
ἄμεινον, ἢ ἐκεῖνοι, τὸ μίλλον προορωμένων, SC. προορῶντ' αἱ» WE Soreseeing the 


Suture better than ey: 


§ 187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote 
ὼ that on account of which any thing takes place. 
Eg. 
Ζηλῶ σε τῇ ς εὖβο vale ς, ὰ admire you Yor your ‘wisdom. 
Th ὑμετέρᾳ- “πόλει τῆς γῆς τῆς UN Rowniwr δεδομένης φϑο- 
γοῦσι, They are jealous of your city, on account of the 
land given to you by the Oropians, 


§ 188.] GENITIVE. 217 


2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in 
exclamations. E. g. Ὦ Πόσειδον, τοῦ μάκρους, Neptune, what 
a length : Γ Kai τὴν ide πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτας; τῶν ἀλαξω- 
γευμάτων, and who ever saw whole oxen roasted in the oven 3 7 
what tough stories !. ὁ i . 


3. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreat denotes 
the person or thing, for the sake of which the person entreated 
is to grant the request. E. g. Μή we γούνων γουνάζεο, 
μεδὲ τοκήων, do not entreat me ὃν my knees, nor by my 
parents. Frequently the “preposition ὑπέρ, ἀντί, OT πρός, 18 
placed before this genitive. 


4. Sometimes the genitive, in connection with a passive 
form, denotes the subject of the action. Εἰ, σ. πληγεὶς 
vy ateos τῆς ἐμῆς ὑπὲρ κᾶρα, being struck in the head by 
my daughter. 


5. Sometimes the genitive denotes the instrument of an ac- 
tion. E. g. πρῆσαι πυρὸς. ἀροῦν Kuphres to burn the gates 
with burning fire. : 


S$ £88. 1. The genitive is used to denote that 
in Prenat ef which any thing is affirmed. E. g. 


"Anas ἔρσενος γόνου, Childless in respect to male off- 
spring, in other words, Having no sons. - _* 

Alhe νυ τόν γε ϑεοὶ Blénrover κελεύϑου, But the gods now 
injure him in respect to his way, that is, hinder him. 

᾿Βοῦσαν ἤδη ἀνδρὸς ὡραΐην, Being now of the right age 10" 
be married. 


2, The genitive is used to limit the meaning of the following 
ADVERBS: ἄγχι OF ἀχχοῦ, ἄνω, δίχα, ἐγγύς, ἕκάς, ἰϑύ ΟΥ̓ ἰϑύς, 
ἵκταρ, κατόπιν, κάτω, κρύφα, λάϑρα, πέλας, πλησίον, πόῤῥω, πρόσω; 
τηλοῦ, τηλόϑεν, and some others, E. ge. Eyyvs τινος, near. 
any thing. 


Nore. "Exyw and ἥκω, limited ty an adverb, are often followed by the 
genitive. E. g. ‘Os εἶχε τάχους; a8 foe as he could run. Ei eer 
Ciou, to be well advanced in life. 


3. The genitive is put after verbs denoting to take aim ate 
to rush against, to throw at. EH. g. Ἑστοχάξετο τοῦ μει- 
ρακίου, he was taking aim at the stripling. ᾽Οἵστε υσον 
Μενελάου, shoot an-arrow at Menelaus. Avroio TLTVOK & 
to, he took aim at him. 


19 


i SYNTAX. [$9 189 191. 


» 


§ 189. The genitive is used after verBs and 
ADJECTIVES to denote the MATERIAL - of which any 
thing is made. Εἰ, g.. 


Χαλκοῦ ποιέονται ἀγάλματα, Statues are made of brass. 
Ῥινοῦ ποιητήν, Made of ox-hide. 


Nore. The prepositions ix, ans, are often used before the genitive. E. g. 
eee amo ξύλων. wsmoinmiva, garments made of cotton cloth. 


-§ 190. 1. The noun denoting the price of any 
thing is put in the genitive. E. g. 


ἰΔγέονται τὰς γυναῖκας παρὰ τῶν γονέων χρημάτων μεγᾶ- 
λων, They buy thetr wives of their ΨΚ for much 
money. 

Τῶν πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν πάντα canis" ot ϑιοί, The 


gods sell to us every good thing for labor. 


Nore 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive, in which case the 
verb of the Proposition does not signify to buy or to sell. E, g. ᾿Ασὰρ ri χρέος 
ἔβα με μετὰ τὸν Ἰ]ασίαν, Τρεῖς μναῖ διφρίσκ ov, Then what debt came upon 
me next to Pasias’s ? Three mine for a little carriage. 


Nore 2. The dative (ὃ 198) is sometimes used for this genitive. E. g. 
Οἰνίζοντο, ἄλλοι μὲν χαλκῷ, ἄλλοι δ᾽ αἴϑων, σιδήρῳ, they γον wine, 
some for brass, others for bright tron. 


2. ἄξιος, ἀξίως, and ᾿ὠνητός are followed by the genitive. Εἰ. g. 
Σπουδῆς ἄξια, deserving serious consideration. 

Nore 3. ”A%ss is sometimes followed ἘΣ the dative (§ 196. 1), in which 
case it means fit, proper, becoming. 

Nore 4. The verb ἀξιόω, think worthy, is followed by the 
accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing. KE. 


᾿ἀξιοῦσιν αὐτὸν μεγάλων, they think him coy of great 
thing's. . 


§ 191. 1. The genitive tin answers to the 


question WHEN ? E. g. 
Τῆς νυκτὸς νέμονται, They feed in the night. . 


2. Sometimes the genitive ‘answers to the question HOW 
LONG since? E.g. Ποΐου χρόνου πεπόρϑηται πόλις; how 
long since the city has been taken? Π ολλὼν ἐτῶν ἐνθάδε 
οὐκ ἐπιδεδήμηκεν, he has not been at home for many years. 


3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question HOW 
soon! E. g. Τριάκοντα ἡ μερῶν ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας, 
within thirty dows From this day. 


ᾧ 192.] GENITIVE. 219 
Sometimes the adverb ἐντός accompanies this genitive. E. - δ’ 
᾿Εντὸς οὐ πολλοῦ χρόνου, within a short time. 


§ 192. A substantive with a participle is very 
often put in the genitive, to denote the Time or 
CAUSE Of, or any CIRCUMSTANCE connected with, 
an action. Εἰ. g. 


Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχϑη, Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, These things 
were done when Conon was general, Here the genitive 
denotes the time when ταῦτ᾽ éxgay dy. 

Τελευτήσαντος Alvattew, ἐξεδέξατο τὴν βασιληΐην Κροῖ- 
coc, After the death of Al, yattes, Cresus received the king- 
dom. 


The genitive thus used is called the GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, 


Remark 1. Strictly speaking. the genitive absolute is a modification of the 
genitive of time (§ 191). i 


Nore 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle dy is wanting, E. g. 
ὯΟον ὑφηγητῶν, who being leaders, where ὄντων must be supplied. 


Nore 2. Frequently ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὥστε, ἅτε, οἷα, that, as if, in- 
asmuch as, on the supposition that, stand before this genitive, 
E. δ. 

“Ως ὧδ᾽ ἐχόντων τῶνδ᾽ ἐπίστασθαί σε χρή, Thou must 

know that these things are so. ~ 

Remark 2. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in connection 
with the abovementioned particles, E. g. Oty ὕβρει λέγω τάδ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖ 
νον ὡς παρόντι νῷν, I do not say these things out of. wantonness, but because 
1 believe that he is near us. Ὥς ἰξὸν ἤδη ποιεῖν αὐτοῖς, δ᾽ τι ἂν βούλοιντο, 
inasmuch as they had now the liberty to do what they pleased: (See ὃ 168. N. 2.) 


Nore 3. When the subject of a proposition is not expressed 
(ἢ 157. N. 8), the participle alone is put in the genitive abso- 
lute. KE. g. “Tovtos πολλῷ, tt raining heavily, which in the 
indicative is “Te. πολλῷ, it rains heavily. 


Nore 4. The genitive absolute is used also when the sub- 
ject is a proposition commencing with ὅτι, that. (ὃ 159. 1.) E. g. 
Sagas δηλωϑθέντος ὅτι ἐν ταῖς ναυσὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, x. τ. λ., tt 
being quite apparent, that in the ships of the Greeks, &c., 
which in-the indicative i 15 Σαφὼς ἐδηλώϑη or ἐν ταῖς, x. τ. }.» 
the subject of which is or ἐν ταῖς, x. τ. λ. 


In such instances, the genitive plural is sometimes used. 
E.g. Εἰσαγγελϑέντων ort Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐπέ- 
πλεον, it beng announced that Phenician _ships were sailing 


against them, where, however, the plural νῆες may be said to 
affect the participle. 


220 SYNTAX, [δῷ 193, 194. 


Nore 5. But when the subject of the proposition is an in- 
Jinitive (ὃ 159. 2), the accusative is used instead of the geni- 
tive absolute. For examples, see above (§ 168. N. 2.) 


§ 193. Frequently the genitive answers to the question 
WHERE! E., δ: Οὐκ Ἄργεος nev; was he not in Argos? 


Auavac χειρὸς οἰκοῦσι Χάλυβες, ad the - Ὁ γωνοίᾳ dwell be 
Chalybes. 


§ 194. The genitive | is put e the following 
PREPOSITIONS. 


Augi, synonymous ih περί.- 

᾿Ανευ, without. “Avev ἔϑεν, without him. 

‘Arti, mstead of, for. 4 F ἱματίου ἔχειν ῥάκος, to have a 
rag instead of a poet ᾿Αντὶ ποΐας αἰτίας; for what 
reason. 

Tt is often used in comparisons with respect to value, 
Τυναικὸς ἄρ᾽ ἀντὶ τέτυξο, you are now equivalent to a 
woman. (See also § 186. N. 4.) 

‘Ano, from. “Ano Ἡλιουπόλιος, from Heliopolis, In cael 
this preposition denotes motion from one place to another. 

᾿Ἄτερ, synonymous with ἄνευ. 

~Azgrs or ἄχρι, until. “Ayo. κνέφαος, till evening. 

Ave, through, by means of, with the assistance of, ἴα. Διὰ τῆς 
πόλεως, through the city. Διὰ νυκτ ός, wm (or during’) the 
night. 

Ee on account οἵ, for the sake of, in respect of, as to. Tov 
ἐπαινεῖσθαι ἕν εκα, for the sake. of being praised. παῖδά 
τὲ σὸν ἀπήμονα τοῦ φυλάσσοντος εἵνεκεν προσδόκα Tob 
ἀπονοστήσειν, so far as Jus guardian is concerned, expect 
thy son to return safe. 

"KE or ἔχ, out of, from, of. ‘Ex τῆς οἰκίας, from the house. 

‘In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to ὑπό, 
by. Τὰ λεχϑέντα ἐξ Aleherd gos, the ‘words spoken by 
Alexander. 

‘Eni, on, upon, to, during. "En eby κεφαλῶν, upon their 
heads. “Eni Sapdens; to Sardes. Ἐπὶ ἄρχοντος Ev- 
ϑυκλέους, during the archonship of Euthycles, or when 
Euthycles was archon. 

Κατά, against, down from, on, upon. K at ἐμοῦ, ipuplast me. 

Mere, with, together with. M eta τῶν watdwy, with my 
children. : 

Mézorg or μέχρι, until, as far as. Mixes τούτου, until this 


time. © 
» 


ᾧ 195.} ᾿ DATIVE. 221 


Παρά, from, of. Χρυοίον παρὰ σοῦ λαβών, recewing gold 
from thee. . 

Περί, concerning, about, in respect to. Περὶ ᾿Α4ϑηνῶν, about 
Athens. ἜΝ ἑν" 

Πλήν, except, | 

Πρό, before, in preference to. πρὸ ϑυρῶν, before the doors. 
Πρὸ τούτων τῶν κακῶν ἡμῖν ys κρέσσον καὶ δτιῶν ἄλλο 
παϑέειν ἐστί, τὲ 8. better for us to suffer any thing else than 
these evils. (ἢ 186. N. 4.) 

Πρός, of, for, on the side of. πρὸς πατρὸς τυμβυρύχος, 
a tomb-breaker on his father’s aude: en TOY ἐχόντων, 
in behalf of the rich. 

So in protestations, Σὲ πρὸς τοῦ σοῦ τέκνου ἱκνοῦμαι, 
1 beseech thee by thy child. 

In connection with passive § forms it is ‘equivalent. to ὑπό, by. 
᾿Εϑέλων μαϑέειν τὸ ποιεύμενον πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίων, 
wishing to know that which was done by the Lacedemonian 8. 

“πέρ, over, above, in behalf of, for the sake of. “£7 éQ ἡμῶν 
πορευόμενος, passing over Us. To ἱερὰ τὰ ϑυόμενα ὑπὲρ 
τῆς πόλεως, the victims offered in behalf of the city. Aio- 


oom ὑπὲρ ψυχῆ $3 1 beseech thee by thy life. 
“fo, under. “L~ ἅρματος, under the car. In connection 


with passive verbs, by. προσκυνο vuEevos ἤδη ὡς βασιλεὺς 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν, veltigt now saluted as mane: by his at- 
tendants. ; 


DATIVE. 


5 195. 1. The dative is used after apsEcTIvEs, 
ADVERBS, and VERBS, implying resemblance, union, 


approach. E. g. 

Ἴχελος Aut, Resembling Jupiter. 

“Μακεδαιμονίοις Picea ye Fas; To fight with the Lace- 

demonians. 

Words of this class are ἀδελφός resembling, ἐσέ ται τ ἀκό-. 
λουϑος, ἅμα, ἀτάλαντος, διαγωνίξομαι, διαδέχομαι, διαλέγομαι » εἰκό-- 
τως, εἴχω look like, resemble, ἕπομαι, ἐρίζω, ἔκελος;, ἴσος, ἴσως, 
μάχομαι, ὁμός and its compounds and derivatives, παλαίω, 
παραπλήσιος, πλησΐος, πολεμέω, ὡσαύτως, and many others. Add 
to these the adverbs « ἀγκοῦ, ἐγγύς, πέλας, Which commonly take. 
the genitive (ᾧ 188. 2). 


2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accu- 
sative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, ob- 
19-* | 


~ 


ΟΦ" : SYNTAX. — Gy 
ject. E. g. Κράτει προσέμιξε δεσπότην, he led his master 
to victory. pee eae re 

Such verbs are εἰκάζω, μέγνυμι, δμοιόω, and some others. 

Nore 1. The adjectives ὅμοιος and ἀδελφός, and those compounded with σύν 
and ὁμοῦ, are sometimes followed by the genitive (§ 188). Κοινός, common, 
which usually takes-the dative, is followed by the genitive, when it implies pos- 
session, (ὃ 174. N.) - ge Whigs’ 

Note 2, When the substantive, which depends on ἔσος or 

ὅμοιος, is the same as that with. which ἔσος Or owovog agrees, 
the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it (§ 173) 
is put in the dative. Ἐπ g. Κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν. ὁμοῖαι, for 
Κόμαν ὁμοῖαν ταῖς κόμαις τῶν Χαρίτων, hair resembling that of 
the Graces. Οὐ μετεῖχες τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς éuot, thou didst not 
receive the sume number of stripes with me. . 
_ Norte 3. The pronoun. ὃ αὐτός, the same, (δ 144. 3,) is 
often followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative, 
to which ὃ. αὐτός directly refers, is omitted, and the limiting 
noun (§ 178) is put in the dative, (ἢ 195. N. 4.) E. g. Οὐδὲν 
τῶν αὐτῶν ἐκείνοις πράττομεν, we do nothing like the things 
which they did; where τῶν» αὐτῶν refers to the deeds, and ἐκείνοις 
to the doers. , 2, . 

Nore 4. Ef; sometimes imitates ὁ αὐτός. E. δ. "Os ἐμοὶ μεᾶς ivyiver” 
ἐκ ματέρος, who proceeded from the same mother as I, | 

δ 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to 
which the quality of an apsecTIveE is directed. 
i E. g. } ee, : 

Ποϑεινὸς τοῖς φίλοις, Dear to his friends. 

Ἔχϑιστος ϑεοῖς, Most hateful to the gods. 

Adjectives of this class are ἀγαϑός, αἰσχρός, ἐναντίος εὔχρη-- 
στος, ἐχϑρός, ἡδύς, καλός, ποϑεινός, ῥάδιος, φίλος, χαλεπός, and 
many others. nh ἐν Ἂ 

2. The dative is used. after verBs, to denote the 
object to or for which any thing is done. E. g. 

Βοηϑεῖν τῇ πάτρᾳ, 70 aid the country. ; 

Τοῖς ϑανοῦσι πλοῦτος οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ, Wealth in no way 

benefits the dead. ars 

Μυμαινομένη τῷ vexog, Abusing the dead body. _ 

᾿Ωχρὰ εἶναί μοι δοκεῖς, Thou seemest to me to be pale. 

This rule applies also to the dative after imPERSONAL VERBS 
(δ 159. N. 1,2). E.g. Δοκεῖ μοι, it seems to me. 


§ 197.] | DATIVE. 223 


Verbs of this class are ἀλέξω, ἀνδάνω, ἀρέσκω, agro, ἄρ- 
μόσσω, βοηϑέω, δοκέω, εἴκω yteld, ἐνοχλέω, ἐπαρκέω, ἐπικουρέω, 
ἐπιτέλλομαι, κατακούω, λατρεύω, λυμαΐνομαι, λυσιτελέω, λαιβάομαι, 
μέμφομαι, παρεγγυάω, πείϑομαι, πρέπω, προστάσσω, συμφέρω, 
τιμωρέἕω, ὑπακούω, ὑπείχκω, ὑποπτήσσω, ὑποτίϑεμαι, φϑονέω, χα- 
ρίζομαι, and many others. 


-- 


Nore 1.. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the accusative 
(§ 163. 1) instead of the dative. 

3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to δὴ to denote 
that to which any thing belongs. E. g. 


Τέλλῳ παῖδες ἦσαν καλοί te κἀγαϑοί, Tellus had good and — 
noble children, 


Note 2. The substantive in the dative after εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, 
is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing, being 
pleased, expecting. E. g. Οἱ Κροτωνιᾶται εἶπον, οὐκ ἄν σφισι 
βουλομένοις εἶναι, the Crotomans said that they should not 
be willing. 

The setclcn of which the dative accompanies the sub- 
stantive, are βουλόμενος, ἐλπόμενος, ὄδομφρς, ϑέλων, προσδεχόμενος. 
Add to these the adjective ἄχων. 

Verbs signifying to come sometimes imitate εἶναι. Εἰ. g: 
Γιγνώσκω δ᾽ ὡς σφῶϊν ἐελδομένοισιν ἱκάγω, 1 know that 


you longed for my arrival. 


4. Many transitive verses of this ἰὸν (ὃ 196. 2) are fol- 
lowed by the accusative of the immediate, ie the dative of the 
remote, object. E. g. 

Aid wmpr σοι τοῦτο, I gina this to thee. 


Nore 3. A few verbs denoting to give a part (a8 μεταδίδωμι) 
are often followed by the dative of.a person, and the genitive 
of the thing imparted (§ 178. 1). 


5. The dative is put after the INTERJECTIONS ol, δὴ ἰώ, nd 
oval. E.g. Οἵ μοι, woe ts me, 


§ 197. 1. The dative is alten: used to denote 
that with regard to which F any feng is affirmed. 
E. g. 

Μάλιστα σπουδῆς ἄξια τῇ metas , Of the utmost considera- 
tion with regard to the state, or Deserving the most serious 
attention of the state. 

Spav μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τέλος δή, As to you two, the com- 
mand of Jupiter is now done. 


2240 — SYNTAX. _ i [ § 198. 


So 7476 Eleqovtivys πόλιος ὦ ἄνω ἰόντι ἄναντές ἐστι τὸ χωρίον, 
to a person going up Seve the city Pe eR the country ap- 
pears steep. 


Nore 1. This dative is often preceded by the particle ὡς. 
E. g. ‘Ensineg εἶ γενναῖος ὡς ἰδόντι, since thou art of noble 
descent to one who sees phee, or rather, as thy appearance in- 
dicates. 

Hence the _phrase τῆς «ἐμοί, or Ὧς a ἐμοί, in my opinion. 
E. 8. Κρέων ἦν ζηλωτὸς, ὡς ἐμοὶ, ποτέ, Creon was once, in my 
opinion, in an enviable condition. 


Nore 2, Frequently the dative of the οόνοκο pronoun is 
apparently superfluous. - _E. δ. Εἰπέμεναί μοι, Τρῶες, ἀγαυοῦ 
᾿Ιλιονῆος πατρὲ φίλῳ καὶ μητρὶ γοήμεναι, Ὁ Trojans, do tell the 
beloved father and mother of illustrious Ilioneus to bewail, 
where μοῦ might have been omitted without any essential in- 
jury to the. sense. ᾿Ζλλά σ᾽ ἐς ᾿λύσιον πεδίον ἀϑάνατοι πέμψου- 
σιν, οὕνεκ᾽ ἔχεις “Ἑλένην, καί σφιν γαμβρὸς Διός ἐσσι, but the 
ammortals. will send thee to the Elysian fields, because thou hast 
Helen for thy wife, and art son-in-law to Jupiter, where the 
dative σφίν, referring to ἀϑάνατοι, eee that the person, to 
whom σέ refers, is a favorite of the gods. 


2. The dative is often used to Viana any ae or 
expression. LE. g. : 
Δυνατοὶ γενόμενοι καὶ τοῖς σώμασι καὶ Tate ψυχαῖς, Be- 
coming strong both in body and soul. Here the dative 
denotes that in which they became strong. 
Eyzety ἐκέκαστο, He was eminent with the spear. 


Nore 8. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the 
excess of one ‘thing over another. E.g. Πόλι λογίμῳ ἢ 
Elias γέγονε ἀσϑενεστέρη, Greece has become weaker by one 
distinguished city. 


Norte 4. Particularly, the dative is ‘often used to we. the 
meaning of a substantive, in which ΡΣ it is nearly equiva- 
lent to the adnominal genitive (§ 173). -E. g. 

Θήβαισιν ἄναξ, King of Thebes. Ἢ ' 

Δόσις ἀνθώποισιν, A ΓΝ to men. Here the dative is 

used objectively, (§ 173. N. 2.) eae 


§ 198. The dative is used to denote the cause, 
_ manner, means, and instrument. E. g. 


δῷ 199, 200.] - DATIVE. 225 


Toi ig πεπραγμένοις αἰσχυνόμενοι, Being ashamed of their 
past acts. ; 

Δρόμῳ ἴεντο ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους, They went running against 
the barbarians. 

Τῷ σώματι ἐργαζόμενος, Working with his body. 


Nore l. The dative after the verb χράομαι, avail myself, 
use, and its compounds, may be referred to this head. E. g. 
Χρώμεϑα αὐτῷ, we use it. 


Norse 2. This dative sometimes depends on ey, σύν, ὑπό. EK. ge Deis’ ἐν 
ὅμ μα σεν, seeing with my eyes. Ἵνα χερσὶν ὑπ᾽ Αἰνείαο δαμεΐη, that he te 
fall by the hands of ZEneas. 


§ 199. The dative is need to: desidte “shat by which any 
thing is accompanied. E. g . ᾿Ἐβοήϑησαν τοῖς αἰβριδῆαιν ἑαυτῶν 
TE πεντακοσίοις καὶ siikors ὁπλίταις καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων 
μυρίοις, they assisted the Dorians with one thousand five 
hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thousand 
of their allies. 


The nouns, of which the dani may thus be used, are ahiefly 
the following : ἱππεύς, ναῦς, See πεζός, πεϊταστής, στόλος, 
στρατιώτης, στρατὸς... 


Nore 1. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da- 
tive of αὐτός. E. g. Τριήρεις avtois πληρώμασι διεφϑά- 
ρησαν, galleys were destroyed with every thing on board. 


Note 2. Sometimes the preposition σύν is found before this 
dative. E. g. Ἔλεγον αὐτὸν ὑποπρῆσαι πάσας αὐτῇ σὺν πόλι, 
they said that he burned them all together with the city. 


§ 200. 1. Frequently the dative, in connection with a 
passive form, denotes the subject of the action. E, g. 


Προσπόλοις φυλ ἄσσεται, He is taken care of by the 
servants, the active construction of which is πρόσπολοι 
φυλάσσουσιν αὐτόν, The servants are taking care of him 
(§ 163. 1. 

Δοιοῖσι κασιγνήτοισι δαμέντε, Being slain by two 
brothers. 

Nore 1. The preposition ὑπό is often used before this dative. E. g. “Os 
ὑπὸ Τυδεΐδῃ συκχιναὶ κλονέοντο φάλαγγες Bok thus were the close ranks 
of the Trojans routed by Tydides. : 

2. The dative after verbal adjectives ἴῃ τος and τεὸς & 132. 
1, 2) denotes the subject of the action. E. σ, Εἴπερ τιμᾶσϑαι 
Διμάδμι, ὠφελητέα σοι ἢ πόλις ἐστίν, if thou wishest to be hon- 
ored, thou must benefit the state. 


226 SYNTAX. [ $$ 201 -- 208, 


“So when the neuter of the verbal in τεὸς is equivalent to δεῖ 
with the infinitive (ὁ 162. N. 1), Ov γυναικῶν οὐδέποϑ᾽ ἔσϑ᾽ 
ἡττητέα ἡμῖν, we must never be conquered by women, a 
ἡττητέα ἡμῖν is equivalent to δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἡττᾶσϑαι. 


Note 2. When the verbal in τεὸν is equivalent to δεῖ with 
the infinitive, the accusative is often used instead of the dative. 
The accusative in this case denotes the subject of the infini- 
tive zmplied in the verbal adjective (ᾧ 159. Ν. 1.) E. g. Οὔτε 
μισϑοφορητέον ἄλλους ἢ τοὺς στρατευομένους, ΠΟΥ͂ 
must others, than, those who serve in the army, receive wages, 
where just apocarior is equivalent to δεῖ. μισϑοφορεῖν. 


§ 201. The dative often answers to the ques- 
tion AT WHAT TIME? WHEN? E. g. 


Ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασίλεύρ, The king did 
not fight on that day. 


Nore 1. Sometimes this dative depends on ρ E. g. ἢ δ᾽ iy Parser on 
this day, to-day. 


Nore 2. os ae the dative is ὩΑΣ ΑΚ ΑΤ. to the genitive 
absolute (§ 192). Εὶ - Ποιήσαντι Φρυνίχῳ δρᾶμα Midy- 
του ἅλωσιν καὶ δι data αγτι ἐς δάκρυα ἔπεσε τὸ ϑέητρον, when 
Phrynichus wrote a play, sntitled, The igs tae of Miletus, 
and acted it, the spectators wept. 


§ 202. The dative often answers to the question IN WHAT 
PLACE ? WHERE! KE. g: Maoadave or ἦμεν, ἐδιώκομεν, when 
we were at Marathon; we ᾿ϑοαιάαρρ (the enemy). 


δ 2038. The dative is put after the following 
PREPOSITIONS ἢ 


"Augi, about, on, concerning. .E. g.°Aug?t πὶ ευραῖς,. about 
the sides. ᾿Αμφὶ τραπέζαις, on the tables, Augi yv- 
ναικί, about (that is, for the sake of ) a woman. 

Ave, upon, only in the poets. 

Ἔν, in, αἱ. E. g. Ἔν τούτῳ τῷ τόπῳ, in this place. 

Sometimes ἐν is found before a genitive, the noun, to 
which it belongs, being understood. E. δ. Ἔν “Ardou, 80. 
δόμοις, in the palaces of Hades, simply in Hades. 

"Ent, upon, on account of, on condition’ that. Ἐπὶ τῷ γελᾷς ; ; 
what dost thou laugh at? Ἐπὶ τοῖσδε τοὺς πρέσβεις ἐπ᾽ 
ἄριστον καλῶ, On this condition I invite the ambassadors — 
to dinner, 


$$ 204, 205.] VOICES. 90" 


Mite, among, with, only i in the poets. “Ope sv εἰδῶ, ὅσσον 
ἊΝ μετὰ πᾶσιν ἀτιμοτάτη ϑεύς εἶμι, that I may well 
now, how much I am the most unhonored goddess of 
all. 
Taga, at, by the side of, with. 17 aoe | gol, with thee, at thy 
house. ᾿ 
Περί, about, on account of, for. Περὶ ξίφει, about (on) 
the sword. Περὶ γὰρ. dis ποἰϊμένι λαῶν, for he feared 
for the shepherd of the people. 
Πρός, with, in addition to. Πρὸς ool, with thee. πρὸς 
τούτοις, in addition to these things. 
Σύν, with, by means of. Σὺν σοὶ, with thee. Σὺν μάχαις, 
by means of battles. 
“γπό, under. “Ὑπὸ tote Ov γαμένοισιν ὦν, being under the 
powerful. 
In connection with passive verbs, imo means by. Ὑπὸ 
Τυδείδη κλονέοντο᾽ eet the ranks were routed by 
Tydides. 


VOCATIVE. 


§ 204. 1. The vocative forms no part of a 
proposition. It.is used simply 1 in addressing a sper 
son or thing.. E. g. 


Eixs, Διὸς ϑύγατερ, πολέμου, Depart, μοί of Jupiter, 
Srom war, 5 


2. The vocative is often put after the INTERJECTIONS ὦ, ἰώ. 
E. g iD ᾿Αχιλεῦ, O Achilles. | 


«- 


VOICES. 
ACTIVE. 


§ 205. 1. The active voice comprises the greater num- 
ber of transitive or active, and intransitive or neuter, verbs, 
E. g. κόπτω, cut; τρέχω, run. 


Nore 1. The accusative of the reflesiiva pronoun. is fre- 
quently omitted; in which case the verb has the appearance 
of an intransitive verb, E. g. ἐλαύγω se. Sania, teapel: myself, 
proceed, march. 


‘5 


- 


* 228 


Seams. 


[ $ 205. 


Nort 2. The cation and pluperfect active of the following 
verbs borrow the signification of the passive or middle, 


“AAIZKN, capture, ἁλίσκομαι, 
“am captured, ἑάλωκα, have 
been captured. 

βρυχάομαι, roar, βέβρυχα, roar. 

TITN 2, produce, γίγνομαι, am 
produced, become, γέγονα, 
am. ah} 

δαίω (transitive), burn, δαίομαι 
(intransitive), burn, δέδηα, 
burn. 

4AM, teach, δέδαα, have Sari 
ed. 

δέρκομαι, 866; δέδορκα, 866. 

᾿ἐγείρω, raise, ἐγείφομαι, raise 
myself, rise, éyenyoga, am 
awake. But the first per- 


fect ἐγήγερκα means have __ 


raised. 


éosinw, demolish, ἐρήριπα, am 
demolished. 


ἵστημι, cause to stand, ἵσταμαι, 


cause myself to stand, stand, 
ἕστηκα, ἕσταα, stand. But 
the later form ἕστακα means 
have placed. 

κεύϑω (transitive), hide, κέκευ-- 
Soe (intransitive), hide. 3 

κήδω, afflict, κήδομαι, care for, 
κέχηδα, care for. 

μαίνω, madden, μαίνομαι, ame 
mad, μέμηνα, am mad, rave. 

μηκάομαι,. bleat, μέμηκα, bleat. 

μυχάομαι, bellow, ae bel- 
low, . 


oly, open, οἴγομαι, am opened, 
ἔῳγα, Stand open. But the 
first perfect Zoya means have 
opened, 


δλλῦμι, destroy, ὄλλυμαι, perish, 


“Chola, have perished. But 
the first _ perfect ὁλώλεκα 
means have destroyed. 

δρνῦμι, rouse, ὄρνυμαι, 
ὄρωρα, have arisen. 

πείϑω, persuade, πείϑομαι, am 
persuaded, πέποιϑα, confide 
in, trust. 

πήγνυμι, fiz, πήγνυμαι, am fir 
ed, πέπηγα, stand fast. 

ῥήγνῦμι, tear, ἔῤῥωγα, am torn 

to pieces. 

σβέννῦμι, extinguish, σβέννυμαι, 
am extinguished, ἔσβηκα, am 
extinguished. 


rise, 


σήπω (transitive), to rot, σήπο-- 


μαι (intransitive), to rot, 
σέσηπα, to be rotten. 

σκέλλω, cause to wither, σκέλλο-- 
μαι (intransitive), wither, 
,ἔσκληκα, am withered. 

τήκω (transitive), melt, τήκομαι 
-(intransitive), melt, τέτηκα; 
am melted. | 

φαΐνω, make appear, φαίνομαι, 
appear, . πέφηνα, have ap- 
peared. ᾿ 

φύω, produce, φύομαι, am pro- 
duced, πέφυκα, πέφυα, am. 


Remark. Sometimes the perfects wimran yes from σλήσσω, and ¢ ἔπ; 
from φϑείρω, take the signification of the passive. 


Nore 3. When the verb is both transitive and intransitive, 
the first. perfect is transitive, and the second perfect (if there 


be any), intransitive. 


Ἦν g. πράσσω, transitive, do, has 1 perf. 


πέπραχα, have done; but πράσσω, intrendititaas am or do, has 


2 perf. MET ON YO. 


Πὰν ΜΝ δ 
ee 


§ 206] VOICES. 229° 


Note 4. The second aorist active of the following verbs 
takes the signification of the passive or middle. 


“AAISKL, ἁλίσκομαι, ξάλων, WAS μυκάομαι, ἔμυκον, belipived. 


captured. σβέννῦμι, σβέννυμαι, ἔσβην, was 
δέρκομαι, ἔδρακον, saw. extinguished, 
ἐρείκω (transitive), break, ἤρι- σπκέλλω, σκέλλομαι, ἔσκλην, with- 
κον (intransitive), broke. ered. 
ἐρείπω, ἐρείπομαι, ἤριπον, fell im, φύομαι, ἔφῦν, was produc 
down. ed, am. But the first aorist 
ἵστημι, ἵσταμαι, ἔστην, stood. ἔἔφυσα means 7 produced. 


μηκάομαι, ἔμακον, bleated. 


2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause (one) 
to do any thing, belong to the active voice. E. g. yevo, cause 
to taste ; μιμγήσκω, cause to remember, remind. 


PASSIVE. 


§ 206. 1. The passive takes for its subject that which 
was the immediate object of the active (§ 163.1), That, 
which was subject-nominative in the active ᾿ς 157), becomes 
genitive in the passive, and depends on ὕπό, παρά, πρός, OF ἐξ. 
E. g. 3 

Ἡμεῖς ἐξαπατώμεϑα ὑπὸ τῶν πρέσβεων, We are 

completely deceived by the ambassadors. The active con- 
struction of this example would be Οἱ πρέσβεις ἐξαπατῶσιν 
ἡμᾶς, Ihe ambassadors are completely deceiving us. 


2. The dative without a preposition is often used instead of 


the genitive with ὑπό, particularly in connection with the per- 


fect and pluperfect passive. E. g. 


Εἴρητο ταῦτα τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ, These thing's had been: 
said by Euthydémus, equivalent to εἰρήκει ταῦτα ὃ Εὐϑύ- 
δημος, Euthydémus had said these things. _ 


Remark. The context will determine whether a dative in- connection with ἃ: 
passive verb denotes the subject (§ 200) or the object (§ 196) of that verb. 


3. When the active is followed by two cases, the 
passive retains the latter. LE. g. 


Ὑπὸ Διὸς ἵἹπποσύνας ἐδιδάχϑης, Thou wast taught 
horsemanship by Jove, the active construction of which 
would be Ὃ Ζεὺς ἱπποσύνας σε ἐδίδαξεν, Jove taught thee, 
horsemanship, (§ 165.) 


20 


-- «“ῳ,ἐῷ 


290 SYNTAX, [ᾧ 207. 


Εἴργεται τῶν νομίμων ὕπό τινος, He is ἡὐδμρενρις of 
privileges by somebody , the active construction of which 


would be Eigysu τις αὐτὸν τῶν rOLiuaits Somebody deprives 
him of privileges, (δ 180. 2.) 


Nore 1. The object, which was in the genitive or dative, is 
sometimes made the subject of the passive. Εἰ g. Ἐκεῖνος 
κατεψηφίσϑη, he was condemned, (Ὁ 183..2.) Οἱ dane 
δαιμόνιοι ἀπιστοῦνταν ὑπὸ πάντων Πελοποννησίων, the 
Lacedemonians are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians, the 
active construction of which would be πάντες Piahoworeqiie 
ἀπιστοῦσι τοῖς Auxsdoimoriors, (δ 196.2.) — 


Note 2. The aorist passive frequently has the signification 
of the aorist middle. In such cases the aorist middle is either 
rare or obsolete. Εἰ. g. ἀπαλλάσσω, deliver, ἀπηλλάγην, delivered 
myself, not was delivered. 


MIDDLE. 


§ 207. 1. The middle is often equivalent to the active 
followed by the accusative of the reflexive pronoun. E, g. 


γίπτομαι equivalent to γέίπτω ἐμαυτόν, wash myself. 

So ἀγάλλομαι, ἀναρτάομαι, ἀπάγχομαι, ἀπέχομαι; ἐνδύομαι, 
κείρομαι, κτενίζομαι, λούομαι, ξυράομαι, περαιόομαι, παρασκευάξο- 
μαι, and some others. 


/ When the active is followed by two cases, middle verbs of 
’ this class retain the latter. Εἰ g. Ἐνυδύεται τὸν ϑώρακα, 


he putson the cuirass, of which the active construction would 
be Ἐνδύει ἑαυτὸν τὸν Bieta, (ὃ 165.) 

Nore 1, The accusative after-xsigouas, regasdopo, φοβέομεαι, and some others, 
is properly speaking synecdochical (§ 167). - 

Nore 2. Some middle verbs of this class ( δ᾽ 207. 1) have apparently be- 
come intransitive. E. g. ἔλπω, cause to hope, tagouas:, cause myself to hope, 
simply hope; πλάζω, cause to wander, κϑήζεμν cause myself to wander, 
simply wander. 

2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active ᾿ 
followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun. In this case 

_the middle is used ἐκοινονν. E. δ: 


Ποιεῖσϑαι τὴν εἰρήνην, To make a peace for one’s self. 
But ποιεῖν τὴν εἰρήνην, To make a peace for others. 
Παρασκευάζο wat τι, 1 prepare something for myself. 
© Βαϊ Παρασκευάζω τι, I prepare something for somebody. 


ᾧ 207.] VOICES. 231. 


3. The middle is sometimes used transitively to denote that 
the object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of 
the verb. KE. g. 


Χρύσης ἦλϑε λυσόμενος ϑύγατρα, Chryses came in order to 
ransom his own daughter. 


Norte 3. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, the reflexive pronoun is an- 
nexed to a middle verb used transitively (§ 207. 2,3). E. g. Téyeap- 
far ἐμαυτῷ ταῦτα, I have written these things for myself. 


4, Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the corresponding 
active with the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. λοιδορούμεϑα equiva- 
lent to λοιδοροῦμεν ἀλλήλοις, we are reviling one another ; but 
λοιδορούμεϑα, in the passive, would mean we are reviled by 
others. 7 


5. Sometimes the middle is used transitively to express an 
action which takes place at the command of the subject of the 
proposition. KE. g. 

᾿Ἐδιδαξάμην σε, I caused thee to be taught, I have given 

thee an education. But ᾿Εδίἰδαξά os, [ taught thee. 


Nore 4. Frequently the middle does not seem to differ from 
the active. E.g. ἰδέσϑαι, in Homer, is equivalent to ἰδεῖν, 
to see. 2 


Note 5. The future middle is often equivalent to the future 
active. In such cases the future active is either rare or obsolete. 
E. g. ϑαυμάζω, admire, ϑαυμάσομαι, shall admire, not shall 
admire myself. 


Verbs, of which the future middle is equivalent to the future’ 
active : ἀγνοέω, ᾷδω, ἀκούω, ἁμαρτάνω, ἀπαντάω, ἀπολαύω, βα- 
δίζω, βαίνω, βιόω, βλώσκω, βοάω, γελάω, γηράσκω, γιγνώσκω, δά- 
HYD δαρϑάνω, JETI, διδράσκω, 4PAML, ἐγκωμιάζω, EIAN, 
εἰμί am, EAETOR, ἐπαινέω, ἐπιορχέω, ϑαυμάξω, ϑέω γε, ϑηράω, 
ϑηρεύω, ϑιγγάνω, ϑνήσκω, ϑρώσκω, κάμνω, κιχάγω, κλαίω, κλέπτω, 
κολάζω, λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, μανϑάνω, γέω Swim, οἰμώξω, ὄμνυμι, 
fio fi οὐρέω, παίζω, πάσχω, πηδάω, πίπτω, πλέω. TIVE πγίγω, 

δέω flow, OLY HO), σιωπάω, σκώπτω, σπουδάζω, συρίζω, τρέχω, τρώ- 
γὼ τωϑάζω, φεύγω, χέζω, χωρέω, and some others. 


Nore 6. Sometimes the future middle. is equivalent to the 
future passive. E. g. ὠφελέω, benefit, ὠφελήσομαι, shall be 
benefited, not shall benefit myself. 


Verbs of which the future middle is equivalent to the future 


232 3 SYNTAX. [δῷ 208, 209. 


passive : ἀδικέω, ἀπαλλάσσω, βλάπτω, γυμνάζω, ξημιόω, προτιμάω, 
τρέφω, φυλάσσω, and some others. ; 


Nore 7. The aorist middle is in a few instances equivalent to the aorist pas- 
sive. E. g. λείπω, leave, truxouny, was left, not left myself. 


_DEPONENT VERBS. 


§ 20 5. Deponent verbs are those, which are used only in 
the passive or middle voice. They are called deponent passive 
or deponent middle, according as their aorist is taken from the 
passive or middle. In respect to signification, they are either 
transitive or intransitive. E. g. 

ἐπιμελέομαι, take care of, ἐπεμελήϑην, is a deponent passive. 

ἐργάζομαι, work, εἰργασάμην, is a deponent middle. 

Norr 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the aorist middle. 
E. g. δύναμαι, am able, ἠδυνήθην, in Homer Burncduny. 

Nore 2. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also a passive 
signification. Εἰ, g. ἐργάζομαι, work, perf. εἴογασμαι; have worked, sometimes 
have been worked. 

Nore 3, Sometimes the aorist passive of a deponent verb has a passive signi- 


fication ; in which case the aorist middle follows the present. E. g. κασαψη- 
φίζομαι, condemn, καφεψηφίσθην, was condemned, xurespngicdpny, condemned, 


TENSES. 


PRESENT, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE, 


~§209. 1. The presenT INDICATIVE expresses an ac- 
tion or being which is going on now. Εἰ. g. γράφω, I am 
writing. 3 

The present in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative, 
imperative, and infinitive) and in the participle expresses a 
continued action. Its time in this case is determined by the 
context. E. g. Ἤκουσα ὅτι Περικλῆς πολλὰς ἐπῳδὰς ἐπέσται- 
το, ἃς ἐπάδων τῇ πόλει ἐποίεν αὐτὴν φιλεῖν αὐτόν, I heard 
that Pericles knew many enchantments, which singing to the 
city he made it love him.. 


Note 1. The present is frequently used for the aorisé in an 
animated narration, in which the past is represented as present. 
E. g. Παΐει κατὰ τὸ στέρνον, καὶ τιτρώσκει διὰ τοῦ ϑώρα- 
noc, he strikes (him) in the breast, and wounds him through the 
cuirass, where παΐει, τιτρώσκει, stand for ἔπαισε, ἔτρωσε. 


§ 209. | | TENSES. | | / 233 


Nors 2. The present of ἥκω has the force of the perfect, have come. The 
imperfect of this verb-has the force of the pluperfect, had come. 


Nore 3. Sometimes the present has the force of the future. E. g. εἶμι 
regularly means shall go, and sometimes am going. 


2. The perrecr in all the moods and in the participle eX- 
presses an action which is now completed. E, g. γέγραφα, I 
have written. 


Nore 4. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of 
the present. In this case the pluperfect has the signification 
of the imperfect. E. g. εἴκω, seem, ἔοικα, Seem. 


Verbs, of which the perfect has the signification of the 
present, are ἄγνυμι, ἀνοίγω, ἀνώγω, βρουχάομαι, γίγνομαι, LRN, 
δαίω burn, JEIN, δέρκομαι, ἐγείρω (only the 2 perf. » ἔϑω, 
ELAN, εὔκω, ἔλπω, ἵστημι, κλάζω, κράζω, κτάομαι, λάσκω, μάω, 
μαίνω, μέλω, μηκάομαι, μιμνήσκω, μυκάομαι, πείϑω (only the 
2 perf.), ῥήγνυμι, δώννυμι, τρίζω, φύω. 

Note 5. The perfect is sometimes used for the present to express ἃ cus- 


tomary action. E. g. Ὁ χρασῶν ἅμα πάντα cuvieraxs, the conqueror 
takes possession of every thing. 


Note 6. The perfect is sometimes used for the future to express the rapidity 
or certainty of an action. E. g. "OdrwdAas, εἴ σε ταῦτ᾽ ἐρήσομαι πάλιν, 
thou shalt certainly perish, if I ask thee aguin the same question. Ν 


Nore 7. The second person of the perfect imperative is 
rarely used, except in verbs of which the perfect has the 
signification of the present (§ 209. N. 4). E. 8. Κράζω, 
κέχραγα, κέκραχϑι cry out; μιμνήσκω, μέμνημαι, μέμνησο 76- 
member thou. 


Norte 8. The third person of the perfect passive imperative 
of any verb may be used to denote the complete termination — 
of an action. E. g. Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν mexalodo ὑμῖν, now you 
have had sport enough, or let there be no more joking about this, 


3. The PLUPERFECT expresses an action which was come ἡ 
pleted in past time. E. g. ἐγεγράφειν, I had written, implying 
that there was a time when I could say “ I have written.” 


Nore 9. In the old writers (as Homer), the pluperfect sometimes has the 
force of the aorist, and sometimes of the imperfect. E. g. (Il. 5, 66) βεβλή- 
xs: for ἔβαλε, from βάλλω, strike ; (Tl. 9, 671) δειδέχασο, they welcomed, from 
déxouas. See also above (§ 209. N. 4.) 


4. The rurure in all the moods and in the participle eX- 
presses an action or event which will take place. Εἰ, g. γράψω, 
1 shall or will write. 

20 * 


a ‘ 
rs 
τὸς 


BA SYNTAX. [$§ 210 — 212. 


Nore 10. The future is often used to denote a probable 
occurrence. Εἰ g. Φήσεις νομίζεσθαι σὺ παιδὸς τοῦτο τούργον 
εἶναι, you will probably say, that this is κοΝ ΣΉ ΒΟῸΣ as the busi- 
ness of a child. 


IMPERFECT. 


§ 210. The imperfect expresses a continued past action. 
. 5. ἔγραφον, I was writing, not simply I wrote. 


Nore 1. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt not brought to a 
successful conclusion. E. g. (Herod. 1, 68) Ἔ μισϑοῦτο «τὴν αὐλήν, he 
tried to hire the court-yard. ~ 

Nore 2, The imperfect frequently denotes a customary ac- 
tion. E. g. Τοὺς πολίτας ped onlwy ἐξέπεμπον, they 
were accustomed to send out the citizens armed. ~ 


Nore 3..The imperfect is frequently used for the aorist, 
especially | in Homer and Herodotus. E. g. Tore δὴ Θεμιστο- 
κλέης κεῖνόν τε. καὶ τοὺς Kogw ious πολλά τε καὶ κακὰ ἔλεγε, 
then Themistocles said many and bad things both about him 
and about the Corinthians. 


‘Nore 4. The imperfect ἦν (from siz/) sometimes stands for ἐσσί. E. g. 
Κύπρις οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἦν Ssés, Cypris then is not a goddess (as we thought). 


THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 


’ a § Qi. The third future passive expresses a completed 
| Ἣ action, the consequences of which will be permanent in future 
.* ‘time. In other words it transports that which is already com- 
vo: pleted to a future time. E. g. ἐγγράφω, ἐγγεγράψομαι 1 shall 
Ἂ ᾧ remain enrolled, implying that I have already been enrolled. 


Γ Z Nore 1. The third future is the natural future of verbs whose perfect has the 
nia signification of the present (ὃ 209. N. 4). E. g. xrdopas, κέκτημαι, κεκτή- 
gouas shall possess. 
Norte 2. In many instances the third future does not differ 
in signification from the common future passive. Εἰ g. δέω, 
bind, δεδήσομαι, shall be bound. | 


Nore 8. The third future in some instances expresses the rapidity or cer- 
tainty of a future action. E, 8: πράσσω, πεπράξεται, it shall ον be 
done. 


AORIST. 


5 212. 1. The aorist in the indicative and participle 
_ expresses a transient past action, without any reference to 


K 


§ 2138. ] MOODS. 235 


another action. It simply narrates that which took place. 
E. g. ἔγραψα, I wrote, not I was writing. 


2. The aorist in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative, 
imperative, and infinitive) expresses a momentary action, its 
time being determined by the context. E. g. eg? πλείονος 
ἐποιήσατο εὐορκεῖν, ἢ χαρίσασϑαν τῷ δήμῳ παρὰ τὸ δίκαιον, 
he thought more of being just than of pleasing the multitude at 
the expense of justice. 


Remark. We see then that. the present in the dependent moods (ὃ 209. 1) ; 
marks a continued action; the aorist in these moods marks a momentary action ; 


and this is all the difference between these two tenses in the dependent moods. 


Norte 1. The Greeks often use the aorist indicative and parti- 
ciple where, properly speaking, the perfect or pluperfect should 


be used. It must not be inferred, however, from this that the 
aorist may express the time marked. by the perfect or pluper-— 


fect. E. g. (Aristoph. Νὰ. 288-9) Κατάβηϑ᾽ ὡς ἐμὲ, ἵνα μ᾽ 


ἐχδιδάξης, ὧν meg οὕνεκ᾽ ἐλήλυϑα. SRK. Hitec δὲ κατὰ τί; 


Come down to me, to teach me those things for which I have 
come. Soc. What have you come for? where ἠλϑὲς is parallel 
with ἐλήλυϑα. 


Note 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the present 
to express a-customary action. E. g. .4λλ᾽ an’ ἐχϑρῶν δῆτα 
πολλὰ μανϑάνουσιν οἱ σοφοί. Παρὰ μὲν οὖν φίλου ov μάϑοις 
ἂν τοῦϑ᾽, ὃ δ᾽ ἐχϑρὸς εὐθὺς ἐξηνάγκασεν, But the wise learn 
many. things from their enemies. Now from a friend you 
might not learn this; but the enemy (as a common thing ) com- 
pels you to learn 2t, 

Nore 3. The aorisét is used for the fuéure to denote the 
rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. ᾿πωλόμεσϑ᾽ ao, 
εἰ κακὸν προσοίσομεν νέον παλαιῷ, then we are undone, if we 
add a new evil to an old one. 


Nore 4. The aorist of the verbs ἀσοσσύω, despise, ysrdw, twaiviw, ἥδοριαι, 
and a few others, is, in conversation, often used for the present, in order to 


express a decided feeling of admiration; contempt, or pleasure. E. g.“Hodny 


ἀσειλαῖς» it amuses me to hear (your) threats. 


MOODS. 


INDICATIVE. 


§ 213. 1. The indicative is used in independent propo- 
sitions. E. g. Ὃ δράκων ἐστὲ μακρόν, the dragon is a long 
thing. , / ; ΄ » 
Pa a | ; , Ζ Pr “ἡ 2; S batil (FC 
νυ, Ae AVY” ; 


3 ited 
iy 


ζ 
7 


i 


᾿ , ΄ . é “ὦ "» Ο(' ,ο(ὺ =, ee 4 « Ἄν 
Ong. gi ΚΣ ΕΝ 10 £4 f° . «ee 


Ort 


Pe 


‘¢ 


236 SYNTAX. - . [ὃ 218. 


2. The indicative may be put after tnterrogative and relative 
words (§§ 68: 71: 73: 123), E. g. Ti ποιεῖς; what art 
thou doing? Oide τί βούλεται, he knows what (it) wants. 
Ὃ ἀνὴρ, ὃς τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίησε, the man who made this. 


8. The indicative may be put after the following particles: 
si, of, whether ; ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, after, when ; ὅτι, that, because ; 
we, that ; ὥστε, so that. 


Remark. In a sentence containing a condition and con- 
sequence or conclusion, the former is called protasis, and the 
latter apoposis. ‘The protasis begins with the particle εἰ, if. 


4, The indicative may be used in conditional propositions. 
E. g. dewe πεισόμεσϑα, εἴ σιγήσομεν, If we shall keep 
silence we shall suffer terrible things, where si σιγήσομεν is the 
protasis and δεινὰ πεισόμεσϑα the apodosis. (ὃ 213. R.) 


5. When the condition and the consequence are both past 
actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the 
apodosis. In this case the apodosis contains the particle dy. 
E. g. 

Οὗτοι εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ayadol, οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον, 
Sf they had been good men, they would never have suffered 
these things. . | 

Οὐκ ay προέλεγεν, εἶ μὴ ἐπίστευσεν ἀληϑεύσειν, Had 
he believed that he should prove a false prophet, he would 
not have predicted. | | 

Nore 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis, especially in the 
epic writers. Εἰ g. Καὶ νύ κεν ἔνϑ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Αἰνείας, εἰ μὴ 
ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ νόησε Διὸς Suydrne ᾿Αφροδίτη, and now Aineas, king of men, had 
perished, had not Venus, daughter of Jove, quickly perceived. 

Nore 2. Sometimes ἄν is omitted in theapodosis. E.g. Ei yao ἦν ἅπασι 
πρόδηλα τὰ μέλλοντα ψενήσεσϑψαι, οὐδ᾽ οὕτως ἀποστατίον τῇ πόλει σούτων ἦν, 
Sor if those things, which were to happen, had been manifest to all, the city 
ought not even then to have given these things up. 


Nore 3. The particle ἀν may accompany all the tenses of 
the indicative, without any protasis expressed. E. g. Efov- 
λόμην μὲν ἂν οὐκ ἐρίζειν ἐνθάδε, I could have wished not to 
be contending here. Ov yoo ἂν ἥψατ᾽ αὐτῶν, he could not 
have touched them. Ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης av, Oinuagtynxer, 80 
that he would have missed the peace. ‘Q¢ σκῆψιν ἂν ἀγὼν 
οὗτος οὐκ ἐσδέξεται, for this contest cannot possibly admit 
of any evasion. 

Norte 4. The particles ὅπως; how, in order that, ὄφρα, in 
order that, μή, lest, and the double negative ov μή, not, are 


Ν A 


§ 2141] Moons. 237. 


frequently put before the future indicative. | E. g. (Herod. 2, 
121, 2) ᾿ποτάμνειν αὐτοῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν, ὅκως μὴ προσαπο- 
ἀξόει καὶ ἐκεῖνον, to cut off his head, lest he might bring 
destruction upon him also. 


N oTE 5, Sometimes the future indicative with ὅπως. and 
οὐ μή supplies the place of an emphatic imperative. E. g. 
Ὅπως δὲ τοῦτο μὴ διδάξεις μηδένα, but see that you do not 
communicate this to anybody. Ov μὴ dy ρήσεις, you shall 
not talk nonsense. 

In such cases it is customary to supply the verb 6 ὅρα, ‘see, ΟΥ̓ 
σκόπει, consider. 


Norte 6. The historical tenses of the indicative are some- 
times put after ive, ὥς, or μή Jest, in which case the leading 
proposition also contains an historical tense. Εἰ. g. Τύριον 
οἶδμα λιποῦσ᾽ ἔβαν, ty ὑπὸ δειράσι Παρνασοῦ κατενάσϑην, 
leaving the Tyrian surge, I came in order to dwell under 
the summits of Parnassus. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


§ 244. 1. The subjunctive is put after the following 
particles : 


ἐάν, ἂν, ἢν, ἀ μή, lest. 

ἐπειδάν, ἐπάν, ἐπήν, when, after: ὅπως, ὡς, that, in order that. 
ἔστε, until. ὄφρα, synonymous with ἵνα or 
ἕως, until. ὅπως. 

iva, that, in order that. πρίν, before. 


2. The sobiuictries is put also after interrogative and Polis. 
tive words (§§ 68: 71: 73: 128). 


3. The verb of the proposition upon which the subjunctive 
depends expresses time PRESENT Or FUTURE. (δῷ 209. 1, 2, 4.) 
E. g. 

“Avovys τὴν ὕλην iy ἐξέλθω, Open the forest, that I may 

come out. (ὃ 209. 1. ) 

Δέδοικά σε μὴ τε δέῃ, Lam afraid thou wilt need 

stripes. (§ 209. N. 4.) 
Εἰσόμεϑα αὐτίκα, ἂν ποιή σωμὲν wyogor,. We shall im- 
mediately know, if we make a noise. (§ 209. 4.) 
᾿Εκβίβασον αὐτὴν, iva ϑεασώμεϑα τὴν ἀηδόνα, Bring 
her out, that we may see the pigheegete: (ὃ 212. 2.) 


238 “ae SYNTAX, [ὃ 215. 


4. The interrogative and relative words, and the particles 
ἔστε, ἕως, ἵνα, ὅπως, ὄφρα, πρίν, (§ 214. 1, 2,) in connection 
with the subjunctive, are generally accompanied by the particle 
dy. KE. g. | ® 

Zoe ov ταῦτα xadsic, ἃ ἂν ψυχὴν ἔχῃ; Do you not call 
animals those which have life 3 

Ὁπότερ᾽ ἂν ἀποκρίνηται τὸ μειράκιον, ἐξελεγχϑήσε- 
ται, Whatever answer the young man may give, he. will 
be confuted. 

‘Asi ποιοῦμεν ταῦϑ᾽ ἑκάστοϑ᾽, ὅταν τινὰ γνῶμεν πονηρῶν byt” 
ἐραστὴν πραγμάτων, ἕως ἂν αὐτὸν ἐμβάλωμεν εἰς κακὸν, 
ὅπως ἂν εἰδ ἢ τοὺς ϑεοὺς δεδοικέναι, We always do these 
things, when we find out that a person is a lover of evil 
deeds, until we place him in a dreadful situation, that he 
may learn to fear the gods. 


Nore 1, The subjunctive often depends on a verb express- 
ing time past, contrary to the rule (ὃ 214. 3); in other words, 
it stands for the optative (§ 216). This substitution generally 
takes place when emphasis is required ; or when the verb after 
the particle denotes an action which is continued to the time 
of the speaker. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 26-7) Κτανὼν ἐς οἷδμ᾽ 
ἁλὸς wedix, ἵν᾽ αὐτὸς χρυσὸν ἐν δόμοις ἔχῃ, killing (me), he 
threw me into the surge, in order that he might keep the gold 
in his house. ᾿Ἐποΐέεε δὲ ἀμφότερα ταῦτα, ὡς 0 τὸ ποταμὸς 
βραδύτερος εἴη, καὶ of πλόοι ἐῶσι σκολιοὶ ἐς τὴν Βαβυλῶνα, 
she did both these things, in order that the river might be 
slower, and that the navigation up to Babylon might be 
crooked. ᾿Εγὼ φοβηϑεὶς μὴ λοιδορία γένηταν, πάλιν κατε- 
πραῦνον τὸν Κτήσιππον, I, fearing lest abusive words should 
be used, again appeased Ctesippus. * 


Nore 2. Μὴ, lest, is sometimes accompanied by ὅπως. E.g. Δέδοιχ᾽ ὅπως 
for μὴ λίαν φανῇς σοφή, I fear lest you prove to be very artful. 
Nore 3. Instead of μή, lest, with the subjunctive, ὅσιν ὅπως, or as, with 


the indicative, is sometimes used. 


_ Nore 4. Sometimes the verb, upon which py, lest, depends, is omitted. 
E. g. (Il. 22, 123: Plat. Crit. 9.) 


Nore 5. Sometimes the subjunctive is put after the particles εἰ, ἐσεί, taedy, 
ὁπότε, dre; unaccompanied by ἄν, (δ 214. 1, 4.) 


§ 25. 1. The first person plural of the subjunctive is 
often used in exhortations. E. g. Τὸν Μενέλεων μιμώμεϑα; 
let us imitate Menelaus. | 


ᾧ 216.] MOODS. ae 239 


2. The first person singular also of the subjunctive, pre- 
ceded by the imperative ays or φέρε, 15. often used in exhorta- 
tions. E. g. Φέρε ἀκούσω, let me hear. 

Nore 1. Homer uses the first person singular of the subjunctive in exhorta- 
tions without ἄγε, φέρεν or any auxiliary word. E. g. (Il. 22, 450) "Dep" 
ὅτιν᾽ Zoya τέσυκται, let me see what deeds have been done. 

3. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in questions 
of doubt, when a person asks himself or another what he is to 
do. Ἐπ g. πῶς φῶ éniotacda; how can I say that I know 3 
Εἴπω τι; may 1 say any thing ? 

Frequently the question begins with the second person of 
the present indicative of Boviowos or ϑέλω. Εἰ. g. Βούλει 
ϑῶμεν; wilt thou that we place? In such cases βούλει or 
ϑέλεις usually precedes the subjunctive. 


Norz 2. Sometimes the interrogation disappears after ϑέλες or βούλει 
(§ 215, 8). E.g. Εἶτε v1 βούλει προσϑῆς ἢ ἀφέλῃς, whether thou 
wishest to add or take away any thing. 

4. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in 
questions expressing indignation. ἘΣ: (Aristoph. Ran. 
1182-4) Αἰσχύλε, παραινῶ σοι σιωπᾷν. ΑἸΣΧ. ᾿Εγὼ σιωπῶ; 
Aischijlus, I advise thee to be silent. fiscu. Am I to be 
silent ? : ! 

Norr 3. The subjunctive i is often used after οὐ μή for the future indicative. 


EL g. Odre γίγνεται, οὔτε γέγονεν, οὐδὲ οὖν μὴ γένηται» it is not, it has not 
been, it will not be. 


In Homer, the subjunctive, with or without κέν, is sometimes equivalent to 
the future indicative. E. g. Adcouas tis’ Aidao, καὶ ἐν νεκύεσσι ἐφ stag I will 
. £0 into Hades, and shine among the dead, 


5. In prohibitions, the second person of the aorist subjunc- 
tive is used after μή and its compounds. E, g. 
Μὴ φοβηϑῆς, Fear not. 


Nore 4. The third person of the aorist subjunctive is rarely found after μή 
in prohibitions. 


OPTATIVE. 

§ 216. 1. The optative is put after the following parti- 
cles : 
εἰ, ἐξ ὅπως, ὡς, that, in order that. 
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, when, after. ὅτι, that. 
ἔστε, until. | ὄφρα, Synonymous with ἵνα or 
ἕως, until, ὅπως. 
ἵνα, that, mm order that. πρίν, before. 


μή, lest. 


940 | SYNTAX. [Ὁ 216. 


2. The optative is put also after interrogative and relative 
words (δὲ 68: 71: 73: 123). 


3. The verb of the proposition, upon which the optative 
depends, expresses time PasT. (§§ 209. 3: 210 : 212. 1.) EB. g. 


᾿Ηλαζονεύεϑ᾽ ἵνα φοβηϑείην ἐγώ, He was telling great 
stories that I might fear, or in order to scare me. . 

‘Howta δὴ ἔπειτα τίς εἴη, καὶ πόϑεν ἔλϑοι, Then he 
asked who he was, and whence he came. 


Note 1. The optative often depends on a proposition 
_ which contains a verb expressing present or future time. In 
this case it generally denotes uncertainty or probability. E. g. 
Κάλεσον τροφὸν Εὐρύκλειαν, θφρ᾽ ἔπος εἴποιμι, call nurse 
 Eurycléa, that I may say α word to her. 


ὩΣ 2. When the present is used for the aorist (§ 209. 

N. 1), it is regularly followed by the optative. This is no ex- 
ception to the rule (δ. 216.3). E. g. Βουλὴν ἐπιτεχνᾶται, 
᾿ὅπως μὴ ἁλισϑεῖεν ᾿Αϑηναῖοι, he contrives a plan which 
should prevent the Athenians from assembling. 


Nore g. Sometimes the particle ἄ ἄν accompanies the words which precede the 
optative (§ 216, 1, 2). Thus the optative is sometimes found after ἐάν, ἐπειδάν, 
ἵνα ἄν, μὴ ἄν, ὅπως ἄν, ὁπόταν, ὅταν, ὄφρα ἄν, ὡς ἄν. 


4. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that has 
been said or thought by another is quoted, but not in the 
words of the speaker. The action denoted by the optative 
may refer to Prerenily past, or future time. E. g. 


"AMEXOLYATO OTL μανϑάνοιεν of μανϑάνοντες, ἃ οὔκ 
ἐπίσταιντο, He answered that those, who learn, learn 
what they do not know. 

| Εἶπον ὅτι ϑαυμαστῶς σπουδάξοιμεν, L Said that we 
were wonderfully in earnest. 

Ἤιδη γὰρ, ὅτι ἐξ αὐτῶν καλόν τι ἀνακύψοιτο τῶν ἐρωτη- 
μάτων, For I knew that something good would come out 
of these questions. 


Nore 4. Sometimes ὅσι or ὡς is omitted before this optative (§ 216. 4). E. g. 
Ταῦτ᾽ ἀπάγγειλον πόσει oo... γυναῖκα πιστὴν δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις εὕροι, announce 
these things to my husband ; ..... and that he will find his wife faithful in the 
house. 

“Ori may be omitted also when it has already been expressed. E. g. Πρῶτον 
μὲν πρὸς ἸΤαριανούς rives ἔχεγεν, ὅς, Μήδοκος μὲν ἄνω εἴη δώδεκα ἡμερῶν 
ἀπὸ ϑαλάσσης δδόν" Σεύϑης δὲ ἄρχων corre, and Jirst he said to some 
Parians, that Medicus was up trortve days’ journey hss the sea; and (that) 
Seuthes would be. the leader, 


τ 


oo ον περ rs 


§ 217.] MOODS. 241 


Nore 5. Instead of the optative after si, ὅτι, ws, the indicative is often used. 
E. g. Προειπόντων Ses σὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐλευϑεροῦσι», having proclaimed 
that they liberate Greece, where ἐλευϑεροῖεν might have been used. 


§ 27. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a 
wish. ἘΣ, g. 


Σοὶ δὲ ϑεοὶ τόσα δοῖεν, ὅσα φρεσὶ σῇσι pevourge, And may 
the gods give thee as many things as thou longest for. 


-Nore 1. Frequently the particles εἰ, εἰ γάρ, εἴϑε, ὡς, O that, 
are placed before this optative. E.g. Ei γὰρ ἐγὼν Διὸς παῖς 
αἰγιόχοιο εἴην, O that I were a son of egis-bearing Jove! 

Homer sometimes adds χέν to these particles. 


Nore 2. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist indicative is used after the 
abovementioned particles (ὃ 217. N. 1). E. g. ES’ ἐξεκόπην»γ O that I 
had been cut off / 


Nore 3. Frequently the aorist ὥφελον (from ὀφείλω) with the infinitive follows 
the particles εἴθε, εἰ γάρ, ὡς. E.g. E7S’ ὥφελέν μοι κηδεμὼν sivas, O 
that he were my guardian. * 

Sometimes ὥφελον with the infinitive is not accompanied by any particle, 
E. g. Ὥφελε μηδεὶς ἄλλος he ψάρι κα; χαίρειν, O that no other man had 
delighted in Aristogiton / 


2. The optative (generally with the particle ov) in an in- 
dependent proposition, very often implies uncertainty, doubt, 
possibilit Ys or inclination. KE. g. 


Οὐκοῦν ἂν ἤδη τῶν ϑεατὼν τις λέγοι, Now some one of 
the spectators might (perhaps) say. 

Ἴσως οὖν εἴποιεν ἄν, They might perhaps say. 

“Ἡδέως ἂν οὖν αὐτῶν πυϑοίμην, Fain would I ask them. 

Et τις ἔροιτό με; τί γομίξω μέγιστον εἶναι τῶν Εὐαγόρᾳ 
πεπραγμένων, εἰς πολλὴν ἀπορίαν ἂν κατασταΐην, should 
any one ask me, which of the deeds of Evagoras I con- 
sider greatest, I should find myself in great perplexity. 


Nore 4. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis, and the  optative 
with ἄν, in the apodosis. E. g. Ei γὰρ μηδὲ ταῦτα οἶδα, καὶ τῶν ἀνδρασό- 
δὼν φαυλότερος ἄν εἴην, I should be more worthless than the slaves, if I did 
not know these things. 


Also the opéative is used in the protasis and the indicative in the apodosis. 
E. Bie Ods ἔδει; τῆς νυκαὸς σ΄αραγενέσϑαι πανστρατιᾷ, εἴ Th ἄρα μὴ τρῦχω- 
goin τοῖς ἐσεληλυϑόσι, who were to come in the night with the entire army, in 
case success should not attend those who had entered. (§ 213. R.) 


Nore 5. The subjunctive with ἐάν, ἄν, or ἥν is sometimes used in the pro- 
tasis, and the optative in the apodosis. i. g. Ἢν re 6 ἐχωσι τοῖς δεομένοις οἱ 
κναφῆς χλαίνας, πλευρῖτις ἡμῶν οὐδέν᾽ ἂν λάβοι, wort, if the fullers furnish 
the needy with gowns, pleurisy will never afflict any of us. (§ 213. R.) 

21 


242 SYNTAX. [δῷ 218, 219. 


3. The optative with ἄν, in an independent proposition, often 
supplies the place of the indicative. E. g. 
Οὐκ ἂν μεϑείμην tov ϑρόνου, I will not give up the throne, 
- where μεϑείμην 15 equivalent to μεϑήσομαι. 
Αὐτὸς μέντοι ἕψομαΐ τοι, καὶ οὐκ ἂν λειφϑείην, I will 
however follow thee, and I will not be left behind, where 
λειφϑείην follows ἕψομαι. 


4. Frequently the optative (with or without ἄν) has the force 
of the imperative. E. g. Hi δὲ μὴ, Χειρίσοφος μὲν 7 χοῖτο ᾿ 
τῶν δὲ πλευρῶν ἑκατέρων δύο τῶν πρεσβυτάτων στρατηγὼ ἐπι- 
μελοίσϑην, and tf not, let Chirisophus take the lead, and let 
iwo of the oldest zenerals take charge of both wings, where 
nysio Iw, ἐπιμελείσϑων, would be less polite. Agyous ἂν, you 
may speak, softer than λέγε, speak thou. 


IMPERATIVE. 


§ 28. 1. The imperative is used to express a command, 
an exhortation, or an entreaty. LE. g. 
φεῦγε, begone ! φευγέτω, let him depart, φεύγετε, depart ye, 
φευγέτωσαν, let them depart. 


2. In prohibitions the present imperative is used after μή 
and its compounds. Εἰ. σ, Πὴ λέγε ταῦτα, say not these things. 


Note 1. Sometimes μή is followed by the aorist imperative, particularly by 
the third person. Εἰ. g. Mundt σοι μελησάπω, and care not. 


Nore 2. The second person of the imperative is sometimes used for the third 
person, when the speaker is in great haste. Εἰ. g. Xages δεῦρο πᾶς ὑπηρέτης " 
woksue πᾶς τις, let every servant come hither; shoot, every one 4 

Nore 3. The imperative in connection with a relative pro- 
noun or relative adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent 
proposition after οἶσϑα (from οἶδα, know). E.g. Oiad οὖν ὃ 
δρᾶσον; knowest thou what thou must now do ? Ook ὡς 
ποίησον; dost thou know how thou must do? Οἶσϑα νῦν ἃ 
μοι γενέσθω; do you know what I desire to be done to me? 


INFINITIVE. 


§ 219. 1. The infinitive depends on a VERB, 
PARTICIPLE, OF ADJECTIVE. E. g. 


“Tutic Bovisode γενέσθαι αὐτὸν βόϊρον, Do you wish 
him to become wise 3 


ᾧ 219.] MOODS. 243 


᾿ϑηναίους πάντας μετὰ τοῦ ϑείου νομίζεις δυνήσεσθαι 
ποιῆσαι πεῤϑεσϑαΐ σοι; Do you think that you will 
be able to make all the Athenians, together with your uncle, 
follow your advice? Here πεέϑεσθϑαι depends on ποιῆσαι, 
ποιῆσαι ON δυνήσεσϑαι, and δυνήσεσϑαι ON νομίζεις. 
Δεινὸς νομιζόμενος sivas λέγειν, Being considered an 
' eloquent speaker. 


The infinitive may depend on the-verbs ἀγγέλλομαι, αἵρέομαι, 
ἀκούω, ἀναγκάξζω, ἀνίημι, ἀνώγω, ἀξιόω, ἀπαγορεύω, ἀπειλέω 
threaten, ἀπειπεῖν, ἄρχω begin, ῥπ Ἄρα δέομαι, διανοέομαι, 
διδάσκω, δοκέω, δύναμαι, ἐάω, ἐθέλω, ἔϑω, εἴδομαιν, seem, ἐλπίζω, 
ἔλπομαι," ἐπαγγέλλομαι, ἐπείγομαι, ἐπιτέλλομαι, ἐπιτρέπω, ἐπιχειρέω, 
εὔχομαι, ἔχω CAN, ἱκετεύω, κατεργάζομαι, κελεύω, κέλομαι, λέγω, 
λιλαίομαι, λίσσομαι, μαγϑάνω, μέλλω, γεμεσίξομαι, γομίζω, οἶδα, 
οἴομαι, ὄμνυμι, ὁμολογέω, δρμάω, ὀτρύνω, ὀφείλω, παραγγέλλω, 
παραινέω, παρασχευάζομαι, παράφημι, πείϑω, πειράομαι, πέφυκα 
and ἔφυν (from φύω), πιστεύω, ποιέω, προαιρέομαι, προσδοκάω, 
προσποιέομαι, προστάσσω, στυγέω, συνίημι, τολμάω, ὑπισχνέομαι, 
φαΐνομαι, φημί, and some others, 

It may depend on the adjectives ἀδύνατος, ἄξιος, δυέλάς. Ou- 
καίος, δυνατός, ἐπιτήδειος, ἕτοιμος, ἡδύς, ἱκανός, κακός, ὀξύς, πιϑα- 
γός, ῥάδιος, χαλεπός, and some others, 


2. The infinitive is often used after verbs, participles, and 
phrases, to denote a cause or motive. E. g. 


Θυέστ᾽ ᾿Αγαμέμνονι λεῖπε φορῆναι, Thyestes left at to 
Agamemnon to carry (it). 


Nore 1. Méaaw, followed by the infinitive (present, aorist, or future) of a 
verb, forms a periphrastic future. E. g. Μέλλε, riSivas, he is about to 
place. ' 

The infinitive is frequently omitted, when it can be supplied from the context. 
E. g. (Aristoph. Plut. 1100-2) Eva’ ἐμοὶ, σὺ τὴν ϑύραν ἔκοπσες οὑτωσὶ 
σφόδρα; EPM. Μὰ Δί᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἔμελλον, sc. κόπτειν, Tell me, was it you 
that knocked at the door so furiously? MER. Not 1, by μος. I was going (to 
knock). 


Nore 2. The. pronominal adjectives ποῖος, τοιόσδε, οἷος ΟΥ̓ 
οἷός τε, and τηλέκος, are sometimes followed by the infinitive, 
in which case they imply capableness.. EX. g. Οὐχ οἵός τ᾽ εἴμ᾽ 
ἀποσοβῆσαι τὸν γέλων, I cannot drive away my laughter. 


Nore 3. It has already been remarked (ᾧ 158. N. 3), that 
the omitted subject of the infinitive is frequently different from 
that of the proposition on which it depends. We remark now 
that this takes place chiefly after ajdectives, E.g. Παμφαὴς 
ἀστὴρ ἰδεῖν, a star all bright to behold, where the subject of 
idsiy would be τινὰ. 


244 SYNTAX. _ [§ 220. 


Nore 4. In narration the infinitive often seems to take the 
place of the indicative ; in which case some part of φημέ or 
λέγω may be supplied. E. g. (Herod. 1. 86) Τὸν μὲν δὴ 
ποιέειν ταῦτα, now he was doing these things, equivalent to 
Ὃ μὲν δὴ ἐποίεε ταῦτα. 

Nore 5. The infinitive of verbs signifying to go is in some 
instances omitted. E. g. (Aristoph. Ran. 1279) “Lye μὲν οὖν 
ἐς τὸ βαλανεῖον. βούλομαι, sc. ἰέναι, for my part L wish to go to 
the bath. (Id. Av. 1) ᾿οΟρϑὴν κελεύεις ; do. you command us to 
go right on? : 


Note 6. The infinitive frequently stands for the second 
person of the imperative ; in which case the imperative ἔϑελε 
ΟΥ̓ ϑέλε 18 usually supplied. E. g. Mijnote σὺ γυναικὶ ἤπιος 
εἶναι, you must never be indulgent to your wife. | 


Nore 7. The infinitive sometimes stands for the third person 
of the imperative, in which case, the subject, when expressed, 
is put in the accusative. It is thus used especially in com- 
mands and proclamations. E. g. Tevzex συλήσας φερέτω κοίλας 
ἐπὶ νῆας, σῶμα δὲ οἴκαδ᾽ ἐμὸν δόμεναι, taking my arms, let 
him carry them to the hollow ships, and let him give my body 
to be carried home. “Axovets, λεὼ, τοὺς OMAiTAaG ἀπιέναι, 
hear, ye people, the heavy-armed soldiers must retire. 


Nore 8. Sometimes the infinitive is put for the first person — 
plural of the subjunctive (ὃ 215.1), in which case δεῖ may 
be supplied. E. g. Woy ἐν τῇ ᾿Ελλάδι καταμείναντας ἡμέων av- 
τέων ἐπιμεληϑῆναι, igs the present, remaining in Greece, 
let us take care of ourselves. 


- Nore 9. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish, in which 
case δός may be supplied. E. g. Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἢ Atovta λαχεῖν, 
ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν, Father Jove, grant that the lot may fall upon 
Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus. : 


§ 220. 1. The infinitive is frequently put after words and 
phrases signifying so that, so as; especially when its connec- 
tion with the preceding clause is not very obvious. KE. g. 

Αὐτόχειρες ὠκοδόμησαν, ὥστε ϑαυμάζειν ἐμέ, They built 

it with their own hands, so that I wondered. 

Οὐ γὰρ ἔπειϑε τοὺς Χίους, ὥστε ἑωυτῷ δοῦναι γέας, For 

he could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels. 
_ The words and phrases, after which the infinitive is put, are 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, ὅσον, dum, ὥς, ὥστε, 80 that, 
80 as. : 


δ. 221.] MOODS. 245 


The infinitive is put also after words signifying before, 
before that, (aS πρίν, πρὶν ἢ.) Εἰ. g. Πρὶν τὸν νόμον rahe 
VOL, before the law was made. 


Nore 1. The infinitive with ὡς, ὅσον, ὅσα, ὅ τὶ (from ὅστις), 
is often used in parenthetical phrases. E. σις ἕπος εἰπεῖν, 
so to speak. “Qo εἰκάσαι, as one might “conjecture. “Ὡς &y 
πλέονι λόγῳ ὃ ηλῶσαι, to explain more fully. “Ὡς συνελόγτν 
εἰπεῖν, SC. λόγῳ; to express it briefly, or to be brief. “Ὅσον 
γ᾽ eu εἰδέναι, at least as far as my knowledge extends. Ὅ 
τι κἄμ᾽ εἰδέναι, for aught I know. 


Nore 2. In parenthetical phrases (ὃ 220. N. 1) ὡς is often 
omitted, in which case the infinitive appears to stand abso- 
lutely. ἘΣ. g. Ov πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, not to use many words. 
“Eg τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν, strictly speaking, to speak strictly. 

, Δοκεῖν ἐμοὶ, as tt appears to me.-'Oliyou dsiv, almost, nearly. 
Πολλοῦ δεῖν, far from tt. 


Nore 3. In phrases like’ Oliyou δεῖν, (§ 220. N. 2;) δεῖν 15 
sometimes omitted. E. g.“O δὴ ὀλίγου πᾶσαι at περὲ τὸ 
~ σῶμα ἡδοναὶ ἔχουσι, which almost all the bodily pleasures have. 


r 3. The infinitive is frequently accompanied by the particle 
ἂν, in which case it has the force of the indicative, subjunctive, 
or optative, with ἄν, (δὴ 213. 5: 214: 217.) E. g. “Eni πολ-- 
lav ἂν τις ἰδεῖν δοκεῖ μοι, tt seems to me that one mght see 
on many occasions. But’Eni πολλῶν τις ἰδεῖν δοκεῖ μοι, would 
mean 1ξ seems to me that one saw on many occasions. 


§ 221. Frequently the infinitive has the force 
of a neuter substantive ; in which case the neuter 
of the article (ὃ 141.3) commonly precedes it. E. g. 


Κρεῖττόν ἐστι τὸ σωφρονεῖν τοῦ π᾿ λυπραγμονεῖν, To 
act discreetly is better than to meddle with other men’s 
᾿ business. 
Σεμνυνόμεϑα ἐπὶ τῷ βέλτιον γεγονέναι τῶν ἄλλων, We pride 
ourselves upon being of nobler descent than others. 
᾿ Me τὸ ξένος εἶναν οὐκ av οἴει ἀδικηϑῆναι; Do you sup- 
pose that you will not be wronged, because you are a 
foreigner ? 3 


Nore 1. Frequently the infinitive with the article τοῦ is 
equivalent to the genitive denoting that on account of which 
any thing takes place (ὃ 187.1). E. g. an με ὑπολάβῃς οὐ 
πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα PORE Te λέγειν, τοῦ xotopaved γενέσθαι, 


~ 


940 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 222. 


lest you suppose that I do not argue in order that the thing 
may become evident. ads 


Nore 2. The infinitive with or without the article 7d is sometimes used in 
exclamations of surprise or indignation, in which case ἀνόησον, ἠλίθιον, εὔηϑες, 
or μωρόν ἔστι, may be supplied. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 268) Τὸ δὲ μὴ κυνέην 
οἴκοϑεν EADsiv ἐμὲ τὸν xaxodaimoy’ ἔχοντα, I, a wretch, have been foolish. 
enough to come from home without a helmet ; literally, that I miserable should 
have came from home without a helmet. 


Nore 3, The infinitive εἶναι (from εἰμί, am) seems to be superfluous in some . 


instances, particularly in connection with the adjective ἑκών, willing. E. g 
(Herodot, 7, 104) Ἑ κὥν ve sivas οὐδ᾽ ἂν μοουνομια χέοιροι, I should not fight 
even against a single man, if I had my way about i. 

So in the phrases Td σήμερον sivas, to-day. Τὰ νῦν sivas, now. Te 
σύμπαν sivas, generally, on the whole. 


Note 4. The infinitive is often put after the substantives 
ἀνάγκη, ϑέμις, ὥρα, and a few others, in which case it has the 
force of the adnominal genitive (ὃ 173). E.g.°avdyxy os 
πάντα ἐπίστασϑαι, sc. ἐστί, thou of necessity must know all 
things. Ὥρα βαδίξειν, sc. ἐστί, tt is time to go, 


PARTICIPLE. 


§ 222, 1. In general, the participle is equivalent to the 
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, preceded by a relative pro- 
noun, or by a particle signifying if, when, after, in order that, 
because, that, although. 

For the participle with the article, see above (§ 140. 3). 


2. The participle in connection with verbs signifying to 
know, to hear, to see, to perceive, to show, to relate, to remem- 
ber, to forget, te be ashamed, to rgoice, and a few others, is 
equivalent to the indicative or optative preceded by the con- 
junction ὅτι. E. g. 

Τοῦτο μέμνημαν ogo ἐπαγγελλομένω, I remember that 

you both profess this. hte 

Τοὺς βαπτιζόμενον τὸ μειράκιον, Perceiving that the 

stripling was overwhelmed. 


Verbs of this class are αἰσϑάνομαι, αἰαχύνομαι, ἀκούω, γιχνώ-: 
oxo, δείχνυμι, Sydow (also δῆλός εἰμι), διαμνημονεύω, διασαφέω, 
διαφέρω relate, ἐνϑυμέομαι, ἐξετάζω prove, ἐπιλανϑάνομαι, ἐπέστα-- 
μαι, εὑρίσκω, ἰδεῖν, κατηγορέω denote, κλύω, μανϑάνω, μέμνημαι, 
γρέω, οἶδα, ὁράω, πυνϑάνομαι, φαίνω, χαίρω, and some others, 


ὑπ aha ae 


§ 222.] PARTICIPLE, _ 247 


Nore |. The participle after σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω, [01- 
lowed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in 
the dative, or in the case with which these verbs agree. LE. g. 
Ἐμαυτῷ ξυνήδειν οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ, 1 was conscious to 
myself that T knew nothing. Πῶς οὖν ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ ξυν εἰ- 
σομαι, φεύγοντ᾽ ἀπολύσας ἄνδρα; now how shall I endure 
the thought that F have let a defendant escape? Συγγινώ- 
σκομεν αὐτοῖσι ἡμῖν οὐ ποιήσασι ὀρϑῶς, we are conscious 


of not having done right. 


3. Verbs signifying to endure, not to endure, to overlook, 
to be contented with, to be satisfied, to cease, are connected | 
with the participle. E. g. 


To δύνασϑαι διψ ὦντα .ἀνέχεσϑαι, To be able to endure 
thirst. 


Παῦσαι φλυαρῶν, Stop talking nonsense. 


Verbs of this class are ἀγαπάω am contented, ἀνέχομαι, 
ἀπαλλάσσομαι, ἄρχω begin, ἐκλείπω, ἐμπέπλαμαι,. ἔχειν ἄδην, 
κάμνω, καρτερέω, λήγω, παύω, περιοράω, τέτληκα and τλῆγαι; 
ὑπομένω, and some others. 


4. The participle is often put after the verbs διαγέγνομαι, 
διάγω, διατελέω, λανϑάνω, τυγχάνω, φϑάνω, and a few others, in 
which case the leading idea is contained in the participle. 
E. g. 

Ποιὼν διαγεγένηται, He has been doing. 

Atayo vor ward ἂν οντες, They pass their time in learning. 

Διατελοῦσι δικάζοντες, They are continually deciding 

cases. 

Aéhy ϑα ἐμαυτὸν σοφὸς ὦ » I did not know that {1 was wise. 

Τυγχάνομεν ἐπιϑυμοῦντες, We happen to be desirous. 

Φϑάνει ἀναβάς, He went up before. 


Note 2. Ἔχω is frequently followed by a participle; in 
which case the verb, from which the ‘participle comes, would 
have been sufficient. E. g. Κρύψασ᾽ ἔχεις, for ἢ ἔκρυψας, thou 
didst conceal. Εἶχε καταστρεψάμενος, for κατεστρέψατο, 
he subjugated. 

The same may be observed of οἴχομαι and the Homeric βῆ. 


E. g.’Qizseto φεύγων, he meee: Βὴ φεύγων éni πόντον, 
he fled ta the sea. 


5. The future participle is regularly put after verbs of 
motion, to express the object of the action of those verbs. ΕἸ. g. 
"Hide πρὸς τὸν ᾿4γησίλαον ἀσπασόμενος, he came to Age- 
silaus to bid him farewell. Διδάξων eu nuat, Lam going 
to show. 


248 SYNTAX. [$$ 223, 224. 


Nore 3. The present participle is used after verbs of motion, 
when the time of the action marked by it is the same as that 
of the verb. E. g. πέμπει μὲ σοι φέροντα τάσδ᾽ ἐπιστολάς, 
he sends me in order to bring these directions to thee. 


Nore 4. The adverbs αὐτέκα, ἐξαίφνης, εὐθύς, μεταξύ, ἅμα, 
are frequently followed by the participle. E. g. Μεταξὺ 
ϑύων, while he was sacrificing. Ἅμα καταλαβόντες, as 
soon-as they had overtaken (them ). 


6. The participle with the particle ἄν has the force of the 
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, with dy, (δὰ 213.5: 214: 
217.) E. g. Ta δικαίως ἂν δηϑέντα κατὰ τῆς πόλεως: those 
things which might justly be said against the state, where 
τὰ δικαίως av ῥηϑέντα is equivalent to ἐκεῖνα ἃ Sinaia ἂν δηϑείη" 
but τὰ δικαίως ῥηθέντα would mean those things which were 
justly said. 3 


ADVERB. 


δ @23.. Adverbs limit the meaning of vERBs, 
PARTICIPLES, ADJECTIVES, and other ADVERBS. 
E. g. 

Οὕτω ποιῶ, LI do so. 

Καλῶς ποιῶν, Doing well. 

‘Enityndevog πάνυ, Very convenient. 

Πάνυ καλῶς, Very well. | 


§ 224, 1. The Greek has two simple negative particles, 
ov, no, not, and μή, not. (ὃ 15. 4.) 


2. Ov expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g. 
Οὔ os κρύψω, I will not conceal it from thee. Οὐκ οἶδα, I do 
not know. Οὐχ οἷός τ᾽ εἰμί, I am not able. 

So in direct interrogations, Ov παραμενεῖς ; wilt thou not 
wait? Οὐκ ἠγόρευον; did not I say? 


3. My regularly expresses a dependent negation. Conse- 
quently it is put after the particles iva, ὅπως, ὥστε, ὡς, ὄφρα, 
ἐάν, εἰ, ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν. Also it is put after all relative words, 
when they do not refer to definite antecedents. “E. g. Οὐκ ἂν 
προέλεγε, εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευσεν ἀληϑεύσειν, had he not believed that 
he should prove a true prophet, he would not have predicted. 
"Bay δὲ τις ἐξελαύνῃ τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ μὴ δέχηται, and if any 
one shall.drive avay the magistrates, and shall not receive them. 


« 


§ 224.] ADVERB. 249 


4, My is used also in propositions containing a wish, an 
entreaty, or a prohibition. E. 9. Παυσανίης κήρυγμα ποιησάμε- 
γος, μηδένα ἄπτεσϑαι τῆς ληΐης, Pausanias proclaiming that 
no one should touch the booty. 


In prohibitions, the present imperative or the aorist subjunc- 
tive is used with μή, (δῷ 215. 5: 218. 2.) 


5. My, after verbs implying fear or anziety, signifies lest ; in 
which case it is followed by the subjunctive, optative, and some- 
times by the future indicative. (δὰ 214: 216: 213. N. 4.) 


6. 2M has also the force of an interrogative particle. E. g. 
Mn πη δοκοῦμέν σοι; do we not seem to thee? where the per- 
son asked is commonly expected to say no. But Οὔ πη doxov- 
μέν σοι; expects or presupposes the answer yes. 


Nore 1. The negative particles very often correspond to 
each other. The following are the negative formulas: 


» » ° : 
OUTE ;: οὔτε ~neither ..... nor 
ovos ..... οὐδὲ ποϊέδεογ". . 0 τ. nor 
ov ity. οὔτε WOE, τὸ nor 
» ᾿ 3 , a 
OUTOL .....- οὐδὲ neither ..... nor 
OUTOU soos οὔτε neither ..... nor 
δὲ.) de. οὐδὲ . sees OUTE not .....MOr..... nor 
οὔτε e*eee#e ov neither ΓΕ nor 
»” > , . 
οὔτε..... οὐδέ neither ....+ nor even 
, > , . 
οὔτε..... δ ud οὐδέ neither ...+. ΜΟΥ͂ e..e. ΠΟΥ͂ 
, 1 > Φ 
QUES ως τὲ οὐ neither ..... nor 
HITE. . 00+ NTE BEURER: wisi nor 
μηδὲν... ἐς μηδὲ neither ..... nor 
PTE «05s UN neither ..... nor 
UNE. ον μηδὲ neither ..... nor 
Nore 2. The formulas ov..... Té, OUTE..... τέ, (sometimes 
4 32 ’ ’ ᾿ .-. 
πὲ OU τινι τέ; OUTE..... καί, οὔτε ..... δέ,) are equivalent to 
»” » 
OUTE..... οὔτε, when both -clauses have the same verb. . E. g, 


(Il. 1, 603-4) Ov μὲν φόρμιγγος περικαλλέος, ἣν ἔχ ᾿Απόλλων, 
Movocay ϑ', at ἄειδον, neither of the harp of surpassing beauty, 
which Apollo had, nor of the Muses, who were singing. 


But if the verb of the second clause is different from that of 
the first, the second member (τέ) of the formula has an affir- 
mative meaning. Εἰ. g. Οὔτε πρότερον ἡμεῖς ἤρξαμεν πολέμου 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς " νῦν τ᾽ ἐθέλομεν σπονδὰς ποιεῖσϑαι, we never began 
the war against you; and now we are willing to make a treaty, 


where the verb of the first clause is ἤρξαμεν, and that of the 
second ἐϑέλομεν. 4 ἃ 


2000 SYNTAX. [δῷ 225, 226. 


Nore 3. The first negative particle of a negative formula is sometimes 
omitted. E. g. Tewas οὔϑ᾽ ‘EdAnvis, for Οὔτε Saas οὔϑ᾽ “Ἑλληνίς, neither 
~ @ Trojan woman nor a Grecian woman. 


» o§ B25. 1. Two or more negatives, in Greek. strengthen 
the negation. E. g. 


“Ὅταν μὴ φῆτε καλὸν εἶναι μηδὲν, When. you say that 
_nothing,is beautiful, or When you deny that there is any 
thing beautiful. 


| 2. The double negative ov μή is put either with the teat 
indicative or with the SU RPUACHEY. (δὲ 213. N. 5: 215. N. 3.) 


The double negative μὴ οὐ 15 commonly put with the enfini- 
tive. KE. g. Οὐκ ἐναντίώσομαι τὸ μὴ οὐ γεγωνεῖν, 1 shall 
not object to saying. 


Nore. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula 
Οὐδεὶς ὃ ὅστις ov, no one who (does) not. E. σ. O ὑδὲν ὃ τι οὐκ 
ἠρώτα, nothing which he did not ask. οὐδ εὶς οὐ τῶν παρόν- 
των ὑπερεπήνεσε τὸν λόγον, there was no one of those who were 
present who did not much praise the discourse. In this case 
both negatives belong to the same clause. 


3. Verbs and expressions, which contain a negation, are 
often followed by the particle μή with the infinitive. E. σ. 
Tov τε νόμον ἐδεικνύτην αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς νέσις ἀπειπέτην μὴ δια- 
λέγεσθαι, they showed him the law, and told him not to hold 
any conversation with young men. eep wo ἐμὰν βροτοὺς τοῦ 
μὴ διαῤῥαισϑέντας εἰς “Αιδου μολεῖν, I delivered the mortal race 
Srom being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades. 


Verbs of this class are ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύω, ἀπέχομαι, ἀπι-- 
στέω, ἀρνέομαι (also the expression ξξαρνός εἰμι), εἴργω, ἐπέχω, 
παύω, ῥύομαι, and a few others. 


PREPOSITION. 


§ 226. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called 
the primitive prepositions : 


Angi, about, around, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 

Ave, upon, on, in, through, with Dative or Accusative. 

Arti, instead of, with Genitive, 

"Ano, from, with Genitive. 

Διά, through, for, on account φῇ, for the ὩΣ Le of with Geni- 
tive or Accusative. 

Eig or Ἐς, to, into, with Accusative. 


4 


§ 220.] PREPOSITION. } 251 


Ἐν, in, at, with Dative. 

Ἔξ or ‘Ex, * from, of, out of, with Genitive. Ἶ 

‘Eni, on, upon, to, towards, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
sative. 

Κατά, down from, against, according to, in, in respect to, with 
Genitive or Accusative. 

Mera, with, among, after, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
sative. 

Taga, from, by, with, to, besides, along, with Genitive, Da- 
tive, or Accusative. 

Περί, about, around, concerning, of, with Genitive, Dative, 
or Accusative. 

Πρό, ὑφηγε, in the presence of, in behalf of, in preference to, Ἂ 
with Genitive. 

Πρός, to, towards, by, in addition to, with Genitive, Dative, 
or Accusative. 

iv and ξύν, with, together with, by means of, with Dative. 

Ὑπέρ, over, be yond, in behalf of, with Genitive or Accusative. 

“γπό, under, by, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 


Nore 1. Most of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the ac- 
cent back on the penult, when they are placed after the nouns 
to which they belong. This is called anastrophe. La” 
Neov ἄπο, for Ano νεῶν, Srom the ships. Ἐχϑρῶν ὕπερ, 
for “γπὲρ ἐχϑρῶν, for the enemies. 


Nore 2. Some of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the 
accent back on the penult also when they stand for stud, am, 
compounded with themselves. In this case, the Attics use 
the old gm for ἐν (ὃ 226. N. 6). E. g. πάρα for πάρεστι from 


πάρειμι, eve for ἔνεστι from ἔνειμε. 


Norte 3. In the early writers (as Homer and Herodotus), the 
preposition is often separated from the verb, with which it 
is compounded, by other words belonging to the same _Propo- 
sition. This is called tmesis. E. g. "And μὲν ἔϑανε ὃ στρα- 


τηγός, for “Ané Fave μὲν ὃ στρατηγός, on the one hand, the gen- 
eral died. 


Nore 4. In case of tmesis (§ 226. N. 3), the preposition is 
sometimes put after the verb. E. g. Ὧσε δ᾽ ἀπὸ ῥινὸν 
λίϑος, and the stone knocked off the shield. 


Nore 5. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be repeated 
several times, after the first time the preposition alone is sometimes used. E. g. 
Κατὰ μὲν ἔλευσαν αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, κατὰ δὲ τὰ τέκνα, for Karéasv- 
σῶν μὲν αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα, κατέλευσαν δὲ τὰ τέκνα, on the one hand, they 
stoned his wife, and, on the other, they stoned his children. (§ 226. N. 3.) 


252 | SYNTAX. [ $$ 227, 228, 


2. The following particles very often have the force of 

ae none. ; 
ἄνευ ΟΥ̓ ἄτερ, without, with Genitive. 
"ἄχρις or "AKQL, until, as far as, with Genitive. 
Ἕνεκα OF Ἕνεκεν, on account of, in respect to, so far as con- 
cerns, with Genitive. 

Mézou or Μέχρι, until, as long as, with Genitive. 

Πλήν, except, with Genitive. 

‘Ne, to, with Accusative. 

Nore 6. The old language has avai for ἀσό' διαί for διώ * ivi, sivi, εἶν, for . 
ἐν" xarai for κατά, only in composition: ragai for παρά " προτί, xori, for 
πρός * ὑπείρ for ὑπέρ" ὑπαί for ὑπό. The Ionic has εἵνεκα or εἵνεκεν for ἕνεκα. 


Note 7. A preposition without a case has the force of an 
adverb. E.g. Κατακτενῶ ye πρός, in addition to this I will 
kill (thee). 


Nore 8. In the old writers, a preposition is sometimes repeated. E. g. 
"Ey δὲ καὶ ἐν Μέμφι, and in Memphis. 


Nore 9. Sometimes the preposition, with which a verb is compounded, is 
repeated, E. g. "Av δ᾽ ᾿Οδυσσεύς &vicraro, and Ulysses arose. 


§ 22 7. A preposition in composition is often followed by 
the same case as when it stands αἱ itself. - E. g. 


Ὑπερενεγκόντες τὰς ναῦς TOY Lod por, Carrying the 
ships across the Isthmus. 
᾿Ἐσῆλϑέ we, It came into my mind. 


CONJUNCTION. 


§ 228. 1. Conjunctions signifying and, but, or, 
than, connect similar words. E. g. 
Πολέμου καὶ μάχης, Of war and batile. 


Δικαίως καἀδίκως, Justly and unjustly. 
Ayangy ἢ μισεῖν, To love or to hate. 


Conjunctions of this class are καί, and, τέ, and, ἀλλά, but, 
7, or, ἢ, than. 


Nore 1. The conjunction 7, or, Means ‘also otherwise, else. 
The formula 7..... ἢ, means either.< cows or, The formula 
πότερον OF πότερα... .. ἤν Means whether..... or. 


Nore 2. The conjunction 7, than, is used after compara- 
tives (§ 186. N. 5, 6). 


ᾧ 228.} CONJUNCTION. 253 


A comparison between two qualities of-the same object: is 
expressed by means of two comparatives, expressive of those 
qualities, with ἢ, than, between them.  E. g. ᾿Μανικώτεροι 
ἢ ἀνδρειότεροι, more rdsh than brave. Ἐποίησα ταχύτερα 
ἢ σοφώτερα, I acted more quickly than wisely. 


Nore 3. The conjunction i in the formula καὶ eos «. καί, 
means both ..... and, as well.....as. > - 

After adjectives and adverbs ‘implying’ ‘Seablibics: union, 
approach, it may be rendered as. Ἐπ g. Ὁ μοΐως πεποιήκασι 
καὶ Ὅμηρος, they have acted in the.same manner as Homer, or 
they and Fomer have acted in the same. manner. 

Sometimes καὶ means even, also. Ev g. Καὶ Saat τούτῳ 
ἔῤῥιγ᾽ ἀντιβολῆσαι, even Achilles i is afraid to meet him. 


Nore 4. Té is always'¢ enclitic (§ 22). The formula ere 


καὶ means both...... and. The formula te καὶ \gite separated). 
means both...... ‘and, The formula καὶ TE..... τε, OF καὶ 
Sein τε, is a little stronger than καί... “ty 


Note 5. Sometimes a possessive pronoun or a possessive 
adjective and a genitive are connected by xoé* in which case 
the genitive is joined to the genitive implied in the pronoun or 
adjective. (δὲ 67: 181. 1.). E. g. Παῖδες ἐμοὶ καὶ πατρὸς 
ἀτασϑάλου, sons of me and an indiscreet father. 


2. The following list contains most other conjunctions. 


αὖ, Doric, = εἰ. - It is used also by the epic poets, τὰ only 
in the formulas ai κεν, αἱ γάρ, aide, O that. ~ 
αἴκᾶ (αἴ, κα), Doric, = ἐάν. 
ἄν, a particle implying uncertainty and indefiniteness. It may 
ΞΕΡΟΘΩΒΑΣ all the moods and: the participle. (S$ 219 -- 
2 
Batis it is doubled. E. g. (Eupol. apud Athen.) 
Ovc οὐκ ἂν silso® οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἰνόπτας προτοῦ, whom for- 
merly you would not have’ appointed even inspectors of 
wine. 
ἄν, see ἐάν, [{ must ποὺ be phe ΠΟΣῸΝ with the. STEEP 
ἄρα (paroxytone), therefore, consequently | 
ἄρα (properispomenon ), an interrogative particle. Ὁ 
ἅτε ἅ, τὲ), inasmuch as, because. : 
αὐτάρ Or ἀτάρ (αὖτε, ἄρα), but. 
γᾶ, Doric, =-yé. 
γάρ, for, never stands αἱ {Π6 Woe ofa ronaencn. 
yé, a particle of limitation, at least. (See also § 64. N. 1.) 


22 


254 SYNTAX. : [ὃ 228. 


your (γέ, οὖν) = ye and οὖν united... 
ai, = δή. 
δέ, and, but, for, never begins a proposition. (See also μέν.) 
δή, now, indeed, an truth, prithee, Its compounds are δήπου-- 
Sey, δῆϑεν, δῆτα. 3 
ἐάν ΟΥ ἄν or ἤν (ei, av), if, with the subjunctive. (δῇ 214. 
1: 216. N. 3.) 
si, tf, whether, followed by the indicative or optative. (δ 218. 
3: 216..1:.214. Ν, δ.) 
εἶ χάρ, Je for a. ‘It cEpreseee: also a wish, Ὁ that! (ὃ Q17, 
ἐπάν OF ἐπήν μέρας ἄν), ρει after, a as soon as, with the sub- 
junctive, ~ (S§ 214.1: 216. N. 3. ie 
ἐπεάν, Tonic, = fom ot nay. 
ἐπεί (ἐπί), since, after, inasmuch as, es the eat or 
optative. “(8 213. 3: 216.1: 214. Ν. ὅ. )- 
ἐπειδάν (ἐπειδή, av), = χω. 
ἐπειδή (ἐπεί, δή), == ἐπεί. 
ἐπειή, poetic, = = ἐπειδή. 
) ἐπήν, 566 ἐπάν. 
ῇ, ‘truly, certainly. It is also an interrogative particle. It 
is often followed by μήν, πού, ‘tol, γάρ, ΟΥ̓ δή. 
788, and. See also 7 ἡμέν. 
ἠέ, Epic and Ionic, = ἤ, or, than. 


ἡμὲν en ae 708, both..... and,” as well cas GS, 

ἤν, see ἐάν. 

ἤτοι (ἢ, tol), used commonly in, the formula ἤτοι ..... ἤ, or 
ἢ «οἰ ἤτοι, either Bh ce or. 


In Homer ἤτοι is equivalent to μέν. 
ϑήν, ἃ particle of confirmation. 
ἰδέ, = τ 708. . 
iva, that, in order that, with the didlos: optantod: or with 
the historical tenses of the indicative. (δὴ 214. 1: 216. 
1: 213. N. 6.) © 
As an adverb it is equivalent to ποῦ ΟΥ̓ δῶν; where. 
κᾶ, Doric, = κέ. 
κέ or κέν, Epic, = ἄν (different from ὦ ἄν, if). , 
μέν, commonly used in the formula wéy..... δέ, indeed ἢ. ΝᾺ 
but, on the one hand..... on the other, ~ : 
μήν, a particle of confirmation, really, indeed, certainly. It 
is often preceded by γέ, 7, καί; μή, ov, and by interroga- 
tive words (§§ 68: 73: 128). 
μὼν (μή, οὖν), an interrogative particle. (§ 224. 6.) Some- 
_ times it is followed by μή or οὖν. 


§ 229.] INTERJECTION. ~ 255 


γύ or νύν (short v) is a weak viv, now. The form vv is found 
only in the Epic language..- 

ὅμως, yet, still. 

ὅπως, that,-in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or 
future indicative. ($$ 214. 1: 216. 1: 213. N. 4, 5.) It 
must not be confounded with the adverb ὅπως, as, 

ὅταν (ὅτε, ἄν), when, with the aechjunctioe: ($$ 214. 4: 216. 
N. 3. 


ὅτι (ὅστις), that, because, with the indicative or optative. 
(δ 2138. 3: 216. 1.) 

It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives or 
adverbs. E. g. Ὅτι πλεῖστον χρόνον, as.much time 
as possible, 

Also, jit stands before words. quoted ‘without - change. 
E. g. Εἶπεν ὅτι Eig xougov ἥκεις, he said, “ You have 

come at the right time.” 

οὖν, now, therefore. (See also δῷ 71. Ν. 8: 78. N. 8:198,. 
N. 4). 

οὕνεκα ἊΝ ἕνεκα), On account of which. ΑΒ a conjunction it 
means since, because. 

ὄφρα, poetic, = ἵνα or ὅπως. (See algo § 123.) 

Ms 9 very, quite, ait a (Bees also %9 a. N. 3: 124. 

4.) 


ῥά, Epic, = ἄρα. 

toi (for σοί, § 64. N. 2), dertintaly: indeed. It often corre- 
sponds to the English parenthetical phrases you know, 
you see. 

ὡς, that, in order that, with the indicative, subjunctive, apta- 
tive, or infinitive. ($$! 219. Ὁ: 214, 1: 216. 1:220. 1.) 

: It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives and 
adverbs. E. σ' Ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible. - 

ὥστε (we, 12), so that, with the indicative or infinitive. 
(S$ 213. 3: 220. 1.) Ἔς 


ΠΙΝΤΕΝΙΕΟΤΙΟΝ. 


§ 229. Interjections are particles used in exclamations, 
and expressing some emotion of the mind. 


The following’ list contains most _Interjections. 


a, ah! of sorrow and compassion. 
ἅ, a, ha! ha! of laughter. 

ai, of wonder. 

ai fot, of wonder. 


256 _ SYNTAX. > . [Ὁ 229, 


ἀππαπαί οἵ ἀπαπαΐ, of Br one: 

ἀτταλαττατά, of joy. : 

ἀτταππαττατά, οἵ sorrow. 

arratal, atetat, Or ἀτταταιάξ, of sorrow aie disgust. 

BoBai or βαβαιάξ, of astonishment. Followed by the geni- 
tive (ὃ 187. 2). 

@ or ἕ, ah? of grief. 

εἴα (sometimes gia), on ! courage | ! 

εἶεν, well, be it 50. , 

ἐλελεῦ, of grief or joy. 

εὖγε (εὖ, γέ), well done! bravo! ὁ 

εὐοῖ, the cry of the bacchanals. 

ἢν, ἡνί, ἡνίδε, = = ἰδού, which see. 

ἰατταταί OF ἰατταταιάξ, de sorrow. ‘Followed by the genitive 
( 187. 2). 

tad, ἰαυοῖ, ho: ! in answer to a call. "Sometimes it is equiva- 
τ Jent to ἰού, iw. mts | 
ἰδού (oxytone), lo! behold ! (See also E74 in the cata- 
᾿ς logue of Anomalous Verbs.) | 
ἰη, οἵ exultation. 
, ἰού, alas ! οἵ sorrow.. Followed by the genitive (§ 187. 2). 
ἰώ, Of joy or grief. Followed by: the dative or vocative 
(SS 196. 5: 204. 2). 

pv, wd, of pain, It 1s made Py breathing strongly oe 

the nostrils. 

θά, woe! alas, : 

ov, woe. Followed by the dative (§ 196. 5). 

οἴμοι OF oF wor (ot, poi), woe is me! Followed by the geni- 
tive (ὃ 187. 2 

ὁττοτοΐ, ὁτοτοὶ,: ‘OTTOTOTOL, or OTOTOTOTOL, of sorrow. 

ovai, woe! used only by the later writers. Followed by the 
dative (§ 196. 5). 

monet, παπαιάξ, οἵ pain, sorrow, joy, wonder. 

πόπαξ, πόποι, or ὦ πόποι, Ὁ gods ! of complaint. 

πύπαξ οἵ πύππαξ, of wonder or admiration. — 

ῥυπαπαί, ἃ cry used by rowers. | 

ὃ ὧ, expresses the sound made by a person smelling 0 of any | 

| thin 

φεῦ, ae Followed by the genitive (§ 187. 2). 

φῦ, = = φεῦ. 

ὦ (with the acute accent), oh! of wonder or grief. Fol- 
lowed by. the nominative, genitive, or dative, (δὴ 187. 2: 
196. 5. 

ὦ (circumflexed), O! Followed by the vocative (ὃ 204. 2) 

woz, used in cacoureging rowers. 


§ 230. 1. Frequently ἃ nominative stands without a 
verb, E. g. (Xen. Hier. 6, 6) Ὥσπερ οἵ ἀϑληταὶ οὐχ, ὅταν 
ἰδιωτῶν γένωνταν κρείττους, τοῦτο αὐτοὺς svpgaiver, ἀλλ᾽, ὅταν 
τῶν ἀνταγωνιστῶν ἥττους, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἀνιᾷ, literally, as the 
athletes, when they become-superior to inexperienced men, — 
this does not gladden them; but when they prove inferior to 
their opponents, — this grieves them, where one might expect 
οἱ ἀϑληταὶ ..... τούτῳ εὐφραΐνονται ---.-. τούτῳ ἀνιῶνται. 


2. If in the formula 6 μὲν ..... ὃ δὲ a whole is expressed, this 
is put either in the genitive tS 177), or in, the same case as - 
© BO sie: ὃ δέ. Ἐπ g. (Il. 16, 317-22) Weorogida: δ᾽, 

ὃ μὲν οὔτασ᾽ ᾿Ατύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ, “Avtihoyos..... τοῦ δ᾽ ἀν- 
τίϑεος Θρασυμήδης ἔφϑη ὀρεξάμενος, πρὶν οὑτάσαι, the sons 
of Nestor, one, that is, Antilochus, pierced Atymnius with the 
sharp spear..... but godlike Thrasymédes directed his spear 
against him before he struck, (Soph. Antig. 21, 22) Ov γὰρ 
τάφου νῷν τὼ κασιγνήτω Κρέων, τὸν μὲν προτίσας, τὸν δ᾽ 
ἀτιμάσας ἔχει; has not Creon given one of our brothers an 
honorable burial, and left the other unburied ? ' 


» 


3. Instead of the nominative, the ACCUSATIVE is sometimes 
found. E. g. (Odys. 1, 275) Μητέρα δ᾽, εἴ of ϑυμὸς ἐφορ- 
μᾶται γαμέεσϑαι, aw trw ἐς μέγαρον πατρός, as to thy mother, 
tf she very much desires to be married, let her go back to her 
father’s house. : 


4, Instead of the infinitive, sometimes the INDICATIVE with 
si, ὥς, OF ow is used; in which case the subject-accusative 
stands alone. KE. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) δεινόν ye τὸν 
κήρυκα, τὸν παρὰ τοὺς βροτοὺς οἰχόμενον, εἶ μηδέποτε νο- 
στήσει πάλιν, it is a terrible thing, that the herald who was 
despatched to the mortals should not return. (Ibid. 650-2) 
Ὡς ἐν Αἰσώπου λόγοις ἐστὶ λεγόμενον δή τι, THY alanex, ὡς 
φλαύρως ἐκοινώνησεν ἀετῷ ποτε, that in the fables of 250» 
something ts said about the fox, that she was once scurvily 
treated by her partner the eagle. 


§ BBL. Sometimes with two or more substantives only one 
verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This irregu- 
larity of construction is called zeugma. LE. g. (Auschyl. Prom. 
Vince. 21, 22) Ἵν᾽ τς φωνὴν, οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν 


ὁ 


258 | syntax, 9 ef§ 232. 


ὄψει, where thou wilt neither (hear) the voice, nor see ᾿ς form, 
of any mortal, where φωνὴν, properly speaking, veo on 


ἀκούσ él. 


§ 232. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred 
words as closely as possible. This often occasions a confused 
arrangement. KE. g. (Aischyl. Ag. 886) Τοῖς αὐτὸς αὐτοῦ 
πήμασι βαρύνεται, he is oppressed. by his own misfortunes. 
(Id. Choéph. 87) παρὰ φέλης φέλῳ “γυναικὸς ἀνδρί, from 
a dear wife to a dear husband. 3 


PARTIV. 
VERSIFICATION. 


- FEET. 
§ 233. 1. Every. Greek verse is divided into ‘portions 
called feet. 


Feet are either pti or compound. A simple foot con- 
sists of two or three syllables; a competes foot, of four. 


SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES. - 


Spondee, .......... two long; as βώλου.. 

Pyrrhie, ᾿. ἐξρλίνους two short; as μόνος. , 
Trochee or Choree,..... a long and a short; as. μῆκος. 
Tambus, .. 000080. a short and a long ; ; aS μένω. 


SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES. 


Dactyle, .......... a long and two short; as πῖνομεν. | 
Anapest, ......... two short and a lone ; as νοερῶν. 
Tribrach,¢........ three short ; as ϑέομεν. 

Molossus, ......... three long; as ἄνϑρωποι. 

Amphibrach, -.+.. 8 short, a long, jay a short ; as γοητός: 
Amphimdcer or Cretic, ..... a long, a short, and a long; as 


Konu κῶν. 
Bacchius, ......... a short and two long: as ἐδείπνεις. 
Antibacchius, ease two long and a short; as ἄνϑρωπε. 

COMPOUND FEET, 

Dispondee, ....... a double spondee ; as ἀμπιυχνοῦνται. 
Proceleusmatic, ... a double pyrrhic; as λεγόμενος. . 
Ditrochee, ........ a double trochee ; as ovddaGovtec. - 
Diiambus, ........ a double iambus; as σοφώτατοι. 
Greater Ionic, .... a spondee and a pyrrhic ; as ποιητέον. 
Smaller Tonic, ..... a pyrrhic and spondee; as ἀπολωλώς. 


Choriambus, ...... a choree and an iambus; as οἱομέγω». 


260 _-. YERSIFICATION, ~ [Φ 294, 


Antispast,. seipexs an iambug hind: a trochee ; as δὲ ἐστημΐ. 
Epitritus I, ...... an iambus and a spondee ; as πᾶρελϑόντων. 
Epitritus I, ide a trochee and a spondee ; as εὐλογῆσαι. 


Epitritus IL, ... a spondee and an jambus ; ; as ἡγουμένων. 
| Epitritus I Vien aspondee and atrochee; as ἀνϑρώποιοϊ. 


Peon I, ......... a trochee and ἃ pyrrhic ; as Αὐτόμενες. 
Peon II, ........ an iambic and ἃ pyrrhic ; as ἄκούομεν. 
Peon if, . 5.0... a pyrrhic and a trochee; as ter¥@aor. 
Paon IV; «2... . a pyrrhic and an iambus; as δ ἀλόγων. 


2. Arsts is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus, 
beat ) of the voice falls. The rest of the foot is called ruzsis. 
The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For example, the 
arsis of an iambus or anapest is on the ‘last en the arsis 
of a trochee or dactyle, on the first. 


Nore. The arsis of ἃ spondee is determined by the nature 
of the verse in which this foot is found.. E. g. in trochaic or 
dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable, thus (— --; in 
iambic or anapestic, on the last, thus (— —’). 


The tribrach has the arsis on the first syllable, when it is 
found in trochaic verse, thus (~' ~ ~); on-the-second syllable, 
when it stands in an iambic verse, thus (~ ~~). 


The dactyle in anapestic or iambic verse ae the arsis on the 
second syllable, thus (--~). 


The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first 
syllable, thus (~~ -).. _ , 


§ 2BA. 1. Verses are very often denominated from the foot 
which predominates in them. For example, the-verse is called 
dactylic, when the dactyle predominates in it. 


2. A complete verse is called acatalectic.. A verse, of which 
the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic. vine 


Particularly, a trochaic, iambic, or anapestic verse is called 
catalectic, when it has an odd number. of feet and a syllable : 
hypercatalectic, when it has an even number of feet and a 
syllable : brachycatalectic, when it has only an odd. number of 
feet. For examples see below. 


3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapestic verses are measured 
by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) ‘Thus, an iambic verse 
_of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic trimeter ; 
of eight, iambic tetrameter. 


δῷ 290 -- 297.] TROCHAIC VERSE, _ 261 


§ 235. Czsure is the separation, by the ending of a | 
word, of syllables rhythmically or eatery connected. There 
are three kinds of cwsura : 


1. Cesura of the root ; 
2. Cesura of the RHYTHM ;— 
3. Cesura of the VERSE. 


1. The cesura of the foot occurs when a word ends before 

a foot is completed. E. g. ‘Titov | ἐξαλα-- | make mo- | λιν, χη- | 

woe δ᾽ a-| γυιας, where ἐξαλαπαξε, ynowos tonamgate in the 
middle of the foot. 


2. The casura of the rhythm occurs lich the arsis falls 
upon the last syllable of a word; by which means the arsis 
is separated from the thesis. This can take place only in feet 
which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. “Age, ‘A-| ρες 
eee howye, μι-- | αἰφονε, | τειχεσι-- [πλητα, where the arsis 
(ρες) of the second foot falls upon the last syllable of “4g¢c. 

- This cesura allows a short syllable to stand instead of a 
long one (§ 18, 2). ἘΦ g. Towec | wer wday-| γῃ τ᾽ ἐνο- | πῇ 
τ ἴσαν | ὄργι-- | Feo ὥς, where thetact syllable (9.0). of 6 0gvt— . 
Seo 15 made long by arsis. 


3. The cesura of the verse is. a pause in verse, so intro- 
duced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more melo- 
dious. It divides the verse into two parts. 

In the trechaic, iambic,, and _anapestic, tetrameter, and in 
the elegiac pentameter, its place is fixed. (δῷ 240: 245: 250. 
4: 255.) 


Other kinds of verse have more than one om for this 
cesura. 


§ 236, The Se syllable of eee verse is common, 
that is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of 
the foot. 


TROCHAIC VERSE. 


§ 237. The fundamental, foot. of the ‘couche verse is the 
trochee. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 


trochee. ‘The spondee or the anapest can stand only in the 
even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th). 


In proper names the dactyle can stand in all the places, 
except the 4th and the 7th. 


262 ο΄ VERSIFICATION. . [S$ 238 — 243. 


238. The Trocuaic MONOMETER consists of two feet. 
It is peony found among trochaic dimeters. E. g. 


Τηνδὲ | νῦνϊ. 


§ 239. 1. The rrocuarc pimeTER acatalectic consists of 
four feet, or two Τρ μόρος cE. gs 
“AMA” ἅ- | ναμνη- | σϑεντες, | ὦ ᾽νδρες. 
Τῶν τε | πᾶλᾶασϊ-- [ wy ἐ- | κείνων. 


First with trembling hollow motion, 
Like a scarce awakened ocean. 


2. The TROocHAIC DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It is found among trochaic dimeters acatalec- 
tic.” E. g. | ‘> 

Τοῦτο μέν ΔΆ ἦρος αἰεὶ 
Βλαστάνει καὶ σῦκοφαντεῖΐ. : 
Του δὲ | χειμω-- [ἰ νος πᾶ |. λὲν. 
Could the stoutest overcome 
~ Death’s assault and baffle doom, 
Hercules had both withstood. 

§ 240. The TROCHAIC TETRAMETER catalectic consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-cesura occurs at the end 
of the fourth foot. ‘This czsura is often neglected by the 
comedians, but very seldom by the tragedians. E. g. 

Eia | dn gi- | dov-do- | gira, || rovgyor | οὐχ & | κας to- | de. 
Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee. 


IAMBIC VERSE. 


§ 241. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the 
iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
iambus.» The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd 
places (Ist, 3d, 5th, 7th). 

The anapest can stand in all the ἀρὰν except the last. 
The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when 
it is contained in a proper name. 

242. The 1Ampic MoNOMETER consists of two feet. It 
is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters. E. g. 
Kou τοις | χολοις. 


ᾧ 242. 1. The 1AMBIC._DIMETER acatalectic consists of, four 
feet. E. g: ie, 


§ 244.] IAMBIC VERSE. 263 


Ἕκτῳ | a ἐτει | προσει- | πον, δ, 
Tov δη- μον ἐλ- |: Sov a- | σμενος, 
Snovdag | ποὶη- | σἄμενος | ἐμαυ-- 
Tw, moa- | yworoy | τε, καὶ | μαχῶν. 


Trust not for freedom to the. Franks, 
‘They have a king who buys and sells. 


2. The 1aAMBIc DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acatalec- 
tic. E. g. 

“Ayn ἀνεύρηκέν τι ταῖς 
Σπονδαῖσιν ἢ δύ᾽ χοὺκ ἐοι-- 
Κεν οὐ- | Seve με- | tadw- | σειν. 


‘That ee is excelling, 
Upon this dull earth dwelling. 


§ 244. 1. The tampic Trimerer acatalectic consists of 
six feet. It never has ἃ tribrach in the last place. 

Its verse-cesura occurs after the second foot ; sometimes 
after the third foot. Sometimes the yerse-cwsura is entirely 
| beglected. EK. g. 

“Ὅσα dn | dedn- | γμαι Ἶ tnv ἐμαυ-- | του καρ-- | diay, 
Hodyy | de βαι- | α, || πανυ | de Bou- | α, τετ- | tage 
‘A δ᾽ w- | δυνη- | ϑην, || ψαμ- | μακοσι- | ογαρ- | γαρα. 
Nore. The tragedians admit a pny only in the Jirst and 
third places. E. g. | 
΄ Κιμμερι- | κον ἥξεις, ὃν ϑρασυσπλαγχνως ᾿ σε χρη. 
Τῆς ὑρϑοβου- | sow Θεμι-- | δος αἰπῦμητὰ παι. 
They admit an anapest only in the oe place. E. g. 
ἀδᾶμαν- | τίνων δεσμων ἐν ἀῤῥηκτοις πεδαις. ὦ 
But in proper names they admit an anapest in any place 


except the last ; in which case Ae anapest is contained in the 
proper name. E, g. 


Ὧ, παντὰα γωμῶν, Τει-- | φεσιᾶ, διδαχτα τε. 
Ἔμοι μὲν ovderg βυϑος, "Ay-_| tiyovn, φιλων. 


2. The scazon or choliambus ia the iambic trimeter acatalectic 
with a spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g. 


᾿Εγὼ Φιλαινὶς, Πη ᾿πέβωτος ἀνθρώποις, 
“Evtavd a rigs || τῷ μακρῷ κεκοίμημαι. 


~ 


264 =e VERSIFICATION. [$$ Q45 — 249. 


§ 245. The 1amsic TETRAMETER + dibabbiie consists of 
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-cesura is at the end of 
the fourth foot ; but this cxsura is often neglected by the 
comedians... -E. g. 


Οὐκουν | παλαι | δηπου | λεγω;, Tl σύ δ᾽ αὖ-] τὸς οὐκ | axov- | εἰς, 
Ὃ de- | σποτῆης [γαρ φη- | σιν v- | μας ἡ-ἶ δεως | ἅπαν- | tas. 


A captain bold of Halifax, || who lived in country quarters. 
DACTYLIC VERSE. 


§ 246. The fundamental fost of the dactylic verse is the 
dactyle. ‘The spondee may-stand for the dactyle. 


§ 94 7. 1. The pacrytic pimeTER acatalectic consists 
of two dactyles. It is found among dactylic tetrameters. 
Mvotodo- | κος δομος. 


2. The pacryiic pimerER catalectic on two syllables con- 
sists of a dactyle and a spondee or trochee. E. g. 
Τησδ᾽ ἀπο | χωρᾶς. 
Mipvouey | ἰσχὺν. 


§ 248. 1. The pacrytic rrimerer catalectic on one syl- 
lable consists of two feet and a syllable. _E. g. 


“Alun- | evra πο-- | gor. 


2. The pactyiic -TRIMETER catalectic on two syllables 
consists of three feet and two syllables forming a wmpondge or 
trochee. E. g. 

| ᾿ἄλκαν | συμφῦτος, | αἴων. 
Παμπρε-- ἴ πτοις ἐν & | ὌΝΟΝ 


§ 249. 1. The pactryiic TETRAMETER acatalectic con- 
sists of four feet, _ the last of which is a santys or a cretic. 


Ὦ, μεγα | χρῦσεον ἐμά ἀδτερό- | πῆς φαος, 

12) Διος | ἄμβροτον | ἐγχος | πυρφορον. 
2. The TETRAMETER Catalectic on one syllable consists of 
three feet and a syllable. E. g. 7 


Πολλὰ Bgo- | των die | μαβομε- | v0 γα. 


§$ 250, 251.] DACTYLIC VERSE. 265 


8. The TeTRAMETER catalectic on two syllables consists of 
three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee, 
Θουριος | ὄρνις | Τευκριδ᾽ én’ | αἶαν. 
Ove’ Rg κλαίων, | ovd ὕπο-: | λειβων. 


§ 250. 1. The pacrytic PENTAMETER acatalectic con- 


sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyle. E. g. 


2 χϑονι- | ov Bagu- | dees | ouBeoqo= | eox ϑ' ἅμα. 


2. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER Catalectic on one syllable 
consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g. 


Tor μεγα- | lov Jave- | ὧν ὗπο- | κλῃζομε- | var. 


3. The pACTYLIC PENTAMETER catalectic on two syllables 
consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g. 


“Atos | δας μαχι-- | μους, ἐδα-  η λαγο- | δαιτᾶς. > 


4, The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER consists of two trimeters cata- 
lectic on one syllable (§ 248. 1). The first hemistich almost 
always ends in a long syllable. The verse-cesura occurs after 
the second foot. This kind of verse is customarily subjoined 
to the heroic hexameter. E. g. 


Βούλεο δ᾽ εὐσεβέων oddyous σὺν χρήμασιν οἰκεῖν, 
Ἦ πλου- | τειν, ἀδι-- | κως || χρηματα | πᾶσαμε- | γος. 


§ 2d. 1. The pactyiic sexaMerer acatalectic consists 
of six feet, the last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the 
tragedians in systems of tetrameters. E. g. | 


‘Adi’ ὦ | παντοι-- | ας φιλο-- | τητος ἀ- | μειβομε- | vow χαριν. 


2. The pacryLic HEXAMETER (or heroic hexameter) cata- 
lectic on two syllables, consists of six feet, the last of which is 
a spondee or trochee. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyle. 


The predominant verse-cgsura is that in the middle of the 
third foot; either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of 
the thesis of a dactyle. E. g. | 


"Avdou μοι | ἔννεπε, | μουσα, || πο-- | λυτροπον, | ὃς μαλα | πολλα 
Πλαγχϑῆ, & | πει Toor- | ης || ἴε- | ρον πτολι-͵ εϑρον ἐ- | περσεν. 


Sometimes the verse-cesura occurs immediately after the 
arsis of the fourth foot. E. g. ἢ 


᾿Ιρνύμενος ἣν te ψυχὴν, || καὶ νόστον ἑταίρων. 


29 


266 VERSIFICATION. [ $§ 252-255. 


ANAPESTIC VERSE. 


§ 252. The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the 
anapest. The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may 
stand for the anapest. 

A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same 
dipody. : 

§ 2433. The anarestTic MONOMETER consists of two feet. 
E. g. 


Toor o- | tuSoay. 


§ 254. 1. The anarestic pimeter acatalectic consists 
of four feet, the last of which is either an anapest, a spondee, 
or a trochee. 

The legitimate verse-cesura is in the second arsis. It is 
often made, however, in the short syllable immediately after 
the second arsis. E. g. 


Tt ov προς | μελαϑροις ; || tv ov τῃ- | δὲ πολεις, 
Φοιβ᾽; ἀδι-- | κεις av, || τῦμας | ἐνερων 
Agogi- | ζομενος || καὶ κατα-- | raver. 
Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar 
Gives hope to the valiant || and promise of war. 
2. The anapestic DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet 
and a syllable. It hasnocesura. KE. g. 


Πολεμου | στῖφος | παρεχον-- | τες. 


Nore. Anapestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees 
are not uncommon. ΚΕ. g. 


Δειλαία δειλαίου γήρως, 
Δουλείας tag ov τλᾶτᾶς. 


§ 255. The anarestic TreTRameter catalectic (called. 
also Aristophanean) consists of seven feet and a syllable. 


The verse-cesura comes after the fourth foot; in some in- 
stances, after the short syllable immediately following the 
fourth foot. E. g. 

Ovnw | παφεβὴη | προς το ϑε- | ατρον || λέξων, | ὡς de- | ser di ᾿ 

στι. 

Διαβαλ- | λομενος | δ᾽ ὕπο των  ἐχϑρων || ἐν APy- | ναιοις | 

τουχυβου-- | λοις, 

Ὡς κω- | under | τὴν πολιν | ἥμων, [[καὶ τον | δημον | καϑυβρυ- | 

ζει. | . 


GREEK 


INDEX. 


In the following indexes, the figures designate the sections (§) and their 
divisions : N. stands for Nore, and R. for Remark. 


A. 

a, 1, 2.— changes of, 2. N. 3. 
— quantity of, 2: 17. Ν. 8: 
al. N. 1: 33. N. 2: 365. 
N. 1: 36. N. 5: 49. N. 3. — 
privative, 135. 4. 

κα pure, nouns~ in, 31. 3. —2 
aor. act. in, 85. N. 2. 

-ἅ, voc. sing. in, 31. 4.— nom. 
sing. mase. in, 31. N. 3. 

-é, gen: sing. in, 31. N..3. — 
voc. sing. of the third declen- 
sion in, 38. N. 1. 

ἄγε or φέρε followed by the subj., 
215. 2. 

ἀδελφός, with dat., 195. 1. — 
with gen., 195. N. 1. 

-ἄδην, see -dny. 

-ἄδης, patronymics in, 127. 1. 

ae contracted into η, 23. N. 1. 

-a3w, -€90, -ύϑω, verbs in, 96. 


a. for a, 2. N. 3. 

-ov permits the accent to be 
on the antepenult, 20. Ν, 1. 
—elided, 25. N. 1. 

αἰναρέτης, voc. sing. of, 31. R. 1. 

-aivw, ἄνω, verbs in, 96: 7. 

-αἷἴος, adjectives in, 62, 3: 131. 
1: 138. N. 1. 

-αις, -αισα, aor, part. in, 90. N. 

-αισι, dat. plur, in, 91. N. 3. 


αἰτιάομαι With acc. and gen., 
183. 1.— with two accusa- 
tives, 183. R. 1. 

-ἄκις, adverbs in, 120. 

ἀκούω with gen., 179. 1. — with 
acc., 179. N. 1. — with acc. 
and gen., 179, N. 2. 

-αλέος, adjectives in, 131. 8. 

ἀλλοδαπός, 73. 2. 

ἀλλοῖος, with gen , 186. 2. 

ἄλλος, 73. 2.—neuter of, 33. 
N. 1.— with a plural verb, 
157. 4. — with gen., 186. 2. 

ἀλλότριος With gen., 186. 2, — 
with dat., 186. R. | 

alc, 36. Ν. 1. δ, 

ἁλῶναι with gen., 183. R. 1. 

ἀλώπηξ, inflection of, 36. 2. 

ἀμφότερος, 73. 2. 

ἄμφω, 73. 2.— agrees with a 
plural substantive, 137. N.8. 

-ay, gen. plur, in, 91. N. 9... 

-ἄν, perf. act. 3d pers. plur. in, 
85. N. 1. 

ἀγαγκή, ϑέμις, ὥρα, followed by 
the inf., 221. N. 4. 

ἄναξ, 36. N. 1.— voc. sing. of, 
38. N. 4. 

ἀνήρ, inflection of, 40. 2. — ac- 
cent of, 40. N. 3. — sub- 
joined to certain nouns, 136. 


268 — GREEK INDEX. 

~Gvoc, national appellatives ἴῃ, N. 2.— signifies μόνος, 144. 
127. 3. β N. 8. -- υϑδεὰ in cases of 

ἀντίστροφος, 566 ἐναντίος. . contrast, 144, R. 9. .-- de- 

ἄξιος, ἀξίως, with gen., 190.2.) notes the principal person, 
—with dat., 190. N. 3. 144. R. 3.— in connection 

ἀξιόω With acc. and gen., 190.) with ἑαυτοῦ, 144. N. 4. — 
N.4. © with ordinal numbers, 144, 

go and ἄω changed into ew, 2.| N. 5. — equivalent to the 

eee 9. demonstrative pronoun, 144, 

-ἄο, -ἄων, gen. if, 31. N.3.~ | N. 6. — with the article be- 

ἀπολαύω with gen., 178. 2. —!| fore it, 65. 2: 144. 8. 
with acc., 178. N. 1. ἀφαιρέομαι, With two accusa- 

᾿ἡπόλλων, acc. sing. of, 37. N.| -tives, 165. 1.— with ace. 
2. —voc. sing. of, 38, N.2.} and gen., 165. R. 

ἀποστερέω, With two accusa-|apin, accent of the gen. plur. 
tives, 165. 1. — with acc.| of, 31. N. 2. 

and gen., 165. R. 7 -αχῆ, SCe =n. 

-αρ, accent of the contracted!-ovov, see ov. 


forms of some nouns in, 36. ἄχρις or ἄχρι, 15. 8, with gen., 
N. 3. 194. 

ΑΡΗ͂Ν, inflection of, 40.3. | dw, see Go. 

-ἄριον, diminutives in, 127. 2. B. 

-ας, neuters in, 42. — adjec- βαῦ, 1. N. 3. 
tives in, 53. 1, R. 1. —nu- βῆ with a part., 222. N. 2. 
merals in, 62. 1. — fem. pa- βλ, a short vowel before, 17. 4. 


tronymics in, 127. 1. — augment of verbs begin- 
πασκον, -ασκόμην, see -soxoy,, ning with, 76. Ν, 2. 

-εσχόμην. βορέας, contraction of, 32. Ν, 
ἀστήρ; dat. plur. of, 40. N. 2. | 2. 


ἅτε With gen. absolute, 192. βούλει or ϑέλεις with subj., 215. 
N. 2 : 


2. 3,N.2 
-ἄτης, national appellatives in,|fovc, nom. sing. of, 36. 2. — 
127. 3. ace. sing. of, 37. N. 1.— 


~-avc, inflection of nouns in,| inflection of, 48. 2. 


43. 2. 


1" 
αὐτός, inflection of, 65. 1.— γάλα, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 


Ionic forms of, 65. N.— γαστήρ, inflection of, 40- 1. --- 
neuter of, 33. N. l1.—com-| accent of, 30. N. 3. 

parison of, 57. N. 5. — how γέλως, compounds of, 55. N. 3. 
used, 144. — superfluous,|yeiw with acc. and gen., 179. 
144. N. 1. —subjoined to} Ν, 9. -- with two accusa- 
the relative pronoun, 144.) _ tives, ibid. . 
R. 1.— signifies self, very,|yn omitted after the article, 
144, 2.— has the appearance| 140. N. 5. 

of ἐγώ, σύ, ἡμεῖς, ὑμεῖς, 144.| 71, γν, a short vowel before, 17. 


GREEK 


4.— augment of verbs be- 
ginning with, 76. N. 2. 

7μ, ἃ short vowel before, 17. 4. 

γνώμη omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

γραῦς, nominative of, 36. 2. --- 
inflection of, 43. 2. 


4. 
δάμαρ, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 


-de, -σε, -ζε, adverbs in, 121. 3.) 


- -δὲ appended to what, 
ΗΝ Ὁ 

δεῖ, subject of, 159. N. 1.— 
with gen. and acc., or with 
gen. and dat., 181. N. 1, 2. 
— δεῖν omitted in certain 
phrases, 220. N. 3. 

δεῖνα, 69. 2. — with the article, 

140. Ν, 10. 

δεσπότης, accent of the voc. 
sing. of, 31. R. 2. 

δεύτερος, 61. — with gen., 186. 
2 


Ζημήτηρ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
accent of, 40. N. 3. 
-δην, -ἄδην, adverbs in, 119. 2. 
διαφέρω, διαφερόντως, with gen. 
86. N. 3. 


διάφορος. with gen., 186, 2.— 
with dat., 186. R. 

δίγαμμα, 1. Ν. 8. 

du, ὃν, a-short vowel before, 
17. 4. 

-δόν, -ηδόν, adverbs in, 119. 8. 

δοῦρε and ὄσσε take plural ad- 
jectives, 137. N. 7. 

δύο, 60. 1.— agrees with a plu- 
ral substantive, 137. N. 8. 


duo-, 566 sv. 


E. 
e, why called ψιλόν, 1. N. 1. — 
changes of, 2.N.3. 
-s#, acc. sing. in, 46. N. 3. — 
pluperf. act. in, 85. N. 4. 
23* 


INDEX. 269 

-ἔειν, 2 aor. act. infin. 
N. 3. . 

-9w, see -ἀϑω. 

et for ε, 2. N. 3.— augment of 
verbs beginning with, 80. 
N. 4. 

-εἰ, see -ἰ, 

τεια, aor. act. opt. in, 87. N. 8, 

εἰμί, am, omitted, 157. N. 10. 


-- with gen., 175. — with 
dat., 196. 3, N. 2. — infin. 
of, 221, N. 3. 


εἶναν apparently superfluous, 
221. N. 3. 

-εινός, adjectives in, 131. 2. 

-sig, adjectives in, 53. 2; — 
dat. plur. of adjectives in, 
53. R. 2.— participles in, 
53. 3. 


εἷς, 60. 1. ----- omitted before the 


gen., 175. N. 3. — with dat., 
195. Ν. 4. | 

ἐκ in composition, 5. N. 1: 7. 
N.: 9. N. — before a con- 
sonant, 15. 4. 

ἕκαστος, 73. 2.— with the ar- 
ticle, 140. N. 7. — with a 
plural verb, 157, 4. 

ἑκάτερος, 73. 2, 

ἐκεῖνος, inflection of, 70.— dia- 
lects of, 70. N. 1. — neuter 
of, 33. N. 1.—how used, 
149, 2.— corresponds to the 
English he, 149. N. 2. 

ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ, more emphatic 
than μοῦ, μοί, μέ, 143. Ν. 4. 
— after prepositions, ibid. 

-εν, infin. in, 89. N. 2. 

ἐν before 9, o, ζ, 12. Ν. 3. 

ἐναντίος and ἀντίστροφος with 
gen., 186. N. 2. 

ἔνοχος with gen., 183. N. 3. 

ἐξ becomes éx, when, 15. 4. 


eo contracted into ev, 23. N. 1. 


in, 89. 


270 GREEK 

ἑορτάζω, augment of, 80; R, 2. 

-soc, adjectives in, 49,3: 131.2. 

ἐπίσημα, 1 N. 3. 

-ερός, adjectives i in, 131. 3. 

-sc, neuters in, 42,—~ 2d pers. 
sing. in, 85. N.3. 

-ἐσχον, Soman; -ασκον, -ασκό- 
μὴν, 8686 -σχον, -σκόμην. 

-sot ΟΥ̓-εσσι, dat. plur, in, 90. 
N, 3. 

ἕτερος, 73. 2.— with gen., 186. 
2 


ἐτησίαι, accent of the gen. plur, 
. οὗ, 31. N.2 

sv and δυσ-, augment of verbs 
, beginning with, 82, 3. 

ev and κακῶς with certain verbs, 
165. N. 2. 

-svc inflection of nouns in, 44. 
— acc. sing. of nouns in, 
44. N. 1.—nom, plur, of 
nouns in, 44, N. 3,— Ionic 
inflection of nouns in, 44, 
N. 4. — appellatives in, 127. 
3, 6. 


ἐφ᾽ ᾧ; ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, With infin., 220, 1. 

ἔχω with gen., 188. N. i1,-— 
with part., 222. N. 2. 

-ew, éwv, gen. in, 91. N. 3. 

-gw, contraction of dissyllabic 
verbs in, 116. N. 1, R. 


Ζ. 
¢, power of; 5. 2, Ν, 2. -- αἱ 
the beginning of a word 
does not always. make posi- 
tion, 17. N. ὦ. 
-ζε, see -δε, 


-ζω, verbs in, ὍΝ, 4, Ν. ὅ, 6, 7. 


ἢ, original Bes of, 1. Ν, 1.— 
changes of, 2. N. 3. 

-n OF -αχῆ, adverbs in, 121, 4. 
— becomes -y, 191, Ν. 4. 
7, than, 228. 1.—after com- 

paratives, 186. N. 5, 6.— 


INDEX. 


between two comparatives, 
228. N, 2. 


ῃ for αἱ, 3. N. 8. 


E dso, see ~Jor 


2 9 ὦ 


τῇ 152. 

= £816, adjectives in, 131. 5.— 
contraction of adjectives in, 
53. N. 1. 

ne for εἰ, 3. N, 3. 

ἥκω with gen., 188, N, —pres- 
ent of, 209. N. 2. 

ἡλίκος, 73. 1.— attracted by 
the antecedent, 151. R, 5. 

-ηλός, adjectives in, 1381. 3. 

ἡμεδαπός, 73. 2. 

ἡμιόλιος With gen., 186. 2. 

-ην, adjectives in, 53. 4,— in- 
fin, in, 89, N, 2. — optat. in, 
Ε΄, ἮΝ me. ; 

-ηγός, national appellatives in, 
127. 8 Ὁ 

-no, syncopated nouns in, 40, 

-ης Zen. £06, inflection of nouns 
in, 42, — acc, aig of proper 
names in, 40, N. 1. — ad- 
_Jectives in, 52. ὰ 

-ἧς, nom. plur. in, 44, N. 3. 

-ῆς OY -ῃσι, dat. ’plur. in, 9], 
N. 3. 


-ἥτης, nabonal appellatives in, 
127. 3. 

τῆφι, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3. 

-ηώς, perf. act. pre in, 99. N. 


ϑατέρου, 14. N 1. 

ϑέλεις, See βούλει. 

ϑέμις, See ἀνάγκη. . 

-ϑεν, adverbs in, 121.2, 

-ϑι, 2d pers. sing. ἀνα in, 
88. N. 1. — becomes 1, 14, 
N. 4. 

- 91, -o1, adverbs in, 121, 1.° 

ϑιγγάνω with gen., 179, 1.— 
with ace., 179. N. 1. 


τ κα ὦ 
et. 


LPOG Wye τ δ. LAPS OP SMALE OL): MO OS ἐπ πο RAL OEE 
: ν a ‘ 
' 


ἴσος with dat., 195. 1.—with 


GREEK 


ϑοιμάτιον, 14. N. 1. 

ϑυγάτηρ, inflection of, 40. 1.— 
accent of, 40. N. 3. 

1... 

-ἰ, inflection of neuters in, 49. 

- annexed to the demonstra- 
tive pronouns, 70. Ν, 2.— 
annexed to the demonstrative 
pronominal adjectives, 73. 
N. 2.— annexed to demon- 
strative adverbs, 123. N. 2, 3. 

-1, τε, adverbs in, 119, 4. 

-ie, nouns in, 128. I. 

-vadns, see -ἐδης. 

-ἰδης, -ἰάδης, patronymics in, 
127. 1. 


-ἰδιον, diminutives in, 127, 2. 
ἴδιος, 73. 2.— with gen., 174. 
N 


-ἰεις, adjectives in, 131. 5. 

ἱερός With gen., 174, N. 

-ἰκός, adjectives in, 131. 2. 

-ιμι, verbs in, 117. N. 14. 

μος, adjectives in, 131. 4. 

-ivdny, adverbs in, 119. 6. 

-iyn, -ιώνη, patronymics in, 
127. 1. 


-wog, adjectives in, 13]. 2.— 
national appellatives in, 127. 
3 


-ἰον, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

-ἰος, adjectives in, 131. 1.— 
national appellatives in, 127. 
3. 


-1¢ gen. toc, ewe, inflections of 
nouns in, 43. 1, 3. 

-ἰς, gen. δὸς or tos, 46. N. 2, 

-ἰς, adjectives in, 52, 2. — pa- 
tronymics in, 127, 1.—di- 
minutives in, 127. 2..— na- 
tional appellatives in, 127. 3. 

-lozoc, -ἰσκη, diminutives in, 
127. 2. 

-ioxw, verbs in, 96, 8. ; 


INDEX. 271 

gen., 195. N. 1. —refers to 

the limiting noun, 195, N. 2. 

πιστος, 8686 -iwy. 

-itng, -ἰιώτης, Nouns in, 127, 3, 
| Se 


-ὦ, fut. in, 102. N. 1, 

-iwy, -ιστος, comparison by, 58. 

-iwy, patronymies in, 127. 1. 

-μώνη, 866 -ἐγη. 

-ώτης, 866 -irye. 

K. 

καὶ oc, 152. 

κακῶς, SCE εὖ. 

κατά, changes of, in composi- 

tion, 10. N. 2. 

κατηγορέω With gen. and acc., 
183. 2.— with two geni- 
tives, 183. N. .1. — with 
part., 222. 2. 

κέρας, inflection of, 42. N. 3.— 
compounds of, 55. N. 3. 

-χλέης, contraction of nouns in, 
42. N. 1. ; : 

κληρονομέω with gen., 178. 2,— 
with acc. of the thing, 178. 
N. 1. — with acc. of the 
person, ibid. 

κοινός With gen., 174. N.— 
with dat., 195. Ν, 1. . ’ 

κόππα, 1. Ν. 9. 

κρέας, τέρας, inflection of, 42. 
N. 8. 


κυχεών, acc. sing. of, 37. Ν. 2. 
κύων, inflection of, 40. 3. 


A. 
λαγχάνω with gen., 178. 2. — 
with acc., 178, N. 1. 
Ando, ληϑάνω, with acc. and 
gen., 182. N. 2. 
-λλω, verbs in, 96. 6. 
M. 
-μα, nouns in, 129, 4. 
μά, νή, with ace., 171. — differ- 
ence between, 171, N. 1. — 


μά omitted, 171. N. 2.—the 


272 GREEK 
name of the god omitted 
after, 171. N. 3. 

μέλας and τάλας, inflection of, 
53. R. 1.— comparison of, 
57. 3. 

μέλει with gen. and dat., 182. 
N.3 


μέλι, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 
μέλλω with infin., 219. N. 1. 
-μεναι, -μεν, infin, in, 89, N. 1. 
μεταλαγχάνω With gen., 178. 2. 
— with acc., 178. N. 1. 
μέτεστι and προσήκει with gen., 
178. N. 2. 
μετέχω With gen., 178. 2, — 
with acc, 178. N. 1. 
μέχρις ΟΥ μέχρι, 15. 3. — with 
gen., 1 
-βη, nouns in, 129. 5. 
μή, 224. 3, "4, 5, 6. — after 
negative expressions, 225. 


μηδείς, plural of, 60. N. 1. 

μήτηρ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
accent of, 40. N. 3. — com- 
pounds of, 55. Ν. 2. 

ee Ist pers. ind. act. in, 84. 

, N. 1. — subj. in, 86. N.2. 

as in, 117. 

μιμνήσκω, With acc. and gen., 

182. N. 2.— with two accu- 
satives, ibid. | 

uv, augment of verbs beginning 
with, 76. N. 2. 

-μός, nouns in, 129 9. 

μοῦ, μοί, μέ, 566 ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ. 

-μων, ences in, 182. 5. 


y before a labial, 12. 1.—before 
a palatal, 12. 2.— before a 
liquid, 12. 3. — before σ or ζ, 
12. 4, 5, N. 2, 4. —in {Π6 δ 
preposition éy. — movable, 
15. 1, 2. 


INDEX. 


ναῦς, nom, sing. of, 86, 2. — in- 
flection of, 43. 2. 

γή, re μά. 

γικάω With acc., 164. Ν. > ie 
with acc. and gen., 184. 2. 

-ψγύω, 566 -νύω. 

νύξ, inflection of, 36. N. 1. 

-γύω, verbs in, 96. 9. 


,Ξ. 
-£, adverbs in, 119. 5. 


O. 
o, why called μικρόν, 1. N. 1, 
το, neuters in, 33. N. 1. 
ὃ for ὅς, 19. ΒΗ. 8. 
ode, inflection of, 70. --- dialects 


of, 70. N. 1.—how used, 
149. 1. — as an adverb, 149. 
WN. 1. 

ὃ δέ, see ὃ μέν. 


odes omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 


1-ὄεις, adjectives in, 131. 5. 


o for o, 2. N. 3.—for ov, 3. 
N. 3. 

ποῦ permits the accent to be on 
the antepenult, 20. N. 1. 

-ot, adverbs in, 121. 1. 

οἷα with gen. absolute, 192. 
N. 2. 

-oiny, opt. in, 87. N. 2. 

-ouv, gen, and dat. dual in, 33. 
N. 4: 35. N. 3. 

οἴκαδε, pvyads, 121. N. 3. 

οἰκεῖος with gen., 174. N. 

οἴκοι, accent of, 121. N. 1: 
20.N. 1... 

-ovo, gen. in, 33. N. 4. 

-0106, adjectives i in, 131. 1. 
οἷος, 73. 1. — attracted by its 
antecedent, 151. R. 3, 4. — 

with infin., 219. N. 2. 
dic, inflection of, 43. 2. 
οἶσϑ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον, 218. N. 3. 
-οισι, dat. plur. in, 33. N. 4. 


GREEK 


οἴχομαι with ρατί,, 222, N. 2. 

ὅλος with the article. 140. N. 7. 

ὃ μὲν ὃ δέ, 142. 1. —the 
proper name subjoined to 
o μέν, 142. N. 2.—are not 
always opposed to each 
other, 142. N. 3.—o δέ re- 
fers to something different 
from that to which ὃ μέν re- 
fers, 142. N. 4. 

ὅμοιος With dat., 195. 1. — with 
gen,, 195. N.1.—refers to 
the limiting noun, 195, Ν, 2. 

ouov, compounds of, with gen., 
195. N. 1. . 

-ooc, inflection of nouns in, 34: 


49. 3. — accent of the con-| 


tracted gen. and dat. of 
polysyllabic nouns in, 
N. 2, — comparison of ad- 
jectives in, 57. R..2. 

-ος, ace, pl. in, 33. N, 4. 

-o¢, inflection of neuters in, 42. 
— adjectives in, 49.— ab- 
stract nouns in, 128. N. 4. 

ὃς μὲν ὃς δέ, 152. 

ὅσον, ὅσῳ, with inf., 220. 1, 

ὃσσε, see δοῦρε. 3 

ὅστις, inflection of, 71. 2.— 

~has the force of the inter- 
rogative pronoun, 153. N. 
ὅσῳ; see ὅσον. 

οὐ for o, 2.N.3. 

-ov, or -ayov, adverbs in, 121. 


@eese 


ov, οὐκ, οὐχ, 15.4. — how used, 
224, 1, 

ov, augment of verbs beginning 
with, 80, N. 4. 

οὐδείς, nom. plur, of, 60. N. 1. 

οὐδεὶς ὃ ὅστις ov, 225. Ν. 

-οὔς, participles in, 53. 5. 

οὗτος, inflection of, 70. — Ionic 
forms of, 70. 
used, 149. Ι. 


84.) 


Ν. 1. — how}. 


INDEX, 273 
οὕτως, οὕτω, 15. 3. 


-οφι, gen. and ih in, 33. N. 4. 


πάλιν ἴῃ composition, 12. Ν, 4, 

παντοδαπός, 49. 2. 

πᾶς With the article, 140. 5.— 
without the article, 140, Ν, 
6. | 

πατήρ, inflection of, 40, 1. --- 
accent of, 40. N. 3. — com- 
pounds of, 55. Ν. 2. 

-πλόος, -πλάσιος, numeral ad- 
jectives in, 62. 3.— with 
gen., 186. 2. 

ποῖος, 73. 1. — with the article. 

140. N. 9. — with infin., 219. 

N. 2. 

πόλις, Epic inflection of, 43. 


N, 4. — compounds of, 55. 
N. 1. 

ΠΟΣ, derivatives of, 73. 1: 
123. 

Ποσειδῶν, acc. sing. of, 37. 
N. 2.—voc. sing, of, 38. 


N. 2, 


"ποῦς, nom. sing. of, 36. 2. 


πρᾶγμα, omitted after the arti- 
cle, 140, N. 5. — omitted 
before the relative, 150, 5. 
—omitted before a verb, 
157. N. 8.—omitted in the 
predicate, 160. N. 2. 

πρίν with subj., 214. 1. — with 
opt., 216. 1, — with infin., 
220. 2. 

προσήκει, 566 μέτεστι. 

-πτω, verbs in, 96. 2. 


P. ‘ 

g at the beginning of a word, 
4, 2.— doubled, 4. 3: 13. 
— augment of verbs begin- 
ning with, 79. 

-ρα, gen. sing. of feminines in, 

91. 3. 

66 for oo, 6. N. 


274 GREEK 

96a, verbs in, 96. 6. 

ῥυπόω, reduplication of, 79. N:2. 
= 

efinal, 1. N.4.—movable, 15. 3. 

-ς, imperat. in, 117. N. 11. 

o between two consonants, 11. 

od for £, 6. Ν. 

σάν or σαμπὶ, 1. N. 3. - 


-σε, see -δε. 
-σϑα, 2d pers. sing. act. in, 84. 
N. 6: 86. N. 2: 87.N. 5. 


-σι, 2d pers. sing. in, 84, N. 6. 
— 3d pers. sing. in, 84. N. 
1: 86. N. 2. 

-ot, adverbs in, see —9u. 

-σις, -ota, nouns in, 129. 3. 

ox does not always make posi- 
tion, 17. N. 2. 

~—Ox0?, -σκόμην, imperf. and aor. 
in, 85. N. 5. 

-oxw, verbs in, 96. 8, 14. 

oo changed into ττ, see rr. 

-σσα, feminines in, 127. 7. 

-σσω, -ττω, verbs in, 96.3, N. 7. 

-oowy, -trwy, CoMparatives in, 
58. N. 1. 

ς for στ, 1. R. 

συγγιγνώσκω, 8686 σύνοιδα. 

-σύνη, nouns in, 198, N. 8. 

σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω with 
part., 222. N. 1. 

-σφι, gen. and dat. in, 35. N. 3. 

σωτήρ, voc. sing. of, 38. N. 2.— 
accent of the voc. sing. of, 
38. N. 3.. 


ταί for αἱ, 63. N. a; 

τάλας, 566 μέλας. 

τέθριππον, 14. N. 1. 

-τειρα, -τρια, -τρίς, feminines in, 
129, 2. 

-τέος, verbal adjectives in, 132. 
2.— neuter of verbal adjec- 
tives in, 162. 2, N. 1, 2: 
200. N. 2. — with dat. 200. 2. 


INDEX. 


τέρας, See κρέας. 

-τερος, -τατος, comparison by, 57. 

τηλικοῦτος, 73. 1. — inflection 
of, 73. N. 1. 

-τὴρ; -τῆς, -τῶρ, verbal nouns 
in, 129, 2. 

-tn¢, Voc. sing. of nouns in, 31. 
4,— abstract nouns in, 128. 
Ν. 2. 

τίς, inflection of, 68. — dialects 
of, 68. N. — with the article, 
140. N. 9. — how used, 147. 
— does not always stand at 
the beginning of a proposi- 
tion, 147. Ν. 1.— for ποῖος, 
147. N. 2. 

tic, inflection of, 69. 1. — dias - 
lects of, 69. N. 1.— how 
used, 148. — for ἕκαστος, 148. 
Ν. 1.— refers to the speak- 
er, or to the person addressed, 
148. N. 2. — with adjectives 
of quality or quantity, 148. 
N. 3. — denotes importance, 
148. Ν. 4.— doubled, 148. 
N. 4. 

τοὶ for ot, 63. N. 1. 

τοιόσδε, 73. 1. — with inf. 219. 
N. 2. 

τοιοῦτος, 73. 1. — inflection of, 
73. N. 1. — with the article, 
140. N. 8. 

-toc, verbal adjectives in, 1382. 
1. — with dat., 200. 2. 

TOS, 63. N. 2. — derivatives 
of, 73. 1: 123. 

τοσοῦτος, 73. 1. — inflection . 
73. N. 1. | 

-τρια, -τρίς, 566 -τειρα- 

τι for oo, 6. N. 

τυγχάνω, with gen., 178. 2.— 
with acc., 178. N. 1. 


-τῶρ; SEE -τηρ. 


ν 
v, why called ψιλόν, 1. N. 1.— 


GREEK 


breathing of, 4. N. 1. — 
quantity of, 17. N. 3: 36. 
N. 5. 


-v, contracts in, 43. 3. 

-ύδριον, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

-ύϑω, See -ἄϑω. a 

vz, improper diphthong, 3. 1, 
N. 1 


vioc, omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

-ύλλιον, -ὕλλος, diminutives in, 
127. 2. 

. ὕμεδαποός, 73. 2. 

-ὖμι, Subj. of verbs in, 117. 4, N. 
4, — optat. of verbs in, 117. 
5, 6, N. 7. —2 aor. of verbs 
in, 117. N. 16. 

ὑπεύϑυνος, With gen., 183. N. 3. 

-υς, contracts in, 43. 1, 3. — 
adjectives in, 51. — parti- 
ciples in, 53. 6. 

ὕύφιον, diminutives in, 127. 2. 

Φ. 
gor, 566 ἄγε. 

pete with Gens: 183. R. 1. 

-φι, gen. and dat. in, 81. N. 3: 
33. N. 4: 35. N. 3. 

φρήν, compounds of, 55. N. 2. 

φροῦδος, 14. N. 1. 

φύγαδε, See οἴκαδε. 
| b ο 

χοῦς, nom. sing. of, 36. 2. 

χράομαι With dat., 198. N. 1.. 

zon, With gen. and acc. 181. 
N. 1. — subject of, 159. 2. 

χρήστης, accent of the gen. 
plur. of, 31. N. 2. 

χώρα omitted after the article, 
140. N. 5. 

Ψ, 
ψαύω with gen., 179. 1. —with 
_acc., L79..N. I. 


Sd. : 
w, why called μέγα, 1. N. 1.— 


INDEX. 275 
changes of, 2. N. 3. — for 
ov, ὃ. N. 3. 

-w, ace. sing. in, 33. R. 1. — 
gen. sing. in, 33. N. 4.— 
inflection of nouns in, 42, 
— dual and plural of nouns 

in, 42. N. 4.—TIonic ace. 
sing. of nouns in, 42. N. 6. 
— accent of the contracted 
acc. sing. of nouns in, 42. 
ING. 

-wdng, adjectives in, 131. 6. 

-ῴην, opt. act. in, 117. N. 6. 

-ωλός, adjectives in, 131. 8. 

-ων, gen. and dat. dual in, 43. 
TIN the 

-ὧν, -ωνιά, nouns in, 127, 4. 

-wy, adjectives in, 53. 7, 8. — 
inflection of comparatives in, 
58. 2. 

ὠνητός with gen., 190. 2. 

-wyla, 8566 -ν. 

-wo, gen. in, 33. N. 4. © 

ὥρα, see ἀνάγκη. 

-ως, acc. pl. in, 33. N. 4.— 
fem. in, 42 — gen. sing. in, 
43. 3: 44. — adjectives in, 
50. — participles in, 53. 9. 
— adverbs in, 119. 1. 

ὡς with dat., 197. N. 1. — 
with gen. absolute, 192. N. 
2.— with acc., 192. R. 2. — 
with inf,, 220. I. 

we for toe, 19. R. 8: 123. Ν. 
1: 152. N: 2. 

ὥσπερ With gen. absolute, 192, 
N. 2. — with acc., 192. R. 2. 

ὥστε With gen. absolute, 192. 
Ν. 2.— with δοο., 192. R.2. 
— with indic., 213. 3. 
with inf., 220. 1. 

wv, diphthong, 3. 1, N. 1.-- 
for av, 3. N. 3. 


i ales - 


Pao 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


A. 

Abstract Nouns, 128: 129. 1, 
N. 1, 2.— for concrete, 136. 
Ν. 4.— ace. of, after kin- 
dred verbs, 164. 


Acatalectic Verse, 234. 2. 
Accent, 19 -- 99. — kinds of, 


19. 1.— place of, 19. 1, 2, 
3, 4, R. 1.— words without, 
19. N. 1, R. 2. 3. — grave, 
19. N. 2. — place of, in 
diphthongs, 19. 5.—on the 
antepenult, 20. 1,2, N. 1,2, 
3.— on the penult, 20. 3. — 
acute becomes grave, 20. 4. 
— circumflex, 21. — circum- 
flex on the penult, 21. 2.— 
of contracted syllables, 23. 
N. 3. — of words whose last 
syllable has been elided, 25. 
N. 3.— of the first declen- 
sion, 31. N. 2. — of the sec- 
ond declension, 33. N. 3: 
34. N. 2. —of the third de- 
clension, 35. N.2: 38. N,3: 
42. N. 7: 43. N..5.— of 
verbs, 93.— of verbs in μι, 
117. N. 18. 

Accusative, 30. 4. — sing. of 
the third declension, 37. — 
how used, 163. — 172. — de- 
notes the subject of the in- 
finitive, 158. — after transi- 
tive verbs, 163. — denoting 
the abstract of a transitive 


verb, 164. — after verbs sig-| 


nifying to look, &c. 164. N. 
1.— after verbs signifying 
to conquer, 164, N.2. — two 


accusatives after verbs sig- 
nifying to ask, &c. 165. 1, 
N. 1. — to do, to say, 165. 
N. 2. —to divide, 165. 2. — 
to name, &c. 166. — synec- 
dochical, 167.— in paren- 
thetical phrases, 167. N. 2. 
— subjoined to a clause, 167. 
Ν. 4. — denotes duration of 
time, 168. 1, N. lL. —of time 
when, 168, 2. — for the gen. 
absolute, 168, N. 2, — de- 
notes extent of space, 169. 
—of place whither, 170. — 
after μά, v7, 171. — omitted 
after μά, νή, 171. Ν, 3.— 
with prepositions, 72,— af- 
ter adjectives, 185. N. 1. 

Active Voice, 74. 1.— forma- 
tion of the tenses. of, 94— 
105.— how used, 205. — as 
passive, 205. N. 2, 3, R. 

Acute Accent, 19. 1, 2.—on 
the antepenult, 20. 2, 3, N. 
1, 2, 3. — becomes grave, 
20. 4. 

Adjective, 30. 1.— inflection 
of, 48-59, — of three end- 
ings, 48. 1.— of two endings, 
48. 2.— of one ending, 48. 
3: 54,—=in oc, 49.—in we 
gen. w, 50. — in ue gen. δος, 
51.— in 7g, ἐς, 52.— iN ἄς, εἰς, 
ous, Uc, WY, ὡς ZEN. ότος, 53. — ~ 
compound, 55.— anomalous 
and defective, 56.— com- 
parison of, 57-59. —deriva- 
tion of, 180 -- 133. — derived 
from other adjectives, 130.— 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


from subst., 131. — from 
verbs, 132. — from adverbs, 
133.— agreement of, 137. — 
mas. adj. with fem. subst., 
137, N.1.— referring to two 
or more substantives, 137, 2, 
N. 5. — agrees with one of 
the substantives to which it 
refers, 137. N. 4. — referring 
to a collective noun, 137. 3. 
—plural agrees with a dual 
subst., and vice versa, 137. 
N. 6.— used substantively, 
138. 1. —neuter, 138. 2. — 
used adverbially, 138. N. 1. 
Admiration, Mark of, 27. N.2. 


Adverb, 29. 2.— of manner,} 


119. — of quantity, 120. — 
of place, 121. — of time, 122. 
—derived from 77023, 123. 
— comparison of, 125,— an- 
omalous comparison of, 125. 
N.3.—with the article, 141. 
1,2, N. 1.— with gen., 177: 
181: 186: 188, 2, N. 1. — 
with dat., 195. 1.— limits 
what, 223.— negative, 224: 
225. . 

Alphabet, 1. 1.—division of 
the letters of, 1. 2. 

Alpha Privative, 135. 4. 

Anapestic Verse, 252 — 255. 

Anastrophe, 226, N. 1. 

Antecedent, 150. 1. 

Antepenult, 16. 3. 

Aorist, 74, 3.— augment of, 78. 
— reduplication of, 78. N. 2. 
— Ist pers. sing. of 1 aor. 
act., 84. N. 2.—in σκον, oxo- 
μην, 85. Ν. 5. — inflection 
of aor. pass., 92. — 2 aor. 
mid, syncopated, 92. N. 4. 
— formation of, 104: 105: 
109: 110: 115. —2 aor. act. 
of verbs in μὲ, 117. 12.— 

24 


277 


how used, 212. — for the 
perfect or pluperfect, 212. N, 
1,—for the present, 212. N. 
2,4.—for the future, 212, 
N. 3. 

Apheresis, 26. 3. 

Apodosis, 213. R. 

Apostrophe, 27. 

Arsis, 233. 2. 

Article, 29. 1. — inflection of, 
63.— quantity, accent, and 
dialects of, 63. N. 1.— old 
form of, 63. N. 2.— how 
used, 139 — 142. — with 
proper names, 139. 3. — ac- 
companies the leading char- 
acter of a story, (89. N. 1. — 
with the second accusative 
after verbs signifying ¢o call, 
139. N. 2. — separated from 
its noun, 140.1, N.1, R. 2. 
—two or three articles stand- 
ing together, 140. R. 1.— re- 
peated, 140. 2.— with the 
part., 140. 3, N. 3. —- adjec- 
tive standing before or after 
the substantive and its article, 
140. N. 4. — alone, 140. 5. — 
without a noun, 140. N.5.— 
with pronouns, 140. 5.— with 
ὅλος and ἕκαστος, 140. N. 7. — 
with τοιοῦτος, 140, N. 8. — 
with tic and ποῖος, 140. N. 
9.— with δεῖνα, 140. N. 10. 

"before adverbs, 141. 1}, 
2, N. 1. — before a proposi- 
tion, 141. 3.— before any _ 
word, 141. 4, N. 2, 3. —as 
demonstrative, 142. 1.— be- 
fore ὃς, ὅσος, οἷος, 142. Ν, 1. 
— as relative, 142, 2. --- neu- 
ter with gen., 176. 

Atona, 19. N. 1. 

Attraction with the Relative, 
151. 


278 


Augment, 75. — kinds of, 75. 
2.—syllabic, 75. 2: 76-79. 
—of the perf., 76. —- of the 
pluperf., '77.—of the imperf. 
and aor., 78, —of verbs be- 
ginning with 9, 79.— tem- 
poral, 80: 81. -- of compound 
verbs, 82. — omitted, 78. N. 
3: 80. N. 4, 5. 

B. 


Barytone, 19. 4. 

Breathings, 4.— of v, 4. N. 1. 
— of 9, 4.2, 3.— place of, 4. 
4. — power of, 4.5, N. 2. — 
rough changed into smooth, 
14, N. 5. 

C. 

Cesura, 235. 

Cases, 30. 4.— how used, 162 
— 204, 

Catalectic verse, 234. 2. 

Causative, see Verbs. 

Circumflex, 19. 1, 3: 21. —on 
the penult, 21. 2. 

Collective Nouns, 187. 3: 157. 
A, 

Colon, 27. 

Comma, 27. 

Comparison by τερος, τατος, 57. 
— of substantives, 57. N. 4. 
— of pronouns, 57. N. 5, — 
by iy, ἱστος, 58. — anoma- 
lous and defective, 59. — of 
adverbs, 125. 

Composition of Words, 135. — 

Concrete, see Abstract. 

Conjunction, 29. 2. — how 
used, 228. 

Connecting Vowel, 85. 1. 

Consonants, 1. 2. — division af 
5: 6. = final; 5. N: 3.—eu- 
phonic changes of, 7-14. 
— movable, 15: 


Contraction, 23. — accent in,| 


23. Ν, 3. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Copula, 160. 1. 

Coronis, 27. 

Crasis, 24. — left to pronun- 
ciation, 24. N. ὦ. 

D. 

Dactylic Verse, 246 — 251. 

Dative, 30. 4. — plural of the 
third declension, 39. — how 
used, 195 — 203. — after 
words implying resemblance, 
&§c. 195. — after adjectives, 
196. 1.—after verbs, 192. 2. 
— after impersonal verbs, 
ibid. — after verbs signify- 
ing fo be, 196. 3, N. 2.— 
with interjections, 196. 5. 
—denotes with regard to, 
197. 1.— preceded by ὡς, 
197. Ν. 1.— apparently su- 
perfluous, 197. N.2.—limits 
words, 197. 2. — with com- 
paratives, 197. N. ὃ. — with 
substantives, 197. N. 4.—of 
cause, &c. 198.— with χράυ- 
μαι, 198..N. 1. — of accom-— 
paniment, 199. — of αὐτός, 
199. N. 1.—denotes the sub- 
ject, 200: 206. 2.— with 
verbal adjectives in τὸς and 
teoc, 200. 2. — of time, 201. 
— for the gen. absolute, 201. 
Ν. 2.—of place, 202.— with 
prepositions, 203. 

Declensions, 30: 3. 

Defective, see Noun, Adjective, 
Comparison. 

Demonstrative Pronoun, 70.— 

dialects of, 70. N. 1. — with 

i, 70. N. 2. ᾿ς pronominal ad- 

jectives, 73. 1. — how used, 

149. — as adverb, 149.N. 1. 

—subjoined to anoun in the 

same proposition, 149. N. 3. 

— subjoined to a relative, 

149. Ν, 4. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Deponent Verbs, 208. — perf. 
and pluperf. of, 208. Ν, 2. — 
aor. pass. of, 208. N. 3, 

Derivation of Words, 126-124. 

Desideratives, 134. N. 2. 

Dieresis, 27. N. 1. 

Digamma, 1. N. 3. 

Diminutives, 127. 2. 

Diphthongs, 3. — improper, 3. 
N. 2.— commutation of, 3. 


N. 3. — improper, in capitals, | 


4. 4. 

Dipody, 234. 3. 

Dissyllables, 16. 2. 

Dual, 29. 3: 30. N.2: 157. Ν. 
1,5, 6,7, 8: 150. N. 1: 157. 
N. 1, 4, R. 1. 

E. 

Elision, 25.— before a conso- 
nant, 25. N, 2. 

Enclitics, 22.—retain their ac- 
cent, 22. 4, N. 1. — suc- 
ceeding each other, 22. Ν. 2. 

Euphonic Changes, see Conso- 
nants, 

ae Ὰ 

Feet, 233. 1. 

Final, see Consonants, Syllable. 

First Declension, endings. of, 
91. 1.— gender of, 31. 2.— 
voe. sing. of, 31. 4. — quan- 

' tity of, 31. Ν. 1. — accent 


of, 31. Ν. 2.— dialects οἵ] 


31. N. 3. — contracts of, 32. 

Future, 74. 3. — augment of 
the third, 75. 1.— formation 
of, 102: 103: 111: 112: 114. 
— how used, 209. 4, N. 10: 
211. — periphrastic, 209. N. 
Li 


α. ι 
Gender, 30. 2. — how distin- 
guished i in grammar, ibid. — 
masc. for fem., 137. N. 1. 


| 


279 
— implied, 1387. N. 2, 3: 
150. N. 2. 

Genitive, 30. 4, — of the third 
declension, - 36. I. — how 
used, 173-194. — adnomin- 
al, 173. — relations denoted 
by the adnominal, 173. N. 1. 
— subjective and objective, 
173. N. 2. — two adnominal 
genitives, 173. N. 3. —- sub- 
joined to possessive words, 
174. -—with ἴδιος, &c. 178. 
N. — with verbs signifying 
to be, ὅ᾽ε. 175. —— after the 
neuter article, 176. —— denot- 
ing a whole, 177.—— after a 

_ participle with the article, 
177. N. lL. —— after δαιμόνιος, 
&c.. 177. N.3.— after neu- 
ter adjectives, 177. 2, Ν. 4. 
—of the reflexive pronoun, 
177. Ν. 5. — after verbs re- 
ferring to a part., 178. 1. — 
after verbs signifying to par- 


take, &c. 178. 2. — to take 
hold of, ὅδε. 179. — to let 
go, &c. 180.— after words 


denoting fulness, &c. 181. 
— after verbs signifying to 
remember, &c. 182. — to 
accuse, &c. 183. — to be- 
gin &c. 184,— after verbal 
adjectives, 185. —— after com- 
paratives, 186. -— denoting 
on account of, 187. 1. —~— 
after exclamations, 187. 2. 
—- after verbs signifying to 
entreat, 187. 9. --- denoting 
the subject, 187. 4. — of in- 
strument, 187. 5.—— denot- 
ing in respect of, 188. ---- af- 
ter adverbs, 188. 2. — after 
verbs signifying to take aim 
at, &c. 188, 3.—- of mate- 


280 


rial, 189. — of price, 190. 
-- οἵ time, 191. — absolute, 
192. --- οὔ place, 193: — with 
prepositions, 194. 

Grave Accent, 19. 1, Ν. 2.— 
for the acute, 20. 4. 

He 

Historical, see Secondary Tens- 

es, 
I; 

lambic Verse, 241 — 245. 

Imperative, 74, 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels, 
88.— how used, 218. — in 
prohibitions, 218. 2. — se- 
cond person of, for the third, 
218. N. 2.—2Jn connection 
with the relative, 218. N. 3. 
— perf. of, 209. N. 7, 8. 

Imperfect, 74. 3. — augment 
of, 78. — in σκον, σκόμην, 88. 
N. 5. — formation of, 97: 
106. 2: 113. — how used, 
210. — denotes an attempt, 
210. N. 1.— denotes a cus- 
tomary action, 210. N. 2. — 
for aor., 210. N. 3.— for 
pres., 210: N. 4. 

Impersonal Verbs, 159. N. 1, 
2.— with dat., 192. 2. 

Indefinite, Pronoun, 69. — pro- 
nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 
— adverbs, 123. — how used, 
148. 5; 

Indicative, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 84: 85. — of verbs in μι, 
117. 2, 3. — how used, 213. 
—in independent proposi- 
tions, 213. 1.— after inter- 
rogative and relative words, 
213. ὦ, — after particles, 
213, 3, N. 4, 5, 6. — in con- 
ditional propositions, 213. 4, 
Ὁ. —with ἄν, 213. Ν, 8. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Infinitive, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 89. — of verbs in μι, 117. 
8, 9.—subject of, 158, — 
after verbs, participles, and 
adjectives, 119. 1. — denotes 
a cause, 119. 2.—for the 
indic., 119. N. 4. — omitted, 
119. N. 5.— for the im- 
perat., 119. N. 6, 7.— for . 
the subj., 119. N. 8.—ex- 
presses a wish, 119. Ν, 9. --- 
with ὥστε, &e. 220. 1. — 
with πρίν, ὅσο. 220. 1. — in 
parenthetical phrases, 220. 
N. 1,2, 3. — with ἄν, 220. 
3.—as a neuter substantive, 
221.— for the gen. of cause, 
221. N. 1.— in exclama- 
tions of surprise, 221. N. 2. 
— superfluous, 221. N. 3. — 
after ἀνάγκη, Soc. 221. N. 4. 

Inflection of words, 99 -- 185. 

Interjection, 29. 2. — how used, 
229. 

Interrogation, 27. 

Interrogative, Pronoun, 68.— 
dialects of, 68. N. — pro- 
nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 
adverbs, 123.— how used, 
147. 

Intransitive, see Verbs. 

Tota Subscript, 3. 1. 

Irregular Construction, 230. 


Koppa, 1. N. 3. 
' L 


Labials, 6.— before linguals, 
7. — before uw and σ, 8. 
Leading, see Primary ‘Tenses. 
Letters and Syllables, 1 -- 28. 
Linguals, 6.— before u, o, and 
before palatals and other 
linguals, 10. 
Liquids, 5. 1. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


: M. 
Metathesis, 26. 2. 
Middle Mutes, 5. 3. 
Middle Voice, 74. 1. —tenses 
of, 113 -- 115. — how used, 
207. — as active, 207. N. 4, 
5. — as passive, 207. N. 6. 7. 
Moods, 74. 2.—terminations 
and connecting vowels of, 
84 -- 90. how used, 
213-221. 
Movable, see Consonants. 
Monosyllables, 16. 2. 
N 


National Appellatives, 127. 3. 

Negative, Particles, 224. — 
formulas, 224. N. 1, 2, 3. — 
two negatives, 225. 

Neuter, 30. 2. —has three 
cases alike,.30. N. 1. — ad- 
jectives with the article, 138. 
2. — plural with a sing. verb, 
157. 2. -- adjective in the 
predicate, 160. N. 1, 2. 

Nominative, 30. 4. — sing. of 
the third declension, 36. — 
how used, 157. — for the 
voc., 157. N. 11.— without 
a verb, 230. 1. 

Noun, 30.—indeclinable, 45.— 
anomalous, 46.—defective, 47. 

Numbers, 29, 3.— commuta- 
tion of, 137. N. 6, 7, 8: 
157. Ν. 4. 

Numerals, Marks of, 1. N. 8, 
5, 6.— cardinal, 60. — or- 
dinal, 61. — substantives, 
adjectives, and adverbs, 62, 


Object, 162.— immediate, 163. 
Optative, 74. 2. — terminations 
and connecting vowels of, 
_ 87.—periphrastic perf., 87. 
N. 1. — perf. pass., 91. 3, 5. 


— of verbs in wo, 117. 5, 6. 


281 


—of verbs in vw, 117. N.7. 
—how used, 216: 217.— 
after particles, 216. 1. — 
after interrogative and rela- 
tive words, 216. 2. — after 
the past tenses, 216, 3, 4. — 
after the present or future, 
216. N. 1, 2.— expresses a 
wish, 217. 1, N. 1. — in in- 
dependent propositions, 217. 
2.— for the ind., 217. 3.— 
for the imperat., 217. 4. 
Oxytone, 19. 2. 
Ἐ 


Palatals, 6. — before linguals, 
7.— before uw and o, 9. 

Parenthesis, Marks of, 27. 

Participle, formation of, 90.— 
of verbs in w, 117. 10, 11. 
— with the article, 140. 3, 
N. 3.— followed by the case 
of its verb, 162. 2.— how 
used, 222.— with verbs sig- 
nifying to know, &§c. 222. 2, 
N. 1.— to endure, §c. 222. - 
3.— with διαγέγνομαι, x. τ. de 
222. 4.—with ἔχω, κα. τ. λ. 
222. N. 2. — fut., 222. 5. — 
pres., 222. N. 3. — with ad- 
verbs, 222..N. 4. — with ἄν, 
222. 6. 

Parts of Speech, declinable, 
29. 1. —indeclinable, 29. 2. 

Passive Voice, 74. 1. — tenses 
of, 106-112. — how used, 
206. — subject of, 206. 1, 2, 
N. 1. — retains the latter 
case, 206. 3.—as middle, 
206. N, 2. 

Patronymics, 127. 1. 

Penult, 16. 3. 

Perfect, 74. 3.— augment of, 
76. — syncopated, 91. N. 6, 
7, 8, 9. — formation of, 98: 
99: 107: 113.— how used, 


209. 2.—as pres., 209. N. 
4. — expresses a customary 
action, 209. N. 5.— for the 
fut., 209. N. 6. —imperat., 
209. N. 7, 8. 

Period, 27. 

Perispomenon, 19. 3. 

_ Person, 74. 4. 

Personal Pronoun, 64. — dia- 
lects of, 64. N. 2.— how 
used, 143: 144. — of the 
third person, 143. N. 1,9. 
— repeated, 143. Ν. 3, — 
ἐμοῦ and μοῦ, 143. N. 4. 

Pluperfect, 74. 3.— augment 
of, 77. —in ea, 85. N. 4. — 
passive, 91. 1. — syncopated, 
91. N. 6, 7, 8.— formation 
of, 100: 101: 108: 113. — 
how used, 209, 4.— as im- 
perf. 209. N. 4, 9.—as aor., 
209, N. 9. 

Polysyllables, 16, 2. 

Possessive Pronoun, 67, — dia- 
lects of, 67. N. 1.— how 
used, 146. — used objective- 
ly, 146. N..1.—third pers. 
of, 146. N. 2, 3. 

Predicate, 156: 160. — noun 
in, 160. 2, 3. 3 

Preposition, 29. 2. — Kove used, 
226 : 227. — primitive, 226. 
1. — after the noun, 226. N. 
1.— for εἰμί, 226. N. 2. 
— separated by tmesis, 226. 
N. 3, 4,5. — in composition, 
135. 3, N. 6, 7, 8.— with 
acc., 172. — with gen., 194. 
— with dat., 203. 

Present, 74. 3. ’ — formation of, 
94-96, — simple or original, 
96.— how used, 209. 1. — 
for. the aor., 209. N. 1.— for 


the perf., 209. N, 2.— for]. 


the fut., 209. N. 3. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Primary or Leading Tenses, 
74.3 — coresiyahoria of, 
84. 1. 

Privative α, 135. 4. 

Pronominal Adjectives, 73. 
Pronoun, 64 —72.— how used, 
143 -- 155. 
Pronunciation, 

Greek, 98, 2. 

Proparoxytone, 19. 2. 

Protasis, 213. R. 

Punctuation Marks, 27. 

Pure Syllable, 16. 4. 

Q 


28. — Modern 


Quantity, 17: 18.—of a, 4, v, 
17. N. 3.— Marks of, 2: 27: 
— of the first declension, 31. 
N. 1,—of the second de- 
clension, 33. N. 2. — of the 
third declension, 35. N. A: 
36. Ν. 5. 

R, 

Reciprocal Pronoun, 72. — 
how used, 155. — for the re- 
flexive, 155. N. 

Reduplication, 76. 1. — of the 
2 aor., 78. N. 2,— Attic, 81. 

Reflexive Pronoun, 66. — ‘dia- 
lects of, 66. N. 4, 5. — how 
used, 145. — of the third 
person, 145, Ν, 1. — for the 
reciprocal, 145. N. 2. 

Relative Pronoun, 71. — dia- 

lects of, 71. N. 1.— how 

used, 150 — 154. — referring 

to two or more nouns, 150. 

2. — referring to a collective 

noun, 150. 3.— before its 

antecedent, 150. 4: 151. 3. 

— refers to an omitted ante- 

cedent, 150. 5. — refers to a 

possessive pronoun, 150. N. 

7. — attracted, 151. 1. — 

attracts its antecedent, 151. 


2.— as demonstrative, 152. 


te Ts 


ee ee ee ee eee 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


— as interrogative, 153. — 
for ive, 154.— verb of, 157. 
N. 6. 

Relative Adverb, 123. — be- 
fore its antecedent, 150. N. 
6. — attracted, 151. N. 2. — 
attracts its antecedent, 151. 


N. 3. — as demonstrative, 
152. N. 2. 
Root, of nouns of the third 


declension, 36. R. 1. — of 
verbs and tenses, 89. 

Rough Consonants, 5. 3. — in 
two successive syllables, 14. 
3, N. 2,3, 4.— not doubled, 
14, 4. 

S. 

San or Sampi, 1. N. 3. 

Secondary or Historical 'Tens- 
es, 74. 3.— terminations of, 
84. 2. 

Second Declension, endings of, 
33. 1.— gender of, 33. 2.— 
quantity of, 33. N. 2. — ac- 
cent of, 33. N. 3. — dialects 
of, 33. Ν. 4, — contracts of, 
34. 

Smooth Breathing, see Breath- 
ings. 

Smooth Consonants, 5. 3. — be- 
fore the rough breathing, 14. 
1, 2. 

Subject, 156 — 159. — of a fi- 
nite verb, 157. — omitted, 
157. N. 8. — of the inf., 158. 
— of impersonal verbs, 159. 
N. 1, 2. 

Subjunctive, 74. 2. — termina- 
tions and connecting vowels 
of, 86. — periphrastic perf., 
86. N. 1. —perf. pass., 91. 
3,4. — of verbs in μι, 117. 4, 
N. 4.—how used, 214: 215. 
—— after particles, ‘214, 2. — 
after interrogative and rela- 


283 
tive words, 214. 2, 4. ---- aftes 


pres. or fut., 214. 3. — after 
past tenses, 214. N. 1.——in 
exhortations, 215. ---- for the 


fut. ind., 215. N. 3. — in pro- 
hibitions, 215. 5. 

Substantive, 30. 1.— deriva- 
tion of, 127 -- 129. — in ap- 
position, 136. — as an adjec- 
tive, 136. N. 3. 

Syllables, 16. 

Syncope, 26. 1. 

Synecdochical, see Accusative. 

Synecphonesis or Synizesis, 
23. N, 2. 

Syntax, 136 —2382. 

ps | 

Tenses, 74, 3. — root of, 83. 2. 
— terminations of, 84, — 
how used, 209 — 212. 

Thesis, 233. 2. 

Third Declension, endings of, 
35. 1.— gender of, 35. 2.— 
quantity of, 35. N. 1. — ac- 
cent of, 35. N. 2. — dialects 
of, 35. N. 3, — formation of 
the cases of, 90 —39. — syn- 
copated nouns of, 40. — con- 
tracts of, 42 -- 44. 

Tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5. 

Trochaic Verse, 237 - 239. 

v. 


Vau, 1. N. 3. 
Verbal Roots’'and Termina- 
. tions, 83 -- 92. 

Verb, 74 -- 118. — accent of, 
93.— division of, 94. 2. — 
penult of pure, 95. — con- 
tract, 116.—im μι, 117,— 
anomalous, 118. — subject 
of a finite, 157. — transitive 
and intransitive, 205. 1.— 
causative, 205 2,— passive, 
206. — middle, 207. — de- 

_ ponent, 208. 


Verse, final syllable of, 236. 

Versification, 233 — 255. 

Vocative, 30. 4. — of the first 
declension, 31. 4.— of the 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Vowels, 1. 2: 2.—doubtful, 2. 
N. 1, R. — commutation of, 
2. N. 3.—short, before a 
mute and liquid, 17. 3.—, 


third declension, 38. — how| long made short and vice ver- 

used, 204. vie sa, 18, — connecting, 85. 1. 
Voices, 74. 1. — how used, 

205-208. — Zeugma, 231. 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

» αι | ὅπ ἐπὶ | & od 
zo ἀπο | c& ἐξ- | οἷ σϑαι 
αν av SU εν |- o σσ 
~ 700 lw ην ς στ 
χ 77 % nai | & ox 
nfo γεν | © pi We TOL 
"» 10 mM AA ὧν TAY 
3 δὲ pp μεν ἢ τὴν 
δὲ δι Θ- ος os τῆς 
De δια g ov Ps) το 
εἰ | Ἢ Get meget | & a 
4 j σῷ ρα ra τῶν 
Cn ἐκ CA gl ww υν 
ἐν ἐν 09 00 oes - ὕπο 


ΤῊ pet es 
a 


+ 


Sess 


pe 
ὙΤΥΥΣΣ 


ters 


Site 


Sanatee 


i 
ὃ ΠΗ 
ἥν 


i 
ἢ 


ο΄ ὉΝΙΨΕΒΒΙ͂ΤΥ OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
Return to desk from which borrowed. 
last date stamped below. 


100m-11,'49 (B7146s16) 476 


BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


CO4b29137b 


